B-66284en 07 120229 PDF

FANUC PICTURE
OPERATOR'S MANUAL
B-66284EN/07
• No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form.
• All specifications and designs are subject to change without notice.
The products in this manual are controlled based on Japan’s “Foreign Exchange and
Foreign Trade Law”. The export from Japan may be subject to an export license by the
government of Japan.
Further, re-export to another country may be subject to the license of the government of
the country from where the product is re-exported. Furthermore, the product may also be
controlled by re-export regulations of the United States government.
Should you wish to export or re-export these products, please contact FANUC for advice.
In this manual we have tried as much as possible to describe all the various matters.
However, we cannot describe all the matters which must not be done, or which cannot be
done, because there are so many possibilities.
Therefore, matters which are not especially described as possible in this manual should be
regarded as ”impossible”.
This manual contains the program names or device names of other companies, some of
which are registered trademarks of respective owners. However, these names are not
followed by ® or ™ in the main body.
B-66284EN/07 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
This manual includes safety precautions for protecting the user and preventing damage to the machine.
Precautions are classified into Warnings and Cautions according to their bearing on safety. Also,
supplementary information is described as Notes. Read the Warnings, Cautions, and Notes thoroughly
before attempting to use the machine.
WARNING
Applied when there is a danger of the user being injured or when there is a
danger of both the user being injured and the equipment being damaged if the
approved procedure is not observed.
CAUTION
Applied when there is a danger of the equipment being damaged, if the
approved procedure is not observed.
NOTE
Notes is used to indicate supplementary information other than Warnings and
Cautions.
• Read this manual carefully, and store it in a safe place.
WARNINGS AND NOTES RELATING TO FANUC PICTURE

Warnings and notes relating to FANUC PICTURE are provided in this manual. Before using this
software, read this manual thoroughly and read the Warnings, Cautions, and Notes in this manual
carefully.
In addition, "BE SURE TO READ THE FOLLOWING:" provided below summarizes items to bear in
mind when FANUC PICTURE is used, which are not described in the chapters in this manual. Read this
part before using the software.
BE SURE TO READ THE FOLLOWING:

The following summarizes items the user should bear in mind when using FANUC PICTURE. Before
using FANUC PICTURE, be sure to read the following:
WARNING
1 Real-time screen operation is not guaranteed. So, do not provide operations
(such as an emergency stop, start, stop, and movement on axes) that need to be
performed on a real-time basis, on the operator's panel screen.
2 An unpredictable operation results when multiple touch panel positions are
pressed simultaneously. If multiple points are pressed at the same time, the
central point of them seems to be pressed.
s-1
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS B-66284EN/07
CAUTION
1 This manual does not provide details on the operations and parameters that vary
depending on CNC models and options. For information about such operations
and parameters, refer to the relevant CNC manual.
2 If you make many screens or a screen that has many screen parts (controls), an
error message about the insufficient memory will be shown while displaying the
operator's screen.
3 If many controls that perform dynamic operation are used on the touch panel,
response of operation will be slow. To improve this response, reduce the number
of controls that are used on screen.
4 Input and output signals to and from a control can be specified in the property
settings. In reality, there are some that cannot be written because of signal
characteristics. Thus, select a proper signal area considering these
characteristics.
5 If controls whose color or shape change due to the on/off states of signals, as
well as numeral/character string indication controls, overlap with each other, the
overlapping section will be painted by the display changes. Remove any
overlapping of competing controls.
As for other restrictions and cautions, see Appendix 5.2, “RESTRICTIONS･CAUTIONS”.
s-2
B-66284EN/07 PREFACE
PREFACE
Thank you for purchasing FANUC PICTURE.
This software, FANUC PICTURE, is designed to help the user to easily create CNC screens on a personal
computer.
FANUC PICTURE runs on Windows®7, Windows Vista®, and Microsoft® Windows® XP.
Read this manual thoroughly for the proper procedures to use FANUC PICTURE correctly.
NOTE
The copyright of this software is owned by FANUC. No part of this software
may be distributed to a third party for application development purposes.
Microsoft, Windows Vista, Visual Basic and Excel are registered trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States.
FEATURES OF FANUC PICTURE

FANUC PICTURE has the following features:
• This software allows you to use a personal computer for designing CNC screens with a touch panel.
CNC screens are displayed on the personal computer as if they were displayed on the CNC, so you
can check and modify screen layouts easily.
• This software provides many controls such as touch switches.
• This software allows you to define detailed operations of touch switches, lamps, and so forth.
• You do not need to know programming languages such as C to create programs.
• Screen data is loaded into the CNC via a memory card. You can easily create MEM data files that
are to be written in the memory card.
MEM data file:

After creating user screens by using FANUC PICTURE , convert them into MEM
data files in memory card format for storage in the CNC. Then, together with
the FANUC PICTURE driver (a program file in memory card format), load these
MEM data files into the CNC as user applications running on the CNC.
p-1
PREFACE B-66284EN/07
APPLICABLE MODELS
The CNC models covered by this manual are as follows. The abbreviations listed below may be used to
refer to the corresponding models.
CNC Model Abbreviation

FANUC Series 30i-MODEL A Series 30i-A Series Series
FANUC Series 31i-MODEL A Series 31i-A 30i/31i/32i-A 30i/31i/32i/35i
FANUC Series 32i-MODEL A Series 32i-A
FANUC Series 30i-MODEL B Series 30i-B Series Series
FANUC Series 31i-MODEL B Series 31i-B 30i/31i/32i-B 30i/31i/32i/35i-B
FANUC Series 32i-MODEL B Series 32i-B
FANUC Power Motion i-MODEL A Power Motion i-A Power Motion i
FANUC Series 0i-MODEL C Series 0i-C
FANUC Series 0i-MODEL D Series 0i-D
FANUC Series 0i Mate-MODEL D
FANUC Series 16i-MODEL A Series 16i-A Series Series
FANUC Series 18i-MODEL A Series 18i-A 16i/18i/21i-A 16i/18i/21i
FANUC Series 21i-MODEL A Series 21i-A
FANUC Series 16i-MODEL B Series 16i-B Series
FANUC Series 18i-MODEL B Series 18i-B 16i/18i/21i-B
FANUC Power Mate i-MODEL D Power Mate i-D Power Mate i
FANUC Power Mate i-MODEL H Power Mate i-H
CHECKING THE PRODUCT PACKAGE

This product package consists of the following:
• CD-ROM
FANUC PICTURE disk (A08B-9010-J518#ZZ11)
NOTE
Be sure to read the release note (READMEE.TXT or READMEJ.TXT) on the first
disk of this product package. The release note provides detailed information on
this product package and additional information not included in the operator's
manual.
ORGANIZATION OF THIS MANUAL

This manual is explained based on FANUC PICTURE Edition 04.0 (A08B-9010-J518#ZZ11).
This manual is organized as follows:
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Describes general precautions that must be observed to ensure safety when using FANUC
PICTURE.
PREFACE
Briefly describes main features of FANUC PICTURE.
Also describes how to use this manual and other information to understand the use of FANUC
PICTURE.
p-2
B-66284EN/07 PREFACE
1. SETUP
Describes the operating environment of FANUC PICTURE and also describes how to set up
FANUC PICTURE.
2. DEVELOPMENT OF CUSTOM SCREEN

Describes the functions and operation methods of menu buttons and describes the components
provided by FANUC PICTURE.
3. FP FUNCTIONS
Describes the functions used in component properties.
4. EMBEDDING OF C APPLICATIONS
Describes how to use FANUC PICTURE together with application software created by C executor
customers.
5. MEMORY SIZES OF CONTROLS AND RESTRICTIONS

Describes the approximate CNC main custom sizes required by various controls, as well as
restrictions on them.
NOTATION CONVENTIONS IN THIS MANUAL

This manual is described according to the following notation conventions:
• Notations and operations of keys

Notation example Explanation
[Enter] key Key names are indicated in brackets [ ].
[Alt] + [→] key When two or more keys are held down at the same time by pressing them
sequentially, the keys are indicated by using "+" as shown to the left.
• Notations of mouse operations

Notation Explanation
Click To press then immediately release a mouse button.
Double-click To quickly click a mouse button twice.
• Folders
Directories and folders are collectively referred to as folders.
p-3
B-66284EN/07 TABLE OF CONTENTS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS............................................................................s-1
WARNINGS AND NOTES RELATING TO FANUC PICTURE ................................ s-1
BE SURE TO READ THE FOLLOWING: ................................................................ s-1
PREFACE ....................................................................................................p-1
FEATURES OF FANUC PICTURE .........................................................................p-1
APPLICABLE MODELS ..........................................................................................p-2
CHECKING THE PRODUCT PACKAGE ................................................................p-2
ORGANIZATION OF THIS MANUAL ......................................................................p-2
NOTATION CONVENTIONS IN THIS MANUAL .....................................................p-3
1 SETUP..................................................................................................... 1
1.1 OPERATING ENVIRONMENT ...................................................................... 1
1.2 INSTALLING FANUC PICTURE.................................................................... 4
1.2.1 INSTALLING FANUC PICTURE disk/ (A08B-9010-J518 #ZZ11) ......................4
1.3 UNINSTALLING FANUC PICTURE............................................................... 5
2 DEVELOPMENT OF CUSTOM SCREEN ............................................... 6
2.1 ACTIVATION AND TERMINATION ............................................................... 6
2.1.1 Activating FANUC PICTURE .................................................................................6
2.1.2 Terminating FANUC PICTURE ..............................................................................7
2.2 CONFIGURATIONS AND FUNCTIONS OF BARS ....................................... 8
2.2.1 Menu Bar and Tool Bar of FANUC PICTURE .......................................................8
2.2.2 FANUC PICTURE Tool Bar Controls and Draw Controls ...................................13
2.2.3 Tool window of FANUC PICTURE ......................................................................16
2.2.3.1 Project window .................................................................................................. 16
2.2.3.2 List editor window............................................................................................. 17
2.2.3.3 Arrangement of tool window............................................................................. 18
2.2.4 Symbol Specification with FANUC PICTURE .....................................................19
2.2.4.1 Symbol data definition....................................................................................... 20
2.2.4.2 Symbol specification method for signals with the property dialog box ............ 21
2.2.4.3 Symbol specification for signals used as FP function arguments...................... 22
2.2.5 Custom Screen Creation Procedure........................................................................23
2.2.6 Creating New Project .............................................................................................24
2.2.7 Open Project ...........................................................................................................26
2.2.8 Setting of Project ....................................................................................................27
2.2.8.1 Setting of CNC system ...................................................................................... 28
2.2.8.2 Setting of Multi-language .................................................................................. 31
2.2.8.3 Collection of history .......................................................................................... 36
2.2.9 Edit of Screen Form ...............................................................................................46
2.2.9.1 Method of placing controls on a form ............................................................... 46
2.2.9.2 Setting of properties........................................................................................... 46
2.2.9.3 Moving and resizing controls ............................................................................ 47
2.2.9.4 Pop-up menu display ......................................................................................... 47
2.2.9.5 Screen form enlarge and edit function............................................................... 48
2.2.9.6 Composite screen edit function.......................................................................... 49
2.2.9.7 Mouse operation and key operation for edit ...................................................... 51
2.2.9.8 Form tool bar ..................................................................................................... 52
2.2.9.9 Zoom dialog box................................................................................................ 53
2.2.10 Make MEM file ......................................................................................................53
c-1
TABLE OF CONTENTS B-66284EN/07
2.2.10.1 Data conversion and MEM form file making procedure ................................... 54
2.2.10.2 Switching between the CNC screen and custom screen .................................... 56
2.2.10.3 Settings for calling a custom screen with the OPER/CUSTOM/GRAPH keys. 57
2.2.10.4 Option function details setting........................................................................... 59
2.2.10.5 Automatic screen call function based on the PMC signals................................ 67
2.2.10.6 FP-PARAMETER SETTING screen................................................................. 69
2.2.11 Write to Card ..........................................................................................................76
2.2.12 Composite Forms ...................................................................................................77
2.2.12.1 Saving the bit map of the active screen form..................................................... 78
2.2.13 Collective screen bitmap output function...............................................................78
2.2.13.1 Thumbnail Display ............................................................................................ 82
2.2.13.2 Screen composite function................................................................................. 83
2.2.13.3 Outputting a property list file ............................................................................ 86
2.2.13.4 Setting the output language ............................................................................... 88
2.2.14 Overall Edit Function .............................................................................................90
2.2.14.1 Overall edit menu .............................................................................................. 91
2.2.14.2 Overall edit function for all properties .............................................................. 92
2.2.14.3 Overall edit function for multi-language caption............................................. 105
2.2.15 FP Script Function................................................................................................116
2.2.15.1 Screen configuration........................................................................................ 116
2.2.15.2 Method of FP script setting.............................................................................. 119
2.2.15.3 Timer driven operation function ...................................................................... 123
2.2.15.4 FP script commands (operators, variables, statements) ................................... 125
2.2.15.5 Notes and restrictions on FP scripts................................................................. 142
2.2.16 Option...................................................................................................................144
2.2.16.1 Color ................................................................................................................ 144
2.2.16.2 List edit ............................................................................................................ 144
2.2.16.3 Environment .................................................................................................... 145
2.2.16.4 Bitmap output .................................................................................................. 145
2.2.17 Help ......................................................................................................................146
2.3 CONTROLS............................................................................................... 147
2.3.1 Procedure for Setting Properties Common to Controls ........................................147
2.3.1.1 Description of general property setting items.................................................. 147
2.3.1.2 Editing text message files ................................................................................ 152
2.3.1.3 Creating custom screens for non-touch panel display units............................. 161
2.3.1.4 Continuous input function ............................................................................... 164
2.3.1.5 Explanations of additional property items ....................................................... 165
2.3.1.6 Setting the signal for the PMC/SD7 type......................................................... 174
2.3.2 Screen Set Control................................................................................................177
2.3.3 Screen Structure Definition Control ...........................................................182
2.3.4 Screen Switch Control ................................................................................189
2.3.5 Lamp Control ..............................................................................................197
2.3.6 Button Control ............................................................................................205
2.3.7 Framed Button Control ...............................................................................218
2.3.8 MDI Key Control ........................................................................................229
2.3.9 MDI Keyboard Control ...............................................................................232
2.3.10 Key Input Buffer Control ............................................................................235
2.3.11 Numeral Indication Control with Key Input ...............................................239
c-2
2.3.12 Numeral Indication Control for Calling a Ten-Key Pad .............................248
2.3.13 PMC Area Character String Indication Control .........................................258
2.3.14 Numeral/Character String Indication Control .............................................264
2.3.15 Label Control ..............................................................................................272
2.3.16 Text Character String Indication Control ...................................................276
2.3.17 Composite Message Indication Control ......................................................281
2.3.18 History Message Indication Control ...........................................................287
2.3.19 Message Indication Control ........................................................................296
2.3.20 Image Display Control ................................................................................301
2.3.21 Clock Control .............................................................................................302
2.3.22 Meter Control .............................................................................................305
2.3.23 Graph Control .............................................................................................308
2.3.24 Line Chart Control ......................................................................................311
2.3.25 Screen Switch Control with image .............................................................318
2.3.26 Button Control with image .........................................................................327
2.3.27 Lamp Control with exchangeable images ...................................................341

2.4 DRAW CONTROLS................................................................................... 348
2.4.1 Pointer Switching .........................................................................................348
2.4.2 Drawing of Line ...........................................................................................348
2.4.3 Drawing of Rectangle ...................................................................................350
2.4.4 Drawing of Arc .............................................................................................352
2.4.5 Drawing of Circle .........................................................................................354
2.4.6 Drawing of Ellipse ........................................................................................356
2.4.7 Drawing of Graphic Characters ....................................................................358
2.5 CUSTOM SCREEN CREATION PROCEDURE AND GUIDELINE ........... 360
2.5.1 About FANUC PICTURE and Customization Tools...........................................360
2.5.2 Custom Screen Design and Creation ....................................................................361
2.5.3 Example of FANUC PICTURE Custom Screen Creation ...................................362
2.5.3.1 FANUC PICTURE creation procedure ........................................................... 364
2.5.3.2 Method of creating a parent screen and child screens ..................................... 368
3 FP FUNCTIONS .................................................................................. 381

3.1 FP FUNCTION INTERFACE ..................................................................... 381
3.1.1 Method of specifying FP function........................................................................381
3.1.2 FP functions for CNC window .............................................................................384
3.1.3 FP functions for PMC window.............................................................................461
c-3
TABLE OF CONTENTS B-66284EN/07
3.1.4 FP Functions for Input/Output of Array-Type Record Variable Data..................472

3.1.5 Function Reference of FP Script ..........................................................................516
4 EMBEDDING OF C APPLICATIONS.................................................. 534

4.1 SOFTWARE REQUIRED FOR C APPLICATION DEVELOPMENT.......... 534
4.2 CREATION OF APPLICATIONS USING TASKS ...................................... 535
4.3 DRAM AND SRAM .................................................................................... 538
4.4 NOTES AND RESTRICTIONS .................................................................. 539
4.5 Series 0i-D, Series 30i/31i/32i/35i and Power Motion i-A ......................... 540
4.5.1 Outline ..................................................................................................................540
4.5.2 Content of Files ....................................................................................................540
4.5.3 Preparation for Development Environment..........................................................542
4.5.4 Interface between FANUC PICTURE and C Language Executor.......................542
4.5.5 Making of Screen Data of FANUC PICTURE ....................................................544
4.5.6 Making of Combining Application Program........................................................545
4.5.6.1 Combining of the main task............................................................................. 545
4.5.6.2 Combining of alarm task.................................................................................. 545
4.5.6.3 Combining of communication task.................................................................. 545
4.5.6.4 Combining of window task.............................................................................. 545
4.5.6.5 Combining of high-level task (Series 30i/31i/32i/35i, Power Motion i-A) ..... 546
4.5.6.6 Combining of common variable (DRAM variable and SRAM variable) ........ 546
4.5.6.7 Making of memory card form file (*.MEM) ................................................... 546
5 MEMORY SIZES OF CONTROLS AND RESTRICTIONS.................. 547

5.1 MEMORY SIZES OF CONTROLS ............................................................ 547
5.2 RESTRICTIONS,CAUTIONS..................................................................... 550
5.3 DIFFERENCES FROM FANUC PICTURE OF OLD VERSION................. 552
APPENDIX
A ERROR MESSAGES .......................................................................... 555
A.1 ERROR MESSAGES................................................................................. 555
A.2 TROBLE SHOOOTING ............................................................................. 556
B CNC SCREEN NUMBERS LIST ......................................................... 557
B.1 Screen numbers for Series 0i-C, Series 16i/18i/21i, Power Mate i ............. 557
B.2 Screen Numbers for Series 0i-D, Series 30i/31i/32i/35i, Power Motion i-A560
C AVAILABLE CHARACTERS ON FANUC PICTURE.......................... 564

C.1 FANUC CODE ........................................................................................... 564
C.2 RUSSIAN CODE ....................................................................................... 568
C.3 TURKISH CODE........................................................................................ 569
C.4 CENTRAL EUROPE CODE....................................................................... 569
D SUPPLEMENT TO THE LINE CHART CONTROL............................. 570
D.1 METHOD OF STORING SAMPLED DATA ............................................... 570
D.2 TIMING CHART OF THE TRIGGER DISPLAY METHOD......................... 571
D.3 ERROR MESSAGES................................................................................. 572
E CONTROL DRAWING COMMAND .................................................... 573
E.1 FORMATS OF COMMANDS ..................................................................... 573
E.2 DETAILS OF FUNCTIONS ........................................................................ 575
c-4
E.3 COORDINATES ........................................................................................ 579

E.4 EXAMPLE.................................................................................................. 580
E.5 NOTES ...................................................................................................... 580
c-5
B-66284EN/07 1.SETUP
1 SETUP
This chapter describes the operating environment of FANUC PICTURE. This chapter also describes how
to set up FANUC PICTURE.
Chapter 1, “SETUP” consists of the following sections.
1.1 OPERATING ENVIRONMENT..........................................................................................................1

1.2 INSTALLING FANUC PICTURE.......................................................................................................4
1.3 UNINSTALLING FANUC PICTURE .................................................................................................5
1.1 OPERATING ENVIRONMENT

The following operating environment is required to use this tool:
Personal computer operating environment

Personal computer : 1GHz 32-bit (x86) processor
Basic software (OS) : Windows XP, Windows Vista or Windows 7
* Windows Vista is supported by Edition 02.3 or later.
* Windows 7 is supported by Edition 03.2 or later.
Application software : Internet Explorer 6.0 SP1 or later
Memory : Windows XP: 256M bytes or more
Windows Vista or Windows 7: 1G bytes or more
Available hard-disk space : 60M bytes or more
VGA monitor : 1024×768 pixels or more
65000 colors or more
Peripheral equipment : PCMCIA-compliant memory card drive
At least a 16M bytes memory card
CD-ROM drive (required during installation)
Items required to create a simplified Chinese character screen on personal

computer
(1) Simplified Chinese character font
(2) When entering simplified Chinese characters with IME, the machine tool builder is to prepare IME
software for simplified character input.
Option specification
- Series 30i/31i/32i-A
Any option of the following 1 or 2 is required.
Option name Usable D-RAM size
6M bytes
1 FANUC PICTURE function (include custom software size 6MB)
(Max 8M bytes)
FANUC PICTURE function for non-touch panel display (include custom software 6M bytes
2
size 6MB) (Max 8M bytes)
-1-
1.SETUP B-66284EN/07
- Series 30i/31i/32i-B
Any option of the following 1, 2 or 3 is required.
1 FANUC PICTURE function (include custom software capacity 6MB) 6M bytes
FANUC PICTURE function for non-touch panel display (include custom software 6M bytes
2
capacity 6MB)
FANUC PICTURE Executor 4M to 8M bytes
3
Custom software size 4MB or more
- Series 35i-B
1 FANUC PICTURE for 35i Function (include custom software size 6MB) 6M bytes
2
- Power Motion i-A

FANUC PICTURE for Power Motion i Function (include custom software size 6M bytes
1
6MB)
2
- Series 0i-C
1 Touch panel B (include custom software size 2MB) 2M bytes
2 Touch panel C (include custom software size 6MB) 6M bytes
- Series 0i-D
2
- Series 16i/18i/21i
FANUC PICTURE function (include custom software size 6MB) 6M bytes
2
* For non-touch panel display
- Power Mate i
The following option is required.
1 Touch panel (include custom software size 6MB) 6M bytes
-2-
Option specification (for uniting with C language executor application)

The option of C language executor is required.
For Series 30i/31i/32i/35i, Series 0i-D, Power Motion i-A, the option of FANUC PICTURE Executor is
also required.
Setting NC parameters on the CNC

Set the following CNC parameters.
Number Set value Content
8661 59 Size of S-RAM variable area
8662 4 Size of S-RAM disk
Size of D-RAM used with C language executor (6M bytes or less)
8781 0 to 96 Example) 6M bytes -> set 96
For Power Mate i, always set 96.
This parameter is available only for Series 30i/31i/32i/35i,
Power Motion i-A.
8783 0, 97 to 128 Size of D-RAM used with C language executor (over 6M bytes)
Example) 8M bytes -> set 128
When this parameter is set, set the parameter NO.8781 to 0.
When a CNC alarm is issued while the user screen of C language executor
is being displayed, automatic switching to the alarm screen is not
performed.
8650#1 1 (Set automatically)
Select operation when a CNC alarm is issued by the FP parameter No. 4,
"Rule for switching the screen when an NC alarm is issued" in section
2.2.10.6, "FP-PARAMETER SETTING screen".
This parameter is available only for Series 30i/31i/32i/35i, Series 0i-D,
8650#2 1 (Set automatically) Power Motion i-A.
The repeat of vertical soft keys is effective.
When the user screen of C language executor is assigned to a CNC
8650#5 1 (Set automatically) program screen, a screen number for each operation mode is used.
In Power Mate i, this parameter need not be set.
NOTE
When the above-mentioned parameter is set, the power must be turned off
before operation is continue.
-3-
1.SETUP B-66284EN/07
1.2 INSTALLING FANUC PICTURE
1.2.1 INSTALLING FANUC PICTURE disk/ (A08B-9010-J518 #ZZ11)

This section explains how to install FANUC PICTURE.
Procedure
Installation of FANUC PICTURE disk /(A08B-9010-J518 #ZZ11)
1. When the CD-ROM of the product is inserted into the CD-ROM drive, installation is automatically
started. Perform installation according to the dialog messages displayed.
2. If installation is not automatically started by step 1 above, activate SETUP.EXE in CD-ROM drive
directly.
This method of activation can be executed by reading drive
3. Upon completion of installation, the Start menu of Windows indicates the icon of FANUC
PICTURE as shown below.
CAUTION
Sample screens of FANUC PICTURE are installed in the Sample folder. When
referencing or editing the sample project, do not directly edit the project. Instead,
copy the project to the local disk and cancel the read-only attribute of all files
before use.
-4-
1.3 UNINSTALLING FANUC PICTURE

This section explains how to uninstall FANUC PICTURE. When FANUC PICTURE is reinstalled, it is
recommended that uninstallation be performed before setup operation is performed again.
1 Click the Start button of Windows.

2 Click Control Panel.
3 Click Add/Remove Program or Programs and Features.
4 Click FANUC PICTURE.
5 Click Change/Remove or Uninstall.
Proceed to perform uninstallation operation according to the messages displayed in dialog boxes.
-5-
2.DEVELOPMENT OF CUSTOM SCREEN B-66284EN/07
2 DEVELOPMENT OF CUSTOM SCREEN

This chapter describes the method of activating and terminating FANUC PICTURE and the structure and
function of each screen.
Chapter 2, “DEVELOPMENT OF CUSTOM SCREEN” consists of the following sections.
2.1 ACTIVATION AND TERMINATION................................................................................................6

2.2 CONFIGURATIONS AND FUNCTIONS OF BARS .........................................................................8
2.3 CONTROLS......................................................................................................................................147
2.4 DRAW CONTROLS ........................................................................................................................348
2.5 CUSTOM SCREEN CREATION PROCEDURE AND GUIDELINE ............................................360
2.1 ACTIVATION AND TERMINATION

This section describes the method of activating and terminating FANUC PICTURE .
2.1.1 Activating FANUC PICTURE

This subsection describes the method of activating FANUC PICTURE .
FANUC PICTURE is selected from the start menu of Windows, and this software is started.
-6-
B-66284EN/07 2.DEVELOPMENT OF CUSTOM SCREEN
The following FANUC PICTURE window is displayed:
2.1.2 Terminating FANUC PICTURE

This subsection describes the method of terminating FANUC PICTURE .
Click the menu button EXIT or click in the title bar to terminate.
-7-
2.2 CONFIGURATIONS AND FUNCTIONS OF BARS
2.2.1 Menu Bar and Tool Bar of FANUC PICTURE

This subsection describes the menu bar configuration and functions of FANUC PICTURE.
When FANUC PICTURE is started, the screen shown below appears first.
Menu bar
Tool bar
Form tool bar
Explanation
The table below indicates the function/application of each item of the menu bar.
Each item of the tool bar or the form tool bar can be displayed as an independent tool window.
Each menu item prefixed by an asterisk (*) may not be displayed, depending on the condition.
Item in the main menu Icon in

Shortcut Chapter of
the tool Functions
* Sub menu key explanation
bar
[ File ] Alt+F
Submenu related to the creation,
Project ► setting, and saving of a project of
custom screens
Creates a project of new custom
New… 2.2.6
screens.
Selects a project of already
Open created custom screens to be 2.2.7
edited.
Save Saves the project being edited.
Close Closes the project being edited.
Sets items, such as the PMC,
display unit type, and option
Setting… 2.2.8
functions, common to a custom
screen to be created.
Opens a custom screen according
Screen ►
to the edit type.
-8-

Shortcut Chapter of
the tool Functions
bar
Opens a new custom screen form
New Ctrl+N
as an editing target.
Selects a custom screen form to
Open Ctrl+O be edited, from the displayed file
dialog box.
Closes the currently active screen
* Close
form.
Saves the currently active screen
* Save Ctrl+S
form.
Saves the currently active screen
* Save as
form under a new name.
Imports and opens a custom
Import from VB… screen form created by Microsoft
Visual Basic, as an editing target.
Saves all screen forms and project
Save all
files opened for editing.
Enables editing of a symbol data
Symbol file dedicated to a custom screen 2.2.4
project of FANUC PICTURE.
Obtains the bit map of the
* Screen bitmap currently active screen form and 2.2.12.1
saves the bit map to a file.
Displays a dialog for printing the
* Print… Ctrl+P
screen form that is currently active.
Displays a screen form print
* Print Preview
image.
Print Setup... Displays the Printer Setup dialog.
A history of the names of the latest
four screen forms opened is
(Screen form opened in the displayed. A desired screen form
*
past) can be opened by pressing the key
for the corresponding number from
1 to 4 indicated at the beginning.
Exit Alt+F4 Quits FANUC PICTURE.
A set of edit commands for
* [ Edit ] Alt+E controls on screen forms is
provided.
Returns the state of control editing
Undo Ctrl+Z operation back to the previous
state.
Performs a reversed operation of
Redo Ctrl+Y “Undo”, namely, returns the state
of editing to the original state.
Cut Ctrl+X Cuts a selected control.
Creates a copy of a selected
Copy Ctrl+C
control.
Pastes a control cut or copied by
Paste Ctrl+V
[Cut] or [Copy].
Delete Deletes a selected control.
Align ►
-9-

Shortcut Chapter of
the tool Functions
bar
Aligns the left side of the rectangle
Left of each selected control with the
left side of the reference control.
Aligns the right side of the
rectangle of each selected control
Right
with the right side of the reference
control.
Aligns the upper side of the
Top
with the upper side of the
reference control.
Aligns the lower side of the
Bottom
with the lower side of the reference
control.
Moves the rectangle display
positions of selected controls so
Horizontal space
that the rectangles are spaced at
regular intervals horizontally.
Moves the rectangle display
positions of selected controls so
Vertical space
that the rectangles are spaced at
regular intervals vertically.
Matches the width of the rectangle
Width of each control with the width of
the reference control.
Matches the height of the
Height rectangle of each control with the
height of the reference control.
Order ►
Moves a control overlapped by
Bring to Front Ctrl+J another control to the front (top
layer).
Moves a control overlapping
Send to Back Ctrl+K another control to the back (lower
layer).
Moves a control overlapped by
Bring Forward another control to the front (one up
layer).
Moves a control overlapping
Send Backward another control to the back (one
down layer).
Chooses whether to display or
hide each bar and chooses
[ View ] Alt+V
whether to set screen form grid
display.
Tool bar
hide the tool bar.
Status bar
hide the status bar.
Control
hide the control bar.
Draw
hide the draw bar.
- 10 -

Shortcut Chapter of
the tool Functions
bar
Form 2.2.9.8
hide the form tool bar.
Arranges and displays screen
Project Window forms registered in the custom
screen configuration project file.
Enables a screen form control to
List Editor be selected for property item
modification.
Chooses whether to set the grid
interval function for setting a grid
Grid interval that is used as the
guideline for placing controls on
the screen form.
Chooses whether to show or hide
Composite View 2.2.9.6
the composite screen display.
Zoom Displays the zoom dialog box. 2.2.9.9
A set of operations related to

*[ Window ] Alt+W
screen form windows is provided.
Displays opened screen form
Cascade
windows one over another.
Tiles open screen form windows
Tile
vertically and horizontally.
Rearranges the icons of closed
Icon
screen form windows.
Displays a list of open screen form
windows. A desired screen form
* (Screen form window list) can be activated by keying the
number displayed at the
beginning.
The custom screen configuration
[ Project ] Alt+P and a set of operations related to
screen data creation are provided.
Opens a screen form registered in
Open screen… the custom screen configuration
project file.
The screen form is registered in
Add screen the custom screen configuration
project file.
Deletes a specified screen form
from those screen forms registered
Delete screen
in the custom screen configuration
project file.
Creates data for a custom screen
Make MEM File… registered in the custom screen 2.2.10
configuration project file.
Creates, in a specified folder, a
Write MEM File… copy of the FP driver software and
2.2.11
Output MEM File… a copy of the screen data file
produced by MEM file generation.
Composites and displays a parent
screen and specified child screens
Composite Screen… 2.2.12
making up a custom screen on
one screen form.
- 11 -

Shortcut Chapter of
the tool Functions
bar
Runs the screen bitmap output tool
that can output bitmap files of
Output Screen Bitmap… screen forms and files in which 2.2.13
setting of controls are written at
once.
Edits all of particular property
items of multiple controls of a
Overall editor… screen form registered in the 2.2.14
custom screen configuration
project file at a time.
Enables editing of the same
property items extracted across
All Properties 2.2.14.2
different screens or controls at a
time.
Enables editing by collecting the
multi-language captions of all
Multi-language Caption controls having a caption for each 2.2.14.3
screen form and by checking the
multi-language settings at a time.
An FP script function coding an
operation program can be called
for execution from a control that
FP Script… 2.2.15
enables FP function specification.
This menu item creates and edits
such an FP script function.
Sets the operating environment of
Option 2.2.16
FANUC
A set of help-related operations is
[ Help ] Alt+H
provided.
Searches for FANUC PICTURE
Help Topics
help topics.
Provides FANUC PICTURE
About FANUC PICTURE 2.2.17
version and copyright indications.
Terminology: Project
When an operator’s panel is created for a target machine with FANUC PICTURE
(which may be hereinafter abbreviated as FP), a set of custom screens built into
the machine is referred to as a project. The start folder for project creation on the
personal computer is referred to as the “project folder”, and a folder name is
referred to as a project name.
Accordingly, to create a “new project” means to create a project folder for
creating a new operator’s panel screen for a machine on the personal computer.
“Project selection” means to choose from multiple projects of operator’s panel
screens for different machines for editing, and means the specification or
selection of a project folder location on the personal computer.
Multiple screen forms can be created in a project folder, but the custom screen to
be displayed on the CNC is managed by the custom screen configuration project
file.
- 12 -
2.2.2 FANUC PICTURE Tool Bar Controls and Draw Controls

Under the tool bar, the FANUC PICTURE controls and draw controls are displayed. Each item of these
bars can be displayed as an independent tool window. The tables below indicate the function of each
control.
Control bar
Draw control bar
The background of the screen

form is a screen set control.
Various toolbars become

independent tool windows.
- 13 -
Icon in the Chapter of

Control Name Functions
tool bar explanation
Control for setting the functions common to screen
forms. This control is used as the background
1 Screen Set Control color of the CNC screen. When a new screen form 2.3.2
is created, the control is placed as the background
of the entire valid screen area.
When a parent screen is created, this control is
pasted. This control is used to set the screen
Screen Structure
2 configuration of child screen functions and whether 2.3.3
Definition Control
to use pop-up screens. This control is not
displayed on the CNC screen.
Control for performing screen switching operations
3 Screen Switch Control with a parent screen switch button, child screen 2.3.4
switch button, and so forth
4 Lamp Control Control for lamp operation 2.3.5
Control for button operations for signal output and

5 Button Control 2.3.6
so forth
Signal output button operation control with a lamp

6 Framed Button Control 2.3.7
function provided in the frame and central area
Control for alphabetic key, numeric key, and

function key operations. An input key code is sent
7 MDI Key Control 2.3.8
to the key input buffer control or button control
monitoring key input.
Control serving as an MDI key set equivalent to

8 MDI Keyboard Control 2.3.9
the MDI unit
A key input from the MDI unit or an MDI-related

9 Key Input Buffer Control control is received in the buffer then the key buffer 2.3.10
data is written to a control with input.
Control for numeric value display that can rewrite a
Numeral Indication
10 display value with an input value from the key input 2.3.11
Control with Key Input
buffer control
Numeral Indication Control for numeric value display that can rewrite a
11 Control for Calling a display value with an input value from the pop-up 2.3.12
Ten-Key Pad ten-key pad
This control displays a character string written in
PMC Area Character
12 the PMC area. This control can also write 2.3.13
String Indication Control
characters input from the key input buffer.
Numeral/Character Control for displaying numeric data and character

13 2.3.14
String Indication Control string data
14 Label Control Control for displaying a fixed character string 2.3.15
Control for displaying a message statement

Text Character String
15 selected from many text messages edited on the 2.3.16
Indication Control
personal computer
- 14 -

Control Name Functions
Control for concatenating and displaying several
message statements selected from many text
Composite Message
16 messages edited on the personal computer. A 2.3.17
Indication Control
concatenated message not longer than 32
characters can be displayed.
Control for displaying a display history of
History Message
17 messages (such as alarms). This control can also 2.3.18
Indication Control
display message summaries and detail messages.
Control for displaying one of the eight messages
Message Indication
18 associated with the individual bits of a one-byte 2.3.19
Control
PMC signal
Control for displaying a bit map or JPEG-format

19 Image Display Control 2.3.20
image
Control for displaying date (year/month/day) and

20 Clock Control 2.3.21
time (hours/minutes) data in digital form
Control for displaying numerical data as a circle

21 Meter Control 2.3.22
meter or bar meter
Control for displaying numerical data as a bar

22 Graph Control 2.3.23
graph
Control for displaying numerical data as a line

23 Line Chart Control 2.3.24
chart
Control same as Item 3 for performing screen
Screen Switch Control switching operations with a parent screen switch
24 2.3.25
with image button, child screen switch button, and so forth.
This control can display an image on the button.
Control same as Item 5 for button operations for
Button Control with
25 signal output and so forth. This control can display 2.3.26
image
an image on the button.
Control for displaying a different image matching a
Lamp Control with
26 signal consisting of successive light bits or a binary 2.3.27
exchangeable images
number in the PMC area

Draw Control Name Functions
This is not a control. On a screen form, the mouse
1 Pointer pointer becomes movable to enable various 2.4.1
usual editing operations such as control selection.
This control draws a straight line between two
2 Line 2.4.2
points of rectangular corner.
3 Rectangle This control draws a rectangle. 2.4.3
4 Arc This control draws an arc. 2.4.4
5 Circle This control draws a circle. 2.4.5
6 Ellipse This control draws an ellipse. 2.4.6
This control draws graphic characters with no

7 Letter 2.4.7
background color.
- 15 -
2.2.3 Tool window of FANUC PICTURE

On the left and right sides of the application window, a project window and list editor window are
displayed. Each of these windows can be used as an independent tool window.
Project window
List editor window
2.2.3.1 Project window

The project window displays a project and a list of the screen forms registered in the project. Operations
such as [Open], [Save], [Close], and [Delete] can be performed for a screen form in the project.
Icon for project
Icon for screen
Double-clicking the icon of a screen displays the corresponding screen form.

Depending on whether the focus is placed on the project icon or a screen icon, right-clicking displays the
pop-up menu specific to the project icon or screen icon. The tables below indicate the items of each
pop-up menu.
- 16 -
Pop-up menu item of Chapter of

Functions
project icon explanation
Sets items, such as the PMC, display unit type, and option
1 Project of setting… 2.2.7
functions, common to a custom screen to be created.
The screen form is registered in the custom screen
2 Add screen to project…
configuration project file.
3 Save project Saves the project being edited.
4 Save all Saves all screen forms and project files opened for editing.
5 Close project Closes the project being edited.
Creates data for a custom screen registered in the custom
6 Make MEM files… 2.2.10
screen configuration project file.
Creates, in a specified folder, a copy of the FP driver software
7 Output MEM files… and a copy of the screen data file produced by MEM file 2.2.11
generation.
Pop-up menu item of Chapter of

Functions
screen icon explanation
Open a custom screen form chosen in the project window to be
1 Open screen
edited.
2 Save screen Saves the currently active screen form.
3 Close screen Closes the currently active screen form.
Deletes a specified screen form from those screen forms
4 Delete screen
registered in the custom screen configuration project file.
2.2.3.2 List editor window

On the list editor window, a control on the screen form can be selected to edit the properties, such as state,
operation, and figure, of the control.
Multiple controls of a screen form cannot be selected to modify their properties at a time. To select one of
the multiple controls, specify the control to be edited, by using the combo box indicated by the frame as
shown below. Clicking the … button placed to the right displays the property dialog box of the specified
control.
To start editing, click the value of a property item to be modified, or move the cursor to the value of a
property item to be modified then press the F2 key.
To finalize the setting of an input value, press the Enter key or select another property item.
To cancel an input value, press the Esc key.
- 17 -
2.2.3.3 Arrangement of tool window

The tool windows (Subsection 2.2.3.1, "Project window" and Subsection 2.2.3.2, "List editor window")
can be joined on the left side or right side of the application window. Once the tool windows are joined,
their height is automatically changed according to the application window size.
An example of placing the tool windows on the right side of the application window as in the case of
Microsoft Visual Basic is provided below.
1. By default, the tool windows are placed as shown below.
2. Double-click the grip bar of each tool window for removal from the application window.
- 18 -
3. Adjust the height of the tool windows.
4. Move the tool windows to the right side of the application window then join them.
2.2.4 Symbol Specification with FANUC PICTURE

With FANUC PICTURE, PMC signal addresses are used to create a custom screen. With the
conventional specification method, absolute addresses such as R123.4 and D134 are used. With FANUC
PICTURE(A08B-9010-J518#ZZ11)of the new version, the symbol specification method usable with
FANUC LADDER-III can also be used for PMC signal address specification.
- 19 -
2.2.4.1 Symbol data definition

When you click [File]-[Symbol] on the menu bar, the symbol data defined in the custom screen project is
displayed.
Text box for adding a new symbol or

updating an already registered symbol
When a new project is created, no symbol is registered. The symbol data file is a dedicated symbol data
file defined in the custom screen project of FANUC PICTURE. So, to use a symbol defined with a ladder
for the custom screen operator’s panel created with FANUC LADDER-III, the symbol can be imported
by adding it to the FANUC PICTURE custom screen project with the import function. Moreover, a
symbol newly defined on the custom screen side can be exported for use with FANUC LADDER-III.
The BOOL type, the BYTE type, the WORD type, and the DWORD type can be specified for a type of
the symbol.
Updating a symbol:
When you click the name of a symbol to be updated, the symbol data is copied to the text box for
editing. Make a necessary modification then click the Alter button.
Inserting a symbol:
Key a symbol name, PMC signal address, type, and scope in the text box for editing then click the
Insert button.
Deleting a symbol:
Select a symbol name to be deleted, by left-clicking the mouse singly or when the Shift key or Ctrl
key is held down, then click the Delete button.
Import/Export:
Each of the Import (Mnemonic/CSV) button and the Export (CSV) button displays the file dialog
box shown below. Specify an input/output destination file in each format then click the Open button
to perform a desired operation.
- 20 -
2.2.4.2 Symbol specification method for signals with the property

dialog box
With various FANUC PICTURE dialog boxes and the property dialog box of each control, fields for both
of absolute address specification and symbol specification are provided as in the case of the button
control property dialog box shown below.
The method of symbol specification is described below.
Absolute address
specification
Symbol
specification
- 21 -
Symbol:
When you check the Symbol check box, the symbol specification method is selected for this PMC
signal specification.
Combo box for symbol specification:
Specify a symbol in the format “scope.symbol”. When you specify a symbol with no scope, a
symbol name only is entered. Type a desired symbol name in the combo box, or select a desired
symbol from the list for setting in the combo box. When you select a symbol from the drop-down
list, you can edit the symbol file by choosing [File]-[Symbol] on the menu bar. An input symbol
may be undefined at this stage. However, register such a symbol in the symbol data file before
performing [Make MEM File...].
CAUTION
1 For the coding specifications of symbol data, refer to the pertinent manual of
FANUC LADDER-III.
2 In the dialog boxes and property dialog boxes described below, the description
of the property for symbol specification is omitted.
2.2.4.3 Symbol specification for signals used as FP function

arguments
A property describing an FP function may specify a PMC signal area as an argument of the function. In
such a case, “PMC-area_PMC-address_bit-position-or-type” is replaced with “:scope.symbol:” as
indicated below. Arguments not related to a signal are to be successively coded in the same list as for
absolute-format argument specification.
Absolute format:
FP-function-name[PMC-area_PMC-address_bit-position-or- type_data]
Symbol format:
FP-function-name[:scope.symbol:_data]
Example)
wrpmcb[adrtype_snumber_bitpos_data]⇒ wrpmcb[:Symbol:_data]
wrpmcb[5_0035_1_1] ⇒ wrpmcb[:DoorOpen:_1]
rdpmc[adrtype_snumber_datatype] ⇒ rdpmc[:Symbol:]
rdpmc[9_0123_2] ⇒ rdpmc[:D0123LONG:]
- 22 -
2.2.5 Custom Screen Creation Procedure
Start This flowchart indicates the procedure for

creating a custom screen with FANUC PICTURE
and the menu commands used.
New New Existing
Project?
[File]Menu
[Project]f[New]
[File]Menu
[Creating new project]
[Project]f[Open]
[File]Menu
[Project]f[Setting…]
[Setting of project]
New Existing
Edit screen?
Yes Import of No Yes Register No

VB screen? in the project?
[File]Menu [File]Menu [Project]Menu [File]Menu

[Screen]f [Screen]f [Open Screen…] [Screen]f
[Import(VB)] [New] [Open]
Click a desired control on the control bar then drag

Edit of screen form the control on the screen form to create a custom
screen.
Double-click a placed control to display the property
Continuance
Edit completion? dialog box and set necessary properties.
Completion
Save the screen form. When a new screen is saved, the screen form can be
Register the new making renamed here. Moreover, the system asks you
screen in the project. whether to register the new screen in the project.
Choose “Register”.
[Project]Menu
[Make MEM File]
[Project]Menu
[Write to card]
[File]Menu When you quit the project, the system asks you
[Exit] whether to save the modifications. Save the project
before quitting the project.
End
- 23 -
To create a custom screen with FANUC PICTURE, perform operations on the personal computer
according to the flowchart shown on the previous page.
Basically, proceed according to the procedure described below.
Work on the personal computer

<1> Create a project folder for custom screen creation.
<2> Set the environment and conditions of the project such as the model of a target CNC
<3> Add a new screen form.
<4> Pastes controls onto the screen form then set properties.
<5> Register the created screen form with the project.
<6> Set the custom screen option functions before MEM file generation.
<7> Generate a MEM file.
<8> Copy the custom screen data and FP driver software to the memory card.
Work on the CNC

<1> Write the copied file to the F-ROM of the CNC.
<2> Initialize the CNC (to set the CNC parameters and start the FP driver).
<3> Debug the custom screen and PMC ladder.
See Section 2.5, which provides an example of creating a custom screen consisting of a main screen and
sub screens.
2.2.6 Creating New Project

Create a new project by using the procedure below.
1 Click New -Project on the file menu bar.

2 The dialog box for entering a project name appears.
- 24 -
3 Click … to display the Browse for Folder dialog box.
4 Select a folder to create a project in, then click OK. The directory name is set.
5 Enter a desired project name, then click OK.
6 If, at this time, you want to create a new project for restoration from a backup of screen data for
restoration sucked up from the F-ROM of the CNC control unit, check the Restoration from F-ROM
check box.
7 Enter a desired project name, then click [OK].
8 When you press [OK], if the Restoration from F-ROM check box has been checked, the Open dialog
box, shown below, appears. Specify the location and the name of the screen data MEM file (file
name: FPF0xx or CEX0FPDT) containing a backup of screen data for restoration sucked up from
the F-ROM of the CNC control unit, then press the [Open] button.
- 25 -
9 Then, a subfolder is created with the directory and project names specified in the Creating new
project dialog box. After that, the Set Project dialog appears automatically. For the Setting of
Project dialog, see Subsection 2.2.8.
2.2.7 Open Project

The menu item Open Project is used to modify a machine operation screen project currently being created
or a machine operation screen project already created or to select a folder containing a project.
Click Open - Project on the file menu bar.

When the Open dialog box appears, specify a desired project file, then click Open. The default file type is
an FPicture Project file. Open Project is used to specify only the project folder location and project file
name. To edit a screen form, use another menu.
- 26 -
2.2.8 Setting of Project

By clicking [Project] - [Setting..] on the menu bar, [Setting of Project] dialog is displayed.
[Setting of Project] dialog
- 27 -
2.2.8.1 Setting of CNC system

By clicking [Setting of CNC system] tab of [Setting of Project] dialog, the settings of the configuration of
the target CNC (CNC model and display unit, etc) and the shortcut key for the non-touch panel display
unit are displayed.
CNC system:
Select the model of the target CNC to which the custom screens are applied.
CNC system CNC model
30i/31i/32i-A/B, 35i-B Series 30i/31i/32i-A
Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B
0i/0i Mate-D Series 0i-D
Series 0i Mate-D
Power Motion i-A Power Motion i-A
0i-C Series 0i-C
16i/18i/21i-A/B Series 16i/18i/21i-A
Series 16i/18i/21i-B
Power Mate i-H Power Mate i-H
Power Mate i-D Power Mate i-D
PMC type:
Select the model of PMC used with the target CNC.
PMC type PMC model
PMC/SB7 FANUC PMC-MODEL SB7
PMC/SD7 FANUC PMC-MODEL SD7
PMC/SA1 FANUC PMC-MODEL SA1
- 28 -
When “30i/31i/32i-A/B, 35i-B”, “0i/0i Mate-D”, “Power Motion i-A” is selected at the CNC system,
the PMC type need not to be set because it is set automatically.
NOTE
1 FANUC PICTURE does not allow input and output to the signal area of the
loader control PMC.
2 FANUC PICTURE does not allow input and output to the signal area of PMC
(include DCSPMC) other than the first PMC in a multi-path PMC system.
With Edition 02.8 or later, the signal area of PMC other than the first PMC can
be input and output only by using the FP function.
Display unit type

Resolution:
Select the resolution of the display unit used with the target CNC.
Resolution Type of display unit
XGA 15”LCD
(1024×768 pixels)
VGA Except for 15”LCD
(640×480 pixels)
Font:
Select the font type of the display unit used with the target CNC.
Font Type of display unit
Big(9inch) 8.4”LCD
Small(14inch) Except for 8.4”LCD
Soft key:
Select the soft key type of the display unit used with the target CNC.
Soft key Type of display unit
5+2 8.4”LCD
10+2 Display unit without vertical software key (except for 8.4”LCD)
10+2+9 Display unit with vertical software key (except for 15”LCD for automotive)
8+13/13+8 Display unit with vertical software key (15”LCD for automotive)
Call key to input pop-up screen

Creating screens for a non-touch panel display unit requires setting up this item.
To input data for a control with input, use one of the following three input methods: Key-in buffer,
pop-up ten-key pad, and pop-up screen for data input. For the latter two input methods (pop-up type
input methods), a pop-up screen for data input is called by touching a control with input on a touch
panel display unit. For a non-touch panel display unit, a pop-up screen is called using a key rather
than touching the control. A key for calling a pop-up screen for data input is selected and set up for
an individual control with input. The following keys can be used for this purpose.
Numeric keys (0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, +, -, .)
Alphanumeric character keys (including numeric keys and special character keys as well letter
keys)
F1, F2, F3, F4, F5, F6, F7, F8, F9, F10, FR, FL, F1A-F25Y (F6 - F10 cannot be specified if the
number of soft keys to be used is 5+2.)
VF1, VF2, VF3, VF4, VF5, VF6, VF7, VF8, VF9 (vertical software key)
VFR1-VFR8,VFL1-VFL8(vertical software key of 15 inches for automotive)
CAN, INPUT, ALTER, INSERT, DELETE (editing keys)
HELP key
- 29 -
Any numeric key or alphanumeric character key (any of those keys enclosed in parentheses) can be
used to call a pop-up screen for input.
Numeric Indication Control with Key Input :

Numeric Indication Control for Calling Ten-Key Pad :
PMC Area Character String Indication Control :
Select a key type for calling a pop-up screen for input to each control type. For Numeric Indication
Control with Key Input and PMC Area Character String Indication Control, data can be input from a
key-in buffer. This setting applies only to the controls for which the pop-up screen input method is
selected.
Specify the common focus color :
If you want to use the following display colors for any focused control with input throughout the
project in common, turn on this check box. If you turned it on, these color settings are used instead
of the focus colors specified for individual controls.
For the non-touch panel display unit, the check box is automatically turned on. For the touch panel
display unit, this setting is optional.
Focus background color :
Focus character color :
If you turned on the check box for “Specify the common focus color,” specify a background color
and character color for the focus.
- 30 -
2.2.8.2 Setting of Multi-language

By clicking [Setting of Multi-language] tab of [Setting of Project] dialog, the settings of the display
language and the multi-language display function are displayed.
(1) When multi-language display function is not used

If you make the custom screen only of a single-language display without using the multi-language display
function, set the following items.
The multi-language display function is used. :

Don’t check this item.
Char. code: (Character code)
Select the character code to be used when the character type is ANK.
The usable characters of each character code are as shown in the table below.
Character code Usable characters
Japanese Characters of shift JIS code
Chinese (simplified character) Characters of Simplified Chinese code (GB2312)
FANUC code ASCII, Kanji characters, European characters, Korean characters
Russian ASCII, Russian characters
Turkish ASCII, Turkish characters
Central Europe ASCII, Hungarian characters, Polish characters, Czech characters, Slovak
characters, Romanian characters, Croatian characters, Slovenian characters,
Albanian characters, Greek characters
* The Alphabetic characters (capital letter and small letter), the figures and signs are included in
ASCII.
- 31 -
NOTE
1 Chinese (simplified character), Russian and Turkish are available with Series 0i
-C, Series 0i-D, Series 16i/18i/21i -B, Series 30i/31i/32i/35i, Power Motion i-A.
In Power Mate i, cannot used other than Japanese.
2 Central Europe is available on Series 0i-D, Series 30i/31i/32i/35i, Power Motion
i-A.
3 For Central Europe, a part of Alphabetic characters cannot be used.
(2) When multi-language display function is used

If you make the custom screen that can be switched to two or more language display by using the
multi-language display function, set the following items.
Item number of multi-language key
The Multi-language display function is used. :

Check this item to use the multi-language display function.
When the multi-language display function is enabled, the language data of 20 countries or less can
be set to the caption on the custom screen.
If you apply an existing custom screen project to the multi-language display function, the previously
set captions are automatically set as those in the language of the first multi-language key (item
number: 01) additionally registered during multi-language editing. By using the batch input tool,
you can set the captions with any multi-language key.
The Multi-language Character Type function:
Check this item to use the multi-language character type function when the multi-language display
function is enabled.
When the multi-language character type function is enabled, the character type of a control caption
can be set for each display language.
- 32 -
For the method of setting a character type when the multi-language character type function is
enabled, see "Method of setting a character type when the multi-language character type function is
enabled" in Subsection 2.3.1.1, "Description of general property setting items".
Method of switching Multi-language display
For this item, select between the two types described below as the method of switching display
languages on the CNC display unit.
The display language parameter of CNC is used. :
Select this option button if the languages provided by the custom screen.
The Multi-language display switch signal used.(1Byte) :
Select this option button if switching between the display languages provided by the custom screen
is to be accomplished by writing the language number associated with a display language to the
PMC signal area. If you select this button, set the PMC area and the PMC address below. From a
PMC ladder, language switching is accomplished by writing the language number registered with a
multi-language key to the interface area. If an un-registered language number is written, the default
language is used for display.
PMC Area, PMC Address :
If you select The Multi-language display switch signal used, above, set the type and address of the
PMC signal area to specify where to reserve the space for the PMC signal area (1 byte).
* For the symbol specification property for PMC signal address specification, see Subsection 2.2.4,
“Symbol Specification with FANUC PICTURE”.
Add button
This button is used to additionally register a new multi-language key.
By clicking the button, [Language change setting] dialog is displayed.
Delete button
This button is used to delete a registered multi-language key.
By clicking the button, [Deletion of Language change] dialog is displayed.
Item number of multi-language key
Double-clicking the item number of the multi-language key (the number of the [No.] column in the
multi-language key list display), [Language change setting] dialog is displayed.
Registration and edit of multi-language key

By clicking the Add button or double-clicking the item number of the registered multi-language key,
[Language change setting] dialog is displayed. And the multi-language key can be registered, and be
edited.
Register the “Multi-language key” of the language to be created using the frame in the dialog box shown
below. You can check the entire comment by using the horizontal scroll bar. For each language provided
by the custom screen, register a unique “Multi-language key”. Registered multi-language keys will be
used as list members in the combo box used to select the language to be set if setting a caption of a
control and as the language sheet names of spreadsheets related to text messages. The “Select” setting is
provided here, which is used to select the language to be created during the Make MEM step. If you have
set a language for a caption property, but on the custom screen on the CNC, the language does not require
switching display, the creation of the data for this language can be suppressed by unchecking Select.
- 33 -
[Language change setting] dialog
Select :
Check this item to create the language data for this multi-language key during the make MEM step.
If this language need not be displayed, you can uncheck this item to suppress the creation of screen
data.
Multi-language key :
Enter a unique multi-language key of up to 20 single-byte characters that will be the header of the
language provided on the custom screen.
Comment :
Enter a comment for the multi-language key.
Default display language :
If the language indicated by the language switching with the language switching interface cannot be
found, the custom screen will be displayed in this default language. Only one language may be
specified for a multi-language key.
Param No.:
If you select “The display language parameter of CNC is used.” as the display language switching
interface, specify the parameter number and bit position of the language selection parameter bit.
- For Series 0i-C, Series 16i/18i/21i, Power Mate i
Generally, specify parameter 3102 , 3119 or 3190.
- For Series 0i-D, Series 30i/31i/32i/35i, Power Motion i-A
Parameter 3281 is always used.
Param bit :
If you select "The display language parameter of CNC is used" as the display language switching
interface, set the parameter bit number specified under [Param No.].
Generally, specify the bit of the corresponding language of parameter No. 3102 , No. 3119 or
No.3190.
Not used.
Number :
If you select “The Multi-language display switch signal is used.(1Byte)” as the display language
switching interface, set the language number for selecting the language. The valid range is from 1 to
255.
* Language number 0 is treated as the default language.
- 34 -
If you select "The display language parameter of CNC is used" as the display language
switching interface, set the parameter language number specified under [Param No.].
Specify the number of the language specified by parameter No. 3281
Char. Code:
Select character code to be used for ANK characters used with this multi-language key.
For details a kind of character code and language can be displayed, see the explanation of the
character code of “(1) When multi-language display function is not used”.
Deletion of multi-language key

By clicking the Delete button, [Deletion of Language change] dialog is displayed.
And the multi-language key can be deleted.
[Deletion of Language change] dialog
Select the item number of the registered multi-language key at the combo box, and delete it.
CAUTION
When the each country word display is switched while displaying the custom
screen, the screen is displayed again. When the pop up screen is displayed, the
pop up screen is shut by the re-display. Moreover, the output signal is turned off
at the button control with the frame which does not maintain the state of the
output signal. Please consider the interlock processing by the PMC ladder for the
switch of the display language when this is inconvenient.
- 35 -
2.2.8.3 Collection of history

Setting of the history collection function
By clicking [Collection of history] tab of [Setting of Project] dialog, the settings of the history collection
function are displayed.
The history message indication control of FANUC PICTURE can display a summary or history of
messages according to a message indication request from the PMC. A function is provided which collects
such message display history. This dialog box tab is used to set up message indication history collection.
By using the button control or the button control with image, the following operation buttons can be
created:
・ Display switch button for the history message indication control
・ Button for outputting collected history data to the memory card
- 36 -
The history collection function conforms to the following specifications:
1. Collects history of message indication signals at up to four locations.
2. Records history of 300 message indication signals per location. A set or record of 300 signals at a
single location is called a block. If the number of collected signals exceeds 300, older signals are
erased to allow recording of new signals.
3. The history items to be recorded are the number, occurrence time, and cancellation time of an
indicated message, plus the history block deletion date and time for each block.
4. Supports both number IF and bit I/F as the message indication interface (abbreviated I/F) for
collecting history. For the number I/F, there may be up to 32 monitoring PMC areas; for the bit I/F,
the monitoring PMC area may be of up to consecutive 2048 bits.
CAUTION : IMPORTANT
1 An unused history collection block is always in the history deleted state. Thus,
the history collection data in a block used once will be deleted when the use of
the history block is stopped. History blocks will be cleared to zero and enter the
history deleted state due to the rewriting of the values of parameters Nos. 8661
and 8662.
2 For bit signals, history collection can collect the on/off signal states of up to
consecutive 2048 bits at four locations. You must, however, adjust the number of
history monitoring PMC signal areas by considering the control environment of
the CNC control unit used and the display performance of the custom screen.
History Block Number :

You can specify up to four blocks for recording message indication history for a history message
indication control. Check the check box of the block number used.
History Deletion Area/Address/Bit :
For each history block, specify the signal for deleting and initializing the history block. Keep this
signal on for 500 ms or more. When the operator’s panel detects a rising edge of this signal, the
corresponding history block is deleted and initialized.
BitIF :
Check this check box to use the bit interface for the history message indication method.
With the method using the bit interface, a single message indication is performed for each bit signal
of the PMC. If multiple message indication request bits are detected at the same time, the request
with the smallest signal and bit numbers will be recorded first.
Search Start Area/Address/Bit :
Specify the start signal position of the area used to monitor message indication history signals with
the bit interface.
Search Bit Counter :
Specify the number of consecutive bits to be monitored, starting at the start of the search start signal.
A number up to 2048 can be specified.
NumberIF :
Check this check box to use the number interface for the history message indication method.
With the message using the number interface, up to 32 PMC indication request number specification
areas with a length of either one or two bytes are provided, and message numbers are written from a
PMC ladder to these areas to indicate messages. If multiple message indication request numbers are
detected at the same time, the number written to the number specification area with the smallest
number will be recorded first.
Message Area/Address :
Specify the start signal position of the areas used to monitor message indication history number
signals with the number interface.
Message Number :
Specify the number of number areas to be reserved that will be reported with message indication
requests with the number interface. The maximum allowable number is 32.
- 37 -
Message Area Size - 1Byte/2Bytes :

Specify either 1 byte or 2 bytes as the size of a single number area to be reported with a message
indication request with the number interface.
Date & Time Display Format :
Specify the display format for the “history block deletion date and time” recorded for each history
block by the history message indication data acquisition FP function and for the newest and oldest
dates of the history data stored in the history block.
None This display item and subsequent ones will not be used.
YYYY 4-digit year
YY 2-digit year
MO 2-digit month
DD 2-digit day
HH 2-digit hours
MI 2-digit minutes
SS 2-digit seconds
You can enter a separator character between the above display format items.
CAUTION
These dates are displayed in a specified format on the screen with the function
specification of the numeral/character string indication control, and with the
character type specified with this control. For this reason, the specified separator
character may not be displayed with the character type specified with the
indication control. Use caution when specifying a separator character. And, the
space must be specified when the separator character is unnecessary. If any
separator character is not specified, character strings after the separator are not
displayed.
History data memory card output function

This function outputs a history of messages concerning the history message indication control stored in a
history block to the memory card inserted into the PCMCIA slot of the CNC. With this function, a display
history of machine alarm messages can be output to a file, for example, to analyze machine trouble with
the file. For a history block, see "Setting of the history collection function".
This function can be specified with the following button controls:

・ Button control
・ Button control with image
- 38 -
Clicking a button control specifying this function on the CNC screen outputs history data to the memory
card.
History data displayed on the history message

indication control
Button for outputting history data to the

memory card
The PC tool "FPCVT.exe" available with FANUC PICTURE can convert the characters in a file output
by this function to UNICODE. So, a file can be referenced and edited with a text editor or Excel of
Microsoft, independently of the OS of the PC.
For information about "FPCVT.exe", see "History message UNICODE conversion tool".
The table below indicates the CNCs that support this function.
[Available CNC]
0i-C 0i-D 16i 18i 21i PMi-D PMi-H 30i 31i 32i 35i Power Motion
i-A
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ - - ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
(○:Available, -:Unavailable)
（1） Setting for outputting history data to the memory card
Method of setting
The setting of the history data memory card output function is described below.
The following setting is needed for this function:
・ Button control or button control with image
・ Setting for history collection
・ History message indication control
The setting of the button control is described below.
- 39 -
First, paste the button control to the screen form then open the [Detail-History Display] dialog box from
the [Action] tab. At this time, specify the momentary attribute for the button.
History message indication control - [Action]
Button control - [Action] tab
Specify the value of [Assign Link

Number] on the [Action] tab of
the history message indication
control.
<1>
<2>
<3>
Set the items of [Detail-History Display] dialog box as described below.

<1> History Action Type:
Specify "Output history data to memory card".
<2> Link Number at output button:
Specify the value of [Assign Link Number] on the [Action] tab of the history message indication
control.
If the history message indication control is created on the parent screen and the button control is
created on a child screen or vice versa, for example, execute the button of this function when both
controls are displayed on the CNC screen.
<3> Output File Name:
Specify the name of a file to be output to the memory card.
Saving the items above completes the setting of the button control.
Clicking the button control specifying this function on the CNC screen outputs a history data file to the
memory card.
For details of the setting of the history collection function and the setting of the history message
indication control, see "Setting of the history collection function" and Subsection 2.3.18, "History
Message Indication Control".
- 40 -
（2） File output to the memory card

A file output by this function is a text file with the items separated from each other by a tab character. An
output file is described below.
History data output order

History data is output in the order of message occurrence date and time (younger to older).
Output file reference with Excel

An output file can be referenced using a text editor or Excel. An output file can be referenced as
indicated below by choosing [Data]-[Get external data]-[Import text file] from the menu bar of
Excel.
Output file format

File Column A Column B Column C Column D
Line 1 Link number Link number
Line 2 Date and time File creation date and
time
Line 3 Character code Character code
Line 4 Occurring date and Restore date and time Duration time Message
time
Line 5 Occurring date and Restore date and time Duration time 1 Message 1
time 1 1
time 2 2
Line n Occurring date and Restore date and time Duration time n Message n
time n n
time 300 300
Link number:
[Link Number at output button] of the button control
File creation date and time:
Date and time when a file is created on the memory card
The output format follows [Date & Time Display Format] on the [Collection of history] tab of
the [Setting of project] dialog box.
- 41 -
Character code:
FANUC PICTURE character code used at file output time
Code name of characters output on line 3 in
Character code
column B
Japanese Japanese
Chinese (simplified character) Simplified Chinese
FANUC code FANUC
Russian Russian
Turkish Turkish
Central Europe Central Europe
The PC tool "FPCVT.exe" available with FANUC PICTURE can convert the characters in a
file to UNICODE.
For information about "FPCVT.exe", see "History message UNICODE conversion tool".
Occurring date and time 1 to 300:
Message display occurring date and time
The output format follows [Date & Time Display Format] on the [History Format] tab of the
history message indication control.
Restore date and time 1 to 300:
Message display restore date and time
The output format follows the [Date & Time Display Format] on the [History Format] tab of
the history message indication control.
A message not restored is output with its numeric portions indicated by "*".
Example: Time **:**:**
Date and time ****/**/**-**:**:**
Duration time 1 to 300:
Message display duration time
The output format follows [Date & Time Display Format] on the [History Format] tab of the
history message indication control.
Message 1 to 300:
The messages of the MSGXML file set with the history message indication control are
followed.
Items other than the above:
All items are set to fixed character strings.
History message UNICODE conversion tool

The PC tool "FPCVT.exe" converts the characters in a file output by the history data memory card output
function to UNICODE (UTF-16, little-endian). When editing or referencing a file with a text editor or
Excel, open the file in the UNICODE format.
"FPCVT.exe" is stored in the following folder:
(FANUC-PICTURE-installation-folder)\TOOLS\FPCVT
"FPCVT.exe" is started with the command prompt of Windows and operates in the following command
format:
FPCVT conversion-source-file-name conversion-destination-file-name
・ conversion-source-file-name:
Name of a file output by the history data memory card output function
・ conversion-destination-file-name:
Name of a file to which the data of the file specified in argument 1 is output after being
converted to UNICODE
* A directory can be specified for the command and each file name.
Method of operation
An example of operating "FPCVT.exe" is provided below.
- 42 -
<1> Start the command prompt then move to the directory of "FPCVT.exe" stored in the installation
folder.
C:\Program Files\FANUC PICTURE\TOOLS\FPCVT>
Specify the directory of "FPCVT.exe".
<2> Specify file name of history data output to the memory card and a file name to be used after
conversion to UNICODE.
Assume that the memory card drive is drive G.
C:\Program Files\FANUC PICTURE\TOOLS\FPCVT>FPCVT G:\ALMLOG.TXT G:\ALMLOG_UNNICODE.TXT
Specify the command name, a conversion source file name,
and conversion destination file name.
<3> Execute the "FPCVT.exe" command. If a conversion destination file is created normally, the
following message is displayed and the processing is ended:
C:\Program Files\FANUC PICTURE\TOOLS\FPCVT>FPCVT G:\ALMLOG.TXT G:\ALMLOG_UNNICODE.TXT
File conversion and creation are completed normally.
Notes and error messages on the history message indication control

Notes
When the display language on the custom screen is set to "FANUC code", convert the characters of an
output history data file to UNICODE by using the PC tool "FPCVT.exe".
Error messages on the history data memory card output function
The tables below indicate the error messages related to the history data memory card output function.
Error messages output during execution of MEM generation

Error message Cause Action
[Output history data to memory card] With the Power Mate-i series, the Delete or disable the button control
with YYYY of the XXXX.XML screen history data memory card output or switch to a function other than the
cannot be specified by Power Mate-i function cannot be specified. history data memory card output
series. XXXX: Screen form name function.
YYYY: Object ID
The output file name (ZZZZ) for [Output File Name] of the button Specify [Output File Name] of the
XXXX.XML is not correct.\nInput the control does not follow the MS-DOS button control in the following
name as the MS-DOS (8.3) format. format (8.3 format). MS-DOS format (8.3 format):
XXXX: Screen form name File name: 8 characters
ZZZZ: Output File Name Period for separation between the
file name and extension: 1
character
Extension: 3 characters
- 43 -
Error messages output during CNC operation

Memory card is not inserted. - Insert a memory card into the
PCMCIA slot of the CNC.
The file (XXXX) to be output has The history data memory card Move or delete the file in question
already existed. output function cannot overwrite a from the memory card.
file.
XXXX: Output File Name
The link number is not correct. 1) [Link Number at output button] of 1) Specify [Assign Link Number] of
the button control is incorrect. the history message indication
2) On the screen being displayed, control in [Link Number at output
the history message indication button] of the button control.
control to be output cannot be 2) Output history data to the
found. memory card when both of the
button control and history
message indication control are
displayed simultaneously.
Memory card is protected. - Cancel the write protection of the
memory card. For the method of
cancellation, refer to the manual of
the memory card used.
The file cannot be created because - Delete unnecessary files from the
the free space of your memory card memory card to create a free area.
is not sufficient or the number of
registered files is full.
The memory card slot is already Other software of the CNC is using Reexecute after the use of the
used by the other software. the memory card. memory card by other software
* Immediately after a memory card ends.
is inserted, a time for making a
preparation for the memory card
is needed. So, this error
message may be displayed.
The memory card could not be - Format the memory card in the FAT
mounted. format.
The inserted memory card is not - Use a memory card recommended
supported. by FANUC.
The memory card battery is low. - Replace the battery of the memory
card. For the method of battery
replacement, refer to the manual of
the memory card used.
[Output history data to memory card] - With the Power Mate-i series, the
cannot be specified by Power Mate-i history data memory card output
series. function cannot be used.
- 44 -
Error messages output during execution of the PC tool "FPCVT.exe"
Converts the file which was made by The command format of Enter data according to the format
the [Output history data to memory "FPCVT.exe" is incorrect. indicated in the error message.
card] function of FANUC PICTURE
to UNICODE format file.
FPCVT filename1 filename2
filename1 Source file name
filename2 Destination file name
The source file name [XXXX] is not A nonexistent file name or file Specify an existent file name or
correct. directory is specified in XXXX. directory.
XXXX: Conversion source file
name
The destination file name [YYYY] is 1) A nonexistent directory is 1) Specify an existent directory.
not correct. specified in YYYY. 2) Specify a separate file name.
2) An unusable symbol is specified 3) Ensure that the total number of
in YYYY. characters of a file name and
Unusable symbol: \ / : * ? “ < > directory does not exceed 255.
|
3) The number of characters
specified in YYYY is too long.
YYYY: Conversion destination
file name
The data format in the source file The conversion source file XXXX Specify a file output by the history
[XXXX] is not correct. differs from a file output by the data memory card output function.
history data memory card output
function.
XXXX: Conversion source file
name
The source file [XXXX] cannot be Access to the conversion source file Allow access to the conversion
accessed. XXXX is not allowed. source file. For the method of
XXXX: Conversion source file allowing access, consult with the
name system administrator.
The destination file [YYYY] cannot Access to the conversion destination Allow access to the conversion
be accessed. file YYYY is not allowed. destination file. For the method of
YYYY: Conversion destination file allowing access, consult with the
name system administrator.
The destination file name [YYYY] - Pressing Y or y through the
has already existed. YYYY: Conversion destination file keyboard overwrites the file.
Do you want to overwrite this name If another key is pressed, the
one ?[Y/N] processing is terminated without
performing conversion.
The destination file [YYYY] is The conversion destination file Cancel the write protection of the
protected to write. YYYY cannot be overwritten for conversion destination file.
write protection.
YYYY: Conversion destination file
name
The data cannot be converted - Delete unnecessary files to create a
because the free space of your disk free area.
is not sufficient.
- 45 -
2.2.9 Edit of Screen Form
2.2.9.1 Method of placing controls on a form
<2>
<3>
<1>
1. Click a desired control among the controls for FANUC PICTURE in the tool box of <1>. Only the
controls provided by FANUC PICTURE can be used.
2. When the mouse pointer is moved onto the form, the shape of the mouse pointer changes from an
arrow-shaped pointer to a
+-shaped pointer. If this shape change is not made, start all over again from the control selection.
3. Move the mouse pointer to a desired upper-left corner position where the control is to be pasted.
After moving the mouse pointer, paste the control according to the operation of <2>.
4. While holding down the left mouse button, drag the mouse diagonally from upper left to lower right.
When a desired size is obtained, release the left button.
5. This completes the pasting of a control.
2.2.9.2 Setting of properties

To display the Property Pages dialog box (<3>), first place the mouse pointer on the control, then
right-click. When the edit menu appears, select Properties... to display the dialog box. The Property Pages
dialog box can also be displayed by double-clicking the control.
By clicking a tab of the Property Pages dialog box, the user can set the property items related to the tab
name.
The user can quit the dialog box by clicking OK or Cancel.
- 46 -
2.2.9.3 Moving and resizing controls

[Movement]
To move the position of a control, move the mouse point onto the control then drag the mouse while
holding down the left button.
[Resizing]
Select and click a desired control. At the four corners and the center of each side of the selected
control, a handle ( ) is displayed. To resize the control, place the mouse pointer on a handle. The
shape of the mouse pointer changes to . In this state, the control can be resized by dragging the
mouse while holding down the left button.
2.2.9.4 Pop-up menu display

When you right-click the mouse on a screen form, the pup menu appears as shown below. This pop-up
menu enables an editing operation to be performed quickly on the currently selected control.
- 47 -
2.2.9.5 Screen form enlarge and edit function

The enlarge and edit function enlarges a screen form and enables editing based on the same operations as
used for the normal screen form before enlargement.
With this function, more detailed screen form editing can be performed more correctly.
Normal screen edit window
Enlarged screen edit window
A scale for a screen form can be set using one of the following means when the window is open.
・ Operation of the mouse with a wheel
・ Form tool bar
・ Zoom dialog box
For details of each setting method, see Subsection 2.2.9.7, "Mouse operation and key operation for edit",
Subsection 2.2.9.8, "Form tool bar", and Subsection 2.2.9.9, "Zoom dialog box".
When a scale is set, the display is immediately enlarged (or reduced) using the center of the screen edit
window as the base point.
- 48 -
A scale can be selected from the following three options:
・ 100% (default used when a new screen is created)
・ 200%
・ 400%
When a screen form is saved, the set scale is also saved. When the screen form is opened next time for
editing, the screen form is displayed according to the saved scale.
CAUTION
• No set scale is saved until the screen form is saved.
• Multiple screen edit windows can be opened. However, a set scale is reflected in
the forefront editing target window only. The display scales of all open windows
cannot be set at a time.
2.2.9.6 Composite screen edit function

This function can be used from Edition 03.1.
The composite screen edit function composites and displays created parent and child screens in one
screen edit window.
With this function, an image near the CNC screen is displayed on a personal computer, which allows you
to edit screens while checking the entire layout.
Can be edited. Composite edit screen
Editing target screen
Screen to be composited with the

editing target screen
CAUTION
The “screen to be composited with the editing target screen” is displayed as the
background for checking the entire image. The screen cannot be edited.
The “screen to be composited with the editing target screen” can be set using either of the following
methods:
• Property dialog of Screen Set control
• Dragging and dropping the screen from the project window
For details, see Subsection 2.3.2, “Screen Set Control”, and Subsection 2.2.9.7, “Mouse operation and
key operation for edit”.
- 49 -
CAUTION
1 The “screen to be composited with the editing target screen” can be opened in
another screen edit window to edit and save it. After the screen to be
composited is edited and saved, all composite edit screens that reference the
screen are automatically updated.
2 When a screen set in the Composite Screen list becomes nonexistent because
its screen data is deleted or it is renamed, the screen is deleted from the edit
screens.
Switching the view

To choose whether to display or hide the “screen to be composited with the editing target screen”, use
either of the following methods.
(1) Using the [View] menu

On the FANUC PICTURE menu bar, choose [View]-[Composite View].
(2) Using the tool bar

Display the [Standard] tool bar and click the mouse on the button framed in the figure below:
For details of the [View] menu and [Standard] tool bar, see Subsection 2.2.1, “Menu Bar and Tool Bar of FANUC
PICTURE”.
In the following figure, a sample screen composited with the editing target screen is displayed and hidden
as an example.
Display
Hide
- 50 -
CAUTION
1 By default, [Composite View] is on (the composite screen is displayed). The
setting is automatically saved when the project is saved. For details of saving
the project, see Subsection 2.2.8,”Setting of Project”.
2 The [Composite View] setting is effective for all screen edit windows. The setting
cannot be made for individual screen edit windows.
2.2.9.7 Mouse operation and key operation for edit

In editing of a form, mouse buttons, [Ctrl], [Shift], and other keys can be combined for various operations.
These operations are summarized below.
Mouse and key

Edit operation Explanation
operation
Selection of control When clicking the left button on a control, the control is Left-click
selected as the target of movement, resizing, or
displaying of its property dialog.
Display of property dialog of When double-clicking the left button on a control, the Double-clicking
control property dialog of the control can be displayed.
Pop-up menu display When clicking the right button on a control, the Right-clicking
frequently used pop-up menu for editing can be
displayed.
Group selection of control When dragging from a starting point where no control is Drag
present, a group of controls completely enclosed by the
drawn rectangle can be selected.
When dragging from a starting point where a control is [Ctrl]+ Drag
present, if pressing [Ctrl], a group of controls completely
enclosed by the drawn rectangle can be selected without
moving the control under the starting point.
Addition of control to group When clicking the lift button on a control while pressing [Shift]+Left-click
selection the [Shift] key, the control can be added to the selected
group.
Addition and release of control to When clicking the left button on a selected control other [Ctrl]+Left-click
group selection than the last selected one (standard control) while
pressing [Ctrl], the control can be deselected.
When clicking the left button on an unselected control
while pressing [Ctrl], the control can be added to the
selected group.
This operation can directly change a group selection
standard control.
Change in group selection When pressing an arrow key with a group selected, the Arrow key
standard control standard control can be changed.
Movement of control When pressing the left button to select a control and Drag
then dragging it, all selected controls can be moved.
When pressing an arrow key while pressing [Ctrl], all [Ctrl]+Arrow key
selected controls can be moved one coordinate step at a
time in the direction indicated by the arrow key.
Size change in control When placing the cursor on ■ a selected control and Drag
dragging it, the size can be changed.
When pressing an arrow key while pressing [Shift], the [Shift]+Arrow key
width or height of all selected controls can be increased
or reduced one coordinate step at a time in the direction
indicated by the arrow key.
- 51 -
Mouse and key

Edit operation Explanation
operation
Enlarged screen form display The screen form being edited can be enlarged by [Ctrl]+Wheel
rotating the mouse wheel back and forth while holding rotation
down the [Ctrl] key.
• The scale increases as the wheel is rotated in the
forward direction as follows:
100% → 200% → 400%
• The scale decreases as the wheel is rotated in the
backward directory as follows:
400% → 200% → 100%
Composite screen display When a screen form in the project window is dragged to Drag
a screen form, the dragged screen is displayed in the
screen form. That is available when the composite
screen edit function is enabled.
2.2.9.8 Form tool bar

With the form tool bar, the ON/OFF state display of button and lamps and the display language and the
screen form display scale can be changed. A change is applied to all controls on the screen being
processed.
Tool bar display Function Function overview

ON/OFF state change Changes the ON/OFF states of buttons and lamps.
Switches the display language of controls using the
Display language
multi-language function when a language key is selected
switching
from the combo box.
Changes the screen form display scale according to a
Display scale switching
display scale selected from the combo box.
• If the ON/OFF state and display language are set differently for each control on the screen being
processed, tool bar display is undefined.
• An ON/OFF state display change and language key change are not saved automatically. To save the
new changed property for display confirmation based on this function, save the screen form
explicitly by selecting [File]-[Screen]-[Save].
• A display scale can be selected from the following three options:
・ 200%
・ 400%
- 52 -
2.2.9.9 Zoom dialog box

By using the zoom dialog box, the screen form display scale can be changed.
A scale can be set as described below.
1 Choose [View]-[Zoom] from the pull-down menu of the screen editor to display the following zoom
dialog box:
2 Select a desired scale from the radio buttons then click the OK button.
Current scale:
The display scale of the screen form being edited is displayed.
Scale:
A display scale can be selected for the screen form from the following options:
・ 200%
・ 400%
2.2.10 Make MEM file

This step converts data to display a created machine operation screen with FANUC PICTURE on the
CNC and creates an MEM file to be written to the F-ROM of the CNC.
By using the procedure below, convert a created custom screen to screen data for FANUC PICTURE to
create data in memory card format.
- 53 -
2.2.10.1 Data conversion and MEM form file making procedure

<1> Click the Make MEM File… menu button.
The Making of memory card file dialog box appears.
<2> In the Start-up screen pull-down list box, select a screen to be displayed when the power is turned
on.
<3> The Form File Name field indicates [RETURN] and lists up screens that function as parent screens in
created custom screens. So, double-click a screen to be called by using the CNC soft key, to open
the Setting user screen dialog box.
The Form File Name field of the Making of memory card file dialog box includes a special screen,
namely, [RETURN]. Specify this screen to display the user screen displayed immediately before
switching to a CNC screen without specifying a user screen (base screen) created with FANUC
PICTURE. Even in this case, the soft key for calling a user screen in the procedure above needs to
be specified.
<4> In the Screen Number pull-down list box, specify a CNC screen to be replaced. For a screen number
with the “C Executor” comment, the screen displayed on the CNC remains to be unchanged, and a
free screen soft key is assigned. (For CNC units and available screen numbers, see APPENDIX B,
"CNC SCREEN NUMBERS".)
- 54 -
CAUTION
When the CNC screen display function is used, the screen numbers indicated
below cannot be used as soft key numbers for calling a custom screen created
with FANUC PICTURE. These numbers are soft key numbers reserved by the
CNC screen display function.
For Series 0i-D, Series 30i/31i/32i/35i, Power Motion i-A : 0x0100
For Series 0i-C, Series 16i/18i/21i : 0x0000
<5> In Key Caption, set a character string in longer than six characters to be displayed for the CNC
screen soft key. Specify a half-size alphanumeric character string. For multi-language display,
captions can be set in a desired language. Simplified characters, kanji/double-size hiragana
characters, and katakana/half-size uppercase alphabetic characters can be used, but note that
half-size lowercase alphabetic characters cannot be used.
<6> Check Select flag to enable calling from the CNC screen.
CAUTION
Select flag must be specified at least once in the base screens including
[RETURN].
<7> Making of backup to F-ROM

Checking the [Making of backup to F-ROM] check box causes the custom screen data in the project
contained in the folder on the personal computer to be saved in a memory card format file.
This enables you to restore the project on the personal computer by sucking up FANUC PICTURE
screen data (this screen data MEM file usually assumes a file name of FPF0xx (with xx representing
the number of used blocks of the F-ROM) or CEX0FPDT) from the F-ROM of the CNC control unit
to the memory card when altering the custom screen of the machine.
If you select [Making of backup to F-ROM] for the custom screen data for the project, collect the
following data into the specified subfolders. When the custom screen data for a project that has been
saved, the same subfolders are created.
1. Image file data → (project-folder-name)\PhotoData

2. MSGXML message file data → (project-folder-name)\VtsData
For an explanation of the method of sucking up a screen data MEM file from the F-ROM of the
CNC control unit and restoring a project on the personal computer, see the explanation of “New
Project”.
<8> Click OK to return to the Making of memory card file dialog box.
Click OK in the Making of memory card file dialog box to create data in memory card format.
When the memory card format file FPF0FPDT.mem or CEX0FPDT.mem is created, the dialog box
indicating “The memory card file was normally made.” is displayed.
- 55 -
When Make MEM is used, the message dialog box indicating “XXX.DEF was not found.” may appear.
This dialog box is displayed when no screen name is set or an incorrect screen name is set in the screen
switch control. Check the property of the screen switch control.
2.2.10.2 Switching between the CNC screen and custom screen

Explained below are how a custom screen created using FANUC PICTURE is called from the CNC
display unit and how switching occurs from the custom screen to a CNC-provided screen.
The following two methods can be used to display a custom screen from the CNC unit. Method A can be
used only when the power is turned on. So, method B is used for ordinary screen switching.
A. When the CNC unit is turned on, a custom screen specified as a “Start up screen,” which is an
MEM-generated setup item, is displayed first.
B. A custom screen is displayed by pressing that screen select soft key which is prepared for each
function key on the CNC unit according to a soft key number specified in MEM-generated
replacement screen setting and the name of the custom screen.
To the contrary, switching from a custom screen to any other CNC screen can be performed by pressing a
function key on the MDI unit or pressing the corresponding function key button placed as an MDI key
control on the touch panel.
Screen switching by method B

In screen switching on the CNC unit, a screen is displayed using a soft key assigned to an individual function key
as listed below. Method B performs screen switching by replacing a CNC screen having this screen number with a
created custom screen. However, the “Custom Screen” listed in the following chart has a screen number that can
be assigned to a custom screen call soft key created using FANUC PICTURE without replacement with an original
screen on the CNC.
[POSITION] function key [PROGRAM] function key [OFFSET] function key

Screen Number/Name Screen Number/Name Screen Number/Name
[0x0000]Absolute [0x0001]MDI program [0x0002]Offset
[0x0100]Relative [0x0101]Program [0x0102]Setting parameter
[0x0200]All [0x0201]Library [0x0202]Work coordinates
[0x0300]Handle IRT. [0x0301]Current block [0x0302]Macro variable
(Other) (Other) (Other)
[0x0500]Custom screen [0x0d01] Custom screen [0x0d02] Custom screen
[SYSTEM] function key [MESSAGE] function key [GRAPHIC] function key (full keypad)
Screen Number/Name Screen Number/Name Screen Number/Name
[0x0003]Parameter [0x0004]Alarm [0x0005]Graphic
[0x0103]Diagnosis [0x0104]External MSG
[0x0203]PMC [0x0204]Alarm history [CUSTOM] function key(for full keypad)
[0x0303]System config. [0x0304]MAP message Screen Number/Name
(Other) (Other) [0x0106]AUX
[0x1903] Custom screen [0x0a04] Custom screen [0x0206]MACRO
[0x0306]MENU
* The screen numbers are provided for Series 0i-C, Series 16i/18i/21i, Power Mate i.
- 56 -
Cautions
Each CNC function key remembers a subscreen previously displayed with it.
When a function key other than the currently active function key is pressed, the subscreen previously
displayed with the pressed function key appears. A concrete example follows.
<1> A screen select soft key corresponding to the “POSITION function key” is used to display custom
screen A. The POSITION function key will memorize that it is displaying screen A.
↓
<2> On custom screen A, pressing the SYSTEM function key causes screen switching to the screen (say,
parameter screen) memorized by the SYSTEM function key.
↓
<3> Pressing the POSITION function key displays custom screen A, which is memorized in this function
key.
If switching to a CNC-side screen is performed by other than the function key to which custom screen A
was assigned as shown above, switching to a sub screen other than custom screen A under the POSITION
function key becomes impossible as shown in step <3>.
When using a function key to switch from a custom screen to a CNC-side screen, make sure that the
function key is the one assigned to the custom screen. In the above example, the POSITION key is used
to switch to the CNC screen.
This is also true for the CUSTOM function key. However, no inconvenience will be experienced because
there is no CNC-provided screen under the CUSTOM function key. For an explanation of allocation to
the CUSTOM function key and notes, see Subsection 2.2.10.3.
2.2.10.3 Settings for calling a custom screen with the

OPER/CUSTOM/GRAPH keys
This subsection explains the method of calling a custom screen with the [OPER]/[CUSTOM] keys on the
virtual keyboard and the [CUSTOM] key on the MDI unit of Series 0i-C, Series 16i/18i/21i and the
method of calling a custom screen with the [CUSTOM]/[GRAPH] keys on the virtual keyboard and the
[GRAPH] key on the MDI unit of Power Mate i.
The CUSTOM and GRAPH keys set up with these methods, as well as the blank key, are enabled for the
switching to a custom screen only if the CNC screen is displayed as shown in the figure above. If a
custom screen is already displayed, therefore, pressing these keys will start the corresponding operations,
but does not eventually perform switching to the specified custom screen.
- 57 -
CNC For virtual board For MDI unit

Display unit CUSTOM OPER CUSTOM (Blank key)
Series type
0i-C Assign the soft key Assign the soft key Same as the setting Assign the soft
HSSB number of bit 5 number of 0x1903 to of the CUSTOM key number of
or connection (0x0106), 6 (0x0206), the custom screen to key on the virtual parameter No.
or 7 (0x0306) of be called. keyboard 8652#4=1,
Series parameter No. 8652 (Note 1) 0x0007 to the
16i/ Display link to the custom screen (Note 2) custom screen to
18i/21i connection to be called.(Note 1) be called.
(Note 3)
Display unit CUSTOM GRAPH GRAPH
type
Assign the soft key Assign the soft key Same as the setting
number of parameter number of parameter of the GRAPH key
No. 3195#0=1, and No. 3195#0=0, and on the virtual
bit 0 (0x0106), 1 bit 0 (0x0105), 1 keyboard
Power (0x0206), or 2 (0x0205), or 2 (Note 1)
Mate i Display link (0x0306) of (0x0305) of
connection parameter No. 8653 parameter No. 8653
to the custom screen to the custom screen
to be called.(Note 1) to be called.(Note 1)
To use “OPER” as the key top of each
switching key, set bit 1 of parameter No. 3195
to 1.
• Select the same soft key number as that determined according to the table above from [Softkey
Number] in the Setting user screen dialog box shown in Subsection 2.2.10.1.
NOTE
1 • Of the three parameter bits, set only one to 1 and assign the soft key number
corresponding to it. For this setting to take effect, the CNC unit must be
turned off and back on.
• In the presence of a macro executor option, the specification of the screen to
switch to with this parameter is invalid.
• If a macro executor option is attached, custom screens can be called with the
CUSTOM (Series 0i-C, Series 16i /18i /21i ) or GRAPH (Power Mate i ) key
by assigning the soft key numbers for the MDI unit to the custom screens to
be called and setting corresponding conversational macro execution program
numbers not existing in compilation parameters Nos. 9038 (AUX)/
9040(MCR)/ 9041(MENU) for the individual soft key numbers.
2 If the MDI unit is of small key type, screen switching can be performed with the
[CUSTOM/GRAPH] key. In this case, however, assign 0x0105 for 0x0106,
0x0205 for 0x0206, and 0x0305 for 0x0306 for soft key numbers.
3 The blank key is available if the MDI unit is of full key type.
For Series 0i-D, Series 30i/31i/32i/35i, Power Motion i-A, the CUSTOM1 and CUSTOM2 function keys
can be set to call a custom screen, without making special parameter settings.
For the screen numbers of the CUSTOM function keys, see "B.2 Screen numbers for Series 0i-D, Series
30i/31i/32i/35i, Power Motion i-A".
- 58 -
2.2.10.4 Option function details setting

Click the Detail button to display the following dialog box. This dialog box is used to specify the various
settings for the function for automatically calling screens from the PMC and the function for reporting the
number of the screen currently displayed on the operator’s panel.
Tab title Function explanation

Automatic screen call The interface area to do “Automatic screen call from PMC” and “Displayed screen
setting number notification” is set.
Display Number Setting The screen number to do “Automatic screen call from PMC” and “Displayed screen
number notification” is set.
Each Display Setting Free of the memory is set to the screen which cannot be set by the screen structure
definition control.
Signal display/OP ratio Signal information set in the button control and the lamp control can be confirmed on
CNC. And, the operation ratio can be changed from PMC at time related to the
custom screen and time related to CNC executed by the background.
Buzzer Number Setting When the custom screen is displayed, the touch operation sound signal of the touch
panel can be output to the PMC area signal.
(1) Automatic screen call setting
Setting area for the

automatic screen call
Setting area for the

completion signal
Setting area for the display

number
Setting area for the NC

screen call
Setting area for the screen

number notification
Setting area for the error

notification signal
- 59 -
The automatic screen call is used.:

Check this item to use the automatic screen call function based on the PMC signals.
When the automatic screen call function based on the PMC signal is enabled, screen switching to the FANUC PICTURE
custom screen or CNC screen can be performed automatically based on the PMC signals.
For the specification of the automatic screen call function based on the PMC signals, see Subsection 2.2.10.5, "Automatic
screen call function based on the PMC signals".
Request Signal Area:
Specify the type of the PMC address of the signal conveying a request to call a screen from the PMC
to the touch panel operator’s panel.
Request Signal Address:
Specify the address of the request signal.
Request Signal Bit:
Specify the bit position of the signal address above by using a number 0 to 7.
Completion signal Area:
Specify the type of the PMC address of the signal reporting the completion of the call in response to
a screen call request made from the touch panel operator’s panel to the PMC.
Completion signal Address:
Specify the address of the completion signal.
Completion signal Bit:
Display Number Signal Area:
Specify the 2-byte interface area to which the screen number is to be written when a screen is to be
automatically called from the PMC. For this item, specify the type of the PMC address of the area.
Display Number Signal Address:
Specify the address of the screen number interface area.
The NC screen call is used:
Check this item when using the automatic CNC screen call function.
When this function is enabled, a CNC screen can be called automatically.
The automatic CNC screen call function is executed by setting a CNC screen number with the screen
number notification signal and turning on the change signal.
Please refer to “B. CNC screen number list” of the appendix for the number allocated to the screen
on the CNC side.
In the screen number notification function when the CNC screen call is done, 0 is notified while
displaying CNC.
Change Signal Area:
Specify the type of PMC address for the change signal.
The change signal is an input signal used for switching between the screens to be automatically
called.
0 : Custom screen created with FANUC PICTURE
1 : CNC screen
Change Signal Address:
Specify the address of the change signal.
Change Signal Bit:
The screen number notification is used:
Check this check box to use the function by which the touch panel operator’s panel reports the
number of the currently displayed screen to the PMC.
0 is set in the notification area while displaying the CNC screen.
Signal Area(Screen number notification function):
Specify the 2-byte interface area to which the screen number is to be written that is used when the
touch panel operator’s panel is to report the number of the currently displayed screen to the PMC.
For this item, specify the type of the PMC address of the area.
Signal Address(Screen number notification function):
Specify the address of the screen number report interface area.
- 60 -
Use the error notification signal:
Check this item when using the error notification function.
When this function is enabled, an error can be posted to the PMC if automatic screen calling is not
performed correctly.
Error Notice Signal Area:
Specify the type of PMC address for the error notification signal.
The error notification signal is an output signal (bit) that posts an error if automatic screen calling is
not performed correctly.
Error Notice Signal Address:
Specify the address of the error notification signal.
Error Notice Signal Bit:
Specify the bit position, from 0 to 7, of the error notification signal.
Request and completion signals are controlled by reversing them to 0 and 1. If the exclusive logical sum of the
signals is 1, the touch panel operator’s panel assumes that it has received a screen call request, and executes a
screen call process. The PMC can set up a screen call if the exclusive logic sum is 0.
• Screen call & notification sequence
Screen number 10 is set in the screen number. 11 is set in the screen number.
Request signal is reversed. Request signal is reversed.

Request signal
500ms or more 500ms or more
Completion signal
Screen switch No.10 No.11

operation
Screen number Screen number before Screen number 10 Screen number 11

notification output
- 61 -
(2) Display Number Setting
Using the function for automatically calling screens from the PMC or the function for reporting the
number of the screen currently displayed on the touch panel operator’s panel requires that screen numbers
be allocated to automatically listed base screen form names. This dialog box is used to set such screen
numbers. Screen numbers 1 to 65535 can be allocated.
Screen numbers have different meanings depending on the function, as described in the table below.
Screen number Automatic call screen Screen number notification function

0 Ignored. Numberless or NC screen
The base screen corresponding to the number The currently displayed base screen number
1 to 65535
is displayed. is reported.
By using the Auto Set button, you can specify the screen number to be allocated to form name 1 so that
consecutive numbers incrementing by +1 are automatically set for the subsequent form names.
- 62 -
(3) Each Display Setting
This menu item allows you to specify whether to free memory for those screens that cannot be set using
the screen structure definition control. It does not allow you to change the specification as to whether to
free memory for those screens that have been set using the screen structure definition control.
If the same screen has been set differently using the screen structure definition control, the system
assumes that memory should be freed.
Form Name:
Displays the names of all created screens.
Free Memory:
Specify whether to free memory.
For an explanation of the memory freeing function, see Subsection 2.3.3, “Screen Structure
Definition Control.”
0: Does not free memory.
The display speed increases at the second display and later.
1: Frees memory.
Frees the memory area containing screen data when the screen is closed. This allows efficient
use of the memory area.
- 63 -
(4) Signal Display/OP ratio
The signal display function displays signal information set in the button control (Only the one that the
shortcut key is defined can be displayed for non-touch panel display unit) and the lamp control (The lamp
cannot be displayed for non-touch panel display unit) while displaying the screen made with FANUC
PICTURE in CNC.
The signal set in ‘The signal display is used’is turned on, and the control on the custom screen is
displayed to following signal information while the operator is touching (The MDI key is operated for
non-touch panel display unit).
Moreover, the touched control does not operate when the signal set in ‘The operation is invalidated’is
turned on at the same time and only the signal display is done. When this signal is turned on, the screen
switch button operation is not done. Therefore, it is not possible to switch from the operation panel screen
to other screens including the CNC screen. Please install the switch of this signal outside or make the
ladder such as turning off this signal automatically when the fixed time passes by the timer for this
measures.
The signal display is used :

Check this check box to use the function for Signal display.
Change Signal Area:
Specify the type of the PMC address of the change signal which displays pop-up window to display
signal.
Specify the address type of the change signal.
Change Signal Bit:
Specify the bit position of the change signal above by using a number 0 to 7.
- 64 -
The operation is invalidated :
When the function that the action of the button control is not executed is used, the check box is
checked.
Change Signal Area:
Specify the type of the PMC address of the change signal not to execute action of button control.
Specify the address type of the change signal not to execute action of button control.
Change Signal Bit:
Specify the bit position of the change signal above by using a number 0 to 7.
The operation ratio change function displaying the custom screen is used.:
This function setting is valid for Series 0i-C, Series 16i/18i/21i and Power Mate i.
If the RS232C-based ladder online monitor function and external device I/O control are used when a
custom screen created with FANUC PICTURE is displayed, these operations abruptly slow down.
This is because the same task is used for screen display and the CNC functions mentioned above, so
processing time allocated per unit time is reduced, thus increasing the time required to complete
processing.
With FANUC PICTURE, the ratio of (custom screen operation:CNC function operation) =
(80%:20%) is used by default.
The operation ratio change function enables the operation ratio to be dynamically changed by a
PMC ladder according to the status of the CNC.
Check this box to use this function. When this box is checked, the dark display of the following
input items disappears:
Interface area for operation ratio change
Signal Area, Signal Address:
Specify a one-byte PMC area signal used under the following configuration for the interface signal
area for operation ratio change:
• Configuration of the interface area for operation ratio change

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Custom screen By using seven bits from #0 to #6, specify the operation time ratio between the display of custom
ratio change screens created with FANUC PICTURE and the processing of the CNC functions. Specify a
request signal binary value from 0% to 99% as a ratio of time to be allocated to custom screen display.
<1> Set the ratio of custom screen operation (#6-#0) with a PMC ladder, then turn on bit #7 “custom
screen ratio change request signal”.
<2> The custom screen side monitors the request signal bit. When the request signal bit is turned on, the
custom screen side reads the ratio (%) to change the screen display processing time so that the time
ratio is changed in steps of 20%, not exceeding the upper limit 80%.
<3> When the request signal bit from the PMC is turned off, the setting is returned to the default (80%).
- 65 -
NOTE
The table below indicates the correspondence between a specified percentage
and a ratio actually set.
Percentage specified from PMC

Ratio actually set
(#6-#0)
0 80%
1-20 20%
21-40 40%
41-60 60%
61-80 80%
81 or more 80%
WARNING
If the operation ratio for custom screen display is reduced, screen display and
response to touch operations such as screen switching and button signal output
slow down. So, if such a slowdown is disadvantageous to a machine operation,
take proper actions such as changing the operation ratio with a ladder and
stopping the affected machine operation or ensuring interlock.
(5) Buzzer Signal Setting
If a touch operation is performed while a custom screen created with FANUC PICTURE is displayed, the
touch operation can be output to the PMC signal area. With this output signal, for example, the external
buzzer can be sounded. However, this signal is not posted when a screen provided by the system on the
CNC or PMC side is displayed.
- 66 -
The buzzer signal is used.:
Check this box to use the function for posting a touch operation to the PMC signal area.
Buzzer Signal Area:
Buzzer Signal Address:
Buzzer Signal Bit:
Specify the type, address, and bit position of a PMC signal area to be used for the touch operation
notification signal mentioned above.
2.2.10.5 Automatic screen call function based on the PMC signals

The automatic screen call function based on the PMC signals switches the screen display to the FANUC
PICTURE custom screen (hereinafter referred to as the FP screen) or CNC screen automatically based on
the PMC signals.
NOTE
Starting with Edition 1.22, automatic screen call is possible in the state where the
CNC screen is displayed.
Signal setting for automatic screen call

The "option function details setting" dialog box is used to set a request signal, completion signal, screen
number setting screen, switching screen, screen number notification screen, and error notification signal
used for automatic screen call.
For the specification and setting method of each signal, see "(1) Automatic screen call setting" in
Subsection 2.2.10.4, "Option function details setting".
Automatic screen calling procedure

Automatic screen calling can be performed when the exclusive OR of the request signal and completion
signal is 0 (when both signals are on or off).
When the exclusive OR of the request signal and completion signal is 0, an automatic screen call request
is being awaited. In this state, automatic screen calling can be performed.
When the exclusive OR of the request signal and completion signal is 1, automatic screen calling is being
requested. Until completion of the current automatic screen calling being executed, the next automatic
screen calling cannot be performed.
NOTE
When automatic screen calling is being requested (when the exclusive OR of the
request signal and completion signal is 1), do not perform the next automatic
screen calling.
Procedure for automatic calling of a parent screen

In the automatic screen calling request wait state:
<1> Set the screen number of a parent screen to be called, with the screen number setting signal.
<2> Turn off the change signal.
<3> Invert the request signal.
Procedure for automatic calling of a CNC screen

In the automatic screen call request wait state:
<1> Set the screen number of a CNC screen to be called, with the screen number setting signal.
<2> Turn on the change signal.
<3> Invert the request signal.
- 67 -
When the request signal is inverted to set the automatic screen calling state, the FANUC PICTURE driver
starts automatic screen call processing.
Upon completion of automatic screen call processing, the FANUC PICTURE driver inverts the
completion signal to set the state waiting for the next automatic screen call request.
If the requested screen number (screen number set with the screen number setting signal) is incorrect, the
following dialog box is displayed and the error notification signal is output:
Touching the [OK] button or pushing the [DELETE] key erases the dialog box and ends automatic screen
calling. (The completion signal is inverted to set the state waiting for the next automatic screen call
request.)
The error notification signal is reset when the next automatic screen call request is made.
Automatic screen calling from the CNC screen

To enable automatic screen calling in the state where the CNC screen is displayed (hereinafter referred to
as automatic screen calling from the CNC screen), a value other than 0 must be set in FP parameter No. 7,
"Time-out period for automatic screen calling from the CNC screen".
When 0 is set, automatic screen calling from the CNC screen is disabled.
For the specification of FP parameter No. 7, see "Explanation of FP parameters" in Subsection 2.2.10.6,
"FP PARAMETER SETTING screen".
If the screen display is not switched to a requested screen even when the time-out period set in the FP
parameter has elapsed after a request for automatic screen calling from the CNC is issued, the error
notification signal is output to cancel the request for automatic screen calling. (The completion signal is
inverted to enter the state waiting for the next request for automatic screen calling.)
CAUTION
If automatic screen calling from the CNC screen is enabled (a value other than 0
is set in FP parameter No. 7), only one user screen can be registered with a soft
key on the CNC screen at the time of MEM file creation.
If an attempt is made to create a MEM file when multiple user screens are
registered with soft keys on the CNC screen, the following error dialog box
appears, and no MEM file is created:
- 68 -
2.2.10.6 FP-PARAMETER SETTING screen

When the operator’s panel screen created in FANUC PICTURE is displayed on the CNC, each type of
control can operate in a different way. The operations can be controlled by setting the parameters on the
[FP-PARAMETER SETTING] screen. To display the [FP-PARAMETER SETTING] screen, click the
FP-PARAM button on the [Making memory card file] screen that can be displayed from the [Make MEM
File…] menu.
The [FP-PARAMETER SETTING] screen is shown below.
On this screen, the parameter number, parameter name, and current settings are displayed. To change a
parameter value, move the cursor to the [SETTING] field next to the desired parameter and then enter a
new value.
OK Button
To save the parameters specified on the [FP-PARAMETER SETTING] screen and then exit the
screen, click the OK button.
Cancel button
To clear the parameters specified on the [FP-PARAMETER SETTING] screen and then exit the
screen, click the [Cancel] button.
- 69 -
Explain button
To display the [FP-PARAMETER Explain] dialog box for the parameter which the cursor points to,
click the Explain button. To see a description of another parameter, move the cursor to the parameter
and then click the Explain button.
To close the [FP-PARAMETER Explain] dialog box, click the OK button.
Explanation of FP parameters
Protection against inadvertent clicking of [KEYCLR] for [INPUT] or vice versa on
FP parameter No. 1
the pop-up ten-key pad
[Function] This parameter enables the function for protection against inadvertent clicking
of [KEYCLR] for [INPUT] or vice versa on the pop-up ten-key pad.
[Explanation] When [INPUT] on the pop-up ten-key pad is clicked:
0 : The value of NEWDATA is written as conventionally done.
1 : The same operation (pop-up ten-key pad erasure) as for [KEYCLR] is
performed if no input is made through the numeric keys.
FP parameter No. 2 Calculator-type numeric input method of the pop-up ten-key pad
[Function] This parameter switches the numeric input method of the pop-up ten-key pad.
[Explanation] The numeric input method of the pop-up ten-key pad for PMC area data is:
0 : Conventional method (A numeric value up to the specified number of
decimal places needs to be input.)
1 : Calculator-type numeric input method (A fraction is input up to the
significant number of decimal places.)
When this parameter is setting to 0 (conventional method), the number of
decimal places specified for data needs to be input even if 0 is set in those
decimal places.
- 70 -
FP parameter No. 3 Screen switching rule

This parameter is available only for Series 0i-C, Series 16i/18i/21i and
Power Mate i.
[Function] Function 1 :
The switching operation between the FANUC PICTURE screen and the
CNC screen can be selected.
Function 2 :
The operation when the [CUSTOM/GRAPH] key is pressed just after
start-up can be selected. (Supported with Edition 04.0 or later)
* The function 2 can not be used with Power Mate i.
[Explanation] Function 1 :
The switching operation between the FANUC PICTURE screen and the
CNC screen by the function key or the screen switch control,
0 : Follow the switching rule between CNC screens
The screen is switched like the switching between CNC screens by the
function key.
This switching operation is always effective for Series 30i/31i/32i/35i,
Series 0i-D and Power Motion i-A.
Example)
If the FP screen is registered on [REL] screen, the screen is switched
as follows by pressing the function key [POS].
[ABS] -> FP screen([REL]) -> [ALL] -> [ABS]
1 : Follow the conventional switching rule
The screen is switched to the CNC screen most recently displayed in
the screen classification of the destination CNC screen.
Example)
If the FP screen is registered on [REL] screen, the screen is switched
as follows by pressing the function key [POS].
[ABS] -> FP screen([REL]) -> [ABS]
For Series 0i-C, always set 0.
When the multi C language executor function is enabled with Series
16i/18i/21i-B, always set 0.
Function 2 :
When [CUSTOM/GRAPH] key is pressed on the FANUC PICTURE
screen just after start-up,
10 : Switch to the macro executer screen
20 : Switch to the graphic screen
Set the value in which the settings of the function 1 and 2 are added to this
parameter.
FP parameter No. 4 Rule for switching the screen when an NC alarm is issued
[Function] This parameter switches the screen switching rule applicable when an NC alarm
is issued.
[Explanation] When an NC alarm is issued:
0 : The screen display is switched to the alarm screen according to bit 7 of
parameter No. 3111.
1 : The screen display is not switched.
FP parameter No. 5 Simultaneous multi-button operation execution function

[Function] The simultaneous multi-button operation execution function is a function for
executing, by a single-touch operation, all of the multiple buttons superposed
one over another at the same location. This FP parameter enables this function.
- 71 -
[Explanation] The simultaneous multi-button operation execution function is:

0 : Disabled.
1 : Enabled.
Create a screen according to the normal screen creation procedure then
superpose operation buttons to be executed in succession one over another.This
function is applicable to the button controls, screen switch control, framed
button controls, MDI keyboard controls, and MDI key controls. Other controls,
even if placed, are ignored. However, when controls unusable with this function
are superposed one over another on the rearmost plane, only the control on the
rearmost plane can be executed.
· This function cannot be enabled or disabled either on a control-by-control
basis or on a screen-by-screen basis. The order of operation button
execution is the order of control pasting on the screen (sequentially from
the rearmost plane). If controls are superposed one over another in a screen
configuration including child screens, the controls are executed in the
order: parent screen → child screen 1 → child screen 2 → child screen
3 → child screen 4 → child screen 5 → child screen 6 → child screen
7 → child screen 8 → child screen 9 → child screen 10.
· If controls superposed one over another include a control related to screen
switching (for calling a parent screen, calling a child screen, calling a
pop-up screen, erasing a pop-up screen, or calling an NC screen), the
controls after that control (controls placed over that control) are not
executed.
· If one shortcut is assigned to multiple groups of multi-button operations,
the multi-button operations of only one group (the first detected
multi-button operation group) are executed.
· Even if controls to which different shortcuts are assigned are placed, all
controls are executed.
· If the signal display function is enabled, information about only the first
control executed is displayed.
· If an external interrupt such as automatic screen calling, alarm screen
calling when an NC alarm is issued, NC screen calling when the CNC
screen display function is connected, or redisplay when the display link
indicator is detachable (including a communication error) during
multi-button operation execution, all operation buttons are executed before
interrupt processing is executed.
· During multi-button operation execution, another touch action or MDI key
input operation, even if performed, is ignored.
· If placed controls include a control for which interlock is set, the control is
interlocked and the other controls continue to be executed.
· Successive execution of controls is started when the first control is
released.
· Buzzer sound and the buzzer signal in superpose processing are activated
only for the first time.
FP parameter No. 6 D-RAM capacity saving function

This parameter is available only for Series 0i-D, Series 30i/31i/32i/35i and
Power Motion i-A.
[Function] This parameter enables the D-RAM capacity saving function. When this
function is enabled, screen display slightly slows down, but more screens can be
created in the NC.
[Explanation] The D-RAM capacity saving function is:
0 : Disabled.
1 : Enabled.
- 72 -
FP parameter No. 7 Time-out period for automatic screen calling from the CNC screen (seconds)
[Unit of data] Second
[Valid data range] 1 to 127, or 0
[Explanation] This parameter sets an execution time-out period applicable when automatic
screen calling is performed during CNC screen display. For details, see
Subsection 2.2.10.5, "Automatic screen call function based on the PMC
signals".
FP parameter No. 8 Function for pop-up screen erasure from the PMC
[Function] This parameter enables a function that can erase the currently displayed pop-up
screen and return the screen display to the screen one level lower when pop-up
screen erasure is specified from the PMC.
[Explanation] In automatic screen calling from the PMC:
0 : The function for pop-up screen erasure from the PMC is not used.
1 : The currently displayed pop-up screen is erased when the same screen
number as that of the currently displayed pop-up screen is specified.
Only those pop-up screens that are created by the user can be erased. The
pop-up ten-key pad and pop-up screens for error notification and so forth
displayed by the FANUC PICTURE driver cannot be erased.
FP parameter NO.9 Condition written by INPUT/INSERT of control with input

[Function] This parameter can specify a write condition for INPUT/INSERT operation of a
control with input.
[Explanation] Writing by INPUT/INSERT operation of a control with input is:
0 : Based on the conventional specifications.
Writing is not performed when the read value is the same as the write
value.
1 : Performed at all times.
Writing is performed at all times by INPUT/INSERT operation of a
control with input.In writing by the PMC area character string indication
control, an INPUT operation with no character held in the key-in buffer
writes 0x00 (Null code) at the start of the character string area.
Accordingly, no character is displayed in the character string display
area.
FP parameter NO.10 Power-on trace display

(Supported with Edition 03.0 or later)
[Function] This parameter can be set to display the progress of FP driver processing at
power-on when nothing is displayed on the screen after power-on.
[Explanation] Start-up trace at power-on is:
0: Not performed.
1: Performed.
FP parameter NO.11 F-ROM data compression

Power Motion i-A.
[Function] This parameter enables the F-ROM capacity compression function. This function
can be enabled to store more screens in the F-ROM.
[Explanation] F-ROM data is:
0: Not compressed.
1: Compressed.
• When this function is enabled, screen switching slightly slows down.
- 73 -
• JPEG files cannot be compressed because they have already been

compressed. For this reason, this function may not have much effect on
screen data containing a large number of JPEG images.
FP parameter NO.12 Avoidance of competition with dynamic graphic

This parameter is available only for Series 16i/18i/21i.
[Function] When FANUC PICTURE and the dynamic graphic display function are used
simultaneously, part of FANUC PICTURE may be displayed in the dynamic
graphic display screen. This parameter can be set to avoid this symptom.
Note that a ten-key pad or pop-up screen is displayed more slowly by several
seconds, however.
[Explanation] Competition with dynamic graphic is:
0: Not avoided.
1: Avoided.
FP parameter NO.13 Round operation of display variable DISP_VAL in the FP script

[Function] This parameter rounds the display variable DISP_VAL in the FP script when
displaying a screen.
[Explanation] DISP_VAL in the FP script is
0 : Not rounded
1 : Rounded
FP parameter NO.14 Cursor display after erasing the pop-up ten-key pad
[Function] In the numeral indication control for calling a ten-key pad, the cursor display
can be selected after erasing the pop-up ten-key pad by the KEYCLR button .
[Explanation] After erasing the pop-up ten-key pad by the KEYCLR button, the cursor is:
0 : displayed.
1 : not displayed.
[Attention] Even if this parameter is 1, the cursor is displayed after erasing the pop-up
ten-key pad in the following cases.
• When the pop-up ten-key pad is shown by a key for calling a pop-up
screen
• When the pop-up ten-key pad is shown by the continuous input function
FP parameter NO.15 Handling of empty macro variable

[Function] The handling of an empty macro variable can be selected.
[Explanation] An empty macro variable is handled as
0 : zero.
1 : blank.
When this parameter is 1, the blank is displayed if an empty macro variable is

read by the FP function, rdmacro or rdprmacro.
Moreover, the macro variable becomes empty by the FP function, wrmacro or
wrpmacro if the INPUT key or the INSERT key is pressed without the input
data in the key input buffer control.
For the FP script, “NaN”(Not aNumber) is obtained if an empty macro variable

is read by the FP function, rdmacro or rdprmacro. The blank is displayed by
setting “NaN” to the display variable DISP_VAL.
- 74 -
Moreover, the input variable INPUT_DVAL becomes “NaN” if the INPUT key
or the INSERT key is pressed without the input data in the key input buffer
control.
The macro variable becomes empty by writing “NaN” to the macro variable by
the FP function, wrmacro or wrpmacro.
If “NaN” is used to calculate, the whole CNC system including FANUC
PCITURE is stopped.
After confirming the read macro variable is not “NaN” by the FP function isnan,
use it to calculate.
[Attention] Even if this parameter is 1, a macro variable cannot be emptied by the numeral
indication control for calling a ten-key pad.
FP parameter NO.16 Optimization of the PMC data transfer range

Power Motion i-A.
[Function] The transfer range of the PMC data used on the custom screens is optimized, and
the display of custom screen can speed up.
[Explanation] The transfer range of the PMC data is
0: Not optimized.
1: Optimized.
- 75 -
2.2.11 Write to Card

Using the procedure described below, operator’s panel screen data (such as FPF0FPDT.MEM or
CEX0FPDT.MEM) and the FP driver are copied to the memory card.
Clicking Output MEM File on the menu displays the Write to card dialog box.
The file name, creation date, and memory size of operator’s panel screen data created with Make MEM
are displayed.
In the Transfer Place edit box, specify a screen data transfer destination (copy destination). In this case,
the memory card drive must always be specified. When screen data is to be transferred from the memory
card to the F-ROM of the CNC, MEM data must be copied to the root directory of the memory card drive.
In the File name field, enter a desired file name at a location where a transfer destination file name is
arbitrarily specified. This file name is a name used for file management by Windows and is not a file
name on the F-ROM. The name FPF0FPDT or CEX0FPDT is assigned to this file.
In usual card write operation, screen data only is copied. However, when screen data is initially written to
the CNC, or FANUC PICTURE is upgraded, however, the FP driver data also needs to be copied. In this
case, check a check box for transfer to the driver system.
By clicking OK button, the FP driver corresponding to the CNC system selected at [Setting of project]
dialog box is copied into the transfer destination with the screen data file.
CNC system File name of FP driver

30i/31i/32i -A/B, 35i-B BY27.mem
0i /0i Mate-D DY61.mem
Power Motion i-A 889K.mem
0i-C DY60.mem
16i/18i/21i -A/B BY17.mem
Power Mate i-H BY18.mem
Power Mate i-D BY19.mem
* If you use the multi C language executor function with Series 16i/18i/21i-B, use BY28.mem that exists
in “Driver” folder under the installation folder of FANUC PICTURE instead of BY17.mem.
FP driver: Short for FANUC PICTURE driver. The operation of the driver is displayed on the LCD with a touch
panel on the CNC by analyzing touch panel screen data created on the personal computer.
- 76 -
Download from the memory card to F-ROM of the CNC

Operator’s panel data (FPF0FPDT.MEM or CEX0FPDT.MEM) or the FP driver can be downloaded to
the F-ROM of the CNC by using the boot function of the CNC.
For the method of activating the boot function, refer to the relevant manual of each CNC system.
Example:
If no MDI unit is attached, turn on the power while holding the upper-left corner of the panel to
activate the boot function software; if an MDI unit is attached, turn on the power while holding
down the [7] and [6] keys on the ten-key pad to activate it.
2.2.12 Composite Forms

A base(main/parent) screen and sub(child) screens created separately from each other at the time of
custom screen editing are composited on the personal computer into an image to be displayed on the
CNC.
With the menu item Composite Forms, these partial screens can be composited so that the same screen
structure as the entire screen displayed on the machine operator’s panel can be checked on the personal
computer.
Click the Composite Screens… button on the menu. The dialog box shown below appears.
Clicking the [Base] pull-down list box displays a list of screens that make up the machine operator’s
panel.
- 77 -
The screen names serve as the names for screens created under a project. If the screen switch button can
be used for switching from one sub(child) screen to another, the pull-down list box on a screen indicates a
list of screens as with the base screen. From these combo boxes, select a desired screen composite
structure then click the Indicate button.
2.2.12.1 Saving the bit map of the active screen form

Click [File]- Screen bitmap on the menu bar to save the bit map of the currently active screen form to a
file.
Screen bitmap appears on the menu when there is an active screen form.
2.2.13 Collective screen bitmap output function

The collective screen bitmap output function converts custom screens created using FANUC PICTURE
into bitmap files and outputs the files to a disk on a personal computer at a time. This function enables
screen bitmap file creation work such as creation of a manual or sales expansion document to be done
efficiently.
- 78 -
Disk
File output
Screen Bitmap Output Tool Bitmap files
The screen bitmap output tool can output the following files to a disk:
1. Bitmap file of a created screen
2. Bitmap file of a “composite screen” on which multiple created screens are composited
3. Text file in which the settings for each screen component used for a screen output after converted
to a bitmap file are written
Starting the screen bitmap output tool

To start the screen bitmap output tool, choose [Project]-[Output Screen Bitmap] on the FANUC
PICTURE menu bar.
Terminating the screen bitmap output tool

To terminate the screen bitmap output tool, choose [File]-[Close] on the menu bar or click the close
button .
- 79 -
Structure of the screen of the screen bitmap output tool

The following figure shows the structure of the screen of the screen bitmap output tool.
Menu Bar
Tool bar
Thumbnail image
List display area
Selection check box
List display area

Displays a list of all screen forms created with a project.
Thumbnail image
Displays a reduced image of each screen form.
Selection check box
To select a screen form to be output, check the corresponding check box.
Menu bar and tool bar
The following table lists each item and its function.
Item in the main menu Shortcut Icon in the Chapter of

Functions
Sub menu key tool bar explanation
[File]
Outputs the bitmap files of selected
screens and text files in which the
Output Files… settings for each screen component is 2.2.13.3
written to a folder in a personal
computer.
Delete Delete Deletes a selected composite screen.
Rename F2 Renames a selected composite screen.
Terminates the screen bitmap output
Close Alt + F4 2.2.13
tool.
[Edit]
Registers a selected screen to the
Composite Ctrl + I 2.2.13.2
composite palette.
Select All Ctrl + A Selects all thumbnail images
[Edit]
Exchanges the selected thumbnail
Invert Selection images and the unselected with each
other.
Checks the check boxes corresponding
Check On
Space to the selected screens.
Unchecks the check boxes
Check Off
corresponding to the selected screens.
- 80 -
Item in the main menu Shortcut Icon in the Chapter of

Functions
Sub menu key tool bar explanation
[View]
Chooses whether to display or hide the
Composite Palette
composite palette.
Zoom Enter Zooms the selected thumbnail image. 2.2.13.1
Thumbnails Size Changes the size of thumbnail images.
1 Small Changes the size to small.
2.2.13.1
2 Midium Changes the size to medium.
3 Large Changes the size to large.
[Options]
Displays the Property List Settings
Property List Settings… dialog box for selecting the property 2.2.13.3
types to be output to the property list.
Selects the language used for outputting
Properties Language
the property list.
Changes the output language to
1 English 2.2.13.4
English.
Changes the output language to
2 Japanese
Japanese.
Operation procedure for the screen bitmap output tool

By using the procedure below, a screen form created using FANUC PICTURE can be output as a bitmap
image file.
(1) Click and check the selection check box at the lower left of the thumbnail image of a screen to be
output as a bitmap file.
NOTE
The status of each selection check box remains when the screen bitmap output
tool is started next time.
(2) Click [File]-[Output Files] on the menu bar. The following Output Files dialog box appears.
- 81 -
(3) Click the ... button to display the Browse for Folder dialog box.
(4) Select the folder to which to output the file, then click the OK button. The output folder is set.
(5) Click the OK button. The bitmap file is output to the output folder. The name of the bitmap file is
(screen-name).BMP. When the output folder contains a file having the same name, the file is always
overwritten.
NOTE
Clicking the Cancel button closes the Output Files dialog without outputting the
file. The setting in the Output Files dialog box remains when the dialog box is
displayed next time.
2.2.13.1 Thumbnail Display

Thumbnail image display size
The display size of thumbnail images can be selected by clicking [View]-[Thumbnails Size] on the menu
bar.
Small Medium Large
- 82 -
Zooming a thumbnail image

Double-clicking a thumbnail image zooms the image to fit it into the screen bitmap output tool window.
Menu bar
Tool bar
The following table lists each item and its function on the menu bar displayed when an image is zoomed.
Item in the main menu Shortcut Icon in the
Functions
Sub menu key tool bar
[View]
←
Previous Screen Displays the image on the previous screen.
↓
→
Next Screen Displays the image on the next screen.
↑
Backspace Returns to the original reduced display from the
Zoom Out
Esc zoomed one.
Close Alt + F4 Terminates the screen bitmap output tool.
2.2.13.2 Screen composite function

Composite palette
A composite screen is displayed in the “composite palette”. Choose [View]-[Composite Palette] to
display the “composite palette” as shown below.
List display area
List display switch tab

Composite palette
List display area

Displays a list of all screen forms created with a project.
Composite palette
Displays a list of created composite screens.
In this area, create a composite screen to be output as a bitmap file with a parent screen registered as
a base of the composite screen.
- 83 -
List display switch tab

Changes screens displayed in the above list display area. When the composite palette is displayed,
these tabs are displayed at the bottom of the list display area.
Choosing each tab changes the list display area as follows:
All : Displays all screens.
Base Screen : Displays only parent screens.
Sub Screen : Displays all child screens that can be specified for the screen selected in the
composite palette.
CAUTION
When the Base Screen or Sub Screen tab is chosen, the selection check box for
selecting files to be output is not displayed.
Compositing screens in the composite palette

By using the procedure below, screens can be composited:
(1) Choose list display switch tab Base Screen to display a list of parent screens.
(2) Select one of the listed parent screens, then drag and drop it into the composite palette. This parent
screen is registered as a new composite screen to the composite palette.
Drag and drop
Base Screen tab
CAUTION
When there is no parent screen, no composite screen can be registered.
(3) Immediately after a screen is registered in the composite palette, an input cursor is displayed in the
name field. Enter the name of the screen and press the [Enter] key. This name is used as the file
name when the relevant bitmap file is output.
Enter the name of the bitmap file.
- 84 -
(4) Click the registered screen, then choose the Sub Screen1 tab in the list display area.
Click the screen.
Choose the Sub Screen1 tab.
(5) Drag and drop a child screen to be composited into the composite palette. The screen in which the
parent screen and child screen 1 are composited is displayed in the composite palette.
Drag and drop
Composite
(6) For Sub Screen2 to Sub Screen10, perform operation in the same way as in steps <4> and <5> above
to composite screens.
* If you want to register and create another composite screen into the composite palette, select a parent
screen again and perform steps <1> to <6>.
CAUTION
As a child screen to be composited, only one screen can be selected from the
list on each of Sub Screen1 to Sub Screen10.
When a child screen is already composited, dragging and dropping another child
screen in the same Sub Screen list as for the child screen replaces the child
screen with another one.
Once a child screen is composited on a Sub Screen tab, the setting cannot be
cleared. Delete the composite screen in the composite palette and composite
screens again.
Outputting bitmap files

By using the procedure below, the bitmap file for a composite screen can be output:
(1) To output the bitmap file for a composite screen, click and check the selection check box at the
lower left of a target composite screen.
- 85 -
(2) Using the Output Files dialog box explained in “Operation procedure for the screen bitmap output
tool” above, output the bitmap file.
2.2.13.3 Outputting a property list file

This subsection explains how to output a text file in which the setting (property value) of each screen
component (control) used for the screen of an output bitmap file is written as data attached to the bitmap
file.
Format of a property list file

A text file in which the property value of each control is written is output in the CSV format (with each
property value delimited by a tab character). This file is called a “property list file” below.
Example of outputting a property list file
Title Screen Name > Control Name > Object ID > Display Caption ↓
Property Parent0 > Label > FPLabel1 > FUNCTION/MEM ↓
setting Child0 > Lamp > FPLamp1 > Operation\nPrepare ↓
* “>“ indicates a tab character and “↓” indicates a line feed.
An output file consists of titles in line 1 and property values in the subsequent lines. Preceding a property
value, the relevant screen name and control name are always output.
Set the types of properties to be output, use the following procedure
Selecting the types of properties

To select properties to be output to a property list file, use the Property List Settings dialog box. Choose
[Options]-[Property List Settings] on the menu bar to display the Property List Settings dialog box.
Title input area
Control name display area
Property type selection area
Title input area

Input titles to be output at the top of a property list file.
Control name display area
Displays control names to be output at the beginning of each line of the property list file (data in this
area cannot be edited).
Property type selection area
Select the types of properties to be output to the property list file.
By using the procedure below, select the types of properties to be output to a property list file:
- 86 -
(1) Clicking the title input area at the top displays an input cursor. Enter the title and press the [Enter]
key.
(2) In the property type selection area, click a cell for inputting a type of property to be output to the
property list file, then right-click or press the [Enter] key.
The following pop-up menu appears, which lists the types of properties that can be output to a
property list file.
NOTE
The property items in the pop-up menu are the same as those that can be set
with the FANUC PICTURE overall edit function. For details, see Subsection
2.2.14, “Overall Edit Function”.
(3) Select a type of property from the menu. The selected property is input into the cell.
(4) Repeat steps (1) to (3) to input required titles and property types.
(5) Clicking the OK button saves the input data and terminates the Property List Settings dialog box.
CAUTION
If you want to terminate the Property List Settings dialog box without saving the
input data, click the [Cancel] button.
For an item for which the property type is left blank, a blank is output to the item
in the property list file. For a control for which all property types are left blank, no
data corresponding to the control is output to the property list file.
- 87 -
Output files
Click [File]-[Output Files] on the menu bar to display the Output Files dialog box. Click and check the
Output property lists check box below.
CAUTION
When at least one property type to be output is selected in the property type
selection area,
the Output property lists dialog box is enabled.
Click the OK button. The property list file is output to the output folder together with the bitmap file for
the screen.
The name of the property list file is (screen-name).CSV. When the output folder contains a file having the
same name, the file is always overwritten.
2.2.13.4 Setting the output language

This subsection explains the method for changing the language used for the screen to be output to a
bitmap file and the method for changing the language used for the output property list file when the
multi-language display function is enabled.
NOTE
For the multi-language display function, see Subsection 2.2.8.2, “Setting of
multi-language”.
Setting the output language for a bitmap file

When the multi-language display function is enabled, select the output language for a bitmap file before
starting the screen bitmap output tool.
To select a language, choose [Project]-[Option] on the FANUC PICTURE menu bar to display the
following dialog box:
Bitmap language key:

A language used for a screen to be output to a bitmap file can be selected. In the combo box,
multi-language keys set in the FANUC PICTURE Setting of project dialog box are displayed.
- 88 -
After selecting a language, click the OK or Apply button to reflect the change.
NOTE
For [Setting of project] dialog box and language keys, see Subsection 2.2.8.2,
“Setting of multi-language”.
Setting the output language for a property list file

Select an output language for a property list file on the menu displayed by choosing [Options]-[Properties
Language] on the menu bar of the screen bitmap output tool.
Example of a property list file for each property output language

Screen Name > Control Name > Object ID > Switch Type ↓
English
Parent0 > Button > FPButton1 > Momentary ↓
画面名 > コントロール名 > オブジェクト ID > スイッチタイプ ↓

Japanese
Parent0 > ボタン > FPButton1 > Momentary ↓
* “>“ indicates a tab character and “↓” indicates a line feed.
CAUTION
Titles must be input in line 1 in the property list file for each language. When a
title is not input for a language, the relevant title field is left blank in the output
property list file.
- 89 -
2.2.14 Overall Edit Function

The overall edit function can extract and display, as a list in a dedicated dialog box, the properties of
setting items, such as figure, color, operation specification, and caption characters, of individual screen
constituent controls such as buttons and lamps that are placed on multiple screens. Thus, with the function,
a particular property item extracted across multiple controls and screens can be collected for editing.
The overall edit function can improve performance in editing, for example, when one property item of
multi controls, such as the turn-on color of all lamps or the output signal of all buttons, is changed in a
batch after completion of screen creation.
- 90 -
2.2.14.1 Overall edit menu

Choosing [Project]−[Overall editor] on the menu bar provides a function for editing a particular property
item of controls in a batch. With the all-property overall edit function provided by choosing [Overall
editor]−[All Properties], only a property item to be edited can be extracted and displayed as a list for
efficient editing.
With the multi-language caption overall edit function provided by choosing [Overall
editor]−[Multi-language Caption], an easy-to-edit spreadsheet dedicated to multi-language caption
character strings is produced for efficient editing.
Choosing [All Properties] or [Multi-language Caption] on the menu displays the dialog box shown below.
[Overall editor] − [All Properties] Property edit function screen
Overall edit list display

section
- 91 -
[Overall editor] − [Multi-language Caption] edit function screen
Multi-language caption
display section
2.2.14.2 Overall edit function for all properties

With the all-property overall edit function provided by choosing [Overall editor]−[All Properties], an
overall edit list is created to display only a particular property extracted across all screens of a project. On
the overall edit list screen, those extracted property items can be edited. Furthermore, a function for
changing the values of selected multiple property items in a batch is available.
This means that with the all-property overall edit function, a list of the same properties extracted across
different screens and controls can be displayed at a time for editing. So, a dramatic improvement in
efficiency can be made when multiple properties are edited.
- 92 -
When the function provided by choosing [Project]−[Overall editor]−[All Properties] from the menu is
selected, the overall edit dialog box for editing properties in a batch is displayed.
On the overall edit list, the focus can be placed on

only one item for editing. Overall edit list display
Moreover, multiple editing target values can be section
chosen with the mouse, and can be edited in a batch
by using the overall conversion function provided by
the Replace button.
Procedure for all-property overall edit operation

1) In accordance with the dialog box activated by the Extract item properties… button at the top of the
screen, specify extraction target screens, extraction target controls, and editing target property items
as an extraction condition.
2) The settings in the extraction condition setting dialog box are preserved on a project-by-project basis,
and are displayed when the wizard is activated next time.
3) Clicking the Finish button in the property item extraction dialog box displays property items on the
overall edit list according to the set extraction condition.
On the list, items displayed are sorted in the order from [Screen] to [Control] to [Object ID] to
[Property].
An item displayed in the overall edit list can be directly edited by selecting the [Data] item of the list.
When a [Data] item is edited, a + mark is prefixed to the item number, and the background color of
the line including the edited data is changed to light red for notification. This helps you to recheck
the details of editing done. The edited data of an item can be returned to the original data displayed
at extraction time. For this purpose, place the mouse pointer on the [Data] item of the line marked
with + then execute [Return to extracted value] on the pull-down menu displayed by right-clicking.
After editing the data of a property, the edit line can be changed by pressing the ↑ or ↓ cursor key to
edit the data of another property.
All items of the overall edit list selected by the All properties button or a group of property items
selected with the mouse can be deleted by clicking the Delete selected button.
In addition, clicking the Delete not selected button deletes property items not selected.
Furthermore, a selected group is treated as a target of "extract data properties" processing described
in 4) or "overall conversion" processing described in 5).
- 93 -
NOTE
In the case of a symbol property or PMC signal property, which value is to be
saved to a file is determined according to the value set as the symbol flag. The
value that can be set as the symbol flag is 0 or 1. The table below indicates the
meaning of a set value and the corresponding save operation.
Symbol flag Save operation

When 0 is set: The PMC signal property is saved.
The signal specification is "to use If the symbol flag is changed from 1 to 0, the value of the PMC
the PMC signal". signal is null. So, set a PMC signal value.
A symbol name, even if set, is not saved.
When 1 is set: The symbol name property is saved.
The signal specification is "to use If the symbol flag is changed from 0 to 1, the value of the symbol is
the symbol". null. So, set a symbol value.
A PMC signal, even if set, is not saved.
1) By using the dialog box activated by the Extract data properties... button, display items on the
overall edit list can be further narrowed down from items selected by the mouse, according to
property data. "Extract data properties" processing is targeted to a group of property items selected
on the overall edit list. In this processing, those items that match a data attribute (see the table
below) selected by "extract data properties" processing are extracted. At this time, all property items
that are deselected from the group remain in the overall edit list.
By using the buttons, [restore from deletion] or [reexecute deletion] can be performed for
property items deleted or deselected by the delete button mentioned in 3) or the Extract data
properties... button. Thus, "extract data properties" processing can be reexecuted by changing the
extraction condition. Property items restored by [restore from deletion] are added to the top of the
overall edit list.
2) In addition to the method of directly editing the overall edit list described in 3), a dedicated overall
conversion method is available which uses the dialog box activated by the Replace... button at the
top of the screen and follows the three property data attribute categories. (For the data attributes, see
the table below.)
3) To end editing, click the OK or Cancel button.
OK button:
This button writes the result of overall editing to the screen form file in the project before
ending overall editing.
Cancel button:
This button ends overall editing without saving the result of overall editing. Accordingly, the
screen form file in the project is not updated.
Type of property data attribute Description of overall editing

PMC signal As in the case of R12.3, all property items of the PMC signal are changed
to the same address in a batch, or the signal address range is changed to
a different area or different address or bit range.
Character string data All or part of character string data such as character strings specified as
PMC symbols or FP function names are replaced.
Numeric data, color data, check box, Numeric data or color data is changed in a batch to the same value or to
option button, list box data the resultant value of arithmetic operation performed on the current
numeric data.
- 94 -
Extraction of all-property overall edit target property items

By using the procedure below, edit target property items can be extracted for display in the overall edit
list.
1) Clicking the Extract item properties… button sequentially displays the extraction dialog boxes
described in <1>, <2>, and <3> below.
2) Enter necessary information into the dialog boxes described in <1> and <2> below then click the
Next> button.
3) To check or change the setting of the previous dialog box, click the <Back button.
4) To cancel the extraction wizard, click the Cancel button. When the extraction wizard is canceled, the
setting of the previous extraction condition remains unchanged.
5) In the last dialog box described in <3> below, enter necessary information then click the Finish
button. Property item extraction is started.
6) Upon completion of extraction, extracted property items are sorted and displayed in the overall edit
list.
The extraction condition is automatically saved. When the extraction dialog box is activated next
time, the extraction condition saved here is displayed.
The items of each dialog box are described below together with the method of setting those items.
<1> Clicking the Extract item properties… button displays the dialog box for project registration screen
selection.
A list of screen forms registered with the project is displayed. Screen form names are displayed in
ascending order.
Select all:
All screen forms registered with the project are subject to all-property overall editing.
Select the followings:
From the list of screen forms registered with the project, select only those screen forms that are
to be subject to all-property overall editing, by checking the corresponding check boxes.
- 95 -
<2> Clicking the Next> button of the screen selection dialog box displays a control selection dialog box.
A list of the drawing controls and component controls provided by FANUC PICTURE is displayed.
Select all:
All controls listed in the control list are subject to extraction.
From the list of controls, select only those controls that are to be subject to extraction, by
checking the corresponding check boxes.
<3> Clicking the Next> button of the control selection dialog box displays a property item selection
dialog box.
The property items of only those controls that are selected with the control selection dialog box are
displayed.
Check the check boxes of those property items that are to be extracted as an overall edit list.
The general tab of the screen setting control (screen background control) does not include an object
ID item. Screen names are indicated in the column of object ID in an overall edit list.
The table below indicates the property data attributes together with the corresponding icons.
In accordance with this property data attribute classification, the "extract data properties" function
and "overall property item data conversion" function determine their processing targets.
- 96 -
Icon indication Property data attribute Attribute description

PMC signal data Data in absolute signal representation corresponding to
R123.4, %M1234, and so forth
Character string data Object ID, screen name, symbol name, caption, FP
function, and so forth
Numeric data, color data, radio X/Y coordinates, character write start position, 7-color
buttons, check combo box data PMC comparison value, identification number, focus
index, number of display character positions, character
color, background color, boundary color, character
type, data type, figure, edit language key, and so forth
Property data extraction

When further extraction based on property data from the property items already extracted and displayed
in the overall edit list is needed, a group of property items selected from the overall edit list can be
processed so that property items matching an extraction condition (for narrowing) are left and property
items mismatching the extraction condition are deleted. As a result, the overall edit list displays those
property items that match the property data extraction condition and those property items that are not
selected for inclusion in the extraction processing target group.
Clicking the Extract data properties… button when the currently selected group of property items has
only one attribute displays the extraction dialog box of <2> below corresponding to the property data
attribute. When the currently selected group of property items has multiple attributes, the dialog boxes
described in <1> and <2> below are displayed sequentially. Select and set the items of each dialog box.
Clicking the Finish button after setting the necessary items of the dialog box of <2> narrows down the
group of selected property items in the overall edit list. Clicking the <Back button returns the screen
display to the extraction dialog box of <1>.
<1> Dialog box for selecting a property data attribute

From the categories indicated below, select the same data attribute as that of target properties to be
extracted based on property item data.
Clicking the Next> button displays the extraction dialog box of <2> corresponding to the selected
data attribute.
- 97 -
<2-1> Extraction condition setting dialog box when [PMC address] is selected
Property data that matches a specified PMC signal or property data that matches a specified range of
signal addresses is extracted, or a complementary set of properties that do not match the condition is
extracted. In the list box for bit specification, select "No" when bit specification is unnecessary, or
select a bit position from 0 to 7 when bit specification is necessary.
When "No" is selected in the list box for bit specification, property data at the same bit from 0 to 7
in the set PMC area addresses is also subject to extraction.
<2-2> Extraction condition setting dialog box when [Character PMC symbol string] is selected
For character string data property items such as PMC symbol specifications and FP function
descriptions, a search character string included in this character string property data is specified as
an extraction condition. When property item character strings that completely match a specified
character string are to be extracted, check the check box "Extract properties matching with the above
rule". In judgment for matching, uppercase and lowercase characters are distinguished from each
other, and half-size and full-size characters are also distinguished from each other.
Property data that matches the extraction condition set above is extracted, or a complementary set of
properties that do not match the condition is extracted.
- 98 -
<2-3> Extraction condition setting dialog box when [Numeric data] is selected
Property data that matches the specification of "Numeric data A", "Numeric data B", and "Rule" is
extracted, or a complementary set of properties that do no match the condition is extracted.
When an extraction condition value is input in "Numeric data A" or "Numeric data B", the list box
for selecting the corresponding extraction condition expression is activated to allow input.
If a value is input in "Numeric data A" and "Numeric data B", the list box for connecting the
extraction condition expressions of both "Numeric data A" and "Numeric data B" is activated for
input. In this case, select "And" or "Or".
The table below indicates the extraction condition expressions and the options that appear in the list
box for connection setting.
When extracting color data represented by numeric data, specify a color by using the color dialog
box displayed with the Color... button to the right of each numeric data input text box. When
numeric data is set using the Color... button, the background of the numeric data setting text box is
displayed in the specified color. When numeric data is set using the Color… button, the condition
expression list box is automatically set to "Numeric data A = Data" or "Numeric data B = Data", and
the list box for connecting the extraction condition expressions is automatically set to "Or".
Connection of two condition

Condition expression A Condition expression B
expressions
List box list List box list
List box list
Numeric data A = Data And Numeric data B= Data
Numeric data A != Data Or Numeric data B != Data
Numeric data A > Data Numeric data B > Data
Numeric data A >= Data Numeric data B >= Data
Numeric data A < Data Numeric data B < Data
Numeric data A <= Data Numeric data B <= Data
Property item data overall conversion

By using the procedure below, a group of property data selected from the overall edit list can be
processed to change the setting data in a batch.
From an overall edit list of extracted property items, a group of property setting data to be converted
needs to be selected beforehand.
- 99 -
Clicking the Replace… button when the currently selected group of property items has only one attribute
displays the extraction dialog box of <2> below corresponding to the property data attribute. When the
currently selected group of property items has multiple attributes, the dialog boxes described in <1> and
<2> below are displayed sequentially. Select and set the items of each dialog box.
Clicking the Finish button after setting the necessary items of the dialog box of <2> changes the setting
data of the group of selected property items in the overall edit list.
Clicking the <Back button returns the screen display to the extraction dialog box of <1>.
<1> Dialog box for property data attribute selection
Select the same property data attribute as the data attribute of property items subject to replace
processing.
Clicking the Next> button displays the extraction dialog box of <2> corresponding to the selected
data attribute.
- 100 -
<2-1> Dialog box when [PMC address] is selected
Two methods of conversion processing are available. Select one of the two methods.
1. When all properties are changed to the same signal address
A group of selected properties in the overall edit list is changed to the signal address set here.
2. When a range of signals is changed to another signal area
For those signals that correspond to a specified range in a group of selected properties in the
overall edit list, the PMC area, addresses, and bit positions are changed.
After a range-specified signal address change, an end signal address is automatically calculated
and displayed. Whether a new end signal address is within the valid signal area of PMC type
used with the project is automatically checked. If the new end signal address is found to be a
nonexistent signal address, a warning dialog box is displayed for notification.
<2-2> Dialog box when [Character PMC symbol string] is selected
The setting data (character string data) of a group of selected property items in the overall edit list is
replaced. Two modes of replacement are available: partial replacement and whole replacement. In
partial replacement, partially matching character strings are replaced. In whole replacement, wholly
matching character strings are replaced.
- 101 -
- 102 -
<2-3> Dialog box when [Numeric data] is selected
The data of each of the property items selected as a group in the overall edit list can be changed to
the data of Numeric data A or the result of an arithmetic operation.
When changing color data represented by numeric data, specify a color by using the color dialog box
displayed with the Color... button to the right of the numeric data input text box. When numeric data
is set using the Color... button, the background of the numeric data setting text box is displayed in
the specified color.
Change logic list box list and processing

List Processing
= Numeric data A Changes the current value to A.
+ Numeric data A Changes the current value to the value produced by adding A to the
current value.
- Numeric data A Changes the current value to the value produced by subtracting A from
the current value
* Numeric data A Changes the current value to the value produced by multiplying the
current value by A.
/ Numeric data A Changes the current value to the value produced by dividing the current
by A.
NOTE
When division, namely, "/ Numeric data A", is selected, the value of numeric data
A must not be zero. If 0 is specified as numeric data A, the following warning
dialog box appears:
- 103 -
Error that can occur during overall conversion processing

If an error occurs with a property item during overall conversion processing, the reason of the error,
screen name, and object ID of the property item are indicated in a dialog box as shown below. The data of
the property remains unchanged.
Clicking the Yes button continues overall conversion processing. Clicking the No button stops overall
conversion processing to return to the overall edit list. In this case, overall conversion processing has been
performed for immediately before the property item where an error occurred.
Upon completion of overall conversion processing, the screen display returns to the overall edit list. In
this case, the background of the property item where an overall conversion error occurred is displayed in
gray. Placing the mouse pointer on the gray area displays the reason of the error with a tool tip.
The error indication background color and tool tip display are cleared and return to the background color
of the original selected state or nonselected state.
<1> Select one or multiple [Data] items whose error indication is to be cleared then execute [Clear error
indication] on the pull-down menu displayed by right-clicking. The error indication in the selected
state is cleared.
<2> Executing [Replace] changes the background to the background display based on the result of
overall conversion processing.
<3> Select a [Data] item for direct editing.
- 104 -
2.2.14.3 Overall edit function for multi-language caption

If "The multi-language display function is used." is set for the custom screen project, the multi-language
caption overall edit function can be used. If the project is not set as a multi-language project, this function
cannot be activated.
With the multi-language caption overall edit function, a caption overall setting sheet used to input a
multi-language caption for all controls with a caption is created for each screen form, thus allowing
multi-language captions to be set while checking the multi-language settings at a time. Moreover, a
caption to be set can be "pasted" from a Microsoft Excel sheet to a multi-language caption table. So, when
compared with caption setting using the property dialog box, a dramatic improvement can be made in
caption input work efficiency.
Choosing [Project]−[Overall editor]−[Multi-language Caption] on the menu bar displays the extraction
dialog box for multi-language caption overall edit function setting.
Select and set the necessary items according to the screen.
An extraction condition is automatically saved. The extraction condition saved here is displayed when the
extraction dialog box is displayed next time.
In the screen selection dialog box shown below, which appears first, select a screen form for
multi-language caption setting.
Upon completion of screen selection, click the Next> button. To cancel multi-language caption input,
click the Cancel button.
- 105 -
Select all:
A caption overall setting sheet is created for all screen forms registered with the custom screen
project.
From the list of screen forms registered with the custom screen project, select only those screen
forms that are to be subject to multi-language caption setting, by checking the corresponding check
boxes.
In the language selection dialog box shown below, which appears next, select language keys for which a
multi-language caption is to be set. By selecting only those language keys that are required for caption
setting to be performed, the display items in the caption overall setting sheet can be read more easily, thus
resulting in an improvement in setting efficiency.
Upon completion of language selection, click the Finish button. To return to the previous screen, namely,
the screen selection dialog box, click the < Back button. To cancel multi-language caption input, click the
Cancel button.
Select all language keys:

A caption setting column is created for all language keys registered with the custom screen project.
Available language key which can be output:
For those language keys that are set for output to a screen data file at MEM generation time among
the language keys registered with the custom screen project, a caption overall setting sheet is created.
This means that a caption setting column is created for each language key with "Yes" set for
"Output".
From the list of language keys registered with the custom screen project, select only those language
keys that are necessary for multi-language caption setting, by checking the corresponding check
boxes. For the selected language keys, a caption setting column is created.
Upon completion of the above dialog box setting, the multi-language caption overall edit screen shown
below appears according to the setting. Select the caption overall setting sheet of a screen form subject to
multi-language caption input then enter a caption character string by placing the character input focus in
the caption setting field of the table.
The following message box appears if the selected screen contains neither controls for which the "No use
multi-language" property is unchecked nor controls for which a multi-language caption can be set.
- 106 -
At this time, no multi-language caption overall setting sheet is created for the screen(s) indicated in the
message box. Clicking the OK button displays the multi-language overall edit screen as shown below.
A list of caption setting columns appears

according to the language keys selected in the
dialog box.
A list of editing sheet tabs for the screen forms selected

in the dialog box appears.
The items displayed in table format include a control type for which the "No use multi-language"
property is unchecked among the controls used in the screen form, and also include an object ID, caption
property name, caption set with each language key selected using the extraction dialog box.
When there are too many items to be displayed within the display window frame, a scroll bar is displayed.
In the lower-left corner of the table, a list of tabs bearing the same sheet names as the screen form names
specified with the screen selection dialog box is displayed. By clicking a screen form name tab, the screen
display can be switched to the sheet for the screen form subject to caption setting.
Each button placed on the multi-language overall edit screen is described below.
Check char button

This button checks multi-language caption characters on all caption overall setting sheets. The
following items are checked:
- Whether the number of characters of a caption is within the maximum number of characters
that can be input for a control
- 107 -
- Whether a character string set with a selected display character type can be confined within the
rectangular range of a control
- Whether characters are set using displayable character codes
If the result of checking finds a warning level error, the following dialog box appears and the
background color of the caption setting field for which the warning is given is changed to gray for
notification.
Upon normal termination, the following dialog box appears:
OK button
All multi-language captions set on the multi-language caption overall edit screen are written to their
respective screen forms then the multi-language caption overall edit function is terminated. At this
time, however, a character check is made, before writing to the screen forms, to see if characters
codes displayable on the CNC display unit are used. If this character check finds a warning level
error indicating that a character code not displayable is included, the inquiry dialog box shown
below is displayed. Click the Yes button to write the multi-language captions to screen forms and
quit in spite of the warning. To check and correct the caption for which the warning was given, click
the No button. In this case, the screen display returns to the multi-language overall edit screen. The
background color of the caption setting field for which the warning was given is changed to gray.
If an attempt is made to write multi-language captions to the screen forms and quit when a warning
is given to indicate that the number of characters of a caption exceeded the maximum number of
characters that can be input for a control, the inquiry dialog box shown below is displayed. Click the
Yes button to continue writing the caption to the screen forms by deleting caption characters beyond
the maximum allowable number of characters. To check and correct the caption for which the
warning was given, click the No button. In this case, the screen display returns to the multi-language
overall edit screen.
In any of the following cases, the maximum number of characters that can be input for a control is
assumed to be exceeded:
- When a caption longer than 20 half-size characters is set for a numeric display control for
calling the ten-key pad
- When a caption longer than 128 half-size characters is set for a key-in buffer control
- 108 -
- When a caption longer than 2000 half-size characters is set for a control other than the above
two controls
Cancel button
This button is used to discard all multi-language captions edited on the multi-language caption
overall edit screen and quit. If any edit operation has been done, the following inquiry dialog box is
displayed:
Search... button
This button displays the search dialog box shown below. A search is made for a set character string
according to the search option setting in the direction set by a clicked search button. If a matching
character string is found, a table is displayed at the matching caption setting field to which the focus
is moved. A character string search is made within the caption overall setting sheet for each screen
form currently displayed on the frontmost screen.
For the setting of a character string and search options, see "Search character string and search
option setting" provided later.
Replace… button
This button displays the replace dialog box shown below. A search is made for a set character string
according to the search option setting in the direction set by a clicked search button. If a matching
character string is found, a table is displayed at the matching caption setting field to which the focus
is moved. Then the caption is replaced with the character string set in [To:] according to the Replace
or Replace all button pressed.
If the Replace all button is clicked instead of the character string search button in the backward or
forward direction, all matching character strings are replaced immediately without displaying the
caption setting field of a matching character string.
A character string search/replacement is made only in the caption setting fields within the caption
overall setting sheet for each screen form currently displayed on the frontmost screen.
For the setting of a character string and search options, see "Search character string and search
option setting" provided later.
For the flow of replace processing, see "Replace processing" provided later.
- 109 -
Search character string and search option setting

Search character string setting and search processing are performed as described below.
• When the specified cell search direction is downward, a search is made horizontally toward the
rightmost cell then to the next lower line. When the specified cell search direction is upward, a
search is made horizontally toward the leftmost cell then to the next higher line. When a matching
character string is found, the screen display moves to the position of the matching character string. A
search for a character string starts at the currently selected cell.
• If a search is started without specifying a character string, a search is made for empty caption setting
fields.
• When all cells of the caption overall setting sheet are searched, the dialog box shown below appears.
Click the OK button to quit.
• When a search is made using the search dialog box, a search can be made for a control name, object
ID, and property name as well. When a search is made using the replace dialog box, these items
cannot be search targets because these items are unchangeable.
• An input history list for search character strings or replace character strings can store up to 10
character strings. At this time, a search character string history list is shared by the search dialog box
and replace dialog box.
Search option setting

When a search character string is specified with the search function or replace function, the
following optional conditions can be set for judgment of matching between a search character string
and character strings in the caption overall setting sheet:
Divide large letters from small ones:
When searching for an alphabetic character string, check this check box to make a distinction
between uppercase characters and lowercase characters in the specified search character string at the
time of judgment for matching.
- 110 -
Divide half size letters from full size letters:
When searching for an alphabetic or katakana character string, check this check box to make a
distinction between half-size characters and full-size characters in the specified search character
string at the time of judgment for matching.
Ignore the new line mark (\n):
An arbitrary new line mark (\n) can be inserted into character strings in the caption overall setting
sheet. When searching for a matching character string by ignoring this new line mark, check this
check box.
Even if this check box is checked, new line marks set in a search character string are not removed.
Replace processing
Replace processing is performed as follows:
• Control names, object IDs, and property names are unchangeable items, so that replace processing
cannot be performed on these items.
• Clicking the Replace button replaces all character strings that are contained in the currently selected
cell and match a search character string.
• When the Replace button is clicked without clicking a search button, a search is made horizontally
toward the rightmost cell then to the next lower line, after replacement execution, for a character
string that matches the specified search character string. When a matching character string is found,
the screen display moves to the position of the matching character string.
The Replace button and Replace all button placed in the replace dialog box are described below.
Replace button:
All character strings in the currently selected cell that match a search character string are replaced
with the character string set in [To:]. After replacing a matching character string, a search is made
for another character string that matches the search character string. So, by clicking the Replace
button in succession, captions in the caption overall setting sheet for each screen form currently
displayed on the frontmost screen can be replaced successively.
If a warning level error is found in replacement execution, the inquiry dialog box shown below is
displayed. Click the Yes button to continue replace processing to replace even a caption that causes
a warning when replaced. Click the No button to stop replace processing without replacing a caption
that causes a warning when replaced. In this case, the caption and selected cell position remain
unchanged.
Replace all button:

This button replaces all character strings that match a search character string. If a warning level error
is found during replacement execution, the inquiry dialog box shown below is displayed. Click the
Yes button to continue replace processing to replace even a caption that causes a warning when
replaced. Click the No button to completely stop replace processing without replacing a caption that
causes a warning when replaced. In this case, the captions that cause a warning when replaced
remain unchanged.
- 111 -
Upon completion of replacement, the following dialog box is displayed.
Warning level error occurring during caption character string editing

A character check is made in caption character string editing. A character check is made in any of the
following cases:
When a character string is directly input in a caption setting field
• When replace processing is executed
• When the Check char button is clicked
• When the OK button is clicked
A check is made in the same as when the Check char button is clicked.
The background color of a caption setting field that caused a warning is changed to gray. Placing the
mouse pointer on the gray area displays the reason of the error with a tool tip. The tool tip display and the
background color of a caption setting field that caused a warning return to the original states when the
displayed tool tip warning is cleared.
- 112 -
About Import and Export

With the Export... button and Import... button, caption character string data can be exchanged
with Excel of Microsoft.
By editing an exported file with Excel then importing the edited file, caption character string modification
and multi-language display can be performed easily.
Export… Button
This button outputs the contents of all sheets to a tab-delimited text file.
The [Save as] dialog box is displayed. Specify a save destination file name then click the Save
button.
・ Default save destination → (project-folder-name)\StringData

・ Default file name → (project-name).csv
- 113 -
If the export operation is not completed successfully, the error indicated below is displayed.
・ When the file cannot be created
(For example, when access right is not granted, a read-only file with the same name already exists,
and so forth)
・ When the disk size is insufficient
Import… Button
This button inputs an exported tab-delimited text file.
The [Open] dialog box is displayed. Specify a read source file name then click the Open button.
・ Default read source → (project-folder-name)\StringData

・ Default file name → (project-name).csv
*.csv when the file name cannot be found
Upon completion of import, the contents displayed on each sheet of the multi-language caption overall
edit screen are updated.
- 114 -
If the import operation is not completed successfully, the error indicated below is displayed.
・ When access right is not granted
・ When the file format is incorrect
The importable file format is as follows:

Text file that has each item delimited by a tab character, has the extension .csv, and uses the character
code Unicode (UTF-16, little endian)
Lines 1 to 2: Header section. Item names on the multi-language caption overall edit screen and a
multi-language name are displayed. Do not modify exported data.
Line 3 and up: Data section. Line-by-line data of each sheet is indicated.
Column 1: Screen form name (sheet name)
Column 2: Control name
(Value of the "Object ID" column on a sheet)
Column 3: Property name
(Value of the "Property" column on a sheet)
Column 4 and up: Multi-language caption character string
CAUTION
When editing an exported file with Excel, modify only the "multi-language caption
character string" portion of the data section. When saving a file, use the file
name extension .csv and the file format of Unicode text.
At the time of import, the lines that have none of "Screen", "Object ID", and "Property" of the data
section on the multi-language caption overall edit screen, namely, the caption character strings of controls
that do not exist on the screen form, are not read but are skipped. In this case, the following warning
dialog box is displayed upon completion of import:
- 115 -
The caption character strings of those languages that are not set with the project are ignored. In this case,
no particular warning is output.
2.2.15 FP Script Function

With the FP script function, a created simple operation program can be called for execution from a
control that enables function specification. By using an FP script, those operations that have been
conventionally executed by a PMC ladder or macro executor can be incorporated into FANUC PICTURE,
so that man-hours for development using customization tools other than FANUC PICTURE can be
reduced.
In the explanation below, the coding portion of an operation program is referred to as the "script".
Moreover, a set of operation programs is referred to as an "FP script".
2.2.15.1 Screen configuration

(1) Script List screen
Click [Project]-FP Script… on the menu bar. A Script List screen as shown below is displayed.
The Script List screen displays the numbers and names of registered FP scripts.
A list of scripts is displayed in ascending order of script numbers.
- 116 -
New Button
Clicking the New button enables a new FP script to be created. In one FP script, up to 100 lines of
operation programs can be input. Up to 1,000 FP scripts can be registered.
If 1,000 FP scripts are already registered, the New button cannot be selected.
For the method of registration, see Subsection 2.2.15.2, "Method of FP script setting".
Entry Button
This button is used to read an existing FP script file.
Clicking the Entry button displays the file selection dialog box for FP script file selection.
When a file to be added is selected, the FP script is added to the Script List screen. If the file name is
FPS0200.dat, script number 200 is assigned to the FP script file.
If 1,000 FP scripts are already registered, the Entry button cannot be selected.
Remove Button
This button enables a currently registered FP script to be deleted.
For the method of deletion, see Subsection 2.2.15.2, "Method of FP script setting".
If no FP script is registered, the Remove button cannot be selected.
Edit Button
This button enables a currently registered FP script to be edited.
For the method of editing, see Subsection 2.2.15.2, "Method of FP script setting", and Subsection
2.2.15.4, "FP script commands".
If no FP script is registered, the Edit button cannot be selected.
Detail Button
This button is used to specify a FP script number to be executed at the startup of CNC.
For the details, see Subsection 2.2.15.3, "Timer driven operation function".
OK and × buttons:
These buttons close the Script List screen.
- 117 -
(2) Script edit screen

Clicking the New button or Edit button on the Script List screen displays a screen as shown below.
The Script Edit screen is used to input and edit scripts.

In one FP script, up to 100 lines of scripts can be input.
If an attempt to input line 101, the attempt fails with the following dialog box:
Script number:
Set a script number to be registered.

A number from 000 to 999 can be set.
In the case of editing using the New button, the youngest free number is set by default. However, if
the script number automatically assigned by clicking the New button is a number that was once
deleted, the contents of the deleted script are displayed.
Script name:
The name of an FP script to be displayed on the Script List screen can be set. A title consisting of up
to 20 characters (20 half-size characters or 10 full-size characters) can be set. If an attempt is made
to input the 21st character, the attempt fails with the following dialog message:
OK Button
This button registers an FP script and closes the Script Edit screen.
If an FP script already registered is edited, the dialog box below is displayed. If you click the OK
button without performing editing, the dialog box below is not displayed.
The OK button overwrites a script.
- 118 -
The Cancel button cancels script registration and returns the screen display to the Script Edit
screen.
Cancel and × buttons:

These buttons cancel editing and close the Script List screen.
(3)Detail screen
Clicking the Detail button on the Script List screen displays a screen as shown below.
The Detail screen is used to specify a FP script number to be executed at the startup of CNC.
Script number:
Set a script number to be executed at the startup of CNC.
OK Button:
This button saves the input script number and closes the Detail screen.
Cancel and × buttons:

These buttons cancel the input script number and close the Detail screen.
2.2.15.2 Method of FP script setting

(1) Calling an FP script
An FP script can be called by specifying the FP_Script[] function dedicated to FP script calling in a
control that enables FP function calling.
Specify the FP script calling function in the following format:
FP_Script[script-number_argument1_argument2_argument3_argument4_argument5]
script-number:
Specify a script number displayed on the Script List screen.
argument1_argument2_argument3_argument4_argument5:
To an FP script, up to 5 constants can be passed. In this argument specification area, up to 5
necessary
arguments can be specified. Unnecessary arguments can be omitted in succession.
The following controls can call an FP script:

・Numeral/character string indication control
・Numeral indication control with key input
・Numeral indication control for calling a ten-key pad
・Meter control
- 119 -
・Graph control
・Button control with image
・Lamp control with exchangeable images
・Text character string indication control
・Lamp control (7-color background specification)
・Button control (FP function calling specification)
・Line chart control
(2) Registering and incorporating an FP script
The method of registering a script numbered 200 for displaying the worn statuses of two types of tools
based on use count data by using PMC signal state is described below together with the method of
incorporation into the numeral/character string indication control.
<1> Click the New button on the Script List screen. The Script Edit screen is displayed.
<2> Set "200" in Script number, and set "wear status" in Script name.
<3> Code a script as follows:
if (:SYM_R300_0_ToolB: == 0) {
DISP_VAL = #[10000] – 0.010 * :SYMBOL1: ;
} else {
DISP_VAL = #[11000] – 0.015 * :SYMBOL2: ;
}
The script above displays the worn statuses of tool A (worn 0.010 by one-time use) and tool B (worn
0.015 by one-time use) alternately by using the PMC signal state indicated by
"SYM_R300_0_ToolB"."SYM_R300_0_ToolB" coded in the script represents bit 0 of R300 in the PMC
area. "SYMBOL1" and "SYMBOL2" represent the data tables of the PMC area where the use counts of
the individual tools are stored. For the method of specifying these symbols in the PMC area, see "(2-4)
Peculiar data variable" of "(2) FP script variables and constants" in Subsection 2.2.15.4, "FP script
commands".
- 120 -
<4> Clicking the OK button registers the edited script.

<5> Script number 200 is registered and script number 200 is displayed on the Script List screen.
<6> Incorporate the edited FP script into the numeral/character string indication control. First, paste the
numeral/character string indication control onto the screen.
Select the numeral/character

string indication control.
Paste the control to the screen.
<7> Open the Action tab of the numeral/character string indication control then set "1:Function" in
"Action Type" below.
Select "1:Function".
<8> In the function name field below, set the FP script calling function FP_Script[200] for calling the FP
script of script number 200 created in steps <1> through <4>.
For FP script calling, see "(1) Calling an FP script" in this subsection.
Set a function name.
- 121 -
At this time, initial values can be set in argument variables after a script number by setting, for
example, "FP_Script[200_10_15]".
An example of script number 200 with arguments specified is given below.
if (:SYM_R300_0_ToolB: == 0) {
DISP_VAL = #[10000] – ARG[0] / 1000 * :SYMBOL1: ;
} else {
DISP_VAL = #[11000] – ARG[1] / 1000 * :SYMBOL2: ;
}
For argument variables, see "(2-6) Argument variable" of "(2) FP script variables and constants"
in Subsection 2.2.15.4, FP script commands (operators, variables, statements)".
<9> Set "7 : Double" in Data Type.
<10> Save the settings above. This completes FP script incorporation.

<11> Select [File]-[Symbol] from the menu bar to display the Symbol list dialog box then register the
PMC symbols used with the script.
For details of symbol specification, see Subsection 2.2.4, "Symbol Specification
with FANUC PICTURE".
(3) Deleting an FP script

The method of deleting script number 100 is described below.
<1> Select script number 100 on the Script List screen then click the Remove button.
<2> The dialog box shown below is displayed.
Click the OK button to delete the script. Click the Cancel button to cancel the deletion of the script.
- 122 -
<3> Script number 100 disappears from the script list management. However, the file of script number
100 itself is not deleted but is stored in the FPScript folder.
(4) Editing an FP script

The method of editing the script of script number 100 is described below.
<1> Select script number 100 on the Script List screen then click the Edit button.
<2> Modify the script then click the OK button.
<3> The dialog box shown below is displayed.
<4> Clicking the OK button overwrites and saves script number 100. Click the Cancel button to cancel
the editing of the script.
2.2.15.3 Timer driven operation function

This function can be used from Edition 03.5. Moreover, this function is available only for Series 0i-D,
Series 30i /31i /32i /35i, Power Motion i-A.
This function can execute the FP script periodically by the timer in the FP driver.
By using this, it is possible to monitor and pick up periodical data and so on.
Example) Line chart display

Executing periodically Chart display
FP Script
1. Reads data by the FP functions
2. Calculates the read data
3. Stores the calculated data in data of
chart
First, to execute the FP script periodically, set a script number to be executed at the startup of CNC.
Next, in this startup script, set script numbers to be executed periodically by using the FP function
set_handler. And, the script numbers that are set by FP function set_handler can be released by the FP
function remove_handler.
For the details of the FP functions set_handler and remove_handler, see Chapter 3, "FP FUNCTIONS".
- 123 -
The following example shows that a custom macro variable is increased by executing the FP script
number 900 for every 5 seconds.
How to make the FP script is the same as the descriptions in Subsection 2.2.15.2,"Method of FP script
setting".
<1> Click the Detail button on the Script List screen. The Detail screen will be displayed.
<2> Set 100 in the script number.
<3> By clicking the OK button, the number will be saved.

<4> Make the script number 100 and write the following code in it.
set_handler[900_1_5000_0_0]; // The script number 900 is executed for every 5000 milliseconds
// (5 seconds).
<5> Make the script number 900 and write the following code in it.
#100 = #100 + 1; // Add 1 to the custom macro variable number 100.
<6> Finally, save the above settings.
Moreover, by using the FP function set_handler, the FP script is also executed in the following
conditions.
・At opening screen
・At closing screen
・At moving input focus of control
- 124 -
The differences between the FP script to be driven in controls and one to be driven by the timer are as
follows:
Driven by events
Driven in controls Driven by the timer (at opening / closing screen
or moving input focus)
Executing It is executed while displaying It is executed while not only It is executed while displaying
the screen made by FANUC displaying the screen made the screen made by FANUC
PICTURE only. by FANUC PICTURE and PICTURE only.
also displaying other screens,
for example the standard
CNC screens.
FP functions All FP functions are available. The FP functions that can be used are limited.
Defined All defined variables are All defined variables for display use (DISP_VAL, ARG,
variables available. INPUT_VAL) are not available.
Error process An error message is Error information is stored to An error message is
displayed on the screen. defined variables. displayed on the screen.
Executing process will be
canceled after an error is
detected.
2.2.15.4 FP script commands (operators, variables, statements)

The commands usable in a script are described below.
If a prohibition item described below is not followed, an error occurs as the result of syntax check. For
error indication by syntax check, see Subsection 2.2.15.5, "Notes and restrictions on FP scripts".
(1) Operators
Arithmetic operators
+ Addition
- Subtraction
* Multiplication
/ Division
% Finds a remainder produced by a division.
= Assignment operation (A variable must be specified on the left side.)
Comparison operators
&& Logical AND
|| Logical OR
! Logical inversion (logical NOT)
> Less than
< Greater than
<= Equal to or less than
>= Equal to or greater than
!= Not equal
== Equal
- 125 -
Bit operators
<< Bit shift to left
>> Bit shift to right
| Bit OR (logical OR)
& Bit AND (logical AND)
^ Exclusive OR
* A bit operation is performed on the integer part of a floating-point number after discarding the
fraction part.
* When the number of bit shift operations is directly coded, a number up to 31 may be specified.
If a number greater than 31 is coded, a compile error occurs.
Arithmetic shift and logical shift

When the bit shift operators "<<" and ">>" are used, the bit shift operations indicated below are
performed according to the type of shift data specified on the left side.
Left side of a bit shift operator Type of bit shift operation

Signed/floating-point temporary variable
Signed/floating-point input variable
Display variable
Peculiar data variable
Arithmetic shift
Constant
Argument variable
Expression
FP function
Unsigned temporary variable
logical shift
Unsigned input variable
* For information about data variables specified on the left side, see "(2) FP script variables and
constants".
Examples of logical shift:
DISP_VAL = ULVAL[3] >> 1;
UWVAL[0]=INPUT_UWVAL>>3;
Examples of arithmetic shift:
DISP_VAL = #500 >> 1;
DISP_VAL = 0xFF >> UBVAL[0];
DISP_VAL = BVAL[3] >> 1;
DISP_VAL = (ULVAL[3]+ULVAL[2]) >> 1;
In a bit shift operation on a constant, an arithmetic shift operation is performed. So, specify a
constant within the range indicated in the table below.
Constant represented in
decimal hexadecimal
Specifiable constant range -2147483648 to 2147483647 0x80000000 to 0x7FFFFFFF
When performing a logical shift operation on an unsigned constant ranging from 2147483648 to
4294967295 or on PMC area data, assign the constant or data to an unsigned temporary variable
with the corresponding size then perform an operation by specifying a single term.
Example:
<1> ULVAL[0] = 0xFFFFFFFF;
DISP_VAL = ULVAL[0] >> UBVAL[0];
<2> UWVAL[0]=:ToolChange:;
UWVAL[0] = UWVAL[0] >> UBVAL[0];
- 126 -
Priority order of operators, and coupling rule
The table below indicates the priority order of commands.
If the priority order is the same, the coupling rule applies.
Priority order Command Coupling rule

High ( ) →
! ←
* / % →
+ - →
<< >> →
< <= > >= →
== != →
& ^ | →
&& || →
Low = ←
Limit on nesting of the operator commands "(" and ")"

Nesting to a depth of up to five levels is allowed.
(2) FP script variables and constants

With the FP script function, only the variables and constants indicated in (2-1) through (2-9) may be used.
No arbitrary variable may be declared. The initial values of temporary variables and display variables are
undefined.
Some types of variables and constants may be specified only on the right side or left side of an
assignment command (=) or comparison operator.
Type of variable Assignment command Comparison operator
(2-1) Temporary variable:BVAL[0] Settable on right side and left side
(2-2) Input variable:INPUT_BVAL Settable on right side only Settable on right side and left side
(2-3) Display variable:DISP_VAL Settable on left side only Settable on right side and left side
(2-4) Peculiar data
Settable on right side and left side
variable:#[100_1],:SYM_100:
(2-5) Constant value :10, 0xFF, (-1) Settable on right side only Settable on right side and left side
(2-6) Argument variable:ARG[0] Settable on right side only Settable on right side and left side
(2-7) Constant value for arithmetic Settable on right side and left side
Settable on right side only
operation:PI, NAN etc.
(2-8) FP functions for indirectly referencing a
custom macro variable or P code Settable on right side only Settable on right side and left side
macro variable
(2-9) Variable for timer driven operation Settable on right side only
function:ERROR_TYPE, SCREEN_NO (Only ERROR_TYPE can be Settable on right side and left side
etc. set on left side.)
(2-1) Temporary variable

When the result of command execution is to be stored temporarily, the result can be stored in the types of
variables indicated in the table below. Ten variables are available for each type.
A temporary variable may be specified on either the right side or the left side of an assignment command
or comparison operator. The initial value of a temporary variable is undefined. So, before using a
temporary variable, initialize it in a script.
- 127 -
BVAL[0-9] Byte-type temporary variable. A number from 0 to 9 can be specified.

WVAL[0-9] Word-type temporary variable. A number from 0 to 9 can be specified.
LVAL[0-9] Long-type temporary variable. A number from 0 to 9 can be specified.
UBVAL[0-9] Unsigned byte-type temporary variable. A number from 0 to 9 can be specified.
UWVAL[0-9] Unsigned word-type temporary variable. A number from 0 to 9 can be specified.
ULVAL[0-9] Unsigned long-type temporary variable. A number from 0 to 9 can be specified.
DVAL[0-9] Floating-point temporary variable. A number from 0 to 9 can be specified.
(2-2) Input variable

When a value input to the numeral indication control with key input or numeral indication control for
calling a ten-key pad is to be used in the script specified with the write function of the control, the input
value can be referenced by specifying a variable indicated in the table below. No input variable can be
used with a read function, because no key input is involved. An input variable indicated in the table
below may be specified on the right side of an assignment command or on either the right side or the left
side of a comparison operator.
INPUT_BVAL Byte-type input variable

INPUT_WVAL Word-type input variable
INPUT_LVAL Long-type input variable
INPUT_UBVAL Unsigned byte-type input variable
INPUT_UWVAL Unsigned word-type input variable
INPUT_ULVAL Unsigned long-type input variable
INPUT_DVAL Floating-point input variable
When the line chart control needs to use a value obtained from the ring buffer in a script, the value can be
referenced by specifying the variable indicated in the table below. This input variable may be specified
on the right side of an assignment command, and on either the right side or left side of a comparison
operator.
READ_VAL Long-type input variable
Example of use
An example of script that references, by using an input variable, a value input to the numeral indication
control for calling a ten-key pad is given below.
<1> Register the script below.
- 128 -
<2> In WriteFunction of the numeral indication control for calling a ten-key pad, set the FP script
set in <1>.
<3> As the result of the settings above, a value input through the ten-key pad is stored in
INPUT_BVAL. Then, the value in INPUT_BVAL is written to the area set in wrpmc. In the
case of the script above, the input value is written to the one byte of D100.
* Example of wrong script

INPUT_BVAL = rdpmc[5_100_0];
The syntax of this script is wrong because the input variable INPUT_BVAL is specified on the
left side of the assignment command.
(2-3) Display variable

To display the result of an operation with one of the controls below, specify the display variable
DISP_VAL on the left side of an assignment command. Thus, the value obtained by a script can be
displayed. However, the display variable cannot reference the value currently displayed by a control. The
display variable may be specified on either the right side or the left side of a comparison operator.
However, the initial value of the display variable is undefined. So, be sure to assign a value before
referencing the value with a comparison operator.
・Numeral/character string indication control
・Numeral indication control with key input
・Numeral indication control for calling a ten-key pad
・Meter control
・Graph control
・Line chart control
DISP_VAL Floating-point display variable
The table below indicates examples of display for data types when the value 123.4567 is assigned to
DISP_VAL by script processing.
Data type Number of decimal places DISP_VAL Display
3 123.456
Fraction 2 123.45
No fraction(*1) 123
123.456
3 0.123
Fixed-point data such as 4,
1 12.3
2, or 1 byte
No fraction(*1) 123
*1 When the check box "Use Decimal Point" is not checked
- 129 -
When DISP_VAL is specified in the graph control or meter control or line chart control, or the
fixed-point data type is specified as the data type, the value of the integer part of DISP_VAL with its
fraction part discarded is passed to the graph control or meter control or a numeral indication control.
When the data type is the fraction data type, the fraction part of the value of DISP_VAL below the
specified number of decimal places is discarded. For example, when a numeral indication control is used
specifying 3 as the number of decimal places for 0.00056, the value displayed is 0.000.
Example of use
An example of script that uses the display variable with the numeral indication control for calling a
ten-key pad is given below.
<1> Register the script below.
<2> In ReadFunction of the numeral indication control for calling a ten-key pad, set the FP script set
in <1>.
<3> As the result of the settings above, the PMC area read value set in rdpmc is stored in the display
variable DISP_VAL. In the case of the script above, the one byte of R100 is read.
Then, the value of DISP_VAL is displayed on the numeral indication control for calling a
ten-key pad.

wrpmc[9_100_0] = DISP_VAL;
The syntax of this script is wrong because the display variable DISP_VAL is specified on the
right side of the assignment command.
(2-4) Peculiar data variable

With the peculiar data variable, a PMC area, custom macro variable, or P code macro variable can be read
or written. Use the formats indicated below. The peculiar data variable may be specified on either the
right side or the left side of an assignment command or comparison operator.
- 130 -
(a) PMC area symbol specification
In the explanation below, an example where the symbol name DoorOpen defines the one-byte area
R100 is used.
Format for specifying the symbol name in an argument of an FP function

In an argument of an FP function, specify the symbol name registered in the symbol table.
Example of use:
Syntax
BVAL[0]=rdpmc[:DoorOpen:];
wrpmc[:DoorOpen:]= BVAL[0];
The symbol name is resolved into an area, address, bit, or size then is converted to the
value to be coded in each argument.
In the example above, ":DoorOpen:" is converted to rdpmc[5_100_0] on the right side and is
converted to wrpmc[5_100_0_0] on the left side.

As indicated below, the value stored in the PMC area specified by a symbol cannot be
used as an argument of an FP function.
Example of use:
Symbol definition
DeviceType : R100, 1BYTE
Address : R150, 1WORD
Size : R200, 1BYTE
Content of the PMC address specified by the symbol
DeviceType value : 5
Address value : 100
Size value : 0
Syntax
The following does not result:
rdpmc[:DeviceType:_:Address:_:Size:]
→ rdpmc[5_100_0]
For linking a symbol name with a PMC area, see Subsection 2.2.4, "Symbol Specification with FANUC PICTURE".
Format for specifying the symbol name singly on the right side of an assignment command
Example of use:
Data at the PMC address
Value at the DoorOpen area : 10
Syntax
BVAL [0]= :DoorOpen:;
When the syntax above is used, the value (=10) read from the one-byte PMC area R100 is assigned
to the temporary variable BVAL[0].
Format for specifying the symbol name singly on the left side of an assignment command
Example of use:
Syntax
:DoorOpen: = BVAL[0];
When the syntax above is used, the value of the temporary variable BVAL[0] is
written to the one-byte PMC area R100.
- 131 -
(b) Custom macro variable

#[number_path]:
number:
・Local variable : 1 to 33
・Common variable : 100 to 999
・System variable : 1000 to 8499
The floating-point data type is assumed for processing.
path:
Specify a path number. "_path" may be omitted. If "_path" is omitted, specification of
path 0 is assumed, that is, the current path is used for processing.
Example of macro variable use:
The following two lines specify the same thing:
#[999_0] = 0;
#999 = 0;
When a number of custom macro variable is specified by variable, use the
dedicated function for FP script in below (2-8).
No good example) #[#500]=100.;
No custom macro variable may be used in an argument of an FP function.
Assign the value of a custom macro variable to a temporary variable once as
indicated below.
LVAL[0] = #[500];
DVAL[0] = rdpmc[5_ LVAL[0]_0];
(c) P code macro variable

#[number_path]:
number:
・Control variable : 8500 to 8999
(usable with Series 0i-D, Series 30i/31i/32i/35i, Power Motion i-A)
・P code variable : 10000 to 19999
・Extended P code variable : 20000 to 89999
The floating-point data type is assumed for processing.
path:
Specify a path number. "_path" may be omitted. If "_path" is omitted, specification of
path 0 is assumed, that is, the current path is used for processing.
When a number of P code macro variable is specified by variable, use the dedicated
function for FP script in below (2-8).
No good example) #[ARG[0]]=100.055;
No P code macro variable may be used in an argument of an FP function. Assign the value
of a P code macro variable to a temporary variable once.
No P code macro variable may be used in an argument of an FP function. Assign the value
of a P code macro variable to a temporary variable once.
Before control variables 8500 to 8999 can be used, the macro executor conversational
program must be installed correctly on the CNC.
(2-5) Constant value

As a constant, a decimal constant or hexadecimal constant can be specified.
A hexadecimal constant is represented by prefixing 0x to the constant.
A constant may be specified on the right side of an assignment command or on either the right side or the
left side of a comparison operator. When specifying a negative decimal constant on the right side of an
arithmetic operator, comparison operator, or bit operator and so on, enclose the constant in parentheses.
Range of constants:
(−2,147,483,648) to 4,294,967,295
Up to 10 digits may be specified.
- 132 -
Example of use:
Decimal constants (255, 0.01, -1.414)
UBVAL[0] = 255;
DVAL[0] = 0.01;
DVAL[0] = INPUT_VAL*(-1.414);
if ( ARG[0]==(-1) ){WVAL=(-32768);}
Hexadecimal constants (0xFF, 0xF19F)
UBVAL[1] = 0xFF;
UWVAL[0] = 0xF19F;

0xFF = UBVAL[1]; (specifying a constant on the left side of an assignment command)
DISP_VAL=-1; (a negative constant is not enclosed in parentheses)
(2-6) Argument variable

When the FP script function is specified, up to five constants can be set as arguments capable of being
referenced in the script. Variables for referencing the constants specified by arguments in the script are
argument variables. With argument variables, scripts can be created so that each script can produce a
different result for each control.
A constant specifiable in an argument variable is an integer ranging from -2147483648 to 2147483647.
Specified constants are stored in the ARG[0] to ARG[4] variables in the order of specification and can be
referenced within the script. An argument variable, when specified in a script, may be specified on the
right side of an assignment command or on either the right side or the left side of a comparison operator.
ARG[0-4] Signed long-type argument variable
To set an argument, code a constant after a script number when specifying a function name.
Example: FP_Script[200_1_2_3_4_5]
In the example above, the FP script of script number 200 is executed, and the
argument variables are initialized as indicated in the table below.
Argument variable Initial value

ARG[0] 1
ARG[1] 2
ARG[2] 3
ARG[3] 4
ARG[4] 5
At the time of specification of constants for argument variables, unnecessary constants may be omitted.
When constants are omitted, the corresponding argument variables are initialized to 0.
Example of using argument variables:

By modifying the example given in Subsection 2.2.15.2, "Method of FP script setting" as indicated
below, it becomes possible to modify the worn amount on a control-by-control basis.
FP function name specification:
FP_Script[200_10_15]
By the specification above, the argument variables are initialized as indicated below.
- 133 -
Argument variable Initial value

ARG[0] 10
ARG[1] 15
ARG[2] 0 (*1)
ARG[3] 0 (*1)
ARG[4] 0 (*1)
*1 The argument variables for omitted constants are initialized to 0.
Script statement:
if(:SYM_R300_0_ToolB:==0){
DISP_VAL = #[10000] – ARG[0] / 1000 * :SYMBOL1:;
}else{
DISP_VAL = #[11000] – ARG[1] / 1000 * :SYMBOL2:;
}
No value may be assigned to an argument variable. Accordingly, no argument variable may be

specified on the left side of an assignment command.
ARG[0] = rdpmc[5_100_0];
(2-7) Constant value for arithmetic operation

Following constant values show special return values or the ratio of the circumference of a circle to
its diameter using in arithmetic operation function.
These are specified on the right side of an assignment command and on the both right and left side of
comparison operator.
Constant value for arithmetic operation Value

PI 3.141592653589793
NAN 0x7FFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
HUGE_VAL 1024 raised to the power 10
EDOM 33
ERANGE 34
(a) PI
It shows the ratio of the circumference of a circle to its diameter with the accuracy of double
precision floating-point
It can convert the radian and angle by temporarily operating it with the variable, decimal, and
hexadecimal.
Example of use:
Syntax
DVAL[0] = WVAL[0] * PI;
For the above mentioned syntax, multiplication result of the value of WVAL[0] and PI is assigned to
the variable DVAL[0].
- 134 -
(b) NAN
It shows not a number.
It is used testing whether the value of the result of arithmetic operation function is not a number.
To express a negative NaN(–NaN), it is described ((-1) * NAN) in the FPScript.
Example of use:
Syntax
DVAL[0] = fmod[WVAL[0]_WVAL[1]];
if ( DVAL[0] == NAN ){ // Test if the operation result is NaN.
setmacval[ARG[0]_0];
}else if( DVAL[0] == ( (-1) * NAN ) ){ // Test if the operation result is
setmacval[ARG[0]_1]; // - negative NaN.
(c) HUGE_VAL
When the overflow occurs, it is returned as return value of the arithmetic operation function.
For details of arithmetic operation, see Subsection 3.1.5, " function reference of FP script ".
(d) EDOM
When the argument of arithmetic operation function was out of range, it is returned as return value
of errno function.
For details of errno function, see Subsection 3.1.5, " function reference of FP script ".
(e) ERANGE
When the overflow occurs, it is returned as return value of errno function.
For details of errno function, see Subsection 3.1.5, " function reference of FP script ".
(2-8) FP functions for indirectly referencing a custom macro variable or P code macro variable
When a custom macro variable or P code macro variable is to be indirectly referenced in an FP script, use
the following FP functions dedicated to an FP script:
Read function: getmacval[num]

Write function: setmacval[num_value]
num Macro variable number
Specify, as a constant, a temporary variable, input variable, or argument variable
where the number of a macro variable to be read or written is written, or a variable
number.
value Write value to be set
Specify, as a constant, a temporary variable, input variable, or argument variable
where a value to be written to a macro variable number is written, or a desired value
itself.
CAUTION
The FP functions for indirectly referencing a custom macro variable or P code
macro variable can be used only in an FP script. Do not set the functions in the
FP function property of each control.
Example:
When the values set in #501 to #520 are to be displayed after inch-to-millimeter conversion,
multiple macro variables can be displayed with one script by specifying the following:
FP script 109:
DISP_VAL = getmacval[ARG[0]] * 25.4;
- 135 -
FP function property setting on the control side

FP_Script[109_501] Displays the value of #[501] in mm.
FP_Script[109_520] Displays the value of #[520] in mm.
When a value input in mm is converted to a value in inches for setting in a macro variable, multiple
macro variables can be set with one script by specifying the following:
Script 110:
DVAL[0]= INPUT_DVAL / 25.4;
setmacval[ARG[0]_DVAL[0]];
Setting on the control side
FP_Script[110_501] Writes the millimeter value input to #[501] in inches.
FP_Script[110_520] Writes the millimeter value input to #[520] in inches.
(2-9) Variable for the timer driven operation function

Following constant values show the execution state of the FP script for the timer driven operation
function.
These initial values and usages for an assignment command and a comparison operator are as
follows:
Variable Initial value Assignment command Comparison operator

ERROR_TYPE 0 Settable on right side and left side
ERROR_SCRIPT_NO -1
ERROR_FPFUNC_NO 0
ERROR_FPFUNC_CODE 0 Settable on right side Settable on right side
ERROR_MACRO_NO 0 only and left side
SCREEN_NO 0
FOCUS_NO 0
(a) ERROR_TYPE
It shows a kind of an error in the FP script that is driven by the timer in the FP driver. It can be
specified on either the right side or the left side of an assignment command or comparison operator.
Value Meaning
0 No error
3 Assignment command for constant
4 Macro variable (custom macro or macro executor variable) read error
6 Macro variable write error
8 Divide by 0
11 FP function error
12 FP script data is not found
13 FP script number is not found
14 Invalid FP function is used
NOTE
When this value becomes other than 0, the execution of the FP script will be
canceled after the place in which the error is detected and all executions of
the FP script by the timer are stopped. By setting 0 to this value, the
executions of the FP script are started again.
- 136 -
(b) ERROR_SCRIPT_NO
It shows a script number where an error occurs in the timer driven operation function.
(c) ERROR_FPFUNC_NO
It shows a FP function that makes an error in the timer driven operation function. Its number
shows that the line number of the Data\function.lst file in the installation folder of FANUC
PICTURE, and the name of the FP function that makes the error is described in the line. (The top
line number = 0)
(d) ERROR_FPFUNC_CODE
It shows an error code of a FP function that makes an error in the timer driven operation function.
It is the same as one of the CNC/PMC window library functions in the C language executor.
(e) ERROR_MACRO_NO
It shows a macro variable number that makes an error in the timer driven operation function.
(f) SCREEN_NO
It shows a screen number that is being displayed.
For the screen number, see Subsection 2.2.10.5, "Automatic screen call function based on the
PMC signals".
(g) FOCUS_NO
It shows an identification number of the control with the input focus.
When no control with the input focus exists, it is 0.
For the identification number, see "Data Change Report Function" of Subsection 2.3.3, "Screen
Structure Definition Control".
(3) Using an FP function

FP function for read:
An FP function for read can be specified only on the right side of an assignment command (=).
A value read by an FP function for read is used as the value of the operation term on the right
side.
FP function for write:
An FP function for write can be specified only on the left side of an assignment command.
The result of operation on the right side is used as the write value for an FP function for write.
An FP function can be specified within a script. However, the following functions may not be used:
copyval
idprogdel, idprogsrch
idrdmac, idwrmac
idrdpmac2, idwrpmac2
idrdpmc, idwrpmc
idrdpmcb, idwrpmcb
idrdset2, idwrset
idrdtofs2, idwrtofs
rdmacro, wrmacro
rdpmacro, wrpmacro
FP_Script
In addition, functions that return a character string or rectangular character string data may not
be used.
In the timer driven operation function, the available FP functions are different from ones in the usual FP
script to be driven in controls.
- 137 -
i) The following FP functions can be used only in the FP script that is executed by the timer in the
FP driver.
rdprgnum, rdseqnum, actf, acts,

absolute, machine, relative, distance,
alarm, adcnv, loadtorq, acts2,
swpath, rdspload, wrpmcb, rdpmc,
wrpmc, rdpmcb, getmacval, setmacval,
set_handler, remove_handler fetchtool rdtool
unfetchtool
・ When one of the FP functions makes an error, error information is stored in the variable
ERROR_FPFUNC_NO and ERROR_FPFUNC_CODE.
・ Any FP functions to make settings of controls cannot be used.
ii) In the FP script that is executed in the startup of CNC or the events (opening/closing screen or
moving input focus), the following FP script cannot be used.
settimer, setrdprgtop, wrcursor, actf3,
absolute3, machine3, relative3, distance3,
skip3, srvdelay3, accdecdly3, rdtofs3,
rdzofs3, movrlap3, setdecimal, setmaxlimit,
setminlimit
・ The swscreen function cannot be used for the FP script that is executed in the startup of
CNC.
・ The rdcursor function can be used only in the FP script that is executed at moving input
focus.
User function
When using user functions, write the user function names, one on each line, in UserFunc.txt held in
the FPScript folder under the project folder. By doing so, it becomes possible to specify those user
functions in a script. For information about user functions, see Chapter 4, "EMBEDDING OF C
APPLICATIONS".
usr_Func1
usr_Func2
*For information about user functions, see Chapter 4, "EMBEDDING OF C APPLICATIONS".
FP functions specifiable on the left side

General FP functions may be specified only on the right side of an expression. However, the FP
functions indicated below may be specified on the left side as well. In this case, specify an FP
function alone on the left side. If an FP function is specified on the left side as in script example 1
below, the value of the right side is assigned to data or number indicated in the table. Script example
1 may also be written as script example 2.
Example 1) wrpmc[9_124_2_0]=LVAL[0];
Example 2) wrpmc[9_124_2_ LVAL[0]];
- 138 -
FP function specifiable on the left side

Function Assignment argument Function argument list
wrpmcb data wrpmcb[adrtype_snumber_bitpos_data]
wrpmc data wrpmc[adrtype_snumber_datatype_data]
wrtofs data wrtofs[number_type_data_pmc_address]
wrset data wrset[number_axis_length_data_pmc_address]
progdel number progdel[number_pmc_address]
progsrch number progsrch[number_pmc_address]
Argument for path number in FP functions

In the multi path system, a path number is usually specified in the last argument of the FP functions.
However, in the FP script, it is indicated by the setpath function like the following example. Do not
specify it in the argument of the FP functions.
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
//ARG[0]:Position type, ARG[1]:axis no, ARG[2]:path no
//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
WVAL[0]=getpath[0]; // Gets the current path no
setpath[ARG[2]]; // Changes the path no ARG[2]
if(ARG[0]==0){ // Absolute position
DISP_VAL=absolute[ARG[1]]; // Displays position of axis no ARG[1]
}else if(ARG[0]==1){ // Relative position
DISP_VAL=relative[ARG[1]]; // Displays position of axis no ARG[1]
}
setpath[WVAL[0]]; // Restores the original path no
(4) Script statements
(4-1) Processing statement

On processing statement lines, code script statements such as an assignment command, GOTO statement,
and if statement explained below. Each line should include only one processing statement. At the end of
each statement, be sure to add a semicolon (;). However, do not add a semicolon after braces ({ and })
used with "(4-4) if statement".
(4-2) Comment
On a line, the data from "//" to the line end is treated as a comment.
(4-3) Assignment command

A statement that has the variable on the left side connected with the item on the right side by "=" as
indicated below is referred to as an assignment command or assignment statement. With such a command
or statement, the value of the right side is assigned to the variable on the left side.
WVAL[0] = ARG[0]*1000;
UBVAL[0] = :TOOL_COUNT_No01:;
On the left side of an assignment command, no polynomial may be used. That is, a syntax as
indicated below is unusable.
BVAL[0] + BVAL[1] = BVAL[2] ;
- 139 -
(4-4) if statement
Examples of if statement using a test expression and processing are given below.
In a test expression, the assignment command "=" may not be used.
Enclose, in braces ({ }), a processing statement to be executed according to the result of test even when
the statement is a single statement.
Example 1
if ( test-expression-1 ) {
processing-statement-1
}
When (test-expression-1) after if is satisfied, processing-statement-1 is executed.
Example 2
if ( test-expression-1 ) {
} else {
}
When (test-expression-1) after if is satisfied, processing-statement-1 is executed. When

(test-expression-1) is not satisfied, processing-statement-2 after else is executed.
Example 3
if ( test-expression-1 ){
}
else if ( test-expression-2 ){
}
When (test-expression-1) after if is satisfied, processing-statement-1 is executed. When

(test-expression-1) after if is not satisfied, (test-expression-2) after else if is tested.
When (test-expression-2) is satisfied, processing-statement-2 is executed. No processing
statement to be executed when (test-expression-2) is not satisfied is specified.
Limit on the number of if statement nesting levels

Nesting to a depth of up to five levels is allowed.
- 140 -
Stack limit
With a complex syntax, a stack overflow can occur.
Do not code complicated processing on one line. Instead, it is recommended to divide such a
line into multiple lines.
When the else if statement is used, the number of nesting levels increases as shown below.
if(test-expression-1){//level-1 if(test-expression-1){//level-1
processing-statement-1 processing-statement-1
} }
else else{//level-1
if(test-expression-2){//level-2 if(test-expression-2){//level-2
processing-statement-2 processing-statement-2
(4-5) Label and jump command

With the command indicated below, the processing of the script can jump.
Be sure to code a label at the start of a line or immediately after "{".
GOTO L1; Causes a jump to the label L1.
L1: Specifies the label L1. Be sure to add a colon (:) after a label name.
(4-6) Return command

If a RETURN command is specified, the script after the RETURN command is not executed but the
processing of the FP_Script function is terminated.
RETURN;
(4-7) Loop control statement

A loop control statement can be made using an if statement and GOTO statement. An example of coding
a loop control statement is given below.
In the example, 100 loops are executed with the loop control variable WVAL[0] changing from 0 to 99.
WVAL[0]=0;
L_REPEAT:
processing-statement;
if (WVAL[1]>= ARG[0]) { GOTO L_BREAK;}
WVAL[0]=WVAL[0]+1;
if (WVAL[0]<100) {GOTO L_REPEAT;}
L_BREAK:
(5)Settings of controls with FP script

Some settings of controls can be changed by the FP functions.
The FP functions that can be used for settings of controls are as follows:
Function Name Function

setdecimal Setting of the number of decimal positions
setmaxlimit Setting of the maximum value
setminlimit Setting of the minimum value
* The above FP functions can be used in the FP script only.
* For the specification of each function, see the sub section 3.1.5 "function reference of FP script".
The settings of CNC/PMC can be changed dynamically by using the script sentence structures or the FP
functions for CNC/PMC window.
- 141 -
In the following, it shows a sample setting of the number of decimal positions according to the value of
PMC(R1000).
2.2.15.5 Notes and restrictions on FP scripts

1. If many FP scripts are executed during screen display, the screen display performance degrades.
Script statements should be made proper, and script processing should be tuned to provide
comfortable operation.
2. Peculiar data variables in an FP script are used to read from and write to common variables and
PMC areas among execution macros, auxiliary macros, conversational macros, custom macros, and
PMC ladder sequences. So, if any of these macro programs and ladder sequences writes to a variable
or PMC area used with the FP script, the written value can change during processing by those
programs, sequences, and FP script. To avoid this problem, ensure that a mechanism for exclusive
control is incorporated or each program, sequence, or script writes to a different variable or PMC
area.
3. If a value beyond the valid range of each data type is assigned, a digit overflow occurs. In such a
case, the overflowing portion of a value is discarded. For example, an unsigned word data addition
such as (65535 + 1) results in 0.
4. All values in a script are managed as floating-point numbers, so that some errors are involved.
Accordingly, when the value of a temporary variable is tested, for example, the error in the least
significant digit of a floating-point number may need to be corrected by round-off processing.
Example) When the following script is executed, the value of :R0BYTE: becomes 2:
DVAL[0]=0.0001;
DVAL[1]=0;
WVAL[0]=0;
L_REPEAT:
DVAL[1]=DVAL[1]+DVAL[0];
WVAL[0]=WVAL[0]+1;
if (WVAL[0]<10000){
GOTO L_REPEAT;
}
if (DVAL[1]==1.0000) {
:R0BYTE:=1;
}
else{
:R0BYTE:=2;
}
- 142 -
5. The syntax and data type for processing using character string data or character string data pointers
are not supported.
6. An FP script undergoes a syntax check when a MEM file is created. If a syntax error is found, MEM
file generation is terminated abnormally with the dialog box shown below. As error information, a
script number, illegal line number, and error details are indicated in an error log file.
Clicking the Yes button above opens an error log file as indicated below.
Example of message:
Script compile error. Script No.0

Line:3 Illegal token function,left of <･･･>.
Line:3 Illegal token function.
7. The constant NAN or HUGE_VAL cannot be substituted to DISP_VAL. The screen made by
FANUC PICTURE maybe stopped if substituting it.
8. There is no real time ability in the FP script that is executed periodically by the timer driven operation
function.
When a heavy task is processed in CNC such as the high precision machining, the execution of the FP
script may be stopped.
And when the load of CNC is low, the execution of the FP script may be delayed up to 256ms behind
the time specified by the FP function "set_handler".
9. When many FP scripts are executed by the timer driven operation function, the performance of screen
made by FANUC PICTURE may become worse.
- 143 -
2.2.16 Option
FANUC PICTURE allows you to set the operating environment for creating an operator's screen,
optionally.
2.2.16.1 Color
The type of the color depth used on the screen can be selected.
Compatible:
The same depth colors as with the former FANUC PICTURE /A08B-9010-J514#ZZ11 are used.
Real:
Drawings are displayed in colors closer to the original as compared with Compatible.
When creating a custom screen for a CNC of the is-series, be sure to select "Real".
2.2.16.2 List edit
A type of property to be displayed in the list edit window can be selected.
All : All control properties are displayed.

Caption only:
Among the property items, only the multi-language caption, object ID, and tab index are displayed.
- 144 -
2.2.16.3 Environment
A screen environment can be set.
Grid
Set the width and height of a grid to be displayed on the screen in the range 4 to 80. Set values are
automatically saved.
2.2.16.4 Bitmap output
The language can be set when the screen bitmap output tool outputs bitmap files, which are explained in
2.2.13 "Collective screen bitmap output function".
Bitmap language key

The multi-language keys that are set in the project setting dialog box of FANUC PICTURE are
displayed in the combo box.
- 145 -
2.2.17 Help
Clicking Help on the menu displays FANUC PICTURE help and version information.
- 146 -
2.3 CONTROLS
2.3.1 Procedure for Setting Properties Common to Controls

2.3.1.1 Description of general property setting items
OK button
This button validates property settings and quits the dialog box.
Cancel button
This button cancels the currently open property setting items (properties of General in the dialog box
above) and quits the dialog box.
If any of the following operations is performed in the past, the properties are updated even when you
click this button.
1. You have clicked the Apply button.
2. You have moved from the current tab to a different one.
Apply button
Click this button to apply the current property settings. The property dialog box is not terminated,
but the display of the controls on the form is updated according to the settings. Moving from the
currently displayed tab to another tab has the effect of clicking the Apply button. In other words, all
updated items are reflected in the control display on the form.
- 147 -
Coordinate specification
A position on the screen is represented by two-dimensional coordinates
(0,0) (X,Y) with the upper-left corner of the screen set as the origin (0,0). (See
the figure at left.) The following indicates the specifiable ranges:
X coordinate
The display unit resolution:For VGA
(0,0) ≤ coordinates (X,Y) ≤ (639,479)
Y coordinate (1,1) ≤ (width,height) ≤ (639,479)
The display unit resolution:For XGA
(0,0) ≤ coordinates (X,Y) ≤ (1023,767)
(1,1) ≤ (width,height) ≤ (1023,767)
[X] and [Y] on the General tab of the Property Pages of each control represent a control position on the
screen. Precisely, [X] and [Y] specify the coordinates of the upper-left corner of the rectangle defining the
outside figure of a control. [Width] and [Height] represent the width and height of a control, respectively.
The position and size of a control can be modified using the mouse on the editing screen. The position
and size of a control can also be modified by updating the coordinates, and width and height values.
If the properties specifying coordinates and width and height values do not satisfy the condition described
below, screen data is not output at the time of memory card file generation. If a control extending to the
right edge or bottom is not displayed on the touch panel, check the coordinate-related properties.
VGA: (1,1)≤(X coordinate+width, Y coordinate+height)≤(639,479)
XGA: (1,1)≤(X coordinate+width, Y coordinate+height)≤(1023,767)
On Caption is copied onto Off Caption

The following controls, which have both On and Off captions, have a caption copy check box:
Screen switch control
Lamp control
Button control
Framed button control
Checking this check box causes the On caption settings to be automatically copied as the Off caption
settings.
Optional new line mark of caption

New line can be described by “\n”.
- 148 -
Character Type
The following table shows the characters displayable for each character type and their display sizes in the
cases where the number of soft keys is 5 + 2(9inch) and 10 + 2(14inch) (including the cases where a
touch panel is used).
Uppercase Lowercase Symbol Kanji/ Half-size (width : height)pixel

Character type alphanumeri kana/ characters Small Big
alphabetic s
c hiragana Half-size kana 14inch 9inch
Half size Half size
ANK (displays a mixture of
8:16 16:25
half-size and 2x-size O O O O O
Full size Full size
characters)
16:16 32:25
X2 (Half-size characters set
for a caption are displayed O O O X X 16:16 32:25
as 2x characters.)
X4 (displays characters two
times larger vertically and O O O X X 16:32 16:32
horizontally)
X6 (displays characters two
times larger vertically and
O X X X X 24:32 48:50
three times larger
horizontally)
SMALL (displays characters
smaller than half-size O X Δ Partly X X 8: 8 8:12
characters)
CAUTION :
The X4 character has the same dot size regardless of the number of soft keys. And in case of other than Series
0i-D, Series30i /31i /32i/35i, Power Motion i-A, the performance of the entire screen becomes slow if there are
many X4 or SMALL characters. The minimum use of them is recommended.
Editing multi-language display captions

The following explains how to edit the On and Off captions of buttons and lamps in each language.
The setting operation explained below is possible if The Multi-Language display function is used. Is
checked in the [Setting of project] tab. As an example, the explanation uses the caption-setting property in
the Action tab in the property dialog box of a lamp control. The caption properties of other controls can
also be set in each language with the same procedure.
<1>
<2>
- 149 -
If the screen of a project created on a version of FANUC PICTURE into which the multi-language
display function is not incorporated is to be converted into a multi-language display screen, the
previously set captions will be automatically set as those for the language of the first multi-language key
(item number: 01) additionally registered by performing a multi-language editing operation on the caption
property; click the Apply button in the Character tab. During this editing operation, for a control that does
not require multi-language switching, check the [No use multi-language] check box and click the Apply
button.
Properties related to multi-language input

No use multi-language :
Check this item for a control that does not require multi-language display switching, as in a case in
which the caption-related property may be the same characters regardless of the display language.
Multi-language key :
Select the multi-language key to be displayed or input for the caption-related property.
In a tab having captions, a property for multi-language input is provided, such as that shown in <1> in the
above figure. The basic operation is to select the multi-language key to be set for a caption from the
[Multi-language key] combo box and enter characters for the caption shown in <2>. In this way, a
multi-language display language can be set.
Selecting another language for the multi-language key being edited causes the character strings set for the
selected language to be displayed for the On and Off captions.
- 150 -
The above property dialog box is that of an MDI key control. There are cases in which the key top
character as a caption item may be “#” for any language display. In such cases, check No use
multi-language.
Method of setting a character type when the multi-language character type

function is enabled
When the multi-language character type function is enabled in [Setting or project], a character type can be
set for each display language by switching the Multi-language key.
The setting of character type changes interactively

with selection using the multi-language key,
enabling a setting to be made for each language.
CAUTION
When the multi-language character type function is enabled, a character type
needs to be set for each language key.
- 151 -
Color specification
Clicking a color button … on the Image tab opens the Color dialog box. In this dialog box, select a
desired color, then click OK to set a color property. On the LCD on the CNC, a color closest to a
specified color is displayed.
2.3.1.2 Editing text message files

Structure of a text file and editing it
A text file has a spreadsheet structure such as that shown below.
Number:
If using numbers as the interface with the PMC, enter the text number. If this number is written to
the number interface of the PMC, the written character string is displayed to a [Message] input cell.
This item must always be specified. So, even when using the bit interface, set a number starting with
1 in this item.
- 152 -
Bit set:
If using bit correspondence specifications as the interface with the PMC, specify the serial number
for the number of bits used. You can specify a numbers up to 511 or 2047, with the search start bit
assumed to be 0.
Char color:
Specify the message display character color. Double-clicking the left mouse button causes a color
setting dialog box to appear; select the desired color.
Message:
Divide a message to be displayed with the text string display control into cell. Messages of up to
1020 characters in total can be created.
Allow to specify back color:
Background color specification function enabled when the text character string indication control is
used. Specify this item when using a background display color for the control.
Checking the check box displays a [Back color] column.
Back color:
This column is displayed when the [Allow to specify back color] check box is checked. Specify a
background display color for the text character string indication control. Double-clicking the left
mouse button displays a color setting dialog box. Select a desired color.
Add row :
This spreadsheet contains 100 rows. If they are not enough, enter the number of additional rows in
the [Add row] input field and click the Add row button, and the specified number of rows are added
at the end of the last row.
- 153 -
Insert Row :
When a certain cell is selected entirely, moving the cursor to the position at which rows are to be
inserted and clicking the Insert Row button causes the Number Setting dialog box to appear; enter
the number of rows to be inserted. The specified number of rows are added at the row on the sheet
on which the cursor is positioned.
Delete Rows :
Drag the cursor vertically to select the range of rows to be deleted at a time. Clicking the Del
Row button causes the deletion confirmation dialog box to appear; click either OK or Cancel. If OK
is selected, the selected rows are deleted.
Number Set :
With the number of the number cell on which the cursor is positioned as the start number, this
option automatically sets the specified number of numbers plus one number, starting with the cursor
row in the downward direction.
Bit set :
With the bit of the Bit Set cell on which the cursor is positioned as the start number, this option
automatically sets the specified bit number position of signals whose bit numbers increment by 1,
starting with the cursor row.
Check Char :
This option checks the message text on all lines to see if the set message character string contains
characters that cannot be displayed with the character type of the character property of the control.
OK :
Terminates editing. Clicking it causes the [Save As] dialog box to appear, allowing you to save the
message file with a new name. If you do not want to change the file name, select the [Same as
Previous] file name and click the Save button.
- 154 -
Cancel :
Cancels a file editing operation.
Copy&Paste
Rectangular copy [CNTL+C] and paste [CNTL+V] in the direction of the row can be done to cells
other than the character color. Moreover, the copy character can be done from the clipboard of
Windows and the paste be done to the Windows application or the text message editor. By
[CNTL+V], rectangular cut can be done.
However, please note the following items which are these limitations.
CAUTION
With Edition 1.10 or later, the following restrictions are no longer imposed:
1 The copy that there is new line in the cell such as Excel does not become
new line in the cell in the text message editor. Therefore, please delete or
replace new line in the cell such as Excel with “\n”.
2 Please give the copied direction of the row as one row. Please note that the
character string of two or more cells enters the beginning cell of the paste
(cell in left upper corner) for two rows or more.
Multi-language editing related to text messages

The following explains how to handle the multi-language display function of a type that writes messages
to text message files (MSGXML files), as well as the editing method.
If you start editing of new text message file when The Multi-language display function is used. Is checked
in [Setting of project]-[Setting of Multi-language], the file type selection dialog box shown in the figure
above appears. Select the desired type and click OK, and a text message setting sheet of the selected type
appears. If you select Multi language, an editing dialog box appears, providing multiple sheets for
individual multi-language keys. “Number”, “Bit set”, “Back color”, and “Char color” are common to all
language sheets. Any changes made to these items on any of the sheets will be reflected in the other
sheets.
If you start editing of existing text message file, the editing dialog box shown below appears. The Add
sheet, Rename sheet name, Delete sheet, Import... and Export... buttons are provided for
multi-language editing, and the check box called [No use multi-language] is also provided. The
previously created messages are registered with the language sheet of an item number of 01.
Add sheet button :

This button is effective if The Multi-language display function is used. Is checked in [Setting of
project]-[Setting of Multi-language]. Clicking this button will cause message setting sheets to be
added for individual registered multi-language keys.
- 155 -
The Add Sheet button adds

sheets for multi-language keys.
Rename sheet name button :

If, after adding a multi-language message sheet, you rename a multi-language key with [Setting of
project], you must change the old sheet name to the same name as the new multi-language sheet
name.
Select the tab of the sheet you want to rename by clicking it. Then, click the Rename sheet name
button. From [Changed sheet name] in the dialog box that appears, select the multi-language key and
click the OK button.
Alternatively, you can directly change the sheet name in the dialog box displayed by double-clicking
the tab of the sheet you want to rename to the same name as that of the multi-language key.
- 156 -
Double-click the tab of the sheet you want to

rename to display the sheet name input dialog box.
Delete sheet button :

This button deletes an unnecessary sheet.
Select the tab of the sheet you want to delete by clicking it. Then, press the Delete sheet button. The
dialog box for confirming deletion appears. Click either the OK or Cancel button.
No use multi-language :
For a text message file to which a sheet for multi-language input has been added, check this item if
message switching due to multi-language display switching is not performed for the messages. If this
item is checked, the message to be displayed will be the one created on the first sheet.
- 157 -
CAUTION
When the multi-language character type function is enabled, a character type
can be set for each language key with the following controls referencing a text
message file, even if this setting is enabled:
• Text character string indication control
• Composite message indication control
• History message indication control
So, be sure to set a character type for each language key even if the
multi-language function is not used.
About Import and Export

With the Export... button and Import... button, message character string data can be exchanged
with Excel of Microsoft.
By editing an exported file with Excel then importing the edited file, message character string
modification and multi-language display can be performed easily.
Export... Button:
This button outputs the contents of all sheets to a tab-delimited text file.
The [Save as] dialog box is displayed. Specify a save destination file name then click the Save button.
- 158 -
・ Default save destination → (project-folder-name)\StringData

・ Default file name → (message-file-name-being-edited).csv
If the export operation is not completed successfully, the error indicated below is displayed.
When the file cannot be created

(For example, when access right is not granted, a read-only file with the same name already exists, and so
forth)
When the disk size is insufficient
- 159 -
Import... Button:
This button inputs an exported tab-delimited text file.
The [Open] dialog box is displayed. Specify a read source file name then click the Open button.
・ Default read source → (project-folder-name)\StringData

・ Default file name → (message-file-name-being-edited).csv
*.csv when the file name cannot be found
Upon completion of import, the contents displayed on each sheet of the text message editing dialog box
are updated.
If the import operation is not completed successfully, the error indicated below is displayed.
・ When access right is not granted
・ When the file format is incorrect
The importable file format is as follows:

・ Text file that has each item delimited by a tab character, has the extension .csv, and uses the character
code Unicode (UTF-16, little endian)
・ Lines 1 to 2: Header section. Item names on the text message editing dialog box and a
multi-language name are displayed. Do not modify exported data.
・ Line 3 and up: Data section. Line-by-line data of each sheet is indicated.
Column 1: Number used for interfacing with the PMC
(Value of the "Number" column on a sheet)
- 160 -
Column 2: Bit used for interfacing with the PMC
(Value of the "Bit set" column on a sheet)
Column 3 and up: Multi-language message character string
CAUTION
When editing an exported file with Excel, modify only the "multi-language
message character string" portion of the data section. When saving a file, use
the file name extension .csv and the file format of Unicode text.
At the time of import, the lines that have none of "Number" and "Bit set" of the data section used for
interfacing with the PMC on the editing dialog box, namely, the message character strings that do not
exist on the sheet, are not read but are skipped. In this case, the following warning dialog box is displayed
upon completion of import:
The message character strings of those languages that are not set with the project are ignored. In this case,
no particular warning is output.
2.3.1.3 Creating custom screens for non-touch panel display units

Using FANUC PICTURE lets you create custom screens used on non-touch panel display units. The
display units must be provided with graphic functions.
When creating a custom screen, you specify what display unit type the target CNC has, using the
[Setting…]-[Project]- menu bar button on FANUC PICTURE.
The method of creating screens for a monochrome display unit is the same as for ordinary color screens.
The display unit automatically converts colors to 16-level monochrome colors (white, back, and gray). To
perform screen editing in a state similar to that of an actual monochrome display unit, however,
monochrome gradation levels as many as necessary must be created in the color setting dialog box then
screen colors must be set using created colors.
- 161 -
At this time, it is recommended that up to four to eight gradation levels be used and that color values be
equally set as indicated in the example below. Nine or more gradation levels can be used. However, as
more gradation levels are used, colors become less distinguishable from each other on an actual display
unit.
Example of setting five gradation levels
Palette color Red Green Blue
White 255 255 255
Light gray 191 191 191
Gray 127 127 127
Dark gray 63 63 63
Black 0 0 0
In the same manner as for custom screens for touch panel display units, basic editing operations for those
for non-touch panel display units are implemented by placing controls in a form and specifying properties
for them. On top of this, specifying additional properties briefly described below completes custom
screens for non-touch panel display units. These additional properties can be also used to create custom
screens for touch panel display units without changing their settings. If a custom screen is designed by
taking the characteristics of both types of display units into consideration, the created screen data can be
used to run the custom screen on both display unit types, provided that the custom screen has 10+2 soft
keys.
Tab - Property
Control Name Brief description
Name
Screen Switch
Button
A button operation set up on the Action tab can be
Framed Button Shortcut key
executed, using a specified soft key or MDI key.
Screen Switch with image
Button with image
This tab is used to specify movement rules applied
in selecting (focusing) an input control on a form with
Screen Set Focus rule tab
the cursor key. It is also used to specify whether to
enable the continuous input function.
Numeral Indication Control with Key This tab is used to set up a focusing index number
Input for determining the order in which the focus is to
Numeral Indication Control for Calling a move. It is also used optionally to specify individual
Focus tab
Ten-Key Pad focus movement rules rather than common focus
movement rules and disable the continuous input
PMC Area Character String Indication
function.
- 162 -
CAUTION
An MDI unit is necessary to use a non-touch panel display unit. Using the
following controls in this configuration is meaningless; their existence within a
custom screen does not do harm, however.
• MDI key control
• MDI keyboard control
Term Explanation
This term collectively refers to the following controls:
1. Numeral Indication control with Key Input
Control with input
2. Numeral Indication control for Calling a Ten-Key Pad
3. PMC Area character string Indication control
This term pertains to a state that a control with input on a screen has been selected
Focus
for data input.
On a non-touch panel display unit, each button/switch is so configured that pressing a soft key or MDI
key associated with the button executes the operation set up for the button. A shortcut key property is
used to associate a button with a key.
On a display unit with touch panel, a control with input is selected by touching it. On a non-touch panel
display unit, to the contrary, a control with input is selected by moving the focus to it with cursor keys,
and data is input using the method corresponding to the selected control (Calling a Ten-Key Pad, Key-in
buffer, or pop-up screen for input).
This is realized by setting up continuous focusing index numbers for individual controls with input on
each form (main screen or sub screen). Assignment of focusing index numbers can be compared to
assignment of uniform numbers (focusing index numbers) to individual players (controls with input) in
each baseball team (form). Next, a common focus movement rule is set up. It determines which control is
to gain the focus next time a cursor key is pressed.
Example of specifying focusing index numbers for each screen and setting up a common focus movement rule
Main screen Common focus movement rule
Screen form
1 2 Sub screen１ ↑ ↓ ← →
1 2 3 Main screen -2 ② -1 ①
3 4 Sub screen１ -3 ③ -1 ①
4 5 6 Sub screen２ -1 ① -2 ②
5 6 Basic operation in accordance with a common focus
Sub screen２ movement rule
The focus is moved to a number obtained by adding an
7 8 1 3 increment/decrement set up for a pressed cursor key to
the current index number.
9 10 2 4 If the focus is at No. 1 on the main screen, pressing the
down cursor key moves the focus to No. 3 (= 1 + ②).
Pressing the right cursor key moves the focus to No. 2 (= 1
+ ①).
A direct-specification focus movement rule can optionally be set up. This setting can specify an arbitrary
movement order directly for individual controls with input rather than a movement order determined
according to the common focus movement rule.
- 163 -
About focus indication and movement on a screen

No focus is displayed when a customer screen appears for the first time. Pressing a cursor key searches
through controls with input in the order “main screen → subscreen 1 → . . . → subscreen 10” and puts the
focus on a control having the lowest focusing index number within the custom screen. After this, the
focus moves in the direction corresponding to any pressed cursor key according to the common focus
movement rule for the screen and the direct-specification focus movement rule. If the focus is on a control
having the highest focusing index number within a screen, and there is no more control in the direction
corresponding to a certain cursor key, pressing this cursor key moves the focus to a control having the
lowest focusing index number on the next subscreen. Assuming that the focus is on a control having a
maximum index number of 10 on the main screen in the previous example, “Example on specifying
focusing index numbers for each screen and setting up a common focus movement rule,” pressing the →
or ↓ cursor key moves the focus to a control having a minimum index number of 1 on subscreen 1. Under
this condition, pressing the ↑ or ← cursor key moves the focus back to the control having the maximum
index number (10) on the main screen. Pressing the CAN key causes the focus to disappear. If characters
remain for a key-in buffer control, pressing the CAN key erases one of the characters rather than moving
the focus. Pressing the CAN key can clear the focus only when there remains no character in the key-in
buffer.
2.3.1.4 Continuous input function

On a data setting custom screen on which there are two or more numeral indication controls with key
input, numeral indication controls for calling a ten-key pad, and PMC area character string indication
controls, using the continuous input function can input data continuously without selecting a control after
each item of data is input.
The continuous input function is implemented with the “focus movement function for selecting a control
with input using cursor keys” that is necessary on a non-touch panel display unit. To put it another way,
performing continuous inputs manually requires pressing a cursor key to move the focus to the next
control each time data input for a control is completed. The continuous input function automatically
performs operations equivalent to pressing of the cursor keys. An option is available which can be used to
stop continuous input after data input for a control with input at a specific location is finished.
This function can be used on any display unit type, no matter whether it has a touch panel.
CAUTION
When using a pop-up screen to input data for a control with input, observe the
following:
1. To perform continuous input, specify a pop-up main screen name for data
input as a “Pop-up screen name” property.
2. Be sure to place a pop-up erase button on each pop-up main screen for data
input. Otherwise, it will become impossible to:
<1> Stop continuous input.
<2> Automatically erase the pop-up screen after continuous data input is
finished.
- 164 -
2.3.1.5 Explanations of additional property items

[ Setting…] menu bar button
Pressing the [Setting… ] menu bar button causes the following dialog box to appear. It lets you specify
the configuration of the target CNC system before creating a custom screen. If the CNC system has a
without touch panel display unit, the dialog box lets you specify also the number of soft keys, focus color,
the type of a key to be used to call a data input pop-up screen for controls with input.
- 165 -
Shortcut key property

A “Shortcut key” property has been added to the Action tab for the following button/switch controls.
1. Screen Switch control
2. Button Control
3. Framed Button Control
4. Screen Switch Control with image
5. Button Control with image
Shortcut key :
If you want to execute an operation set up on the Action tab by pressing an associated shortcut key,
turn on this check box.
An operation associated to the shortcut key setting can be executed by pressing the key on the
display unit, no matter whether it has a touch panel, or touching the corresponding button on the
touch panel (if available).
The following key types can be selected:
1. Soft keys (FL, F1 – F10, and FR for 10 + 2 soft keys
FL, F1 - F5, and FR for 5 + 2 soft keys
VF1-VF8, and VF9 for the vertical soft keys
F1A-F25Y and the vertical soft keys VFR1-VFR8 and VFL1-VFL8 for 8 + 13/13 + 8 soft
keys)
2. Cursor / Page key (←, →, ↑, ↓, Page-UP, Page-DOWN)
3. Edit key (CAN, INPUT, ALTER, INSERT, DELETE)
4. HELP key
- 166 -
The figure below shows the soft key name and the position in case of 5+2 soft keys.
LCD
FL F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 FR
The figure below shows the soft key name and the position in case of 10+2,or 10+2+9 soft keys.
VF1
VF2
VF3
VF4
VF5
LCD
VF6
VF7
VF8
VF9
FL F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 FR
- 167 -
The figure below shows the soft key names and positions in the case of 8+13/13+8 soft keys. In this case,
the soft keys at the F13M and F26Z positions cannot be specified actually as shortcut key codes.
VFL1 VFR1
VFL2 VFR2
VFL3 VFR3
VFL4 VFR4
MDI
LCD
VFL5 VFR5 Key
VFL6 VFR6
VFL7 VFR7
VFL8 VFR8
F1A F2B F3C F4D F5E F6F F7G F8H F9I F10J F11K F12L (F13M)
F14N F15O F16P F17Q F18R F19S F20T F21U F22V F23W F24X F25Y (F26Z)
Control with additional focus-related properties

To the following indication controls, a focus tab is added:
1. Numeral Indication Control with Key Input
2. Numeral Indication Control for Calling a Ten-Key Pad
3. PMC Area Character String Indication Control
- 168 -
Focus index
For an individual screen (form), specify a focusing index number to be used to determine the order
in which the focus moves through key controls with input and the order in which continuous inputs
are performed, using either of the following two methods. These methods have their own features.
Select one whichever is convenient for you.
Specify the focusing index of this control as:

Select this method if you want to use a property provided on this Focus tab to specify a focusing
index number for determining the order in which the focus moves. The focusing index number must
be input to the editbox on the line just below this option button. If the screen (form) has tow or more
focusing index numbers, they must be continuous. For a control to which the focus is not to move,
specify 0 as its focusing index number. More than one focusing index can be 0.
0: The focus does not move to a control whose focusing index number is 0.
1 and greater:
These numbers indicate the order in which the focus moves through the controls. The focusing
index numbers must be continuous within each screen.
Use TabIndex property for focusing index:

This setting cannot be used at present.
CAUTION
1 If “Specify the focusing index” is selected, do not use the same number for two
or more focusing indexes within one screen (form).
2 For both Focusing index and TabIndex numbers, the lowest number must not
necessarily be 1, but all numbers used must be continuous.
Focus movement rule

If you want to move the focus directly to a specific control rather than putting it on a control
determined according to the common focus movement rule set up on the Focus rule tab of the Screen
Set control, set up a focusing index number for the control for an individual cursor key. This setting
is referenced also in determining the continuous input order for the continuous input function.
UP key, DOWN key, LEFT key, RIGHT key:

As the property of each of the ↑, ↓, ←, and → keys, specify a focusing index number or TabIndex
number assigned to a control to which the focus it to put next. The index numbers that can be
specified are those within the current screen. If an index number out of range is specified, the focus
will move to the next subscreen or to the first or last control with input on the current screen.
If the specified value is 0, the focus will move to the control obtained according to the “Common
focus movement rule.”
Don’t move focus to the next control after data input operation.:
If you want to stop continuous input after data is input to the control of interest, turn on the check
box for the “Don’t move focus to the next control after data input operation.” This function can be
used to disable continuous input, for example, after the last data input is finished for the input setup
item group of interest if there are two or more input setup item groups on the screen.
Focus rule tab of Screen Set control

The property dialog of the Screen Set Control in the background of the screen form is displayed, and set
up the property on the Focus rule tab. On this tab, it is possible to specify whether to enable or disable the
common focus movement rule and the continuous input function for controls with input.
Listed below are how to determine the way the focus is to move basically according to the common focus
movement rule. In “Control layout” below, each circled number (<1>,<2>,<3>) indicates an example
- 169 -
location where the corresponding one of the listed rules is applied when one of the indicated cursor keys
is pressed.
<1> When a cursor key is pressed, the focus will move to a control having a focusing index number
obtained by adding the corresponding cursor key direction value (focus index increment/decrement)
set up as the Common focus movement rule to the focusing index number of the control currently
having the focus.
<2> If the focusing index number obtained above is not within the current screen, a check is made to see
whether there is a row or column before or after the control with input of interest. If a row or column
turns out to exist, the focus will move to the target control on the row or column.
<3> If the above step does not find a target column within the current screen, the focus will move to the
next subscreen or, if there is no “next” subscreen, the focus will move to the first or last control with
input on the current screen.
↑ Subscreen 1 ↑
← <3> 1 2 3 4 5 <2> 6 7 8
↑
9 10 ← <1> 11 → 12 13 14 15 16
↓
17 18 19 20 <2> 21 22 23 <3> 24 →
↓ ↓
↑ Subscreen 2
← <3> 1 4 7 10 Control layout
2 5 8 11
3 6 9 <3> 12 →
↓
- 170 -
Common focus movement rule
UP key, DOWN key, LEFT key, RIGHT key :
Set up a common focus movement rule for controls with input placed on a screen. To be specific,
specify index increment/decrement values to be added to the focusing index number for a control
currently having the focus when the → or ↓ cursor is pressed. An increment/decrement value
corresponding to the ← or ↑cursor key is automatically set up. See “Focus Movement & Continuous
Input setting example.”
Continuous input :
Turn on this check box if you want to input data continuously for controls with input. To use this
function, also set up the following “Direction” property.
Direction :
The continuous input function causes the focus to move automatically (rather than by pressing a
cursor key) after data is input. Specify the direction in which the focus is to move.
Focus Movement & Continuous Input setting example
(Focus movement specification example 1):
1 6 11 16
2 7 12 17
3 8 13 18
4 9 14 19
5 10 15 20
The screen has 5 rows × 4 columns of controls placed as shown at the left. Pressing the ↓ cursor key
moves the focus vertically and from the bottom row to the top of the next column. Also the continuous
input function is enabled, and the focus is moved in the same order as stated above. Pressing the ↑ cursor
key causes the focus to move in the opposite direction.
1 → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 → 6 → . . . → 18 → 19 → 20 → (Back to 1)
Pressing the → cursor key causes the focus to move horizontally. Pressing the ← cursor key causes the
focus to move in the opposite direction.
1 → 6 → 11 → 16 → 2 → . . . → 5 → 10 → 15 → 20 → (Back to 1)
Setting:
Each control is assigned with a focusing index number or TabIndex number in the indicated order.
The other controls and properties are set up as listed in the following tables.
- 171 -
Example of specifying properties on the Focus rule tab of the Screen Set control
Common focus movement rule Direction(for Continuous input)
Continuous input
Æ key È key Æ È Å Ç
5 1 ; { ~ { {
Example of specifying properties on the Focus tab for each control with input
Don’t move focus to the next control after
Focus movement rule
Focus index or TabIndex number data input operation.
Ç Å Æ È
1 0 0 0 0
(Continuous numbers 2 to 19 are
0 0 0 0
specified here.)
20 0 0 0 0

The focus is moved in the same manner as in example 1 above. However, to specify the direction of
continuous inputs as horizontal like 1 → 6 → 11 → 16 → 2 → . . . → 20 → disable, set up the screen
set control as listed below.
Continuous input
5 1 ; ~ { { {
Example of setting up properties on the Focus tab for controls with input
Focus Movement rule Don’t move focus to the next control after
Focus Index or TabIndex number
Ç Å Æ È data input operation.
1-19 0 0 0 0
20 0 0 0 0 ;
1 4 5 6
7 8 9
2 10 11 12
13 14 15
3 16 17 18
19 20 21
There are three groups for 1 to 9, 2 to 15, and 3 to 21. Continuous input is disabled at the end (9, 15, or
21) of each group. (No continuous input is performed over a group.) The ← cursor key causes the focus
to move in the direction opposite to that shown below.
1→4→5→6→7→8→9→ disable
2→10→11→12→13→14→15→ disable
3→16→17→18→19→20→21→ disable
Pressing the ↓or ↑ key causes the focus to move as shown below:
1⇔2⇔3⇔4⇔7⇔10⇔13⇔16⇔…⇔18⇔21⇔ (Back to 1)
Setting:
Each control is assigned with a focusing index number or TabIndex number in the indicated order.
The other controls and properties are set up as listed in the following tables.
- 172 -
Continuous input
1 3 ; ~ { { {
Example of setting up properties on the Focus tab for controls with input
Focus index or TabIndex number Focus movement rule Don’t move focus to the next control
after data input operation.
Ç Å Æ È
1 0 21 4 2
2 1 9 10 3
3 2 15 16 4
4 3 1 0 0
(5-8) 0 0 0 0
9 0 0 2 0 ;
10 0 2 0 0
(11-14) 0 0 0 0
15 0 0 3 0 ;
16 0 3 0 0
(17-20) 0 0 0 0
21 0 0 1 0 ;
Touch panel and MDI key operations for each control

MDI key
Control Operating function Touch panel operation
operation
Delete one character at the end of the
CAN button CAN
buffer.
Key-in buffer Delete all characters from the buffer. DELETE key button DELETE
Input data (overwrite). INPUT key button INPUT
Input and add data (additive data input). INSERT key button INSERT
Numeral Indication Clear input data to 0. CLEAR button CAN
Control for Calling Erase a pop-up ten-key pad. KEYCLR button DELETE
Ten-Key Pad Input data. INPUT button INPUT
Touch a control having Any of the four
Display the focus.
no focus. cursor keys
Touch a control for
Any of the four
Move the focus. which the focus is not
cursor key
Control with input displayed.
( By Key-in buffer) Touch a control for
Erase the focus. which the focus is CAN(*1)
displayed.
Touch a control having
Manually disable continuous input. CAN
no focus.
Causes the input screen to appear. Touch the target control. Any key
Any of the four
Display the focus. (No operation)
cursor key
Any of the four
Control with input Move the focus. (No operation)
cursor key
(By pop-up screen)
Erase the focus. (No operation) CAN
Shortcut key
Manually disable continuous input. Screen erase button for the screen
erase button
Error notification dialog Erase the dialog box window. Touch the OK button DELETE
box window display
- 173 -
MDI key
Control Operating function Touch panel operation
operation
Causes the input screen to appear. Touch the target control. Any key
Any of the four
Display the focus. (No operation)
cursor key
Control with input
Any of the four
(By pop-up Ten-Key) Move the focus. (No operation)
cursor key
Erase the focus. (No operation) CAN
Manually disable continuous input. KEYCLR button DELETE
*1 If there are characters in the key-in buffer, the last one of them is erased.
Continuous input disabling procedure

The following table lists the procedure for manually disabling continuous input.
Control with input Continuous input disabling procedure
<1> Input to a key-in buffer control
Key-in buffer controls are usually in a continuous-input state. Continuous input
Numeric Indication Control
is disabled by touching a control having the focus or using the CAN key.
with Key Input
<2> Input by calling a pop-up screen
or
Continuous input is disabled by erasing the pop-up screen rather than
PMC Area Character
performing input equivalent to [INPUT], which is a data input method for the
String Indication Control
pop-up screen. To erase the pop-up screen, touch the erase button for it or a
shortcut key assigned to the erase button.
Numeric Indication Control Continuous input is disabled by erasing the pop-up ten-key pad. To erase the pop-up
for Calling Ten-Key Pad ten-key pad, touch the [KEYCLR] or the [☒]button for it, or press the DELETE key.
2.3.1.6 Setting the signal for the PMC/SD7 type

If you set SD7 for PMC type in [File]-[Project]-[Setting…]-[Setting of CNC system] tab, the signal
setting properties of various dialog boxes will set SD7 notation signals using area and address properties.
At this time, the bit position specification property used with SBx notation (this includes 3Xi type) is
displayed as input not permitted.
If the signal properties of various dialog boxes are already set in SBx type signal notation, they are
automatically converted into the signal notation of the SD7 type, like the interlock and lighting signal
properties in the solid-line frame in the figure below. If, during this automatic conversion, SBx type
signal notation cannot be converted into SD7 signal notation, the properties for area and address
specification will be blank like the blinking signal properties in the broken-line frame in the figure below;
set new signals in SD7 signal notation.
In the following cases, the blink signal property fields enclosed in the dashed lines shown below are
empty:
1. When the "T" or "C" area of SBx type is used
2. When an odd address in the "D" area of SBx type is used
3. When the "D" area of SBx type is used for the signal bit (BOOL) type
4. With the SD type, the property fields may become empty when the area corresponding to "%Sx" is
used
- 174 -
The following is a table of correspondence between SBx notation and SD7 notation in the PMC signal
area selection combo box and a list of numbers of arguments for specifying signal areas with FP function
arguments.
When using SD7 signal representation, specify 0 with an FP function that has a bit position in an
argument.
Table of correspondence between the PMC signal area combo box, FP

function argument numbers, and signal areas
Combo box list for selecting PMC FP-function-specification-time area
Item Argument
signal area selection argument
Number Number
SB7 SD7 SB7 SD7
0 R %M 0 G %QG
1 D %R 1 F %IF
2 C Reserve 2 Y %Q
3 T Reserve 3 X %I
4 K %MK 4 A %MA
5 X %I 5 R %M
6 Y %Q 6 T Reserve
7 G %QG 7 K %MK
8 F %IF 8 C Reserve
9 A %MA 9 D %R
10 Reserve Reserve 10 Reserve Reserve
11 Reserve Reserve 11 Reserve Reserve
12 E %ME 12 E %ME
13 Reserve %S (R9016.0-R9499.7) 13 Reserve %S (R9016.0-R9499.7)
14 Reserve %ST (R9008.0-R9015.7) 14 Reserve %ST (R9008.0-R9015.7)
15 Reserve %SA (A9000.0-A9299.7) 15 Reserve %SA (A9000.0-A9299.7)
16 Reserve %SK (K900.0-K919.7) 16 Reserve %SK (K900.0-K919.7)
- 175 -
Comparison of SD7 and SB7 PMC addresses

Corresponding
Name Range Size/Type Attribute Remarks
PMC-SB7 references
Input using I/O Link 1st channel
1-1024 X0.0-X127.7
Input using I/O Link 2nd
%I 10001-11024 1bit(BOOL type) Read-only X200.0-X327.7
channel
80001-81024 X1000.0-X1127.7
Input using built-in I/O
1-6144 F0.0-F767.7
10001-16144 F1000.0-F1767.7
%IF 1 bit(BOOL type) Read-only Input from CNC
20001-26144 F2000.0-F2767.7
30001-35144 F3000.0-F3767.7
Output using I/O Link 1st
1-1024 channel Y0.0-Y127.7
%Q 10001-11024 1 bit(BOOL type) Output using I/O Link 2nd Y200.0-Y327.7
80001-81024 channel Y1000.0-Y1127.7
Output using built-in I/O
1-6144 G0.0-G767.7
10001-16144 G1000.0-G1767.7
%QG 1 bit(BOOL type) Output to CNC
20001-26144 G2000.0-G2767.7
30001-36144 G3000.0-G3767.7
16 bit(WORD
%R 1-5000 Retentive Data Register D0.0-D9999.7
type)
%M 1-64000 1 bit(BOOL type) R0.0-R7999.7
Internal relay
%ME 1-64000 1 bit(BOOL type) E0.0-E7999.0
%MA 1-2000 1 bit(BOOL type) Message display request A0.0-A249.7
%MK 1-800 1 bit(BOOL type) Retentive Internal relay K0.0-K99.7
%S 1-3872 1 bit(BOOL type) Read-only R9016.0-R9499.7
%ST 1-64 1 bit(BOOL type) Read-only R9008.0-R9015.7
System area
%SA 1-2000 1 bit(BOOL type) Read-only A9000.0-A9249.7
%SK 1-160 1 bit(BOOL type) Retentive K900.0-K919.7
* In SD7, you will have to use %R, %M, or %ME for the SBx types T (timer address) and C (counter
address).
- 176 -
2.3.2 Screen Set Control

Screen Set control is a control to do various setting of the screen.
This control is a control to set necessary information at MEM make. This control is not displayed on the
CNC screen.
Only a single instance of this control can be placed in a form. More than one instance cannot be placed.
Displaying effective range display according to LCD unit resolution

The range of the resolution chosen by [Setting …] is displayed in the background color property.
Even the screen display on CNC is effective to this background color. An effective range on the
screen is displayed by the background color in case of pop up base screen.
Signal of notice screen display

The function turns on the notice screen display signal when the screen is a main screen. In case of a
sub screen, the signal is never turned on.
When the screen is displayed, the set signal is turned on.
There is a similar property in Screen Structure Definition control.
When the signal is set in both Screen Structure Definition control and Screen Set control, setting
Screen Structure Definition control is used.
Enable signal of each action control

This signal is used by the “FP function of indirect specification”.
Please notify the FP function to have completed setting the argument for the FP function of indirect
specification by this signal.
In the FP function, execution begins when this signal is turned on.
Focus rule tab

This tab is used to enable or disable the common focus movement rules and the continuous input
function for the input support controls placed on the entire screen.
- 177 -
Property Pages
- General
Object ID:
Object ID managed in the form. This ID is automatically assigned. The user cannot change this ID.
X,Y:
Set the coordinates of the upper-left corner of the screen set control. This control is not displayed on
the CNC screen. This means that any coordinates may be set.
Width, Height:
Set the width and height of the screen set control.
Background color:
Specify the background color of the screen form. The background color is enabled for a base screen
on the CNC screen. The background color of the sub screen is not displayed on the CNC screen, so
separately create the background using the rectangle drawing control or label control.
Not use background color:
Check this item when no screen form background color based on the [Background color] property is
displayed on the CNC screen.
- 178 -
- Option
Use signal of notice screen display:

Check this box to output PMC signals when this screen is displayed.
Out PMC Area:
Select a type of PMC address where a signal is output.
Out PMC Address:
Specify a PMC address where a signal is output.
Out PMC Bit:
Specify the bit position of the signal address above by using a number from 0 to 7.
Use enable signal of each action control:
When the signal to permit the operation of each control is used, this box is checked.
Input PMC Area:
Input PMC Address:
Input PMC Bit:
- 179 -
- Focus rule
Common focus movement rule

Set up a common focus movement rule for controls with input placed on a screen. To be specific,
specify index increment/decrement values to be added to the focusing index number for a control
currently having the focus when the → or ↓ cursor is pressed. An increment/decrement value
corresponding to the ← or ↑cursor key is automatically set up. See “Focus Movement & Continuous
Input setting example.”
Continuous input:
Turn on this check box if you want to input data continuously for controls with input. To use this
function, also set up the following “Direction” property.
Direction:
The continuous input function causes the focus to move automatically (rather than by pressing a
cursor key) after data is input. Specify the direction in which the focus is to move.
- 180 -
- Composite Edit
Select Screen:
List of screens that can be selected as a screen to be composited
The screens registered with the project are displayed.
Composite Screen:
Displays the names of screens displayed in a composite screen.
Select a screen from the Select Screen list and click the [Add] button to add the screen to the
Composite Screen list.
Screens are composited from bottom to top in descending order in which they appear in the list.
Add:
Adds a screen selected in the Select Screen list to the Composite Screen list
Up to five screens can be added.
The added screens are hidden in the Select Screen list.
Del:
Delete a screen selected in the Composite Screen list from the list.
A screen deleted from the Composite Screen list is displayed in the Select Screen list again.
Up:
Moves a screen selected in the Composite Screen list one line up.
Down:
Moves a screen selected in the Composite Screen list one line down.
- 181 -
2.3.3 Screen Structure Definition Control

The screen structure definition control provides two types of specification: setting of a combination of
sub screens to make up a single screen (base screen) and definition of a popup screen. Only a single
instance of this control can be placed in a form. More than one instance cannot be placed.
As an option function, this control provides a data change report function.
Definition of a Base Screen and Sub Screens

FANUC PICTURE allows you to create part of a screen as a sub screen and switch this sub screen to
another sub screen. With this specification, define the combination of sub screens to make up a base
screen.
The items to be set in the properties of this control are the name of the base screen and the name of the
first of the sub screens to make up the base screens (i.e., the name of the first sub screen to be displayed
after the power is turned on of all the sub screens to be displayed alternately in the same section on the
base screen). On the first sub screen specified here, place a sub screen switch button and specify the next
page sub screen. By calling a still another sub screen from the called sub screen, sub screen switching is
accomplished.
On a single base screen, up to ten sub screens may be displayed at the same time. That is, it is possible to
create up to ten partitions within the range of the screen resolution and switch screens between the
partitions.
For the screen structure example shown below, set the underlined screen names as the names of the first
sub screens in the properties of the screen structure definition control.
BASE1 (base screen name)

SUB10 →SUB11 → SUB12 (→ To SUB10)
SUB20 → SUB21 (→ To SUB20)
(*) Up to ten sub screens can be specified for simultaneous display.
Place the control in the valid area within the range of the screen resolution.
Popup Screen Definition

Place the control in the valid area on the screen and expand it to the size of the rectangle used as a popup
screen. Then, check Popup Screen, which is one of property items, to specify it as the pop-up base screen.
The size and coordinates of the rectangle to pop up are determined by pasting this control. In this
rectangle, place the necessary buttons and lamps to create a popup screen.
To return to the screen from which the popup screen was called, create on the popup screen a button for
which “popup erasure” is specified as the “screen type” of the screen switch control. Clicking this screen
switch button allows you to return to the screen from which the popup screen was called.
A popup screen with up to two layers can be displayed. If a popup screen is displayed, only the screen
displayed last will be active. This means that the background screen terminates and buttons and the like
will not respond when touched.
Data Change Report Function

The controls that provide a function for changing numeral and character string data are as follows. In the
following explanation, these controls are referred to as controls with a change function. Touching such a
control to enter the data change input state is described as bringing the control into focus.
a. Numeral indication control with key input
b. Numeral indication control for calling a ten-key pad
c. PMC area character string indication control
The data change report function is a function that, if any of these controls is used, notifies the PMC that
data has been changed with the change function provided by that control. If a read value is the same as a
value to be replaced, however, write processing is not performed. So, no data change is posted with this
function.
- 182 -
A unique identification number is allocated to each control with a change function, so that the PMC can
decide what data has been changed. As the identification number of each control, a value in the range of 0
to 16383 can be set in “Identification number,” found in the action property page of that control. An
identification number of 0 may be set for more than one control, and means that “no data change will be
reported to the PMC.” An identification number 1 to 16383 can be allocated to a control that is to report a
data change. Within a project, each identification number must be unique. In the following explanation, a
control with a change function that has an identification number of 0 is referred to as a change non-report
control, while that that has an identification number other than 0 is referred to as a change report control.
The data change report function requires that a 2-byte continuous area, with the structure shown below,
be reserved on the PMC. Different change report areas can be specified for different base screens. The
2-byte change report area will be cleared to zero when the corresponding base screen is displayed.
#15 #14 #13-#0

Data change report One or more changed Identification number 0 to 16383 in binary format
Data change report bit (#15):

Reports that a data change has been made in the change report control identified by the identification
number. It rebases ON for 200 msec or longer. Then, it remains ON until either of the off conditions
is satisfied.
<On condition>
• A data change has been made in the control with a change function.
<Off conditions>
• The base screen that uses this change report area is displayed.
• A change report control other than the change report control that has reported a change is
brought into focus (the focus is shifted to another control).
One or more changed bit (#14):
Reports that a data change has been made in at least one of the change report controls used on all the
sub screens under a base screen since the base screen was displayed.
<On condition>
• A data change has been made in at least one control with a change function for the first time
since the base screen was displayed.
<Off condition>
• The base screen that uses this change report area is displayed.
Identification number (#13 to #0):
If a change report control is brought into focus, the identification number of that control in focus is
output as a binary value. This identification number output is performed simply if a control is
brought into focus, regardless of the data change report bit (#15).
If this number is zero, this indicates either that all of the change report controls currently displayed
are out of focus or that a change non-report control is in focus.
Data change report example

Description of the change report area
0- Legend /: Indefinite (0 or 1) -: 0 or 1
Identification number (#13-#0)
One or more changed report bit (#14)
Data change report bit (#15)
- 183 -
No State of change report area Description

<1> All bits are cleared to zero immediately after a base screen is
1 00 0
displayed.
<1> A change report control is out of focus because of no data change.
2 0- 0 <2> A change non-report control is in focus. (If the data change report bit
is off, the identification number is set to zero.)
<1> A data change has been made to the change report control having
3 0 - identification number
the output identification number.
<1> A data change has been made to the change report control having
the output identification number.
4 11 identification number
<2> A change non-report control is in focus. (If the data change report bit
is on, the identification number is not set to zero.)
Popup screen to be called from a base screen

A popup screen may also have a change report area. If a popup screen does not use a change report
area, it reports the data change state using the change report area of the base screen from which the
popup screen was called. For this reason, a input popup screen for character change input in a PMC
area character string indication control etc. must not use a change report area.
- 184 -
Property Pages
- General
Object ID:
X, Y:
1. Definition of a base screen and sub screens
Coordinates of the upper-left corner of the screen structure definition control. This control is
not displayed on the CNC screen. This means that any coordinates may be set.
2. Definition of a popup screen
Define the display position of the screen.
Width, Height:
Width and height of the rectangle in which the control is placed. If a popup screen is defined, the
size of the display area of this screen is indicated.
- 185 -
- Base screen
Screen Name:
Set the name of the form file where this component is placed.
Free Memory:
For high-speed screen display, screen data once read is stored in the memory inside the touch panel.
However, the memory space is limited. If you check this box for a base screen that does not need to
be displayed at high speed, base screen display is performed at low speed, allowing many other
screens to share the memory.
Use Out PMC:
Check this box to output PMC signals when this base screen is displayed.
Out PMC Area:
Out PMC Address:
Out PMC Bit:
Use Popup Screen:
A popup screen can be displayed, overlapping the screen displayed immediately before this base
screen was displayed.
- 186 -
- Sub screen 1-5
The procedure for setting the properties below applies to sub screen 1 through sub screen 5.
Use Sub Screen n:

Check this box when using the property settings for sub screen n.
Save Sub Screen n:
When this base screen is selected and displayed on the screen, check this box to display the sub
screens selected when this base screen was displayed previously. If you do not check this check box,
the sub screens set in Sub Screen n are displayed.
Free Memory:
For high-speed screen display, screen data once read is stored in the memory inside the touch panel.
However, the memory space is limited. If you check this box for a sub screen that does not need to
be displayed at high speed, sub screen display is performed at low speed, allowing many other
screens to share the memory.
Sub Screen Name n:
Set the name of a sub screen to be displayed when a base screen is first displayed after the power is
turned on.
- Sub screen 6-10

This is enabled only with Series 0i-D, Series 30i/31i/32i/35i, Power Motion i-A.
The method of setting each property is the same as the sub screen 1-5.
- 187 -
- Options
Use Signal of Update notification:

Check this check box to use the function to notify the PMC that data is updated by the control
change function, which was described earlier. The function is used when a change report control
having a numeric value or string data is used on the base screen or on all the child screens called
from the base screen.
Change Notice Area:
The signal for the change notice area uses two bytes. Specify the type of the PMC address.
Change Notice Address:
Specify a signal address.
- 188 -
2.3.4 Screen Switch Control

This control is used to switch from one screen to another. Touching the screen switch control on the
screen switches the screen display to the screen set as a property of this control. Following types of screen
switch operations are available.
1. Base screen switching

When this type of switching is selected, the entire screen currently being displayed is erased, then a
base screen is displayed. However, for switching to a pop-up screen, the pop-up screen is displayed
in the forefront without erasing the screen currently displayed.
2. Sub screen switching
When this type of switching is selected, a new screen is written over the current screen.
3. Switching to an NC screen
This type of switching is used to switch from a user-created touch panel screen to a screen provided
by the CNC such as the position display screen and parameter screen.
4. Popup screen erasure
Erases the popup screen in which this screen switch control is placed, and returns the system to the
screen from which the popup screen was called.
This button can be interlocked when functioning as a screen switching button. When the embedded-plug
indication is selected, this control can be set not to function as a button.
In addition to the normal on/off-style indication the following three types of button style indications are
supported: (normal indication), embedded-plug-style indication, embedded-plug-style indication by an
invalid signal, and interlocking-style indication.
(1) Embedded-plug-style indication
This indication displays the control as an embedded plug from the time of screen layout design. To
switch to a button, change the property. This indication requires much less built-in memory in the
CNC than the embedded-plug-style indication by an invalid signal. This embedded-plug-style
indication cannot be used with either of the following indications described in items (2) and (3).
This embedded plug style is specified in [Property] on the [Image] tab.
(2) Embedded-plug-style indication by an invalid signal
When the invalid signal specified during power-up is turned on, the embedded-plug-style indication
is used. The state of the invalid signal is obtained during power-up. Therefore, even if the state is
changed by the PMC after this process has started, the style indication for the button is not affected.
For the button with the invalid signal set to OFF, the normal button operation and the button style
indication during input of the interlock signal described in item (3) can be used. Unlike the
embedded-plug-style indication described in item (1), the indication type on the CNC screen can be
determined by the signal state during power-up without changing the property.
This embedded plug style is specified in [Property] on the [NoAction Image] tab.
(3) Interlocking-style indication
The button style indication during input of the interlock signal helps the operator visually check the
state of the button by displaying the style that indicates the interlocking state. Since both the
interlocking style and on/off style are included, this style requires more memory.
This interlocking style is specified in [Property] on the [Interlock Image] tab.
There are several state indication check boxes for confirming the style indication on the form. When all of
these boxes are checked, the style indications are prioritized as shown below. To confirm a lower-priority
style indication, uncheck the check box for a higher-priority style indication.
Embedded-plug-style indication or
embedded-plug-style indication by an invalid signal
> Interlocking-style indication
> On/off-style indication
- 189 -
Property Pages
- General
Object ID:
X, Y:
Set the coordinates of the upper-left corner of the screen switch control.
Width, Height:
Set the width and height of the screen switch control.
- Character
- 190 -
No use multi-language:
Multi-language key:
See [Editing multi-language display captions] in Subsection 2.3.1.1, “Description of general
property setting items”.
Centering:
Check this check box to center the caption display position automatically in the vertical and
horizontal directions within the rectangle of the control.
On caption is copied onto Off caption:
settings.
ON Caption:
Set a character string to be displayed on the screen switch control while the control is being held
down.
X, Y:
Specify the display position of the caption by using relative coordinates within the rectangle of the
control. With the upper-left corner of the rectangle of the control used as the reference, specify the
coordinates of the upper-left corner of the character string.
OFF Caption:
Set a character string to be displayed when the screen switch control is not held down.
X, Y:
Character Type:
Specify the type of character used for a caption character string.
0: ANK (displays a mixture of half-size and 2x-size characters)
1: X2 (Half-size characters set for a caption are displayed as 2x characters.)
2: X4 (displays characters two times larger vertically and horizontally)
3: X6 (displays characters two times larger vertically and three times larger horizontally)
4: SMALL (displays characters smaller than half-size characters)
ON Caption Color:
Specify the display caption color of the ON caption.
OFF Caption Color:
Specify the display caption color of the OFF caption.
- 191 -
- Action
No Action:
Check this check box to disable the screen switch control function.
The control can be placed on the form, but can be disabled, in which case the display is embedded.
Set the embedded image for no action set in the Image tab.
Screen Type:
Select a screen switching type. One of base screen switching, sub screen switching, switching to an
NC screen, and popup erasure can be selected.
Popup erasure: If the base screen is of the popup type, selecting this screen switching type erases the
currently displayed popup screen, returning the system to the screen from which the popup screen
was called.
Screen Name:
Set the name of a screen (name of a form) to which screen display is to switch. This item need not be
set in the case of switching to an NC screen.
Key Code:
In the case of switching to an NC screen, select the function key code of an MDI key.
Specifically, choose from POSITION, PROGRAM, OFFSET, SYSTEM, MESSAGE, GRAPHIC,
CUSTOM1, and CUSTOM2.
Shortcut key:
VF1 – VF8, and VF9 for the vertical soft keys
F1A-F25Y and the vertical soft keys
VFR1-VFR8 and VFL1-VFL8 for 8 + 13/13 + 8
soft keys)
4. HELP key
- 192 -
Interlock:
Check this check box to specify interlocking for screen switching.
When the interlock signal specification is ON, screen switching is not performed.
Interlock PMC Area:
Specify a type of PMC address.
Interlock PMC Address:
Specify an interlock signal address.
Interlock PMC Bit:
Blink:
Check this check box to specify a blink signal for the light section of the screen switch control. This
item is enabled when base screen switching is selected and "Light" below is checked, or when sub
screen switching is selected. When a specified blink signal is turned on, the light section displays the
ON state color and OFF state color alternately.
Blink PMC Area:
Blink PMC Address:
Specify a blink signal address.
Blink PMC Bit:
Light:
Check this check box to specify a light signal for the light section of the screen switch control. When
a specified light signal is turned on, the light section displays the color set in the ON state color
property.
When the screen is switched, the light signal is output. Turn off the signal by using the ladder or
switch destination screen.
Light PMC Area:
Light PMC Address:
Specify a light signal address.
Light PMC Bit:
- 193 -
- Image
Mask Image File:

The FIG file holding the button figures to be used when the No Action check box in the Action tab
is checked can be selected.
Mask Style:
Select a type of button figure registered in Mask Image File.
Image File Name:
is not checked (that is, when the function is enabled) can be selected.
Style:
Select a type of button figure registered in Image File Name.
On Color:
Select a color to be used for the light section when the button is pressed or turned on.
Off Color:
Select a color to be used for the light section when the button is not pressed or is turned off.
Border Color1:
Select a frame color for the upper edge and left edge of the button.
Border Color2:
Select a frame color for the lower edge and right edge of the button.
On preview:
Check this check box to confirm the control display state on the personal computer when the light
section of the control is turned on. When this check box is checked, the caption display state can also
be confirmed on the personal computer. This property is valid for form display on the personal
computer. This property does not affect the screen display of the CNC.
- 194 -
- NoAction Image
This tab is valid when [NoAction] on the [Action] tab is checked.
NoAction Signal:
Check this check box to use the embedded-plug-style indication by an invalid signal. This function
disables the function of the screen switching control and displays the embedded plug style when the
invalid signal specified in the following boxes is detected during power-up.
When this check box is checked, the following items can be set.
Image File Name:
This box can be used to select the FIG file that contains the button styles used when the screen
switching control is in the invalid state.
Style:
Select the type of the button styles registered in the file specified in [Image File Name].
State Color:
Select the color of the indicator lamp section.
Border Color1:
Select the color of the upper and left ends of the button.
Border Color2:
Select the color of the lower and right ends of the button.
PMC Area:
Specify the type of the PMC address of the invalid signal. The following areas can be specified.
R, D, K, X, Y, G, F, E(PMC-SB7)
Address:
Specify the PMC address of the invalid signal.
Bit:
Specify the bit position (between 0 and 7) of the above signal address.
Preview:
Check this check box to confirm the indication state on the form when the button control is in the
invalid state.
This property is valid for the form display on a PC. This property does not affect the screen display
of the CNC
- 195 -
- Interlock Image
This tab is valid when [Interlock] on the [Action] tab is checked.
Display:
Check this check box to change the style indication of an interlocked button.
When [Interlock Signal] on the [Action] tab is set to ON, the function of the screen switching control
can be disabled and the button style can be switched to the one that indicates the interlocking state.
When this check box is checked, the following boxes can be set.
Image File Name:
This box can be used to select the FIG file that contains the embedded plug styles used when the
screen switching control is in the stop state.
Style:
State Color:
Border Color 1:
Border Color 2:
Without Caption:
Check this check box to making the caption hidden by Interlocking-style indication.
Preview:
Check this check box to confirm the style indication of an interlocked button on the form.
of the CNC.
- 196 -
2.3.5 Lamp Control

This control is used as a lamp whose light section color and caption change according to the state of an
input signal from the PMC.
Property Pages
- General
Object ID:
X, Y:
Set the coordinates of the upper-left corner of the lamp control.
Width, Height:
Set the width and height of the lamp control.
- 197 -
- Character
Multi-language key:
Centering:
Left Arrangement[X]:
Caption display is left-justified.
Right Arrangement[X]:
Caption display is right-justified.
settings.
ON Caption:
Set a character string to be displayed in the light section when the PMC monitor signal is on.
A character string that cannot be completed on one line can be continued by inserting “\n” before
continuing onto the additional line.
Although no new line mark is indicated, new line operation is automatically performed at the right
edge of the rectangle.
If a character string not containable in the rectangle is specified, those characters that overflow the
rectangle are not displayed. If a character not using a FANUC-specified font is specified, ““ is
displayed. In such a case, change the character to a displayable one.
- 198 -
X, Y:
control. Specify the coordinates of the upper-left corner of the character string to be displayed.
When "Right Arrangement" is specified, specify an X coordinate as a position from the right-hand
Y coordinate
X coordinate in X coordinate in
left arrangement ABC right arrangement
OFF Caption:
Set a character string to be displayed in the light section when the PMC monitor signal is off.
Line continuation can be performed as with an ON caption.
X, Y:
When "Right Arrangement" is specified, specify an X coordinate as a position from the right-hand
Character Type:
ON Caption Color:
OFF Caption Color:
- 199 -
- Action
No Action:
Check this check box to disable the lamp control function.
Set the lamp image for no action set in the Image tab.
Watch PMC Area:
Specify a type of address for the PMC signal that turns on and off the lamp. The following areas can
be specified:
Watch Address:
Specify a monitor PMC signal address.
Watch Bit:
Use Blink:
Check this check box to cause the lamp to blink.
Blink Signal Area
Specify the type of the address of the PMC signal for specifying the blinking of the lamp. The
following areas can be specified.
Blink Signal Address:
Blink Signal Bit:
- 200 -
- Image
Mask Image File:

The FIG file holding the lamp figures to be used when the No Action check box in the Action tab is
checked can be selected.
Mask Style:
Select a type of lamp figure registered in Mask Image File.
Image File Name:
not checked (that is, when the function is enabled) can be selected.
Style:
Select a type of lamp figure registered in Image File Name.
On Color:
Select a color to be used for the light section when the monitor PMC signal is turned on.
Off Color:
Select a color to be used for the light section when the monitor PMC signal is turned off.
Back Color:
Specify the base color of the rectangle. This property has an effect for a lamp such as a round lamp.
Border Color 1:
Select a frame color for the upper edge and left edge of the lamp.
Border Color 2:
Select a frame color for the lower edge and right edge of the lamp.
On Preview:
Check this check box to confirm the display state on the form when the lamp is turned on. When this
check box is checked, the caption display state can also be confirmed on the form. This property is
valid for form display on a personal computer. This property does not affect the screen display of the
CNC.
- 201 -
- Option
Use 7 Colors:
Check this box to use seven colors as the background colors of the numeral indication section.
Type:
Specify how to switch seven colors.
0:PMC (bit)
Allows you to switch the background color at the bit position of the PMC area specified with
the signal area and the signal address.
1:PMC (big or small comparison)
Allows you to switch the background color by comparing the magnitudes of the value of the
PMC area specified with the signal area and the signal address and the change beginning value.
2: FP-Function(bit)
The light color can be switched according to a value (bit position) returned from the specified
FP function.
3: FP-Function (big or small comparison)
The light color can be switched according to the result of small/large comparison between a
value returned from the specified FP function and the change beginning value.
Signal Area:
Specify the type of the address of the PMC signal used to control the 7-background color selection
signal for the numeral indication section. The following areas can be specified:
Signal Address:
Specify the address of the 7-background color selection signal for the numeral indication section.
This signal requires one byte if 0:PMC(bit) is specified for Type. As the background color, bit 0
takes precedence. If blink bit 7 turns on, blinking starts with the specified on and off colors.
If 1:PMC (big or small comparison) is specified for Type, a continuous area with the length
specified as the data length (1, 2, or 4 bytes) is required.
Set Up Number:
If specifying big or small comparison for Type, specify the number of change beginning values to be
used.
This option is not used if bit is specified for Type.
- 202 -
Data Length:
If specifying big or small comparison for Type, specify the data length of the PMC area specified
with the signal area and the signal address or return value of FP-Function.
0: 1 Byte (Signed)
1: 1 Byte (Unsigned)
2: 2 Byte (Signed)
4: 4 Byte (Signed)
Use Blink Signal:
Check this box to use blinking in the numeral indication section.
This option takes effect if big or small comparison is specified for Type.
Blink Signal Area:
Specify the type of the address of the PMC signal used to specify the blinking in the numeral
indication section. The following areas can be specified:
Specify the address of the blink signal.
Blink Signal Bit:
Light Color #6 to #0:
Specify the ON color corresponding to each of the bits.
Character Color #6 to #0:
Specify the numeral indication character color corresponding to each of the bits.
Change Beginning Value:
Specify the value whose magnitude is to be compared with that of the value of the PMC area
specified with the signal area and the signal address or return value of FP-Function. If the value of
the PMC area specified with the signal area and the signal address or return value of FP-Function
exceeds the value specified here, the lamp turns on in the ON color corresponding to the change
beginning value.
Bit #1 #0
Change beginning value 20 10
In the above case, 0 to 9 represent OFF color, 10 to 19 represent #0 color, and 20 and up represent
#1 color.
Set a value that satisfies the following magnitude relationship: change beginning value 7 > change
beginning value 6 to 2 > change beginning value 1.
Function Name:
Specify an FP function for controlling 7-color lamp lighting.
This item is enabled when 2:FP-Function(bit) or 3:FP-Function (bit or small comparison) is selected
in "Type".
* For argument setting, see Chapter 3, "FP FUNCTIONS".
Function Blink Bit:
This item can be set in the case of bit specification as the type of 7-color lighting. Specify a bit
position from 0 to 7 for blinking from the lamp lighting portion. A blinking bit position that is
specified here is unusable for the 7-color light signal. When the blinking function is not used,
specify "No use blink".
- 203 -
From the list displayed in the combo box, one of the following types can be specified:
0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, No use blink
Example of specifying a bit for the blinking function and bits turned on
<1> Bit specification for the <2> Bits that can be
Blinking operation
blinking function turned on
0 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 When the blink signal of <1> is turned on with the light
1 0, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 signal of <2> turned on, blinking between the specified
7 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 light color and turn-off color starts.
No use blink 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 The blinking function is not used.
- NoAction Image
NoAction Signal:
disables the function of the lamp control and displays the embedded plug style when the invalid
signal specified in the following boxes is detected during power-up.
Image File Name:
This box can be used to select the FIG file that contains the button styles used when the lamp control
is in the invalid state.
Style:
Select the type of the lamp styles registered in the file specified in [Image File Name].
State Color:
Border Color 1:
Select the color of the upper and left ends of the lamp.
Border Color 2:
Select the color of the lower and right ends of the lamp.
PMC Area:
- 204 -
Address:
Bit:
Preview:
Check this check box to confirm the indication state on the form when the lamp control is in the
invalid state.
of the CNC
2.3.6 Button Control

This control consists of a lamp section whose light section color and caption change according to the state
of an input signal from the PMC, and a switch section that performs the following operations when the
button section is pressed:
<1> Setting of bits in the PMC area
<2> Writing of fixed data to the PMC area
<3> Calling of an FP function
<4> Calling of a screen (used with momentary type)
<5> Switching of history message indication control screens, outputting of history data to the memory
card
The state of output to the PMC area is preserved after the screen is switched.
Two switch types are available: momentary type and alternate type.
This button can be interlocked when functioning as a push button. When the embedded-plug indication is
selected, this control can be set not to function as a button.



- 205 -
CAUTION
When using a non-touch panel display unit, do not use the momentary button
attribute.
Even if the operator holds down the MDI key or soft key assigned to a button,
the key can be released momentarily, depending on the state internal to the
display unit. Thus, a button operation such as for signal output can result in
chattering. Even for an alternate button, chattering occurs while the key is being
held down, as with a momentary button.
Property Pages
- General
Object ID:
X, Y:
Set the coordinates of the upper-left corner of the button control.
Width, Height:
Set the width and height of the button control.
- 206 -
- Character
Multi-language key:
Centering:
horizontal directions within the rectangle.
settings.
ON Caption:
Set a character string to be output to the light section when the PMC monitor signal is on.
X, Y:
Specify the display position of the ON caption by using relative coordinates within the rectangle of
the control. Specify the coordinates of the upper-left corner of the character string to be displayed.
OFF Caption:
Set a character string to be output to the light section when the PMC monitor signal is off.
X, Y:
Specify the display position of the OFF caption by using relative coordinates within the rectangle of
- 207 -
Character Type:
ON Caption Color:
OFF Caption Color:
- Action
NoAction:
Check this check box to disable the button control function.
Set the button image for no action set in the Image tab.
Switch Type:
Select a switch type. This property is valid for other than screen switch action.
Action Type:
Specify operations to be performed when a switch is pressed and released. Click the Detail button
and set the detailed properties of the selected type.
For the method of setting, see [Action Detail Properties].
[Bit Set]
Performs bit operation in the PMC area.
[Data Set]
Writes fixed data as word-size data to the PMC area.
[Function Call]
Calls an FP function.
[Change Screen]
Calls another screen. (Used with momentary type)
- 208 -
[History Display]
Specifies an operation for the history message indication control.
・ Screen display switching
・ Outputting of history data to the memory card
Shortcut key:
soft keys)
4. HELP key
Watch:
Choose whether to change the state of the light section (lamp section) according to switch state
(automatically) or a signal from the PMC.
[USER]
Specify USER to change the state of the light section according to a signal from the PMC.
Pressing the button section does not change the light section.
[AUTO]
Display is turned on when the switch is turned on. Display is turned off when the switch is
turned off. No signal bit in the PMC area needs to be assigned.
Watch PMC Area:
Specify a type of address for the PMC signal that turns on and off the light section. The following
areas can be specified:
Watch Address:
Watch Bit:
Interlock:
A signal for disabling button action can be specified. When the specified signal is on, the interlock
function operates to disable button action.
Check this item when using this function.
PMC Area:
Specify a type of address for an interlock signal. The following areas can be specified:
Address:
Bit:
Specify the bit position of the signal above by using a number from 0 to 7.
- 209 -
Action Detail Properties

- Detail[Momentary]-[Bit Set]
Specify which data to be output to which signal bit when the switch is on.
PMC Area:
Specify a type of address for a PMC signal to be output. The following areas can be specified:
Address:
Specify an output signal address.
Bit:
Bit Pattern:
[0:0] Outputs 0 (LOW) to a bit specified for output.
[1:1] Outputs 1 (HIGH) to a bit specified for output.
[2:Revers] Outputs a bit specified for output after reversion of 0/1.
- Detail[5:Alternate]-[Bit Set]
[ON Action], [OFF Action]

Specify separately [ON Action] to be executed when the switch makes a transition from OFF to ON,
and [OFF Action] to be executed when the switch makes a transition from ON to OFF.
PMC Area:
Address:
Bit:
Bit Pattern:
- 210 -
- Detail[Momentary]-[Data Set]
Specify which value to be output to which PMC area when the switch is on. The size of output data is
word.
PMC Area:
Address:
Word:
Specify a value from -32767 to +32767.
- Detail[5:Alternate]-[Data Set]

PMC Area:
Address:
Word:
- 211 -
- Detail[Momentary]-[Function Call]
Specify a function to be called when the switch is turned on.
Function:
Describe an FP function. For the method of description, see Chapter 3, “FP Functions.”
- Detail[5:Alternate]-[Function Call]

Specify separately [ON Action] to be executed when the switch makes a transition from OFF to ON, and
[OFF Action] to be executed when the switch makes a transition from ON to OFF.
Function:
- Detail[Change Screen]
Specify a main screen to be called when the switch is turned on.
Screen Name:
Specify a main screen name. For a screen name, enter the XXX portion of the project form file name
XXX.XML.
- 212 -
- Detail[Momentary]-[History Display]
When the button state is changed to ON, one of the following operations can be performed:
・ Switching of history message indication control display
History Action Type Select the operation of the history message indication control from among the items
described below.
The history display screen in the following explanation is not displayed if “Message Display” is selected
for the “First Time Display” property in the Action tab of the history message indication control.
<1> Summary/History/Detail Switch Button

This item creates a button for switching between summary and history display screens or a button
for returning from a detail display screen to a summary or history display screen. If selecting this
operation, set the following property:
• Link Number at output button
<2> Detail Message Switch Button

This item creates a button for switching from a indicated message on a summary or history display
screen to a further detail screen. If selecting this operation, set the following properties:
• Row Number at Detail
• Detail Message File Name
<3> Page Switch Button

This item creates a Page Switch Button for a summary display or history display message. If
selecting this operation, set the following properties:
• MDI Key Code
<4> Output history data to memory card

This item creates a button for outputting the history messages stored in a history block to the
memory card. When this operation is selected, set the following properties:
・ Link Number at output button
・ Output File Name
For details of the history data memory card output function, see [History data memory card output
function] in Subsection 2.2.8.3," Collection of history ".
Link Number at output button:

Specify the “Assign Link Number” set in the target history message indication control to specify on
which history message indication control the set button operation is to be performed.
- 213 -
Row Number at Detail:

Set this item for the “Detail Message Switch Button” operation. When summary or history display is
in progress, specify the line number of this indicated message. On a detail display screen, the system
searches the detailed explanation of the summary/history displayed command line through a
specified detail display file and displays it.
A line number of 0 means that the display contents of the detail display screen having the Link
Number at output button are to be cleared.
Detail Message File Name:
Set this item for the “Detail Message Switch Button” operation. The system loads the details of the
message indicated by the pressed detail switching button from the display file specified for this item
and displays them on the screen. If you create multiple detail switching buttons for the same line,
you can display different details by specifying different display file names for the buttons.
Edit button:
Clicking this button enables you to edit messages in a detail display file.
Message texts and detailed explanations are associated with one another if their “Number” or “Bit
Set” items have the same numbers in their respective text files.
For the method of editing, see Subsection 2.3.1.2, "Editing text message files".
MDI Key Code:
Used to select between page-up and page-down as the “Page Switch Button” operation.
Output File Name:
Set this item when "Output history data to memory card" is selected. Specify the name of a file used
when history data is output to the memory card. Enter a file name in the following format:
"8-character file name" + "one period" + "3-character extension"
(MS-DOS 8.3 format)
- Detail [Alternate]-[History Display]

Under [ON Action] and [OFF Action], specify separately the history message indication control
operations to be executed when the button changes from the off state to the on state and from on to
off.
The setting property is the same as that of the momentary operation history indication function
button.
For the setting of [History Display], the use of the momentary button attribute is recommended. If
MEM generation is executed using [History Display] with the alternate button attribute set, a
warning message is displayed. The warning message indicated below is output when [Output history
data to memory card] is set.
- 214 -
- Image
Mask Image File:

Style:
Image File Name:
Style:
On Color:
Select a color to be used for the light section when the light section is turned on by the monitor PMC
signal or automatically.
Off Color:
Select a color to be used for the light section when the light section is turned off by the monitor
PMC signal or automatically.
Border Color 1:
Border Color 2:
On Preview:
Check this check box to confirm the display state on the form when the button is turned on. When
this check box is checked, the caption display state can also be confirmed on the form. This property
is valid for form display on the personal computer. This property does not affect the screen display
of the CNC.
- 215 -
- NoAction Image
NoAction signal:
disables the function of the button control and displays the embedded plug style when the invalid
Image File Name:
button control is in the invalid state.
Style:
Select the type of the embedded plug styles registered in the file specified in [Image File Name]
State Color:
Border Color 1:
Border Color 2:
PMC Area
Address:
Bit:
Preview:
invalid state.
of the CNC
- 216 -
- Interlock Image
Display:
When [Interlock Signal] on the [Action] tab is set to ON, the function of the button control can be
disabled and the button style can be switched to the one that indicates the interlocking state.
Image File Name:
button control is in the stop state.
Style:
State Color:
Border Color1:
Border Color2:
Without Caption:
Preview:
of the CNC.
- 217 -
2.3.7 Framed Button Control

This control consists of a lamp section whose light section color and caption change according to the state
of an input signal from the PMC, a switch section that sets a specified PMC signal to on when the button
section is pressed, and an outside frame whose color changes according to the state of the switch.
PMC signal output is turned off automatically when the screen is switched. When [5:Alternate] is used, a
setting can be made to preserve the output signal state even when the screen is switched.
The following switch types are available:
• Momentary button (with no lamp)
• Momentary button with a lamp
• Actuator button
• Alternate button
This button can be interlocked when functioning as a bordered button. When the embedded-plug
indication is selected, this control can be set not to function as a button.


This embedded plug style is specified in [Property] on the [No Action Image] tab.

The button style indication during input of the interlock1 signal helps the operator visually check the
- 218 -
CAUTION
attribute.
Description of switch types

[2:Momentary(No Lamp)]
This type of switch is on while the button is held down, and is off when the button is released.
Depending on the switch state, the on (1) or off (0) signal is output to an address.
The display of the lamp section is as follows:
Lamp light signal OFF ON

Frame color Frame off color Frame on color
Light color Lamp off color Lamp on color
Caption color Caption off color Caption on color
[3:Momentary(Use Lamp)]
This type of switch is on while the button is held down, and is off when the button is released.
Display operation depends on the following:
Switch state OFF ON

Lamp light signal OFF ON OFF ON
Frame color Frame off color Frame off color Frame on color Frame on color
Light color Lamp off color Lamp on color Lamp on color Lamp off color
Caption color Caption off color Caption on color Caption on color Caption off color
Blink operation Enabled Disabled Disabled
If the blink signal is turned on after blink operation is enabled, the display blinks on and off
repeatedly. (This operation is not performed when the lamp light signal is on.)
[4:Actuator]
Each time this button is pressed, this switch toggles between on and off. If a number other than 0 is
set as a group number, when the switch that is currently off is turned on, the other switches of the
same group number are turned off. Up to nine groups can be set on one screen (1 to 9).
Depending on the switch state, the on (1) or off (0) signal is output to an address. Display operation
depends on the following:
Switch state OFF ON

Frame color Frame off color Frame on color
Light color Lamp off color Lamp on color Lamp off color Lamp on color
Caption color Caption off color Caption on color Caption off color Caption on color
Blink operation Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled
- 219 -
If the blink signal is turned on after blink operation is enabled, the display blinks on and off
repeatedly. (This operation is not performed when the lamp light signal is on.)
In this mode, the button does not operate when the interlock 2 signal is off. The switch does not
change state when the interlock 1 signal is on. When the screen display switches to another screen,
the output signal of the button is turned off.
[5:Alternate]
Each time this button is pressed, this switch toggles between on and off. If a number other than 0 is
set as a group number, when the switch that is currently off is turned on, the other switches of the
same group number are turned off. Up to nine groups can be set on one screen (1 to 9).
The operation of the light section is the same as for the alternate button with a lamp.
When switching to another screen, the user can choose whether to turn off the switch or preserve the
current state.
The operation is as follows:
Switch state OFF ON

Frame color Frame off color Frame on color Frame on color Frame off color
Light color Lamp off color Lamp on color Lamp on color Lamp off color
Caption color Caption off color Caption on color Caption on color Caption off color
Blink operation Enabled Disabled Disabled
- 220 -
Property Pages
- General
Object ID:
X, Y:
Set the coordinates of the upper-left corner of a framed button control.
Width, Height:
Set the width and height of a framed button control.
- 221 -
- Character
Multi-language key:
Centering:
settings.
ON Caption:
Set a character string to be output to the light section when the PMC light signal is on.
If the character string not containable in the rectangle is specified, those characters that overflow the
X, Y:
- 222 -
OFF Caption:
Set a character string to be output to the light section when the PMC light signal is off.
X, Y:
Character Type:
ON Caption Color:
OFF Caption Color:
- Action
No Action:
Check this check box to disable the function of the framed button control.
Set the image for no action set in the Image tab.
- 223 -
Keep State:
This check box can be specified when the button type [5:Alternate] is selected.
Check this check box to preserve the state of the output PMC signal even when the screen is
switched. When this check box is not checked, the state of the output PMC signal is turned off.
Switch Type:
Select a switch type. This selection is valid for an action other than screen switch action.
[2:Momentary(No Lamp)]
[3:Momentary(Use Lamp)]
[4:Actuator]
[5:Alternate]
Group No:
A group number can be specified when the actuator button or alternate button is selected. A button
with the same group number operates as a selector switch. In selector switch operation, only one
switch operates in one group; if another switch is turned on, the switch previously turned on is
turned off. A group number from 1 to 9 can be specified on the same screen.
Number 0 specifies switches that operate alone.
Shortcut key:
soft keys)
4. HELP key
Interlock 1:
This function can be specified when the momentary button , actuator button, or alternate button is
selected.
When the interlock signal is on, push-button operation is interlocked.
Interlock 2:
This function can be specified when the actuator button is selected.
When the interlock signal is off, push-button operation is interlocked. When this function is used
together with InterLock1, push-button operation is enabled when both interlocks are released.
Interlock PMC Area 1, Interlock PMC Area 2:
Specify a type of PMC address for an interlock signal. The following areas can be specified:
Interlock PMC Address 1, Interlock PMC Address 2:
Interlock PMC Bit 1, Interlock PMC Bit 2:
Specify the bit position of an interlock signal by using a number from 0 to 7.
Blink:
This check box can be specified when the momentary button (with a lamp), actuator button, or
alternate button is selected. Check this check box to use the blink function.
Blink PMC (Blink PMC Area, Blink PMC Address, Blink PMC Bit):
Specify a signal for blinking the lamp section.
Specify these items in the same way as for Interlock PMC Area, Interlock PMC Address, and
Interlock PMC Bit.
- 224 -
Light PMC (Light PMC Area, Light PMC Address, Light PMC Bit):
These items can be specified when the momentary button (with a lamp), actuator button, or alternate
button is selected. Specify a signal for turning on the lamp section.
Interlock PMC Bit.
OUT PMC (Out PMC Area, Out PMC Address, Out PMC Bit):
Specify a signal for switch state output.
Interlock PMC Bit.
- Image
Mask Image File:

Mask Style:
Image File Name:
Style:
Example: Specify No. 23 to select a push-button with a frame.
On Color:
Select a color to be used for the light section when the light section is turned on.
- 225 -
Off Color:
Select a color to be used for the light section when the light section is turned off.
Border Off Color:
For a framed figure button, select a button frame OFF color. For other types of buttons, select a
frame color for the upper edge and left edge.
Border On Color:
For a framed figure button, select a button frame ON color. For other types of buttons, select a frame
color for the lower edge and right edge.
On Preview:
this check box is checked, the caption ON state can also be confirmed on the form. This property is
valid for form display on the personal computer. This property does not affect the screen display of
the CNC.
- NoAction Image
This tab is valid when [No Action] on the [Action] tab is checked.
No Action Signal:
disables the function of the bordered button control and displays the embedded plug style when the
invalid signal specified in the following boxes is detected during power-up.
- 226 -
Image File Name:
This box can be used to select the FIG file that contains the button styles used when the bordered
Style:
State Color:
Border Color 1:
Border Color 2:
PMC Area:
Address:
Bit:
Preview:
Check this check box to confirm the indication state on the form when the bordered button control is
in the invalid state.
of the CNC
- Interlock Image
- 227 -
This tab is valid when [Interlock1] on the [Action] tab is checked.
Display:
When [Interlock Signal] on the [Action] tab is set to ON, the function of the bordered button control
can be disabled and the button style can be switched to the one that indicates the interlocking state.
[Interlock 1] is used as the interlock signal.
Image File Name:
bordered button control is in the stop state.
Style:
State Color:
Border Color1:
Border Color2:
Without Caption:
Preview:
Check this check box to confirm the indication state on the form when the bordered button control is
in the stopped state.
of the CNC.
- 228 -
2.3.8 MDI Key Control

This control can be used to create a button on the touch panel that performs the same function as an MDI
unit key. A ten-key pad can be created by placing multiple such MDI keys. With a system that has no
MDI unit attached, the screen display can be switched to the CNC screen by placing function keys on the
touch panel.
Property Pages
- General
Object ID:
X, Y:
Set the coordinates of the upper-left corner of the MDI key control.
Width, Height:
Set the width and height of the MDI key control.
- 229 -
- Action
Multi-language key:
Key Top:
Specify a caption for the MDI key.
A caption that cannot be completed on one line can be continued by inserting “\n” before continuing
onto the additional line.
If the character string not containable in the rectangle is specified, those characters that overflow the
Centering:
X, Y:
Key Code:
Specify which MDI key code to be input to the operator’s panel when this button is pressed. Choose
from the list box.
- 230 -
Character Type:
ON Caption Color:
Specify the color of key top characters to be displayed when the MDI key is pressed.
OFF Caption Color:
Specify the color of key top characters to be displayed when the MDI key is not pressed.
- Image
Image File Name:

The FIG file holding MDI key figures can be selected.
Style:
Select a type of MDI key figure registered in Image File Name.
On Color:
Select a color to be used for the light section when the MDI key is pressed.
Off Color:
Select a color to be used for the light section when the MDI key is not pressed.
Back Color:
Specify the background color of the MDI key. This property is effective when a round figure is
selected.
Border Color1:
Select a frame color for the upper edge and left edge of the MDI key.
Border Color2:
Select a frame color for the lower edge and right edge of the MDI key.
On Preview:
Check this check box to confirm the display state on the form when the MDI key is pressed. When
this check box is checked, the key top character display state can also be confirmed on the form.
This property is valid for form display on the personal computer. This property does not affect the
screen display of the CNC.
- 231 -
2.3.9 MDI Keyboard Control

This control allows you to create on the touch panel a group of buttons that function in the same way as
keys on the MDI unit. For system configurations without an MDI unit, placing this control on the touch
panel allows the operator to enter keys in the same way as on an MDI unit.
Property Pages
- General
Object ID:
X,Y:
Set the coordinates of the upper-left corner of the MDI keyboard control.
Width, Height:
Set the width and height of the MDI keyboard control.
- 232 -
- Action
Keyboard:
Select an MDI keyboard type.
0: Address key
1: Numeric key
2: Command key
CNC MODE(system):
Specify whether the CNC system on the touch panel is a “machining” or “lathe” system. This option
can be specified only if the keyboard type is address key.
0: Arrangement of T series address key
1: Arrangement of M series address key
ON Caption Color:
Specify the display color of the character on the top of the key when the MDI key is clicked.
OFF Caption color:
Specify the display color of the character on the top of the key when the MDI key is not clicked.
0:Example of T series address 1:Numeric key 2:Command key
- 233 -
- Image
Image File Name:

A FIG file holding a control figure can be selected.
Style:
Select a type of control figure registered in the “Image File Name.”
On color:
Select a color to be used for the light section when it is turned on.
Off color:
Select a color to be used for the light section when it is turned off.
Back Color:
Specify the background color of the control.
Border Color 1:
Specify a frame color for the upper edge and left edge of the control.
Border Color 2:
Specify a frame color for the lower edge and right edge of the control.
ON Preview:
Check this check box to confirm the display state of the control on the form when the keyboard is
pressed. When this check box is checked, numeral indication can also be confirmed on the form.
This property is valid for form display on the personal computer. This property does not affect the
screen display of the CNC.
- 234 -
2.3.10 Key Input Buffer Control

This control is a key input buffer for data input that temporarily stores key codes entered from the keys on
the MDI unit and MDI key controls. One key input buffer can be placed on one screen.
This control is used together with a numeral indication control with key input. When the [INPUT] key is
pressed on the MDI unit or the [INPUT] key code is entered through the MDI key control, the data stored
in this key input buffer is written to the numeral indication control with key input where the focus is
placed.
The key used by editing Key Input Buffer control is the following.
KEY name Operation

INPUT The input (The value displayed in key input buffer is written in the area specified for the
control to be input).
INSERT + input (The value to which key input buffer is displayed is written and the value added to
the value of the area specified for the control to be input is written).
CAN The back space (One character of the character string displayed in key input buffer in the
back is deleted).
DELETE Clear (The character string displayed in key input buffer is deleted).
Property Pages
- General
Object ID:
X, Y:
Set the coordinates of the upper-left corner of the key input buffer control.
Width, Height:
Set the width and height of the key input buffer control.
- 235 -
- Character
Centering:
X, Y:
Character Type:
Character Color:
Specify the display color of characters input into the key input buffer.
- 236 -
- Action
Screen Interlock:
Numeral input from an MDI key or MDI key control can be interlocked. This function is used to
disable the setting of the numeral indication control with key input according to the machine state.
PMC Area:
Specify a type of address for an interlock signal. The areas below can be specified. When the signal
is on, the interlock function is activated.
Address:
Bit:
Multi-language key:
Interlock Message:
If an MDI key is input when the interlock function is activated, a message specified here is output to
the key input buffer.
Character Color:
Specify the display color of an interlock message.
Number of digits specification:
Check this check box to specify the number of character input digits of the key input buffer.
This causes the text box on the right to accept input; set the number of digits.
The number of digits includes the digits of the decimal point and the sign, if used.
If the character type or rectangle size is changed, the number of digits may have to be changed
accordingly.
- 237 -
- Image
Image File Name:

The FIG file holding key input buffer control figures can be selected.
Style:
Select a type of key input buffer control figure registered in Image File Name.
Back Color:
Specify the background color of the key input buffer control.
Border Color1:
Select a frame color for the upper edge and left edge of the key input buffer control.
Border Color2:
Select a frame color for the lower edge and right edge of the key input buffer control.
Display Screen Interlock Message:
Check this check box to confirm the display state of an interlock message on the form. This property
of the CNC.
- 238 -
2.3.11 Numeral Indication Control with Key Input

This control displays the value of a specified PMC area. Touching the numeral indication section changes
the background color to the ON color (focused state), and allows numerals to be written from the key
input buffer control by pressing the [INPUT] key.
For numeral input, this control needs to be used together with a key input buffer control. Only one control
is focused on the screen. When another numeral indication control with key input not focused is touched,
the focused state of the previously focused control is released, and the new touched control is focused.
When the new focused control is touched again, the focused state of the control is released.
Property Pages
- General
Object ID:
X, Y:
Set the coordinates of the upper-left corner of the numeral indication control with key input.
Width, Height:
Set the width and height of the numeral indication control with key input.
- 239 -
- Character
Centering:
X, Y:
Character Type:
Focus Caption Color:
Specify a numeral indication color when the control is focused.
Off Caption Color:
Specify a numeral indication color when the control is not focused.
Check Caption Color:
Specify a numeral indication color when the control lights according to the check function.
- 240 -
- Action
No Action:
Check this check box to disable the function of the control.
Set the image for no action set in the Image tab.
In/Out Target:
Select a numeral data I/O destination.
I/O by the PMC area or the FP function is selected.
PMC Area:
Specify a type of I/O target PMC address. The following areas can be specified: R, D, K, X, Y, G, F,
E(PMC-SB7)
Address:
Specify an I/O target address.
ReadFunction:
Select a function for reading a numeral to be indicated.
WriteFunction:
Select a function for writing input data from the Key Input.
CheckFunction:
With a value returned from the function set in this field, the display color of the light section can be
controlled. The light section is turned on when a value other than 0 is returned.
Data Type:
Specify the data size and numeral attribute of an I/O target.
Numerals are stored in binary or floating.
0: 1 Byte(Signed)
1: 1 Byte(Unsigned)
2: 2 Byte(Signed)
3: 2 Byte(Unsigned)
4: 4 Byte(Signed)
5: 4 Byte(Unsigned)
6: RESERVE
7: Floating-Point(Ex. COMMON var. P-code var.)
- 241 -
In/Out Format:
Specify a numeral I/O format and numeral indication format.
0 : Decimal
1 : Binary
2 : Hexa Decimal
3 : BCD
Use Decimal Point:
Check this check box to provide a decimal point in numeral indication.
Do not use this check box when using the binary, hexadecimal, or BCD format.
This decimal point indication is for easy-to-read purpose only. Numerals are actually stored as
binary values with no decimal point.
Example) Indicated value: 1.234
Stored value: Binary value (4D2H) of 1234
Decimal digits:
Set the number of decimal places.
Left Align:
A numeral indicated is left-justified.
Non Zero suppress:
Check this check box when leading zeroes are not to be removed in numeral indication.
Set max. and min. value:
Check this check box to set a valid numeral range for numeral input.
If a range check finds that a numeral written using the key input buffer control is outside the valid
range, the key input buffer control indicates an error message.
Max. Value:
Set a maximum value to define a valid numeral range.
Min. Value:
Set a minimum value to define a valid numeral range.
Check this check box to specify the number of display digits in the numeral indication section.
accordingly.
Identification number:
To use the data change report function, set the number used to identify this control, in the range of 1
to 16383. The identification number must be unique within the project.
If the data change report function is not used, set zero.
Popup Screen Name:
Specify the name of a pop-up base screen having a keyboard which can be used to update the value
in the value display area. When using a key on the MDI unit or an MDI key control on the same
format, do not specify this pop-up screen name.
Use focus index for the identification number:
Check this item when using the focus index number set in the Focus tab, as an identification number.
In this case, ensure that a focus index number from 1 to 16383 is used.
- 242 -
- Focus
Focus index:
are performed, using either of the following two methods. Tabindex number specification cannot be
used at present.
1 and greater:
CAUTION
Focus movement rule:

- 243 -

- Interlock
Use Interlock:
Numeral input can be disabled. This interlock function can be set for each control.
PMC Area:
Specify a type of PMC address for an interlock signal. The areas below can be specified. When the
signal is on, the interlock function is activated.
Address:
Bit:
- 244 -
- Image
Mask Image File:

The FIG file holding the embedded figures to be used when the NoAction check box in the Action
tab is checked can be selected.
Mask Style:
Select a type of figure registered in MaskImageFile.
Image File Name:
The FIG file holding the figures to be used when the NoAction check box in the Action tab is not
checked (that is, when the function is enabled) can be selected.
Style:
Select a type of figure registered in Image File Name.
Focus Color:
Select a background color to be used when the control is focused.
Off Color:
Select a background color to be used when the control is not focused.
Check Color:
Select a background color to be used when the control lights according to the check function.
Border Color 1:
Select a frame color for the upper edge and left edge of the control.
Border Color 2:
Select a frame color for the lower edge and right edge of the control.
Focus Preview, Check Preview:
Check the Focus Preview check box to confirm the display state of the control on the form when the
control has focus. Check the Check Preview check box to confirm the display state of the control on
the form when the control lights according to the check function. This property is valid for form
display on the personal computer. This property does not affect the screen display of the CNC.
- 245 -
- Option
Use 7 Colors:
Check this box to use seven colors as the background colors of the numeral indication section. If this
option function is enabled, the light color switching with the check function is disabled.
CAUTION
The focus index number of this control must be set in the focus property page.
Type:
0:PMC (bit)
2:FP-Function(bit)
FP function.
3:FP-Function(big or small comparison)
Signal Area:
R, D, K, X, Y, G, F, E(xPMC-SB7)
Signal Address:
This signal requires one byte if 0:PMC (bit) is specified for Type. As the background color, bit 0
- 246 -
Set Up Number:
used.
Data Length:
0: 1 Byte (Signed)
2: 2 Bytes (Signed)
3: 2 Bytes (Unsigned)
4: 4 Bytes (Signed)
Use Blink Signal:
Blink Signal Area:
Blink Signal Bit:
exceeds the value specified here, the background colors of numeral indication section in the light
color corresponding to the change beginning value.
Function Name:
Specify an FP function for controlling 7-color lighting for numeral indication section display.
in "Type".
Function Blink Bit:
position from 0 to 7 for numeral/character string blinking. A blinking bit position that is specified
here is unusable for the 7-color light signal. When the blinking function is not used, specify "No use
blink".
0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, No use blink
- 247 -
<1> Bit specification for the <2> Bits that can be turned
Blinking operation
blinking function on
0 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 When the blink signal of <1> is turned on with
1 0, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 the light signal of <2> turned on, blinking
0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 between the specified light color and turn-off
7
color starts.
2.3.12 Numeral Indication Control for Calling a Ten-Key Pad

This control is used to input and display numeric data inside the PMC and NC. Touching the numeral
indication section displays a ten-key pad for numeral input.
Property Pages
- General
Object ID:
X, Y:
Set the coordinates of the upper-left corner of the numeral indication control for calling a ten-key
pad.
Width, Height:
Set the width and height of the numeral indication control for calling a ten-key pad.
- 248 -
- Character
Centering:
X, Y:
Specify the numeral display position by using relative coordinates within the rectangle of the control.
With the upper-left corner of the rectangle of the control used as the reference, specify the
Character Type:
Specify the type of character used for numeric character string indication.
Check Caption Color:
Specify a display caption color to be used when the check function returns a value other than zero.
OFF Caption Color:
Specify a display caption color to be used when the check function returns the value zero.
Focus Caption:
Specify a display character color when the control is focused.
- 249 -
- Action
No Action:
Check this check box to disable the function of the numeral indication control for calling a ten-key
pad.
Select Ten-key:
Select a type of ten-key pad that pops up when the numeral indication section is touched.
0: TenKey1
2: TenKey3
Ten-key pin pad that is larger and always displayed at the screen center
Depending on the position, the numeral indication section may be hidden behind the pad. So, a
ten-key pad title for indicating input items can be set.
TenKey1 and TenKey3 are exactly the same.
1: TenKey2
Small ten-key pad that is displayed adjacently to the four corners of the numeral indication
section
Multi-language key:
Ten-key Title :
When 0 (TenKey1) or 2 (TenKey3) is selected in Select Tenkey, a title entered in this field is
displayed. The maximum character of the keys title is up to 20 characters in half-size.
- 250 -
Read Function:
Select a function for reading a numeral to be indicated.
Write Function:
Select a function for writing input data from the ten-key pad.
Check Function:
With a value returned from the function set in this field, the display color of the light section can be
controlled. The light section is turned on when a value other than 0 is returned.
When the 7-color display option is used, the check function cannot be specified.
Data Type:
Specify the data size and numeral attribute of specified data.
Numerals are stored in binary.
0: 1 Byte(Signed)
1: 1 Byte(Unsigned)
2: 2 Bytes(Signed)
3: 2 Bytes(Unsigned)
4: 4 Bytes(Signed)
6: RESERVE
7: Floating-Point (EX. COMMON var. P-code var.)
In/Out Format:
Specify a numeral I/O format and numeral indication format.
Only decimal I/O is allowed.
Use Decimal Point:
Check this check box to provide a decimal point in numeral indication or to specify the number of
decimal places.
• When data types 0 to 5 are used, decimal point indication is for easy-to-read purpose only.
Numerals are actually stored in the PMC area as binary values with no decimal point.
• When data type 7 (floating-point) is used, a numeral is indicated to the specified number of
decimal places. If a numeral to be indicated has more decimal places than the specified number
of decimal places, the decimal places beyond the specified number of decimal places are
discarded.
When the significant number of decimal places of a numeral to be indicated is 3 or more, all
significant decimal places are indicated if this property is not checked, and data type 7
(floating-point) is specified. If the significant number of decimal places is less than 3, up to
three decimal places are indicated with zeroes added.
Decimal digits:
Left Align:
Non Zero suppress:
In numeral indication, leading zeroes are added.
Set max. and min. Values:
Check this check box to set a valid numeral range for numeral input.
If a range check finds that an input numeral is outside the valid range, the background color of the
display section for the value entered through the ten-key pad changes to red.
When the number of decimal places is specified, a range check is made assuming that a decimal
point is placed at the specified decimal place.
Max. value:
Set a maximum value to define a valid numeral range. If decimal places are specified, it is assumed
that the same decimal places are specified in this setting.
Example: When the specified number of decimal places is 3 for 99999, 99.999 is assumed.
- 251 -
Min. value:
Set a minimum value to define a valid numeral range. Decimal places are handled in the same way
as for Max Value.
accordingly.
To use the data change report function, set the number used to identify this control, in the range of 1
Figure of tenkey1 or tenkey3.

A decimal point key appears only when data type 7 (floating-point) is specified.
CLEAR : Clears the display section of NEWDATA to zero.
KEYCLR: Erases the pop-up ten-key pad.
INPUT : Writes a value entered in NEWDATA to an area specified using a write function. If a
value entered in NEWDATA is within the valid range, the value is written, and the pop-up
ten-key pad is erased.
If an entered value is outside the valid range, the background color of the NEWDATA
field becomes red. Pressing any key returns the background color to the original color, and
clears the entered value, then performs the operation corresponding to the pressed key.
- 252 -
Figure of tenkey2. Only an entered value is indicated.
key performs the same operation as CLEAR above.
key performs the same operation as KEYCLR above.
key performs the same operation as INPUT above.
- Action 2
Use Interlock:
A numeral input disable function can be created. If the interlock signal is turned on, touching the
numeral indication section does not cause the popup ten-key pad to appear. If the ten-key pad is
displayed, turning the interlock signal on causes the ten-key pad to be automatically erased.
Interlock PMC Area:
Specify the type of the PMC address of the interlock signal. The following areas can be specified.
The interlock takes effect when the signal is turned on.
Specify the address of the interlock signal.
Interlock PMC Bit:
Specify the bit position of the interlock signal by using a number 0 to 7.
- 253 -
- Focus
Focus index:
used at present.
1 and greater:
CAUTION

- 254 -
- Image
Mask Image File:

The FIG file holding the embedded figures to be used when the No Action check box in the Action
Mask Style:
Select a type of embedded figure registered in Mask Image File.
Image File Name:
The FIG file holding the control figures to be used when the No Action check box in the Action tab
Style:
Select a type of control figure registered in Image File Name.
Back Color:
Specify the background color of the rectangle of the control.
Check Color:
Select a color to be used for the light section when the check function returns a value other than
zero.
- 255 -
Off Color:
Select a color to be used for the light section when the check function returns zero.
Focus Color:
Select a color to be used for the light section when the control has focus .
Border Color 1:
Border Color 2:
Check Preview:
Focus Preview:
Check this check box to confirm the display state of the control on the form when the control is
touched to call a ten-key pad or the control has focus. When this check box is checked, numeral
indication can also be confirmed on the form. This property is valid for form display on the personal
- Option
Use 7 Colors:
Check this box to use seven colors as the background colors of the numeral indication section. If this
option function is enabled, the light color switching with the check function is disabled.
CAUTION
The focus index number of this control must be set in the focus property page.
- 256 -
Type:
0:PMC (bit)
2:FP-Function(bit)
FP function.
Signal Area:
R, D, K, X, Y, G, F, E(xPMC-SB7)
Signal Address:
Set Up Number:
used.
Data Length:
0: 1 Byte (Signed)
2: 2 Bytes (Signed)
4: 4 Bytes (Signed)
Use Blink Signal:
Blink Signal Area:
Blink Signal Bit:
- 257 -

exceeds the value specified here, the background colors of numeral indication section in the light
color corresponding to the change beginning value.
Function Name:
Specify an FP function for controlling 7-color lighting for numeral indication section display.
in "Type".
Function Blink Bit:
blink".
0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, No use blink
Blinking operation
7
color starts.
2.3.13 PMC Area Character String Indication Control

This control reads a character string from a specified PMC area and indicates it on the screen.
The characters that can be set to the PMC area apply to the character code selected at [Setting of project]
dialog.
The usable characters of each character code are as shown in the table below.
Character code Usable characters
Japanese Shift JIS code
Chinese (simplified character) Simplified Chinese code(GB2312)
FANUC code See Appendix C.1, “FANUC CODE”
Russian See Appendix C.2, “RUSSIAN CODE”
Turkish See Appendix C.3, “TURKISH CODE”
Central Europe See Appendix C.4, “CENTRAL EUROPE CODE”
On a popup screen for character string setting, an input screen can be created by creating MDI key
controls and key input buffer controls.
CAUTION
1 Only ASCII characters can be input from the input screen. Other character codes
cannot be input directly.
2 In a input screen, the numeral indication controls with key input that inputs data
via the same key input buffer control cannot be used.
- 258 -
When you set the character string to the PMC area, set 0 to the terminal of the character string.
Moreover, if you set two bytes character like shift JIS code or FANUC code, set the high byte of the
character code to the address smaller than the low byte of it.
Example) When “MADE IN 日本” is specified,
+0 +1 +2 +3 +4 +5 +6 +7 +8 +9 +A +D +E
4D 41 44 45 20 49 4E 20 07 06 04 30 00
M A D E I N 日本
Property Pages
- General
Object ID:
X, Y:
Set the coordinates of the upper-left corner of the PMC area character string indication control.
Weight, Height:
Set the width and height of the PMC area character string indication control.
- 259 -
- Character
Centering:
Check this box to center the display position of the PMC area character string automatically in the
vertical and horizontal directions within the rectangle of the control.
X,Y:
Specify the character string display position by using relative coordinates within the rectangle of the
Character Type:
Specify the type of character used for character string indication.
Focus Caption Color:
Specify the color of a character string to be displayed when the focus is placed on the character
string.
Off Caption Color:
Specify the color of a character string to be displayed when the focus is not placed on the character
string.
- 260 -
- Action
PMC Message Area:

Specify which area of the PMC the character string to be displayed is located.
Usually, the area to be specified is “D” or “R” or “E” (PMC-SB7).
PMC Message Address:
Specify the start address of the character string in the area specified above.
PMC Message Bit:
If specifying “A” for PMC Message Area, specify the character string registration bit.
PMC Char Count:
Specify the number of bytes of the character string to be displayed.
Look Signal:
Check this check box to display the character string in the PMC area only if the specified PMC
signal is on. To use this option, specify the following three options. Character display or display
character erasure is performed by looking at the signal for changes and, therefore, the signal change
state must be retained for 500 msec or longer.
Signal Area:
Specify the signal area of the signal used to specify whether to display the character string. The
following area can be specified:
R, D, K, X, Y, G, F, A, E(PMC-SB7)
Signal Address:
Specify the signal address of the signal used to specify whether to display the character string.
Signal Bit:
Specify the signal bit of the signal used to specify whether to display the character string.
Interlock:
Check this check button to interlock the function for calling a popup screen in which a keyboard for
changing the character string in the PMC area is placed. Specify the following three options.
Interlock PMC Area:
Specify the signal area of the popup screen call interlock signal. The following areas can be
specified:
Specify the signal address of the popup screen call interlock signal.
- 261 -
Interlock PMC Bit:

Specify the bit position of the popup screen call interlock signal.
Popup Screen Name:
Specify the name of the popup screen in which the keyboard for changing the character string in the
PMC area is placed.
Use Key-in-buffer:
Check this box to input a rewritten character string by using the key-in-buffer control placed on the
same screen, instead of using the popup screen name mentioned above. Among these rewrite
measures, this check has priority.
* When a PMC character string is to be just displayed and need not be rewritten, leave Popup Screen
Name unspecified, and uncheck Use Key-in-buffer. When these settings are made, input operation is
disabled even if the control is touched.
To use the data change report function, set the number used to identify this control in the range of 1
- Focus
Focus index:
used at present.
1 and greater:
- 262 -
CAUTION

- Image
Image File Name:

Style:
Select a type of control figure registered in the “Image File Name”.
- 263 -
Back Color:
Focus Color:
Select the background color when the focus is placed on the control.
The common focus color specified for the project has priority.
Border Color 1:
Border Color 2:
2.3.14 Numeral/Character String Indication Control

This control is used to display character data or numerals in a PMC register or to call character data or
numerals from the NC with an FP function for display. As a special application, a setting can be made
which calls character data or a numeral with an FP function but does not display the called data or
numeral.
Property Pages
- General
Object ID:
X, Y:
Set the coordinates of the upper-left corner of the numeral/character string indication control.
Width, Height:
Set the width and height of the numeral/character string indication control.
- 264 -
- Character
Centering:
X, Y:
Specify the numeral display position by using relative coordinates within the rectangle of the control.
Character Type:
Specify the type of character used for display.
Character Color:
Specify the color of a numeral or character string to be displayed.
- 265 -
- Action
No Action:
Check this check box to disable the function of the numeral/character string indication control.
Action Type:
Choose whether to display the value of a PMC area or call an FP function.
0: PMC
1: Function
Watch PMC Area:
Specify a type of PMC address to be referenced. The following areas can be specified:
Watch Address:
Specify a PMC address to be referenced.
Function Name:
Specify a function to be called when 1 (Function) is selected in Action Type.
* For argument setting, see Chapter 3, “FP Functions.”
Display :
When the Display check box is unchecked, the control does not display the return value of a function.
This function can be used to execute a function without displaying the return value of the function.
Data Type:
Specify the data size and numeral attribute of an I/O target of specified data.
Numerals are stored in binary.
0: 1 Byte(Signed)
1: 1 Byte(Unsigned)
2: 2 Bytes(Signed)
4: 4 Bytes(Signed)
6: Character string
7: Floating-Point (EX. COMMON var. P-code var.)
8: Rectangular character string
- 266 -
Format:
Select a numeral indication format.
0: Decimal
1: Binary
2: Hexa Decimal
3:BCD
4:ASCII
* In case of ASCII, the lowest 1 byte in the numerical read value is handles as ASCII code.
Example) Read data:88 → Display character: ‘X’
Use Decimal Point:
Check this check box to provide a decimal point in numeral indication.
Do not use this check box when using the binary or hexadecimal format.
This decimal point indication is for easy-to-read purpose only. Numerals are actually stored as
binary values with no decimal point.
When the following FP functions are specified for the function name, this item is invalid.
actf3, absolute2, machine3, relative3, distance3, skip3, srvdelay3, accdecdly3, rdtofs3, rdzofs3,
movrlap3
In this case, decimal positions are displayed automatically, according to the settings of CNC.*
Example) Automatic display of decimal positions by a difference of unit (milli/inch). (using
absolute3)
*) For the specification of the FP functions, see the sub section 3.1.2 "FP function for CNC
window".
Decimal digits:
Left Align:
Non Zero suppress:
In numeral indication, leading zeroes are added.
accordingly.
- 267 -
- Image
Mask Image File:

The FIG file holding the embedded figures to be used when the No Action check box in the Action
Mask Style:
Image File Name:
Style:
Back Color:
Border Color 1:
Border Color 2:
- 268 -
- Option
Use 7 Colors:
Check this box to use seven colors as the background colors of the numeral indication section.
Type:
0: PMC (bit)
1: PMC (big or small comparison)
2:FP-Function(bit)
FP function.
Signal Area:
Signal Address:
Set Up Number:
used.
- 269 -
Data Length:
0: 1 Byte (Signed)
2: 2 Bytes (Signed)
4: 4 Bytes (Signed)
Use Blink Signal:
Blink Signal Area:
Blink Signal Bit:
exceeds the value specified here, the numeral indication section in the light color corresponding to
the change beginning value.
Function Name:
Specify an FP function for controlling 7-color lighting for numeral/character string display.
in "Type".
Function Blink Bit:
blink".
0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, No use blink
- 270 -
Blinking operation
7
color starts.
- NoAction Image
NoAction signal:
disables the function of the button control and displays the embedded plug style when the invalid
Image File Name:
Style:
State Color:
Border Color 1:
Border Color 2:
PMC Area
Address:
Bit:
- 271 -
Preview:
invalid state.
of the CNC
2.3.15 Label Control

This control is used to display a rectangular figure or a fixed character string on the screen.
Property Pages
- General
Object ID:
X, Y:
Set the coordinates of the upper-left corner of the label control.
Width, Height:
Set the width and height of the label control.
- 272 -
- Character
No Action:
Check this check box to disable the function of the label control.
Multi-language key:
Caption:
Enter a character string to be displayed.
Centering:
Caption display is left-justified.
X, Y:
Specify the caption display position by using relative coordinates within the rectangle of the control.
coordinates of the upper-left corner of the character string. When "Right Arrangement" is specified,
specify an X coordinate as a position from the right-hand edge of the rectangle.
Y coordinate
- 273 -
Character Type:
Specify the type of character used for character string display.
1: X2 characters (Half-size characters set for a caption are displayed as 2x characters.)
Character Color:
Specify the color of a character string to be displayed.
- Image
Mask Image File:

The FIG file holding the embedded figures to be used when the No Action check box in the
Character tab is checked can be selected.
Mask Style:
Image File Name:
Style:
Back Color:
Border Color 1:
Depending on the figure, a specified color applies to different portions.
Border Color 2:
- 274 -
- NoAction Image
NoAction signal:
disables the function of the display captions and displays the embedded plug style when the invalid
Image File Name:
Style:
State Color:
Border Color 1:
Border Color 2:
PMC Area
Address:
Bit:
Preview:
invalid state.
of the CNC
- 275 -
2.3.16 Text Character String Indication Control

This control reads the text (character string) corresponding to the text number specified with a specified
PMC area, fixed text number, or FP function call from F-ROM and indicates it. With the highlight display
function, switching can be made to message indication with a character color and background color
different from ordinary message indication. At this time, highlight display with blinking can also be
performed.
PMC text number specification

PMC area signal No. 3
Touch panel screen
Fixed text number specification
FP function call Text No. 3
Message is displayed.
F-ROM Text No. 3
tex
file
No.1
Property Page
- General
Object ID:
X,Y:
Set the coordinates of the upper-left corner of the text character string indication control.
Width, Height:
Set the width and height of the text character string indication control.
- 276 -
- Character
Centering:
Check this item to automatically center the caption display position in the up/down or left/right
direction in the control rectangle.
Caption display is left-justified (default).
X,Y:
coordinates of the upper-left corner of the character string. When "Right Arrangement" is specified,
specify an X coordinate as a position from the right-hand edge of the rectangle.
Y coordinate
Character Type:
The color of the character string to be displayed must be specified in the text file.
Multi-language key:
To confirm display state on the form, specify a language key from the combo box.
This item is enabled when "The Multi-language display function is used." is set in [Setting of
project].
- 277 -
- Action
Bit Interface:
Select this option to use a PMC signal bit for the specification of the text message to be displayed.
The message of the first ON bit found from the search start signal address is displayed.
Search Start Area:
Search Start Address:
Search Start Bit:
Specify the start address of the bit-corresponding message signal area. As many bits as the search bit
count, described below, will be used in ascending order, starting with this signal.
Search Bit Count:
Specify the number of bits used for the bit-corresponding message display signal area. A number up
to 2048 can be specified.
Number Interface:
Select this option use a 1- or 2-byte binary number in the PMC signal area for the specification of
the text message to be displayed.
If specifying this option, specify the following four items:
Message Area:
Specify the PMC area used if the number interface is selected.
Usually, use area R, D or E(PMC-SB7)..
Message Address:
Specify the start address of the area specified above. If two bytes is specified as the size of the
number area, this address and the next one, with a total of two bytes, are used.
Use 1byte, Use 2byte:
Select the size of the number area.
If Secure 1byte is selected, a text number of 1 to 255 can be specified.
Fixed number:
Select this item when using a fixed number to specify a text message to be displayed. A number
from 1 to 65535 can be specified without using the PMC area. If 0 is specified, the nonuse of a fixed
number is assumed.
- 278 -
FP function:
Select this item when using a value read with an FP function in order to specify a text message to be
displayed.
File Name:
Specify a text number and the name of the spreadsheet file describing the message character string.
Edit button:
Click this button when a file (~.msgxml) for setting character strings used to create a message to be
displayed is edited. For the method of editing, see “2.3.1.2 Editing text message files” in the text
character string display control.
Display messages with back color.:
Specify this item to display the message and background color set in a text message file. If this item
is not specified, the message and background color set in the image tab are used for display.
For the method of editing the background color of a text message file, see Subsection 2.3.1.2,
"Editing text message files".
Interface with the PMC area

For the number interface
A text message is displayed on the operator’s panel via the 1- or 2-byte text number report interface,
using the R or D or E(PMC-SB7)area of the PMC. If the text number is zero, the character
previously displayed will be erased. Subsequently, the system monitors for a number change, and
displays a text message only if a change is made. The system monitors for a number change
periodically and, therefore, a number change must be retained for 500 msec or longer. If a change
cannot be detected, the message cannot be displayed.
- 279 -
- Highlight
Use highlight:
Check this item to use highlight display or blinking display for the text character string indication
control. When a value returned from an FP function specified in the function name property
described below matches a specified highlight display value or blinking display value, the
corresponding display is performed.
FP function:
Select an FP function for reading a value to be turned on or blink.
Highlight:
Set a value to be highlighted.
Blinking:
Set a value to blink.
If the value set in "Highlight" above equals the value of the FP function, the value set in" Highlight"
has priority.
Back Color:
Specify a color for the light section in highlight state.
Character color:
Specify a character color in highlight state.
Highlight preview:
Check this item to confirm the highlighted message display state on the form. This item has higher
priority than "Preview" in the Image tab. So, if this item and "Preview" in the Image tab are checked
at the same time, the background color and character color set in the Highlight tab are used for
display.
This property is effective for form display on the personal computer, and is irrelevant to the screen
display of the CNC.
* The setting of 0 in both of "Highlight" and "Blinking" is equivalent to the unchecking of "Use
highlight".
- 280 -
- Image
Image File Name:

Style:
Back Color:
Border Color 1:
Border Color 2:
Preview:
Check this item and specify a text message number to confirm the text message with the specified
number on the form. This property is effective for form display on the personal computer and is
irrelevant to the screen display of the CNC.
If "Display messages with back color." in the Action tab is checked, the character color and
background color specified in the message file are used for display.
2.3.17 Composite Message Indication Control

This control reads the text (character string) corresponding to the text number specified with a specified
PMC area from F-ROM and indicates it.
As the message indication interface, a number interface and bit interface are supplied.
For the number interface, a single message can be displayed by combining up to six phrases. For the bit
interface, only a single phrase can be displayed. Up to 32 messages can be displayed, with each
connected-phrase or mono-phrase message being assumed as one.
A function is provided which adds a connect word to each connected-phrase or mono-phrase message. As
a connect word, a date and time can be selected.
Messages can be displayed on the display in two ways:
• List messages in a rectangular display area, one in each line.
• Run a telop of messages from right to left.
- 281 -
Number Interface Specification

Structure of phrases and specifying an PMC area
In the following example, two bytes are secured for all phrases (up to six phrases) in the number
specification area for a single message, and consecutive 12 bytes, D200 to D211, are used.
Example Phrase Phrase Phrase Phrase Phrase Phrase

D200: number 1 number 2 number 3 number 4 number 5 number 6
Either one or two bytes can be selected as the size of a single phrase number specification area.
If one byte is selected, the PMC area requires less space; however, only phrase numbers 1 to 255 in the
message text file can be specified. The numbers specified in the PMC must be the ones that correspond to
the messages registered in the message text files specified for the individual phrases.
As many message specification areas, such as that shown in the above example, as the specified number
of messages are reserved consecutively as an array in the PMC area. The following shows an example of
reserving the areas to display three 5-phrase messages.
x→ 0 2 4 6 8
Phrase Phrase Phrase Phrase Phrase
D20x: For message 1
number 1 number 2 number 3 number 4 number 5
D21x: For message 2
D22x: For message 3
Up to 32 messages can be displayed.

A 1-bit read enable signal is required for each message.
The following shows an example of reserving read enable signals in a 2-byte area to display 11 messages.
Placement of read enable signals

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
R200 Message Message Message Message Message Message 3 Message 2 Message 1
8 7 6 5 4
R201 Message Message Message 9
11 10
When a read enable signal is set to 1, this control reads the message number specification area
corresponding to this bit, and retrieves message phrases with the specified phrase numbers from the
individual message files corresponding to this phrase. Thus, the retrieval of a single phrase is executed for
the number of constituent phrases, and the phrases are combined in the order of phrase numbers 1 to 6, so
that a single message is created. When the read enable signal is set to 0, the message is removed from the
operator’s panel.
If two bytes is selected as the size of each phrase number specification area and thirty-two 6-phrase
messages are to be displayed, 2 × 6 × 32 = 384 bytes are required as well as 32 bits for the read enable
signals. Thus, two continuous areas of 384 bytes and 4 bytes each are required in the PMC.
- 282 -
CAUTION
1 Set the necessary phrase numbers from the PMC before turning the
corresponding read enable signals on.
2 After setting a read enable signal to 1, do not change the corresponding phrase
number.
3 Telop display is accomplished by shifting the character string gradually using
software. The rate at which the character string runs is affected by the operating
status of the NC unit. The shifting of the character string stops if there is a
process that takes precedence over the telop display.
Property Pages
- General
Object ID:
X,Y:
Set the coordinates of the upper-left corner of the composite message indication control.
Width, Height:
Set the width and height of the composite message indication control.
- 283 -
- Character
X,Y:
Multi-language key:
Character Type:
- 284 -
- Action
Bit IF:
Select this option to use a PMC signal bit for the specification of the text message to be displayed. A
specified number of messages of ON bits that are found from the search start signal address are
listed.
Number IF:
Check this check box to select the number interface to specify message phrases with numbers.
Sentence connect number:
Specify the number of phrases to make up a single message.
For the number interface, a number 1 to 6 can be specified.
For the bit interface, the number is fixed at 1.
Message number:
Specify the number of messages to be displayed, in the range of 1 to 32.
Edit Massage File:
Click this button to edit the file (.msgxml file) containing the character strings to create the messages
to be displayed.
For an explanation of how to edit the file, see “2.3.1.2 Editing text message files” found in the
explanation of the text character string indication control.
* Even if the color of characters in a message file is set, the specification of 1-6 [Character Color]
is used when a message is displayed with this control.
Connect Words:
Specify the character string to be added to the beginning of a message. Select one from the combo
box.
- Date (2000/06/30)
- Time (16:44)
- Date&Time(2000/06/30 16:44)
- None (no additional character string displayed)
* If date or time is specified, the date or time at the time when the composite message indication
control receives a read enable signal is displayed.
1-6 Secure 1 byte: , 1-6 Secure 2 byte:
Used for the number interface.
Select the size of the document number specification area for each phrase.
If 1 byte is secured, a number 1 to 255 can be specified; if 2 bytes, 1 to 65535.
1-6 File Name:
Specify the name of the text message file containing a message to be displayed. Different files can
be specified for different phrases.
1-6 Character Color:
Specify the character color used to display a message character string.
- 285 -
1-6 Back Color:

Specify the background color used to display a message character string.
Reference Area: , Reference Address:
Specify the type and the top address of the PMC area used as the first signal area in the phrase
number specification area. An array of necessary message specification areas is secured starting with
the interface area specified here. The following areas can be specified:
R, D, X, Y, G, F, E(PMC-SB7)
Read Enable Area: , Read Enable Addr: , Read Enable Bit:
Specify the first bit of the read enable signal area used to notify that the number interface area can be
read. As many bits as the number of messages are used, starting with this bit. If the number of
messages is four and D100.6 is specified, the following bits are allocated:
D100.6 for message 1 read enable signal
The message corresponding to the read enable area bit that is on is displayed.
The following areas can be specified:
R, D, X, Y, G, F, E(PMC-SB7)
Search Start Area:
Search Start Bit:
Used for the bit interface.
Specify the start address of the bit-corresponding message signal area. As many bits as the search bit
Search Bit Count:
Display format:
Specify the format in which the messages specified from the PMC are to be displayed.
For List Display, the messages are listed, each in one line.
For Telop Display, each message is displayed, shifting from right to left at the speed corresponding
to the display speed level. If there are multiple messages, they are run one by one as they are
generated.
Display Speed Level:
For Telop Display, specify the speed at which messages are to be displayed. The speed can be
specified in the range of 1 to 7.
- 286 -
- Image
Image File Name:

Style:
Back Color:
Border Color 1:
Border Color 2:
2.3.18 History Message Indication Control
This control is used to display a summary/history/detail screen of the contents of a “History Block”
resulting from collecting and recording message display history with the history collection function.
For another use of this control, a function is provided which allows you to display a summary/detail
screen of display request messages from the PMC without specifying a “History Block”. This is similar to
the text character string indication control. The history message indication control, however, allows you
to display multiple messages at the same time. It also allows you to scroll through the screen, display a
- 287 -
detail screen, and switch between summary and detail screens in cooperation with the history display
operation button of a button control.
By specifying the history message indication data acquisition function for the function specification of a
numeral/character string indication control, you can display various related information on the screen.
Property Pages
- General
Object ID:
X, Y:
Set the coordinates of the upper-left corner of the history message indication control.
Weight, Height:
Set the width and height of the history message indication control.
- 288 -
- Character
The history message indication control offers three screen display types, summary, history, and detail.
You can specify the display format of summary/history and that for detail separately.
- 289 -
Multi-language key:
X, Y:
coordinates of the upper-left corner of the character string. The second and subsequent rows will
assume caption display positions relative to the upper-left corner of the rectangle as calculated with
the row height specification.
Character Type:
Specify the character type of the character string to be displayed.
Row Height:
Specify the row height from the upper-left corner of the rectangle of the control.
If the row height is 0, the default row height for a specified font size will be assumed.
- Action
No Action:
Check this check box to disable the function of the control itself.
Set the disabled-time control display image shape set in the Image tab.
First Time Display:
The history message indication control allows you switch between three types of display, summary,
history, and detail, in cooperation with a button control. Select from the four types described below
to specify which display type to use for the first time display when the power is turned on.
Types <1> to <3> are for the screen types for history block display. Thus, select one of them to
display the contents of a “History Block” collected with the history collection function. Specify <4>
to simply display the message indication requests reported from the PMC directly on the operator’s
panel without recording to a history block. Thus, for <4> Message Display, only summary and detail
- 290 -
screens are possible. On the summary screen in this case, only message texts are displayed; other
information such as occurring date and time cannot be displayed.
<1> Summary Display Specify a history block number.
<2> History Display Specify a history block number.
<3> Detail Display Specify a history block number.
<4> Message Display Select either the bit or number of the message indication interface.
File Name:
Specify the name of the spreadsheet file (MSGXML file name) in which to register the messages
indicated by the message indication interface.
Edit button:
Click this button to edit the file (~.msgxml) for setting the character strings used to create messages
to be displayed.
For an explanation of the editing method, see “2.3.1.2 Editing text message files” located in the text
character string indication control.
Assign Link Number:
To indicate the relation with the “History Display button control”, which is a function to be
accomplished in cooperation with a button control, assign a necessary link number. Numbers from 0
to 30 can be specified throughout the custom screen project. A number of 0 may be specified if no
link number is necessary; there may be multiple 0s. The history message indication control having
the assign link number that matches the “Link Number at output button” of a history indication
button control will perform the operation specified for the history indication button, such as page
switching.
Reference Link Number:
If you have created a summary/history screen and a detail screen separately with two history
message indication controls, when a detail display message display switching operation command is
transferred from the button control linked with the control currently displaying a summary/detail
screen to the control that displays a detail screen, the history message indication control that is
assigned this “Reference Link Number”, specified for the control that displays a detail screen, is
referenced to decide on which detail message to display. Specify the “Assign Link Number” of the
control to be referenced so that the detailed message of that control is displayed. To switch between
summary/history screen and detail screen using a single control, specify the same number as the
“Assign Link Number” of the control. If you leave the number 0, the system will evaluate this as the
absence of the control to be referenced, and a detail screen cannot be displayed.
Summary/History Display:
This item is checked if you select “Summary Display”, “History Display”, or “Detail Display” for
the first time display property.
History Block Number:
For history display, select a number from 1 to 4 to specify the “History Display” whose contents are
to be displayed.
You can specify the history block number 0 if the history message indication control is to be used
for a detail screen only.
CAUTION
The history message indication control indicated by the “Reference Link
Number” of such a control for a detail screen only may be of the
summary/history display type with a history block specification or of the message
display type. Do not, however, mount a history display switch button for a control
for a detail screen only.
Bit IF:
You can select this option if you select “Message Display” for the first time display property.
Select this option to use a PMC signal bit for the specification of the text message to be displayed.
The message of the first ON bit that is found from the search start signal address is displayed.
- 291 -
Search Start Area/Bit/Address:

Specify the start address of the bit-corresponding message signal area. Usually, R, D, E (PMC-SB7),
and A areas are used. As many bits as the search bit count, described below, will be used in
ascending order, starting with this signal.
Search Bit Count:
Number IF:
You can select this option if you select “Message Display” for the first time display property.
Select this option to use a PMC signal area for the specification of the text message to be displayed,
with a 1- or 2-byte binary number specification.
If you select this interface, set up and select the four items described below.
Message Area:
Specify the start address of the PMC area for message indication number notification when the
number interface is used.
For this property, specify the type of the PMC area. Usually, R, D, and E (PMC-SB7) areas are used.
Message Address:
Specify the start address of the area specified above.
Message Number:
Specify the maximum number of notification messages that can be displayed at a time, starting at the
start of the specified message area. A number up to 32 can be specified.
Message Area Size - Secure 1 byte, Secure 2 byte:
Select the size of a single number area. A continuous area of the [Message Number x Message Area
Size] size will be used.
For 1 byte, a text number from 1 to 255 can be specified.
For 2 bytes, a text number from 1 to 65535 can be specified.
History display screen setting example
- 292 -
Link Number
Button control/History
at output Explanation of cooperation action
Display button control
button
When the button is pressed, “Line n of detail” is output to history
<1> Setting of detail message indication control 2, and history message indication
message display 2 control 2 displays the details of the message on “Line n” displayed
switch button by the history message indication control with reference link
number 1.
When the button is pressed, a display screen type switching
<2> Setting of
command is output to history message indication control 1. On
summary/history/deta 1
history message indication control 1, screen type switching
il switch button
between summary and history is executed.
When the button is pressed, a page UP or DOWN switching
command is output to history message indication control 1. On
<3> Page Switch button 1
history message indication control 1, the page switching in
accordance with the command is executed.
<4> Output history data to When the button is pressed, the history data stored in history
1
memory card block 1 is output to the memory card.
- Image
Mask Image File:

You can select a FIG file containing the mask styles to be displayed when “No Action” in the Action
tab is checked.
Mask Style:
From the styles contained in the “mask image file”, select the mask style for the control.
Image File Name
You can select a FIG file containing the styles for controls to be displayed when “No Action” in the
Action tab is not checked (the function is enabled).
Style:
From the styles contained in the “image file name”, select the style to be displayed when the control
is enabled.
- 293 -
Back Color:
Specify the background color of the rectangular base.
Border Color 1, Border Color 2:
Select a frame color for the upper edge and left edge of the rectangular style; for some styles, a color
for the inner frame, outer frame, etc. and a frame color for the lower edge and right edge; and for
others, a color for the inner frame, outer frame, etc.
Summary/History Display, Detail Display:
You can check the character display state for each display screen type on a form. This property is
effective to the form display on the personal computer. It does not have an effect on screen display
on the CNC.
- History Format
The settings in the “History Format” tab are mainly the properties to be assumed when the contents of a
history block are displayed.
For Message Display type, however, the “Ruled Line Interval” and “Ruled Line Color” properties will be
effective.
History Display Order:
If a summary screen and a history screen are displayed, messages are displayed in a time series, from
the top and bottom lines, according to the occurring dates and times of messages. For this property,
specify the direction of the time series.
Row Display Order:
Specify the order of message display items in a single line on a summary screen and a history screen.
No :This display item and subsequent ones will not be used.
Occurring date&time :Displays the occurring date and time of the message.
Restore date&time :Displays the restore date and time of the message.
Duration Time :Displays the time that elapsed from occurrence to restoration.
Message :Display message
You can enter separator characters and ruled line between the above display format items.
- 294 -
Ruled Line Interval:
If a summary screen and a history screen are displayed, you can draw horizontal ruled line on each
line. Specify whether to draw ruled line, and the line width and color.
These settings will be effective even if you specify the “Message Display” screen type for the first
time display.
No : Does not display ruled line between lines.
1dot line : Draws straight ruled line with 1-dot width.
2dots line : Draws straight ruled line with 2-dot width.
Ruled Line Color:
Specify the line color.
Date & Time Display Format:
Specify the display format for the occurring date & time and the restore date & time described below.
You can select the following types for the respective date and time items:
No : This display item and subsequent ones will not be used.
YYYY : 4-digit year
YY : 2-digit year
MO : 2-digit month
DD : 2-digit month
HH : 2-digit hours
MI : 2-digit minutes
SS : 2-digit seconds
You can enter a separator character between the above display format items.
Occurring date & time:
Specify the display format for the date and time at which a message indication request is received.
Restore date & time:
Specify the display format for the date and time at which a message indication request is stopped.
Duration Time:
Specify the display format for the time that elapsed from the message occurring date & time and
restore date & time.
No : This display item and subsequent ones will not be used.
HHH : 3-digit hours
MI : 2-digit minutes
SS : 2-digit seconds
After the display time above, you can specify a single character that indicates a unit.
Date & Time Display Font Color:
Specify the display color for the character strings of occurring date and time, restore date and time,
and duration time.
CAUTION
The separator character and unit character in the occurring date and time,
restore date and time, and duration time are displayed with the character type
specified for Summary/History Display in the Character tab. Use caution
because the specified separator character and unit character may not be
displayed with this character type, depending on which characters are specified.
And, the space must be specified when the separator character is unnecessary.
If any separator character is not specified, character strings after the separator
are not displayed.
- 295 -
2.3.19 Message Indication Control

This control reads the value of one byte in the PMC area, and displays eight types of messages based on
the on/off states of the bits.
If multiple bits are on in a specified byte, a message is displayed with priority assigned to the lowest bit.
To display multiple messages on the screen, set additional message indication controls at different display
locations.
Property Pages
- General
Object ID:
X, Y:
Set the coordinates of the upper-left corner of the message indication control.
Width, Height:
Set the width and height of the message indication control.
- 296 -
- Character
X, Y:
Specify the display position of a message character string. Specify the upper-left corner of a start
character string by using relative coordinates within the rectangle of the control.
Character Type:
Specify the type of character used for message display.
Watch Bit:
Select a message assignment bit from one byte in the PMC area specified in the Action tab. A
number from 0 to 7 can be specified.
When a bit number is selected, the setting corresponding to the bit number can be checked in the
item of ON, OFF below. To enter a new setting or modify the existing setting, open the edit dialog
box by clicking the Edit button.
Multi-language key:
ON, OFF:
The operation performed when a bit is turned on or off is described.
- 297 -
- Edit dialog box
The setting items enclosed in the ON frame specify operation to be performed when a specified bit is
turned on. The setting items enclosed in the OFF frame specify operation to be performed when a
specified bit is turned off. The setting items of the ON and OFF frames can be specified in the same way.
In the list box, select one of the following:

Not Use : No message is assigned.
Display : A character string set in the Caption field is displayed, depending on the bit state.
Clear : A character string is cleared (to space), depending on the bit state.
NOTE
When assigning multiple messages to one byte, set “Display” in the ON or OFF
side uniformly for all bits.
Character Color:
Specify the display character color of a caption.
Caption:
When Display is selected in the list box, set a character string to be displayed.
- 298 -
- Action
Watch PMC Area:

Specify a type of PMC area address where a message is set. The following areas can be specified:
Watch Address:
Specify a PMC address where a message is set.
- 299 -
- Image
Image File Name:

The FIG file holding control figures can be selected.
Style:
Select a type of figure registered in Image File Name.
Back Color:
Specify the background color of the message display section.
Border Color 1:
Select a frame color for the upper edge and left edge of the message display section.
Border Color 2:
Select a frame color for the lower edge and right edge of the message display section.
On Preview:
Check this check box to confirm the message display state on the form when a specified bit is turned
on. When this check box is checked, caption display can also be confirmed on the form. This
property is valid for form display on the personal computer. This property does not affect the screen
display of the CNC.
- 300 -
2.3.20 Image Display Control

This control is used to display an image on the CNC screen. The types of image files that can be
displayed are bit map (BMP) files and JPEG files. When image data is displayed on the touch panel, the
number of usable colors is decreased to 256. The palette on the personal computer differs from the palette
on the CNC. So, the vividness and color of an image displayed on a CNC differ from those of an image
displayed on a personal computer.
Property Pages
- General
Object ID:
X, Y:
Set the coordinates of the upper-left corner of the image display control.
Width, Height:
A specified screen is edited (namely, enlarged or reduced) to match the width and height specified
here.
Image File Name:
Specify a BMP file or JPEG file. Clicking the … button at the right edge displays a file dialog box,
from which a desired file can also be selected.
- 301 -
2.3.21 Clock Control

This control is used to place a digital indication clock on the CNC screen. Only one piece can be specified
in the form of the screen. The other clock display is made in the subscreen form at the layout of the
division of the date and time.
Property Pages
- General
Object ID:
X, Y:
Set the coordinates of the upper-left corner of the clock control.
Width, Height:
The fixed size dependent on each type of display character is automatically set. So, the user cannot
change these properties.
- 302 -
- Character
Display Type:
Date and/or time data is displayed. Choose from the following:
0: TIME
1: DATE
2: DATE & TIME
Character Type:
Specify the type of character used for clock display.
* Do not select 6x-size characters. With the 6x-size font, “/” and “:” are not available.
Character Color:
Specify the color of characters used for clock display.
- 303 -
- Image
Image File Name:

The FIG file holding control figures can be selected.
Style:
Back Color:
Border Color 1:
Border Color 2:
- 304 -
2.3.22 Meter Control

This control reads the value of a PMC register, and provides a meter indication according to the setting of
the properties. It is possible to separate the Graduations Back Color into two or three colors, by
specifying the Graduations Boundary. Display scale values and meter item names by using the label
control.
Property Pages
- General
Object ID:
X, Y:
Set the coordinates of the upper-left corner of the meter control.
Width, Height:
Set the width and height of the rectangle of the meter control.
- 305 -
- Setting
Function:
Specify a function for reading a meter indication.
Example: rdpmc[9_100_1]
This example reads two bytes from D100 as a meter indication.
Max Value:
Set a maximum value for a meter value specified in Function.
In meter indication, this value represents the state where the meter has moved off the scale.
Min Value:
Set a minimum value for a meter value specified in Function.
In meter indication, this value represents the lowest value.
Number of tics per division:
Specify the number of divisions for graduating the meter indicator.
Graduations Boundary High:
When the Graduations Back Color is displayed, separating into two or three colors, turn on the check
and set a boundary value.
Graduations Boundary Middle:
When the Graduations Back Color is displayed, separating into three colors, turn on the check and
set a boundary value.
NOTE
Set the value as the following condition.
the minimum value < Graduations Boundary Middle < Graduations Boundary High
< the maximum value
- 306 -
- Image
Image File Name:

The FIG file holding meter control figures can be selected.
Style:
Select a type of meter figure registered in Image File Name.
Direction:
For a circular meter figure, specify the direction of increase in the graph.
0 : Clockwise
1 : Counterclockwise
Back Color:
Specify the background color of the meter section.
Indicator Style:
Select a meter indicator figure.
0: Pin Style
1: Belt Style
Indicator Color:
Specify the color of the meter pin.
Graduations Back Color High:
When the "Graduations Boundary High" check box is validated, set the color of "Graduations Back
Color High".
Graduations Back Color Middle:
When the "Graduations Boundary Middle" check box is validated, set the color of "Graduations
Back Color Middle".
Graduations Back Color Low:
Either "Graduations Boundary High" or "Graduations Boundary Middle" is validated, or both of
them are validated, set the color of "Graduations Back Color Low".
Frame Color:
Specify the background color of the meter.
Border Color 1:
Border Color 2:
- 307 -
2.3.23 Graph Control

This control reads the value of a PMC register, and displays a bar graph according to the setting of the
properties. Display scale values and graph item names by using the label control.
Property Pages
- General
Object ID:
X, Y:
Set the coordinates of the upper-left corner of the graph control.
Width, Height:
Set the width and height of one bar. Alternatively, set the width and height of a coordinate axis
(scale) figure.
- 308 -
- Setting
This property tab can be set when a graph is specified in the item of Style of the Image tab. When a
coordinate axis (scale) is specified, this property tab cannot be specified.
Function:
Specify a function for reading a bar graph indication.
Example: rdpmc[9_100_1]
This example reads two bytes from D100 as a graph indication.
Max Value:
Set a maximum value for a graph value specified in Function.
This value represents the value corresponding to a maximum position in graph indication.
Min Value:
Set a minimum value for a graph value specified in Function.
This value represents the value corresponding to a minimum position in graph indication.
- 309 -
- Image
Image File Name:

The FIG file holding graph control figures can be selected.
Graph and Scale radio buttons:
Check Graph to select a bar graph figure.
Check Scale to select a coordinate axis (scale) figure to be used as the background of a bar graph.
Style:
Select a type of graph figure registered in Image File Name.
Back Color:
Graph : Specifies the background color of a bar graph.
Scale : Specifies the background color of a coordinate axis figure.
Graph Series Color: To be set only when Graph is selected
Specify the data value display color of a bar graph.
Border Color 1: To be set only when Scale is selected
Select a frame color for the upper edge and left edge of a coordinate axis figure.
Border Color 2: To be set only when Scale is selected
Select a frame color for the lower edge and right edge of a coordinate axis figure.
Scale Color: To be set only when Scale is selected
Select an axis color for a coordinate axis figure.
- 310 -
2.3.24 Line Chart Control

This control reads the value of a PMC register or P code macro variable and displays a line chart.
・ A line chart can be displayed at an arbitrary time by using a PMC signal as a trigger.
・ A line chart can be displayed on a real-time basis by sampling data at certain intervals.
・ Up to eight line charts can be displayed.
・ Create data for line chart display in a PMC data area or P code macro variable by using a PMC ladder,
auxiliary macro for the macro executor, and so forth.
NOTE
When line charts are displayed on a real-time basis, the number of line charts
displayable on a real-time basis and the display interval vary, depending on the
CNC operation (load) state.
Screen configuration
Background
Line chart
Update
Data value
indicator
Division
Time
The line chart control consists of a rectangular background, divisions, update indicator for indicating the
current display update position, and line charts.
Use the label control for display of a line chart title, explanation of the vertical and horizontal axes,
explanation of each line chart, and so forth.
Screen display
Data to be displayed as a line chart is sampled using a PMC ladder or auxiliary macro for the macro
executor. Sampled data is stored using the ring buffer method. For details, see Appendix D.1, "METHOD
OF STORING SAMPLED DATA".
A line chart can be displayed using one of two methods:
1. Real-time display method
Data is sampled at certain intervals for display as a line chart. The current drawing position (update
indicator) is represented by a vertical heavy line. When the drawing position has reached the right
edge of the horizontal axis, drawing restarts from the left edge. Drawing continues while the screen
is displayed.
- 311 -
2. Trigger display method

A line chart of a specified section is displayed using PMC signals as triggers for starting and ending
sampling. For example, sampling is started when a button on the screen is pressed. When the
sampling ends, a line chart of a specified section is drawn. If sampled data cannot be fully displayed
on one screen, the drawing range can be scrolled. For details of signals used as triggers, see
Appendix D.2, "TIMING CHART OF THE TRIGGER DISPLAY METHOD".
1st draw
Update
indicator
Scroll
2nd 1st draw
Data moved by Data displayed

scrolling after scrolling
By using an FP script, which is an existing operation function, the result of an operation performed on
sampled data can be displayed.
An FP script is a function that enables a control to call a simple operation program created with the edit
function of FANUC PICTURE. For details, see Subsection 2.2.15, "FP Script Function".
For example, data can be displayed as a line chart representing ratio data (%) relative to a maximum
value.
Within an FP script, the following two variables are used.
・ READ_VAL
Input parameter variable for an FP script (LONG type)
・ DISP_VAL
Variable for returning the result of FP script operation (LONG type)
Example) FP script for converting data to ratio data relative to a maximum value
DISP_VAL = READ_VAL*100/maximum-value;
- 312 -
Property Pages
- General
Object ID:
X, Y:
Set the coordinates of the upper-left corner of the line chart control.
Width, Height:
Set the width and height of the line chart control.
- 313 -
- Action
Select the real-time display method or trigger display method from the combo box then set the items
required for the selected method. Those items that need not be set are dimmed and cannot be set.
[Setting items common to the two methods]

Display Method:
Select the real-time display method or trigger display method.
Data Stored Area:
Specify which of the PMC and P code macro variable stores sampled data.
Number of division:
Specify the number of divisions on each axis.
Display Time:
Specify a maximum time of display performed without scrolling.
The divisions of the horizontal axis of a line chart are automatically scaled using this display time as
the size of the horizontal axis. The unit of time may be the second, minute, or hour. However, be
sure to match the unit with the one used for Sampling Interval and Drawing Interval below.
Sampling Interval:
Specify an interval used to sample data.
Drawing Interval:
Specify a drawing interval used to display sampled data as a line chart. A sampling interval
multiplied by an integer is used as an actual drawing interval.
Max. value:
Specify a maximum value for data to be displayed as a line chart.
The value set in this item corresponds to the maximum position of a displayed line chart.
- 314 -
Min. value:
Specify a minimum value for data to be displayed as a line chart.
The value set in this item corresponds to the minimum position of a displayed line chart.
Function:
To process and display data, check this item and specify an FP script. An FP script is a function that
enables a control to call a simple operation program created with the edit function of FANUC
PICTURE. For details, see Subsection 2.2.15, "FP Script Function".
Display Data Setting:
Clicking this button displays a screen for setting data to be displayed.
For details, see "Action - Display Data Setting" provided later.
[Setting items only for the real-time display method]

Update Indicator Color:
Specify the color of the update indicator used to indicate the current update position on the
horizontal axis.
[Setting items only for the trigger display method]

Display Request Signal (PMC Area, Address, Bit, Symbol):
Specify the address and type of a signal to be used as a trigger for line chart display.
Display Response Signal (PMC Area, Address, Bit, Symbol):
Specify the address and type of a signal used to indicate the end of line chart display.
Scroll Signal (PMC Area, Address, Symbol, Data Type):
To use the scroll function, check this item and specify the address where a scroll amount is stored
and its type.
・ With the trigger display method, a line chart is displayed when the display request signal is inverted.
The display response signal is inverted at the end of display. For details, see Appendix D.2, "TIMING
CHART OF THE TRIGGER DISPLAY METHOD". To scroll data that cannot be displayed fully on
one screen, set the items following "Scroll Signal".
Example of line chart display)

Data sampled at intervals of 5 seconds is displayed at intervals of 10 seconds for 60 seconds only.
----- Horizontal axis ----- ----- Vertical axis -----
Number of division: 4 Number of division: 6
Display Time: 60 s Max. value: 500
Sampling Interval: 5 s Min. value: -100
Drawing Interval: 10 s
* Actually, the following items are not displayed:

• Numbers and explanation on the vertical and horizontal axes
• Sampling interval division lines
• ● mark representing the sampled data position
- 315 -
- Action - Display Data Setting

For each of up to 8 line charts, set the address and type of a buffer, line style, and so forth.
Data1 to Data8 (PMC Area, Start PMC Address, Data Type, Symbol):
To display a line chart, check each of these items and specify the address and type of a buffer storing
sampled data. For details, see Appendix D.1, "METHOD OF STORING SAMPLED DATA".
Line Style:
Specify the line style of a line chart.
Line Color:
Specify the line color of a line chart.
Buffer Length:
Specify the maximum allowable number of data items stored in the buffer.
Pointer Stored Address (PMC Area, Start PMC Address, Data Type):
Specify the address and type of the pointer pointing to a sampled data write position and read
completion position.
- 316 -
- Image
Image File Name:

A selection can be made from the FIG files storing the figures of the line chart control.
Style:
Select a desired one from the frame styles stored in the image file.
Graph Border Color1:
Make a color setting according to the frame figure as follows:
・ Single-line frame: Select a frame color.
・ Double-line frame: Select a color for the outer frame.
・ Concaved frame: Select a color for the left side and upper side of the frame.
Graph Border Color2:
Make a color setting according to the frame figure as follows:
・ Single-line frame: Disabled
・ Double-line frame: Select a color for the inner frame.
・ Concaved frame: Select a color for the right side and lower side of the frame.
Graph Back Color:
Specify the background color of the graph area.
Graduations Back Color:
Specify the background color of the graduations.
Graduations Color:
Specify the color of the graduations on the horizontal axis and vertical axis.
- 317 -
2.3.25 Screen Switch Control with image

This control is used to switch from one screen to another. Onto a button, an image in the BMP or JPG
format can be pasted. Touching the screen switch control on the screen switches the screen display to the
screen set as a property of this control. Following types of screen switch operations are available.
1. Base screen switching
When this type of switching is selected, the entire screen currently being displayed is erased, then a
base screen is displayed. However, for switching to a pop-up screen, the pop-up screen is displayed
in the forefront without erasing the screen currently displayed.
2. Sub screen switching
When this type of switching is selected, a new screen is written over the current screen.
3. Switching to an NC screen
This type of switching is used to switch from a user-created touch panel screen to a screen provided
by the CNC such as the position display screen and parameter screen.
4. Popup screen erasure
Erases the popup screen in which this screen switch control is placed, and returns the system to the
screen from which the popup screen was called.
This button with image can be interlocked when functioning as a screen switching button. When the
embedded-plug indication is selected, this control can be set not to function as a button.

- 318 -
Property Pages
- General
Object ID:
X, Y:
Set the coordinates of the upper-left corner of the screen switch control.
Width, Height:
Set the width and height of the screen switch control.
- 319 -
- Character
Multi-language key:
Centering:
settings.
ON Caption:
Set a character string to be displayed on the screen switch control with image while the control is
being held down.
X, Y:
OFF Caption:
Set a character string to be displayed when the screen switch control with image is not held down.
X, Y:
Character Type:
- 320 -
ON Caption Color:
OFF Caption Color:
- Action
No Action:
Check this check box to disable the screen switch control with image function.
Screen Type:
Select a screen switching type. One of base screen switching, sub screen switching, switching to an
NC screen, and popup erasure can be selected.
Popup erasure: If the base screen is of the popup type, selecting this screen switching type erases the
currently displayed popup screen, returning the system to the screen from which the popup screen
was called.
Screen Name:
Set the name of a screen (name of a form) to which screen display is to switch. This item need not be
set in the case of switching to an NC screen.
Key Code:
In the case of switching to an NC screen, select the function key code of an MDI key.
Specifically, choose from POSITION, PROGRAM, OFFSET, SYSTEM, MESSAGE, GRAPHIC,
CUSTOM1, and CUSTOM2.
- 321 -
Shortcut key:
soft keys)
4. HELP key
Interlock:
Check this check box to specify interlocking for screen switching.
When the interlock signal specification is ON, screen switching is not performed.
Interlock PMC Area:
Interlock PMC Bit:
Blink:
Check this check box to specify a blink signal for the light section of the screen switch control with
image. This item is enabled when base screen switching is selected and "Light" below is checked, or
when sub screen switching is selected. When a specified blink signal is turned on, the light section
displays the ON state color and OFF state color alternately.
Blink PMC Area:
Blink PMC Address:
Specify a blink signal address.
Blink PMC Bit:
Light:
Check this check box to specify a light signal for the light section of the screen switch control with
image. When a specified light signal is turned on, the light section displays the color set in the ON
state color property.
When the screen is switched, the light signal is output. Turn off the signal by using the ladder or
switch destination screen.
Light PMC Area:
Light PMC Address:
Specify a light signal address.
Light PMC Bit:
- 322 -
- Image
Mask Image File:

Mask Style:
Image File Name:
Style:
On Color:
Select a color to be used for the light section when the button is pressed or turned on.
Off Color:
Select a color to be used for the light section when the button is not pressed or is turned off.
Border Color1:
Border Color2:
On preview:
Check this check box to confirm the control display state on the personal computer when the light
section of the control is turned on. When this check box is checked, the caption display state can also
be confirmed on the personal computer. This property is valid for form display on the personal
On Image:
Specify the file name of an image (BMP or JPG) to be used when the button is pressed or turned on.
Off Image:
Specify the file name of an image to be used when the button is not pressed or is turned off.
Centering:
Check this item to display an image at the center of the button.
- 323 -
X,Y:
Specify the display position of an image by using relative coordinates within the rectangle of the
coordinates of the upper-left corner of an image. This item is disabled when "Centering" is checked.
When "Auto resize" is checked, specify the width of a margin on the four sides.
Auto resize:
Check this item to enlarge or reduce an image according to the size of the button.
Fixed aspect:
When "Auto resize" is checked, check this item to enlarge or reduce an image without changing the
aspect ratio of the image.
- NoAction Image
NoAction Signal:
disables the function of the screen switching control with image and displays the embedded plug
style when the invalid signal specified in the following boxes is detected during power-up.
Image File Name:
This box can be used to select the FIG file that contains the button styles used when the screen
switching control with image is in the invalid state.
Style:
State Color:
Border Color1:
Border Color2:
PMC Area:
Address:
- 324 -
Bit:
Preview:
Check this check box to confirm the indication state on the form when the button control with image
is in the invalid state.
of the CNC
- Interlock Image
Display:
When [Interlock Signal] on the [Action] tab is set to ON, the function of the screen switching control
with image can be disabled and the button style can be switched to the one that indicates the
interlocking state.
Image File Name:
screen switching control with image is in the stop state.
Style:
State Color:
Border Color 1:
Border Color 2:
Without Caption:
Preview:
- 325 -
of the CNC.
- 326 -
2.3.26 Button Control with image

This control consists of a lamp section whose light section color, caption and image change according to
the state of an input signal from the PMC, and a switch section that performs the following operations
when the button section is pressed:
<1> Setting of bits in the PMC area
<2> Writing of fixed data to the PMC area
<3> Calling of an FP function
<4> Calling of a screen (used with momentary type)
<5> Switching of history message indication control screens, outputting of history data to the memory
card
The state of output to the PMC area is preserved after the screen is switched.
Two switch types are available: momentary type and alternate type.
This button can be interlocked when functioning as a push button. When the embedded-plug indication is
selected, this control can be set not to function as a button.



- 327 -
CAUTION
attribute.
Property Pages
- General
Object ID:
X, Y:
Set the coordinates of the upper-left corner of the button control with image.
Width, Height:
Set the width and height of the button control with image.
- 328 -
- Character
Multi-language key:
Centering:
horizontal directions within the rectangle.
settings.
ON Caption:
Set a character string to be output to the light section when the PMC monitor signal is on.
X, Y:
Specify the display position of the ON caption by using relative coordinates within the rectangle of
OFF Caption:
Set a character string to be output to the light section when the PMC monitor signal is off.
X, Y:
Specify the display position of the OFF caption by using relative coordinates within the rectangle of
- 329 -
Character Type:
ON Caption Color:
OFF Caption Color:
- Action
NoAction:
Check this check box to disable the button control with image function.
Set the button image for no action set in the Image tab.
Switch Type:
Select a switch type. This property is valid for other than screen switch action.
Action Type:
Specify operations to be performed when a switch is pressed and released. Click the Detail button
and set the detailed properties of the selected type.
For the method of setting, see [Action Detail Properties].
[Bit Set]
Performs bit operation in the PMC area.
[Data Set]
Writes fixed data as word-size data to the PMC area.
[Function Call]
Calls an FP function.
[Change Screen]
Calls another screen. (Used with momentary type)
- 330 -
[History Display]
Specifies an operation for the history message indication control.
・ Screen display switching
Shortcut key:
soft keys)
4. HELP key
Watch:
Choose whether to change the state of the light section (lamp section) according to switch state
(automatically) or a signal from the PMC.
[USER]
Specify USER to change the state of the light section according to a signal from the PMC.
Pressing the button section does not change the light section.
[AUTO]
Display is turned on when the switch is turned on. Display is turned off when the switch is
turned off. No signal bit in the PMC area needs to be assigned.
Watch PMC Area:
Specify a type of address for the PMC signal that turns on and off the light section. The following
areas can be specified:
Watch Address:
Watch Bit:
Interlock:
A signal for disabling button action can be specified. When the specified signal is on, the interlock
function operates to disable button action.
Check this item when using this function.
PMC Area:
Specify a type of address for an interlock signal. The following areas can be specified:
Address:
Bit:
- 331 -
Action Detail Properties
- Detail[Momentary]-[Bit Set]
Specify which data to be output to which signal bit when the switch is on.
PMC Area:
Address:
Bit:
Bit Pattern:
- Detail[5:Alternate]-[Bit Set]

PMC Area:
Address:
Bit:
Bit Pattern:
- 332 -
- Detail[Momentary]-[Data Set]
Specify which value to be output to which PMC area when the switch is on. The size of output data is
word.
PMC Area:
Address:
Word:
- Detail[5:Alternate]-[Data Set]

PMC Area:
Address:
Word:
- 333 -
- Detail[Momentary]-[Function Call]
Specify a function to be called when the switch is turned on.
Function:
- Detail[5:Alternate]-[Function Call]

Specify separately [ON Action] to be executed when the switch makes a transition from OFF to ON, and
[OFF Action] to be executed when the switch makes a transition from ON to OFF.
Function:
- Detail[Change Screen]
Specify a main screen to be called when the switch is turned on.
Screen Name:
Specify a main screen name. For a screen name, enter the XXX portion of the project form file name
XXX.XML.
- 334 -
- Detail[Momentary]-[History Display]
When the button state is changed to ON, one of the following operations can be performed:
・ Switching of history message indication control display
History Action Type Select the display operation of the history message indication control from among
the items described below.
The history display screen in the following explanation is not displayed if “Message Display” is selected
for the “First Time Display” property in the Action tab of the history message indication control.
<1> Summary/History/Detail Switch Button

This item creates a button for switching between summary and history display screens or a button
for returning from a detail display screen to a summary or history display screen. If selecting this
operation, set the following property:
<2> Detail Message Switch Button

This item creates a button for switching from a indicated message on a summary or history display
screen to a further detail screen. If selecting this operation, set the following properties:
• Row Number at Detail
• Detail Message File Name
<3> Page Switch Button

This item creates a Page Switch Button for a summary display or history display message. If
selecting this operation, set the following properties:
• MDI Key Code
<4> Output history data to memory card

This item creates a button for outputting the history messages stored in a history block to the memory
card. When this operation is selected, set the following properties:
・ Link Number at output button
・ Output File Name
For details of the history data memory card output function, see [History data memory card output
function] in Subsection 2.2.8.3, " Collection of history ".
Link Number at output button:

Specify the “Assign Link Number” set in the target history message indication control to specify on
which history message indication control the set button operation is to be performed.
- 335 -
Row Number at Detail:

Set this item for the “Detail Message Switch Button” operation. When summary or history display is
in progress, specify the line number of this indicated message. On a detail display screen, the system
searches the detailed explanation of the summary/history displayed command line through a
specified detail display file and displays it.
A line number of 0 means that the display contents of the detail display screen having the Link
Number at output button are to be cleared.
Detail Message File Name:
Set this item for the “Detail Message Switch Button” operation. The system loads the details of the
message indicated by the pressed detail switching button from the display file specified for this item
and displays them on the screen. If you create multiple detail switching buttons for the same line,
you can display different details by specifying different display file names for the buttons.
Edit button:
Clicking this button enables you to edit messages in a detail display file.
Message texts and detailed explanations are associated with one another if their “Number” or “Bit
Set” items have the same numbers in their respective text files.
For the method of editing, see Subsection 2.3.1.2, "Editing text message files".
MDI Key Code:
Used to select between page-up and page-down as the “Page Switch Button” operation.
Output File Name:
Set this item when "Output history data to memory card" is selected. Specify the name of a file used
when history data is output to the memory card. Enter a file name in the following format:
"8-character file name" + "one period" + "3-character extension"
(MS-DOS 8.3 format)
- Detail [Alternate]-[History Display]

Under [ON Action] and [OFF Action], specify separately the history message indication control
operations to be executed when the button changes from the off state to the on state and from on to
off.
The setting property is the same as that of the momentary operation history indication function
button.
For the setting of [History Display], the use of the momentary button attribute is recommended. If
MEM generation is executed using [History Display] with the alternate button attribute set, a
warning message is displayed. The warning message indicated below is output when [Output history
data to memory card] is set.
- 336 -
- Image
Mask Image File:

Style:
Image File Name:
Style:
On Color:
Select a color to be used for the light section when the light section is turned on by the monitor PMC
signal or automatically.
Off Color:
Select a color to be used for the light section when the light section is turned off by the monitor
PMC signal or automatically.
Border Color 1:
Border Color 2:
On Preview:
this check box is checked, the caption display state can also be confirmed on the form. This property
of the CNC.
On Image:
Specify the file name of an image (BMP or JPG) to be used when the button is pressed or turned on.
Off Image:
Specify the file name of an image to be used when the button is not pressed or is turned off.
Centering:
Check this item to display an image at the center of the button.
- 337 -
X, Y:
Auto resize:
Fixed aspect:
- NoAction Image
NoAction signal:
disables the function of the button control with image and displays the embedded plug style when
the invalid signal specified in the following boxes is detected during power-up.
Image File Name:
button control with image is in the invalid state.
Style:
State Color:
Border Color 1:
Border Color 2:
PMC Area
- 338 -
Address:
Bit:
Preview:
invalid state.
of the CNC
- Interlock Image
Display:
When [Interlock Signal] on the [Action] tab is set to ON, the function of the button control can be
disabled and the button style can be switched to the one that indicates the interlocking state.
Image File Name:
button control with image is in the stop state.
Style:
State Color:
Border Color1:
Border Color2:
Without Caption:
Preview:
- 339 -
of the CNC.
- 340 -
2.3.27 Lamp Control with exchangeable images

This control is used as a lamp whose light section color and image change according to the state of an
input signal from the PMC.
Property Pages
- General
Object ID:
X, Y:
Set the coordinates of the upper-left corner of the lamp control with exchangeable images.
Width, Height:
Set the width and height of the lamp control with exchangeable images.
- 341 -
- Action
No Action:
Check this check box to disable the lamp control with exchangeable images function.
Set the lamp image for no action set in the Image tab.
Bit IF:
Select this option to use a PMC signal bit for the specification of the image to be displayed. The
image of the first ON bit found from the search start signal address is displayed.
Search Start Area:
Search Start Bit:
Specify the start address of the bit-corresponding image signal area. As many bits as the search bit
Search Bit Count:
Specify the number of bits used for the bit-corresponding image display signal area. A number up to
512 can be specified.
NumberIF:
Select this option use a 1- or 2-byte binary number in the PMC signal area for the specification of
the image to be displayed.
If specifying this option, specify the following four items:
PMC Area:
Specify the PMC area used if the number interface is selected.
Usually, use area R, D or E(PMC-SB7)..
Address:
Specify the start address of the area specified above. If two bytes is specified as the size of the
number area, this address and the next one, with a total of two bytes, are used.
Use 1byte, Use 2byte:
Select the size of the number area.
- 342 -
FP Function:
Select this item and set an FP function when an image to be displayed is to be specified using a
value returned from the FP function. For the method of setting, see Chapter 3, "FP FUNCTIONS".
File Name:
Specify a image number and the image file name of the spreadsheet file(~.bmpxml) describing the
image.
Edit: (Button)
Click this button when a file (~.bmpxml) for setting image file used to create a image to be displayed
is edited. For the method of editing,
Interface with the PMC area

For the number interface
A image is displayed on the operator’s panel via the 1- or 2-byte text number report interface, using
the R or D or E(PMC-SB7) area of the PMC. If the image number is zero, the character previously
displayed will be erased. Subsequently, the system monitors for a number change, and displays a
image only if a change is made. The system monitors for a number change periodically and,
therefore, a number change must be retained for 500 msec or longer. If a change cannot be detected,
the image cannot be displayed.
・ Structure of a BMPXML file and editing it

A BMPXML file has a spreadsheet structure such as that shown below.
Number:
If using numbers as the interface with the PMC, enter the image number. If this number is written to
the number interface of the PMC, the written image file is displayed to a [Image file name] input cell.
This item must always be specified. So, even when using the bit interface, set a number starting with
1 in this item.
Bit set:
If using bit correspondence specifications as the interface with the PMC, specify the serial number
for the number of bits used. You can specify a numbers up to 511, with the search start bit assumed
to be 0.
Back color:
Specify the image lamp display back color. Double-clicking the left mouse button causes a color
setting dialog box to appear; select the desired color.
- 343 -
Image file name:

Specify the image file name display image lamp.
Add row :
This spreadsheet contains 100 rows. If they are not enough, enter the number of additional rows in
the [Add row] input field and click the Add row button, and the specified number of rows are added
at the end of the last row.
Insert Row :
When a certain cell is selected entirely, moving the cursor to the position at which rows are to be
inserted and clicking the Insert Row button causes the Number Setting dialog box to appear; enter
the number of rows to be inserted. The specified number of rows are added at the row on the sheet
on which the cursor is positioned.
Delete Rows :
Drag the cursor vertically to select the range of rows to be deleted at a time. Clicking the Del
Row button causes the deletion confirmation dialog box to appear; click either OK or Cancel. If OK
is selected, the selected rows are deleted.
Number Set :
With the number of the number cell on which the cursor is positioned as the start number, this
option automatically sets the specified number of numbers plus one number, starting with the cursor
row in the downward direction.
- 344 -
Bit set :
With the bit of the Bit Set cell on which the cursor is positioned as the start number, this option
automatically sets the specified bit number position of signals whose bit numbers increment by 1,
starting with the cursor row.
Image Set… :
By using the file selection dialog box, specify a file name to be entered in an "Image file name" cell.
OK :
Terminates editing. Clicking it causes the [Save As] dialog box to appear, allowing you to save the
message file with a new name. If you do not want to change the file name, select the [Same as
Previous] file name and click the Save button.
Cancel :
Cancels a file editing operation.
- 345 -
- Image
Mask Image File:

checked can be selected.
Mask Style:
Select a type of lamp figure registered in Mask Image File.
Image File Name:
not checked (that is, when the function is enabled) can be selected.
Style:
Select a type of lamp figure registered in Image File Name.
Back Color:
Specify the base color of the rectangle. This property has an effect for a lamp such as a round lamp.
Border Color 1:
Select a frame color for the upper edge and left edge of the lamp.
Border Color 2:
Select a frame color for the lower edge and right edge of the lamp.
Centering:
Check this item to display an image at the center of the lamp.
X, Y:
Auto resize:
Fixed aspect:
- 346 -
- NoAction Image
NoAction Signal:
disables the function of the screen lamp control with exchangeable images and displays the
embedded plug style when the invalid signal specified in the following boxes is detected during
power-up.
Image File Name:
This box can be used to select the FIG file that contains the lamp styles used when the lamp control
with exchangeable images is in the invalid state.
Style:
Select the type of the lamp styles registered in the file specified in [Image File Name].
State Color:
Border Color 1:
Border Color 2:
PMC Area:
Address:
Bit:
Preview:
Check this check box to confirm the indication state on the form when the lamp control with
exchangeable images is in the invalid state.
of the CNC
- 347 -
2.4 DRAW CONTROLS
2.4.1 Pointer Switching

This is not a control but is designed to switch from the draw pointer state to the standard pointer. Actually,
the mouse pointer can be returned to the arrow (standard). This pointer state is convenient for editing
operations such as control selection and pull-down menu selection.
2.4.2 Drawing of Line

This control draws a straight line between two points of rectangular corner.
Property Pages
- General
Object ID:
Object ID managed in the form. This ID is automatically assigned, so that the user cannot set this ID.
X, Y:
Set the coordinates of the upper-left corner of the rectangle formed by the start coordinates and end
coordinates of a line.
Width, Height:
Set the width and height of the rectangle formed by the start coordinates and end coordinates.
Direction:
Select a line draw direction from the start coordinates to the end coordinates.
- 348 -
- Image
Image File Name:

A FIG file storing draw control styles can be selected.
Style:
Select a draw control style from those stored in the file indicated by Image File Name.
Back Color:
Specify a background color for the draw control. Some background colors cannot be selected,
depending on the style.
Border Color1:
Select a display color for the line.
- 349 -
2.4.3 Drawing of Rectangle

This control draws a rectangle.
Property Pages
- General
Object ID:
X, Y:
Set the coordinates of the upper-left corner of a rectangle.
Width, Height:
Set the width and height of the rectangle.
- 350 -
- Image
Image File Name:

Style:
Back Color:
Specify the background color for the inside of the rectangle of the draw control.
Border Color1:
If there is a rectangular outer line, select a display color for the rectangular outer line.
- 351 -
2.4.4 Drawing of Arc

This control draws the arc determined by a start point, end point, center, and
arc drawing rotation direction.
The start point, end point, or center can be dragged on a screen form. When
the start point or end point is dragged, the center may position outside the
screen form depending on the positions of the start point and end point,
making the center invisible.
Property Pages
- General
Object ID:
X, Y:
Width, Height:
Direction:
0: Clockwise
X1, Y1:
X coordinate and Y coordinate of an arc drawing start point
X2, Y2:
X coordinate and Y coordinate of an arc drawing end point
Xc, Yc:
X coordinate and Y coordinate of an arc drawing center
- 352 -
- Image
Image File Name:

Style:
Back Color:
Specify the background color for the inside of the rectangle of the draw control. Some background
colors cannot be selected, depending on the style.
Border Color1:
Select a display color for the arc.
- 353 -
2.4.5 Drawing of Circle

This control draws a circle.
Property Pages
- General
Object ID:
X, Y:
Width, Height:
- 354 -
- Image
Image File Name:

Style:
Back Color:
Specify the background color for the inside of the circle of the draw control.
Border Color1:
If there is a circular outer line, select a display color for the circular outer line.
- 355 -
2.4.6 Drawing of Ellipse

This control draws an ellipse.
Property Pages
- General
Object ID:
X, Y:
Width, Height:
- 356 -
- Image
Image File Name:

Style:
Back Color:
Specify the background color for the inside of the ellipse of the draw control.
Border Color1:
If there is an elliptical outer line, select a display color for the elliptical outer line.
- 357 -
2.4.7 Drawing of Graphic Characters

This control draws graphic characters with no background.
Property Pages
- General
Object ID:
X, Y:
Width, Height:
- 358 -
- Character
No Use multi-language:
Multi-language key:
See “Editing multi-language display captions” in Subsection 2.3.1.1, “Description of general
Caption:
Enter a character string to be displayed.
Centering:
Check this check box to automatically center the caption display position vertically and horizontally
in the rectangle of the control.
X, Y:
Specify the caption display position as relative coordinates in the rectangle of the control. With
respect to the upper-left corner of the rectangle of the control, specify the coordinate of the
upper-left corner of the character string.
Character Type:
Specify a character type of the character string to be displayed.
0: ANK (display using a mixture of half-size and double-size characters)
1: Double size (display using double-size characters for half-size characters specified for the
caption)
2: Quadruple size (display using double height size and double width size characters)
3: Sextuple size (display using double height size and triple width size characters)
4: Reduced size (display using characters smaller than half-size characters)
Character Color:
Specify the character color of the character string to be displayed.
- 359 -
2.5 CUSTOM SCREEN CREATION PROCEDURE AND

GUIDELINE
2.5.1 About FANUC PICTURE and Customization Tools

FANUC PICTURE, when used with PMC ladders and other CNC customization tools, enables a
man-machine interface custom screen for machine operation to be created easily and speedily. Moreover,
by employing an operator’s panel of touch panel type, more operator-friendly machine operations can be
provided. So, when using FANUC PICTURE, consider how to create a desired custom screen in
association with these customization tools, before starting custom screen design work.
The figure below shows the relationships of the customization tools of FANUC PICTURE with the
interface areas and various functions.
Macro-Executer
C-Executer
• Execution
Alarm/High-level/
Communication • Conversational
S-RAM Task • Auxiliary
Area
Call user-
Message function P-code macro
History Area Variable
FANUC PICTURE Touch Panel

PMC
Signal Custom Screen Virtual Keybord
Ladder
Area Operation Board MDI-unit
FP-Functions Common Variable
Internal Data of CNC

Custom-Macro
Coordinates, Offset,
Parameter, ETC
- 360 -
2.5.2 Custom Screen Design and Creation

In general, when a custom screen for the machine operator’s panel is created, the development work is
divided into the four jobs below: <1>, <2>, <3>, and <4>. Job <4> may be unnecessary, depending on
the design of the custom screen. FANUC PICTURE enables development job <2> to be performed easily
and speedily.
<1> Custom screen design

Overall machine operations from <2> through <4> below are designed. The type and configuration
of machine operator’s panel screen and the role of each screen are designed. In detailed design,
design of a map for PMC signal area assignment to the buttons and lamps on each screen is needed,
and design of interface specifications is also needed if a customization tool such as the macro
executor is used.
• Design of a custom screen type to be created and screen specifications
Machine operation, data setting, machine monitor, fault indication, maintenance screen, etc.
• Hierarchical design of menu buttons displayed on each screen
• Custom screen interface area design
PMC signal area map → Buttons, lamps, interlock signals, etc.
Display data area map → D/E area, P code variables, common variables, etc.
• Design of layout and operation specifications of controls to be displayed on the custom screen
<2> FANUC PICTURE custom screen creation and incorporation into the CNC
In conformity with the custom screen design of <1>, controls such as buttons, lamps, and numerical
indicators are placed on the form according to each screen layout. For each control, property items
such as a caption and signal assignment for style and operation determination are set. The following
indicates the typical work items and work flow:
• Creation and setting of a custom screen project
• Creation of a parent screen for the custom screen
• Creation of pop-up screens for the custom screen
• Creation of child(=sub) screens for the custom screen
• Placement of each control and setting of properties
• Setting of a screen switch control
• Setting of a custom screen call key in MEM file generation
• Writing of a MEM file to CNC/F-ROM
• Setting of parameters for custom screen display
<3> Creation of screen-related PMC ladders

A ladder necessary for machine operation to be performed in response to button output signals from
the custom screen is created. Moreover, a ladder is created to process the signals for turning on
lamps and buttons for posting machine state from the ladder to the custom screen and to process the
screen operation interlock signals.
<4> Creation of interfaces with other customization tools

When data processing is allotted by using the macro executor and C language executor, programs on
the customization tool side are created to perform desired processing in response to a trigger
operation from the custom screen.
- 361 -
2.5.3 Example of FANUC PICTURE Custom Screen Creation

Let us create custom screens as indicated below. The types of screens and screen configurations are as
described below. As reference information, use a sample screen stored as a two-language display project
(Japanese and English) in the installation folder SAMPLE\fp_Exercise_XXX. When referencing or
editing the sample project, do not directly edit the project. Instead, copy the project to the local disk and
cancel the read-only attribute of all files before use. Basically, the form screen names and object IDs used
in the text below are the same as those used in the sample.
1. Machine operator’s panel screen
a. Coordinate display child screens (Four child screens: Absolute, relative, machine, and distance
to go)
b. Lamp display child screens
(Three child screens: Lamp 1, lamp 2, and program in execution)
c. Mode-matching operation button display child screens
(Five child screens: Editing, automatic MEM/MDI, manual JOG/HNDL)
d. Fault display/CNC state and CNC screen switch buttons (common child screen)
e. Screen switch and menu buttons
2. Fault guidance and history display screen
a. Current fault or fault history display
b. Fault details and guidance display
c. Fault display/CNC state and CNC screen switch buttons (common child screen)
d. Screen switch and menu buttons
Machine operator’s panel screen
e. Operation button screen switch
a. Coordinate display
child screens
b. Lamp display child

screens
c. Mode-matching operation
button display child
screens
e. Menu button screen switch d. Fault display/CNC state and CNC screen
switch button (common child screen)
- 362 -
The machine operator’s panel screen consists of one parent(=base/main) screen for the machine
operator’s panel and four types of child(=sub) screens, namely, coordinate child screen, lamp child screen,
button child screen, and an alarm child screen. Each of the child screens other than the alarm child screen
has a switching button for switching to a desired screen as required.
The alarm child screen is not switched. This screen, however, is common to all parent screens, so that this
screen, when made available as a child screen, can not only improve screen maintainability but also
suppress the increase in screen data memory size.
Fault guidance and history display screen

a. Current fault or fault history display
b. Fault details and

guidance display
d. Screen switch menu buttons c. Fault display/CNC state and CNC screen
switch buttons (common child screen)
The fault guidance and history display screen consists of screens a, b, and d in the parent screen portion,
and the alarm child screen, which is a common child screen.
The current fault or fault history display is switched using the history display switch function of the
button control, so that no child screen is required.
The table below indicates the setting for switching to the custom screen when the CNC screen is
displayed or the power is turned on.
Kind of custom Custom screen

Softkey Number Note
screen switch name
Machine operator’s
Start-up screen
panel screen
0x0106 The screen display is switched to the previously
Function key of (Series 0i-C, Series displayed custom screen.
CUSTOM 16i/18i/21i, Power If the machine operator’s panel screen is
Mate i) displayed previously, the screen display is
[RETURN]
0x3206 switched to the machine operator’s panel. If the
Function key of (Series 0i-D, Series fault guidance screen is displayed previously, the
CUSTOM1 30i/31i/32i/35i, screen display is switched to the fault guidance
Power Motion i-A) screen.
- 363 -
2.5.3.1 FANUC PICTURE creation procedure

The procedure for custom screen creation with FANUC PICTURE is as follows:
Creation of new Restoration of custom Selection of existing

custom screen project screen project custom screen project
<1>: Creating new project A: Open project
<2>: Setting of project
<3>:
Creating and editing screen form
- Create parent screen
- Create pop-up screens
- Create child screens
- Place controls and set properties
- Set screen switch control
B: Display composite screen
Composition ?
NG
OK
<4>: Making memory card file
<5>: Write to card and

write to CNC/F-ROM
<6>: Setting CNC parameters and

S-RAM memory initialization
alarm screen
c: Debug actual CNC display screen
Debug?
NG
OK
Completed
- 364 -
<1> In “Creating new project”, a project folder for storing various files created in connection with a
custom screen to be created is created.
¾ Specify a location and project folder name for creating and saving a custom screen on the hard
disk for data saving on the personal computer.
Dialog name Tab name Property item name Setting/Change/Point

A new project is created. → (This option is set in this
example.)
Restoration from F-ROM
A project is restored from the screen data MEM file →
Creating new
;
project
◎Project Name Enter a custom screen project name.
Specify the location where the project folder above is to
◎Directory Name
be created.
* Check if the property item names marked with ◎ must always be specified or the defaults may be used.
<2> In “Setting of project”, the conditions below that are common to the entire screen project and must
be set before project editing for custom screen creation are set.
¾ CNC system type, PMC type, display unit type
¾ Setting of the multi-language display function
¾ Setting of the PMC message display history collection function
Dialog name Tab name Property name Setting/Change/Point

◎CNC system Select a CNC model.
◎PMC type Select a PMC type to be used.
Display unit type Set an LCD display unit type.
Specify the resolution of the display unit, the font size,
Resolution, Font,
the number of soft keys displayed at the bottom of the
Soft key
Setting of display unit, and so forth.
CNCsystem For the three types of controls with a pop-up key input
Call key to input pop screen, specify an MDI key for which a pop-up window
up screen is to be displayed on the screen when the MDI key is
Setting of
pressed.
project
Specify the common Specify a focus color (common to the project) for data
focus color input destination indication.
The default is the setting for no use (unchecked).
For this example of screen, “;checked” is used.
◎The Multi-language In the sample project provided for reference
Setting of
display function is information, the two languages (Japanese and English)
Multi-language
used. are set. So, for some screens shown below, screen
descriptions based on Japanese display and English
display are provided.
(Content set in this Setting tab for using the function that stores a history of
tab.) alarm message display requests from the PMC
Up to four successive message display signals from
the PMC can be stored.
◎Block1 - 4
In this example, ; Block 1 only is used. Make the
Setting of Collection of settings below for block 1.
project history ◎History Deletion Specify one bit of the history storage area initialization
Signal signal for block 1.
Check the check box when using the interface where
one message corresponds to one bit of the alarm
◎Bit IF
notification PMC signal. For this example, this interface
is used. → ;
- 365 -
Dialog name Tab name Property name Setting/Change/Point

Specify the start of the successive signal bits used for
◎The first signal bit
alarm notification. The successive bits in ascending
and number of bits
order starting with this bit as many as specified are
Setting of Collection of which does search
monitored and collected as a notification area.
project history
Number IF Not used for this example →
Date&Time Display
Use the default.
Format
<3> In “Creating and editing screen form”, buttons and lamps are placed on a form (virtual screen)
according to the layout design of the custom screen, and editing operations such as setting and
modifying the properties for styles and operations of the controls are performed.
¾ For the method of creation and setting, see Subsection 2.5.3.2.
<4> In “Making memory card file”, screen data is created to operate the custom screen created in
“Creating and editing screen form” on the CNC then is converted to a MEM file format.
¾ Select a start-up screen to be first displayed on the created custom screen when the power to the
CNC is turned on.
¾ As required, set a soft key number for switching to the custom screen while the CNC screen is
being displayed. At least one display switching key must be set. In this example, set only the
[RETURN] screen for returning to the previously displayed custom screen.
¾ Click the OK button in the Making memory card file dialog box to start conversion processing.

PMC type Already set by project setting
◎Start-up screen Select POP_machine from the combo box.
Set a soft key number for switching to the [RETURN]
Making screen for indicating the previously displayed screen
memory card ◎(Software key and parent screen of the custom screen. When you
file setting of each double-click the left button of the mouse on the parent
screen) screen name listed in [Form File Name] or [RETURN],
the Setting user screen dialog box appears.
In this example, double-click [RETURN].

Select the following number from the combo box:
0x0106 CREATION_CST_AUX (full key)-AUXILIARY
◎Softkey number (Series 0i-C, Series 16i/18i/21i, Power Mate i)
0x3206 CUSTOM1-C Executor1(Series 0i-D, Series
30i/31i/32i/35i, Power Motion i-A)
Setting user Set a name, not longer than 6 letters, to be displayed
screen on the soft key caption indication area. In this example,
◎Key Caption specify “CUSTOM”.
* When assignment to the CUSTOM key is made, this
caption is not soft key display on the CNC screen.
Check the check box to indicate that this user screen
◎Select Flag
setting is selected.
- 366 -
<5> In “Write to card and write to CNC/F-ROM”, screen data created in MEM file generation and the
MEM file of the FP driver software for displaying the screen data are written to the F-ROM on the
CNC side.
¾ Write the screen data and a copy of the FP driver to the memory card.
¾ Insert the memory card into the memory card slot of the CNC (slot of the main CNC control
unit when a display unit with the display link connected is used, or slot on the side of the
display unit when a display unit of LCD-mounted type or a display unit with HSSB connected
is used) to start boot processing.
¾ Write the screen data and FP driver software to the F-ROM by using the method of system data
loading of the boot, which is the same method as for writing PMC ladder data to the F-ROM.

Specify the memory card drive of the personal
◎Transfer to: computer into which a write destination memory card is
inserted.
Write to card
The FPdriver is
The FP driver for the CNC model specified in the
transferred to the
project setting is automatically selected.
memory card.
<6> Setting CNC parameters and S-RAM memory initialization alarm screen
¾ Set CNC parameters according to the table below.
¾ If the FP driver software is first run on the CNC, an alarm screen prompting the user to
initialize the S-RAM area used by the C language executor may be displayed when the power is
turned on.
¾ If this alarm screen is displayed, check that the parameter Nos. 8661, 8662, 8781 and 8783 are
set to the values indicated in the table below, then turn on the power again to initialize the
S-RAM area. This processing establishes a proper environment to display the custom screen in
the next operation and afterward.
¾ If you write the screen data and FP driver for the first time, check that the parameters are set to
the values indicated in the table below even when the alarm screen is not displayed.
CNC Parameter All CNC common parameter

Note
number setting
8661 59 S-RAM variable area size
8662 4 S-RAM file area size
D-RAM size allocated to the C language executor (FP
driver)
8781 96 * Setting when touch plane C (touch plane is used with
Power Mate i) and the FANUC PICTURE function
option are selected
CNCParameter Series 30i/31i/32i/35i

Note
number Power Motion i-A
D-RAM size allocated to the C language executor (FP
driver) over 6M bytes
8783 0, 97~128
* When the parameter is set, set the parameter No.8781
to 0.
- 367 -
CNC Parameter Power Series 0i-C

Note
number Mate CNC
3195#0 =1 Uses the CUSTOM key for FP screen switching.
Switches the screen display with soft key number
8653#0,#1,#2 =1,0,0
0x0106.
Switches the screen display with soft key number
8652#5,#6,#7 =1,0,0
0x0106.
• Soft key number 0x0106 (auxiliary screen number for CUSTOM) can be used with FANUC
PICTURE when the macro executor option is not selected.
• Parameter Nos. 3195, 8653, and 8652 can be set for Series 0i-C, Series 16i/18i/21i , Power Mate i.
• For Series 0i-D, Series 30i/31i/32i/35i, Power Motion i-A, set parameter Nos. 8661, 8662, and 8781
only.
2.5.3.2 Method of creating a parent screen and child screens

¾ When creating a screen including multiple child screens as in the case of a machine operator’s panel
screen, first determine the layout display of the entire screen including composited child screens.
¾ If you attach a label control to the display area background of each child screen at this time, the area
usable for creating another switchable child screen with the same size and display area can be
indicated for child screen switching operation.
¾ When the layout of the entire screen is completed, select a group of controls for making up each
child screen then move the controls to a new child screen form.
- 368 -
Machine operator’s panel parent screen

Layout display of entire machine operator’s and controls
panel screen
a. Coordinate display child screen and c. Operation button display child screen
controls and controls
b. Lamp display child screen and controls d. Alarm display child screen and controls
- 369 -
Fault guidance and history display screen
Parent screen of fault display & switch buttons

Layout display of entire fault guidance screen for a, b, and d sections
¾Removing the common child screen, namely, the

alarm child screen from the layout of the fault guidance
screen including the alarm child screen generates a
parent screen for the fault guidance screen.
c. Alarm display child screen is already created as a

common child screen.
Creating a machine operator’s panel parent screen

¾ When a custom screen is created and displayed, the screen display is switched from one parent
screen to another parent screen. So, a custom screen project must have at least one parent screen.
¾ A screen can be treated as a parent screen by attaching one screen structure definition control
(FPPScrn) to the screen (no multiple controls cannot be attached). In other words, a screen with no
screen structure definition control attached is treated as a child screen.
¾ With the screen structure definition control, define what child screens are used with the parent
screen. No child screen, of course, may be specified. A specified child screen is also specified as a
child screen to be first displayed when the power is turned on.
¾ The table below indicates the screen structure definition control for each parent screen and the
settings of major properties of screen switch buttons.
¾ For the name of a child screen making up a parent screen or the switch screen name of a screen
switch button, be sure to use a screen name. Otherwise, an error occurs at the stage of MEM file
generation for screen data creation.
- 370 -
Control
.xml name Object ID Tab/Property name Setting/Change/Point
name
Base/Screen Name POP_machine
Sub/Use Sub Screen1 ;
Sub/Save Sub Screen1 ;
Sub/SubScreenName1 COP_coord_abs
Sub/SubScreenName2 COP_lamp_CNC
FPPScrn FPPScrn
Sub/SubScreenName3 COP_mode_mem
Sub/Save Sub Screen4
Sub/SubScreenName4 CMN_alarm
Sub/Use Sub Screen5
FPButton1
FPButton5 Action/NoAction ;
FPButton7
Action/NoAction
POP_machine Action/Action Type Change Screen
* Because FPPScrn FPButton FPButton4 Action/Detail/Screen
POP_machine
is put, this screen Name
becomes main Action/Interlock Enable & Set R9091.1
screen. Action/NoAction
FPButton6 Action/Action Type Change Screen
Detail/Screen Name PAL_fault
FPLabel1 Character/Caption MACHINE OPERATOR’S PANEL
FPLabel3 Character/Caption MODE
FPLabel Character/Caption F
FPLabel4
Character/Character Type 3:X6
FPLabel5 Character/Caption MM/MIN
Character/Character Type 3:X6
Action/Action Type Function
FPNDisp FPNDisp3
Action/Function Name Actf
Action/Data Type 5:4Byte
Action/Watch PMC D1106.0
FPLamp1 Image/Style 11:Ellipse(No.1)
Image/ (on/off Color) Setting of on/off color,ETC
FPLamp FPLamp2 Action/Watch PMC D1106.1
FPLamp3 Action/Watch PMC D1106.2
- 371 -
Control placement on machine operator’s panel parent screen
Creating coordinate display child screens

¾ Based on a screen produced by screen movement from the layout display screen to each child screen
form, create copies of forms as many as required.
¾ An example of creating coordinate display child screens is provided below.
¾ Based on the copy source child screen (COP_coord_abs.xml), make additional copies of the three
child screens: relative coordinate child screen (COP_coord_rel.xml), distance-to-go child screen
(COP_coord_dist.xml), and machine coordinate child screen (COP_coord_mcn.xml).
¾ Modify the coordinate title labels, rewrite the coordinate read function, and rename the child screen
switch button screens.
.xml name Control name Object ID Tab/Property name Setting/Change/Point

FPLabel FPLabel2 Character/Caption (ABSOLUTE)
FPNDisp1 Action/Function Name absolute[1]
FpNDisp FPNDisp2 Action/Function Name absolute[2]
COP_coord_abs
FPNDisp3 Action/Function Name absolute[3]
Action/Screen Type Sub Screen
TFPChgScrn TFPChgScrn1
Action/Screen Name COP_coord_rel
FPLabel FPLabel2 Character/Caption (RELATIVE)
FPNDisp1 Action/Function Name relative[1]
FpNDisp FPNDisp2 Action/Function Name relative[2]
COP_coord_rel
FPNDisp3 Action/Function Name relative[3]
Action/Screen Name COP_coord_dist
FPLabel FPLabel2 Character/Caption (DISTANCE TO GO)
FPNDisp1 Action/Function Name distance[1]
FpNDisp FPNDisp2 Action/Function Name distance[2]
COP_coord_dist
FPNDisp3 Action/Function Name distance[3]
Action/Screen Name COP_coord_mcn
FPLabel FPLabel2 Character/Caption (MACHINE)
FPNDisp1 Action/Function Name machine[1]
FpNDisp FPNDisp2 Action/Function Name machine[2]
COP_coord_mcn
FPNDisp3 Action/Function Name machine[3]
Action/Screen Name COP_coord_abs
- 372 -
Display sub screen of

power supply turning on
Absolute coordinates Machine coordinates
Specify the following coordinates sub

screen with the sub screen switch button.
Relative coordinates
Distance to go
Creating lamp display child screens

¾ An example of creating lamp display child screens is provided below.
¾ The method of creating lamp display child screens is basically the same as for creation of coordinate
display child screens.
¾ Based on the copy source child screen (COP_lamp_CNC.xml), make additional copies of the
machine lamp display child screen (COP_lamp_MCN.xml) and the program display child screen
(COP_lamp_PRG.xml).
¾ Set the ON/OFF colors, captions, and signals to be turned on for the lamps placed on each child
screen.
¾ For each lamp not used, check the disable property check box on the action tab. A lamp processed in
this way is treated simply as a label indication. If the assignment of a lamp is needed later, the
property for enabling use as a lamp may be set.
Control
name
Character/ on/off Specify the character of lamp
Caption name
FPLamp1 Action/NoAction When not using →;
FPLamp to Action/Watch PMC Lighting signal address of lamp
COP_lamp_CNC FPLamp15 Blinking signal address of
Action/Blink Signal
lamp(Opt.)
Image/ on/off Color Setting of on/off color,ETC
Action/Screen Name COP_lamp_MCN
Character/ on/off Specify the character of lamp
Caption name
FPLamp1 Action/NoAction When not using →;
FPLamp to Action/Watch PMC Lighting signal address of lamp
COP_lamp_MCN FPLamp15 Blinking signal address of
Action/Blink Signal
lamp(Opt.)
Image/ on/off Color Setting of on/off color,ETC
Action/Screen Name COP_lamp_PRG
- 373 -
Control
name
1:Function (Running program
Action/Action Type
FpNDisp FpNDisp1 indication)
COP_lamp_PRG Action/Function name rdexecprog[0_99_0]
Action/Screen Name COP_lamp_CNC
Display sub screen of Sub screen for lamp display Sub screen for lamp display
power supply turning on related to CNC related to machine
Sub screen for program

display under execution
Creating mode-matching operation button display child screens

¾ An example of creating child screens with operation buttons prepared for each mode is provided
below.
¾ The method of creating mode-matching operation button display child screens is basically the same
as for creation of coordinate display child screens.
¾ Based on the copy source child screen (COP_mode_mem.xml), make additional copies of the
COP_mode_edit.xml, COP_mode_mdi.xml, COP_mode_hndl.xml, and COP_mode_jog.xml child
screens for the EDIT, MDI, HNDL, and JOG modes.
¾ Set the captions, output signals, signals to be turned on, and ON/OFF colors for the buttons required
in each mode.
¾ Unnecessary buttons may be deleted. Then, a new user-friendly operation that can be easily placed,
such as a numerical value display and input operation that allows numerical value display and
numerical value setting can be incorporated on a screen such as the EDIT mode child screen.
¾ The FpNDisp1 control is attached to each operation button child screen, but is set so that the control
is not visible on the CNC screen. The purpose of the control is to notify the PMC ladder that the
operation button child screen is displayed and that the mode is switched, by turning on a bit of the
one byte of D1106. For this bit notification processing, the FP function for writing to the PMC
signal area (Example: wrpmc[9_1106_0_1]) is used. The signal bit turned on is specified as the
interlock signal for the local child screen switch button. Thus, the switch button style can be placed
in the on state, and the switch button operation can be interlocked at the same time.
- 374 -
Table of switch button settings common to each operation button child screen
Character/ on/off Caption EDIT
Action/Screen Type Sub screen
TFPChgScrn1 Action/Screen Name COP_mode_edit
Action/Interlock Enable & Set D1106.0
; Display, the interlock state
Interlock Image display shape are specified.
Character/ on/off Caption MEMORY
COP_mode_xxx TFPChgScrn
TFPChgScrn2 Action/Screen Name COP_mode_mem
Character/ on/off Caption MDI
TFPChgScrn3 Action/Screen Name COP_mode_mdi
Character/ on/off Caption HANDLE
TFPChgScrn4 Action/Screen Name COP_mode_hndl
COP_mode_xxx TFPChgScrn Interlock Image display shape are specified.
Character/ on/off Caption JOG
TFPChgScrn5 Action/Screen Name COP_mode_jog
FPLabel1 Character/Caption FUNCTION/EDIT
FPLabel
FPLabel2 Character/Caption Act. Program
1:Function
Action/Action Type
(D1106,1byteWrite)
wrpmc[9_1106_0_1] Write to
FpNDisp1 Action/Function Name
1
Action/Display
FpNDisp Image/ Style 10:No Figure
1:Function (Program
Action/Action Type
Directory)
FpNDisp2 Action/Function Name rdprgdir[0_1_5999_99_0]
Action/Data Type 8:Rectangle String
COP_mode_edit Action/Left Align ;
Action/Char Type 2:X4
Action/Ten-key Title Search Program#
Action/ReadFunction rdprgnum[0]
Action/WriteFunction progsrch[0_05_0]
TFPInput TFPInput1
Action/Data Type 3:2Byte
Action/Non Zero
;
suppress
Action/Number of Digit ;, 4 Digits
FPLamp33 to Action/Watch PMC Specify the lamp signal
FPLamp
FPLamp35 Image/ on/off color Specify the lamp on/off color
FPButton33 to Character/On Caption Specify the On caption
FPButton
FPButton35 Action/ Watch: User
- 375 -

FPButton33 to Action/ Watch PMC: Specify the ON/OFF signal
COP_mode_edit FPButton
FPButton35 Action/Detail/ PMC Signal Specify the output signal
FPLabel FPLabel1 Character/Caption FUNCTION/MEM
1:Function
Action/Action Type
(D1106,1byteWrite)
FpNDisp FpNDisp1 Action/Function Name
2
Action/Display
COP_mode_mem Image/ Style 10:No Figure
FPLamp
Character/On Caption Specify the On caption
FPButton11
Action/Watch: User
FPButton to
Action/Watch PMC: Specify the ON/OFF signal
FPButton35
Action/Detail/ PMC Signal Specify the output signal
FPLabel FPLabel1 Character/Caption FUNCTION/MDI
1:Function
Action/Action Type
(D1106,1byteWrite)
4
Action/Display
COP_mode_mdi Image/ Style 10:No Figure
FPLamp
FPButton11
Action/Watch: User
FPButton to
FPButton35
FPLabel FPLabel1 Character/Caption FUNCTION/HANDLE
1:Function
Action/Action Type
(D1106,1byteWrite)
8
Action/Display
COP_mode_hndl Image/ Style 10:No Figure
FPLamp
FPButton11
Action/Watch: User
FPButton to
FPButton35
FPLabel FPLabel1 Character/Caption FUNCTION/JOG
1:Function
Action/Action Type
(D1106,1byteWrite)
wrpmc[9_1106_0_16] Write
to 16
Action/Display
COP_mode_jog Image/ Style 10:No Figure
FPLamp
FPButton11
Action/Watch: User
FPButton to
FPButton35
- 376 -
Display sub screen of MEM mode MDI mode
power supply turning on
EDIT mode JOG mode HANDLE mode
Creating a fault display/CNC state and CNC screen switch button display child screen
¾ An example of creating a child screen where fault information/CNC state and CNC screen switch
buttons are displayed is provided below.
¾ This screen is a child screen common to parent screens. This means that each screen displays
summarized fault information, CNC state, and CNC screen switch buttons.
¾ For machine alarm display, a property is set to display the currently issued alarm among those
alarms accumulated by the function for collecting a history of various displayed alarms posted from
the PMC.
¾ For CNC alarm display, a property is set to display the alarm message currently issued on the CNC
by using the numeral/character string indication control with an FP function. To display a message
with the alarm acquisition function of the CNC, allocate a character display width of 40 columns or
more.

Machine Alarm Status NC
FPLabel FPLabel1 Character/Caption
Alarm&Status
Specify character format of the
Character/Summary/History
history display.
Action/First Time Display Summary Display
Action/File Name McnFultMsg.msgxml
FANUC PICTURE Message
Action/EDIT Button
Editor
CMN_alarm
Action/Summary/History ;
FPHistory FPHistory1
Action/History BlockNumber 1
Format/History Display Set the order of the time series
Order of machine alarm.
Specify display item format of
Format/ Row Display Order
the message.
Format/ Display format of date and
Date&Time Display Format passing time
- 377 -

Action/Action Type 1:Function (Get CNC alarm)
rdalminfo[1_99_2_99_0] Get
Action/Function name
FpNDisp FpNDisp1 2alarms
Action/Date Type 8:Rectangle string
Action/Left Angle ;
Action/Action Type 1:Function (Get CNC status)
rdncstats[0] Operation Mode
rdncstats[2] Axis move/Dwel
Action/Function Name
CMN_alarm rdncstats[1] Auto OP mode
FpNDisp2 to Earth setting to FpNDisp2 to
FpNDisp rdncstats[3] MSTB Status
FpNDisp7 FpNDisp7
rdncstats[5] Status of alarm
rdncstats[4] Status of EMG
Action/Data Type 6:String
Action/Left Angle ;
TFPChgScrn1 Character/On Caption Caption of key-top
TFPChgScrn to Action/Screen Type NC Screen
TFPChgScrn5 Action/Key Code Specify the function-key code
Display sub screen of Fault display, state of CNC,

power supply turning on and CNC screen switch button
Creating a fault guidance and history display parent screen

¾ Create a screen structure definition control used for parent screen identification.
¾ Place a fault message display section and detail message display section.
¾ In the fault display section, create a button for switching between a summary indication and detail
indication, and page switch button.
¾ In the fault display section, create a numeral indication control for indicating the ordinal number of
the message displayed on the top line among all messages.
¾ Create a detail display selection button to the left of a fault message display line. This button sets a
mechanism for posting details to be displayed in the detail display section.
¾ Create a message file for fault message display and for detail message display.
- 378 -
Control
name
Base Screen/screen Name PAL_fault
PAL_fault SubScreen/Use Sub Screen1 ;
* Because Sub Screen/Save Sub

FPPScrn is Screen1
put, this Sub
FPPScrn FPPScrn CMN_alarm
screen Screen/SubScreenName1
becomes SubScreen/Use Sub Screen2
main SubScreen/Use Sub Screen3
screen. SubScreen/Use Sub Screen4
SubScreen/Use Sub Screen5
FPButton11
to
FPButton13 Action/NoAction ;
FPButton15
FPButton17
Action/NoAction
FPButton
FPButton14 Action/Action Type Change Screen
Detail/Screen name POP_machine
Action/NoAction
Action/Action Type Change Screen
FPButton16
Action/Detail/Screen Name PAL_fault
Action/Interlock Enable & Set R9091.1
FPLabel1 Character/Caption FAULT GUIDANCE&HISTORY
FPLabel FPLabel2 Character/Caption Detail Time Fault Message …
FPLabel3 Character/Caption Detail Guidance Message/…
Start position, Line interval, Char
Character/Summary/History
Type
Action/First Time Display Summary Display
Action/File Name VtsData\McnFultMsg.xmlxml
FANUC PICTURE Message
Action/EDIT Button
Editor
Action/Assigne Link Number 1 (ID number of this control)
(Continuity) FPHistory1
Specify that data on a fault
Format/ Row Display Order message line is displayed in the
FPHistory order of FPLabel2 titles.
Specify the format of date and time
Format/
information for each data unit
Date&Time Display Format
displayed on the line above.
Start position, Line interval, Char
Character/Detail Display
Type
Action/First Time Display Detail Display
FPHistory2 Action/Assign Link Number 2 (ID number of this control)
Action/Reference Link 1 (Specify in detail of message ID
Number where to be displayed.)
Seven from one. the order on the
Character/On Caption
button
Action/Action Type History Display
FPButton1
Detail/History Action Type Detail Message Switch button
FPButton to
2(assign link number/ID of
FPButton7 Detail/Link Number at output
FPHistory)
Detale/Row Number at Detail In button order from 1 to 7
Detail/Detail Message File VtsData\McnFultGudMsg.msgxml
- 379 -
Control
name
Character/On Caption Summary\nHistory
(Continuity) FPButton FPButton8 Summary/History/Detail Switch
Detail/ History Action Type
BTM
Detail/Button Output Link 1(assign link number/ID of
Number FPHistory)
Detail/ History Action Type Page Switch Button
FPButton9 1(assign link number/ID of
Detail/Link Number at output
FPHistory)
Detail/MDI Key code Page-Up
FPButton
Detail/ History Action Type Page Switch Button
FPButton10 1(assign link number/ID of
(Continuity) Detail/Link Number at output
FPHistory)
Detail/MDI Key code Page-Down
Character/Centering ;
Action/Action Type 1:Function
msghis[1_4_1]
(“head / entire number” Display)
Action/Data Type 6:String
Action/Number Digits ;, 7Digits
Control placement on a fault guidance and history display parent screen
Spreadsheet
Dialog name Setting point
item name
When the number interface is selected for the interface with the message
Number
indication control, register a message number.
When the bit interface is selected for the interface with the message
Bit Set indication control, register relative bit position numbers in ascending order
with the first bit position of the bit interface being 0.
FANUC
Specify a display color for the characters registered with messages below.
PICTURE
Char color The [Set color] dialog box is displayed by double-clicking the left mouse
Message Editor
button.
Enter an alarm message for a fault together with details and action to be
taken. Enter “\n” to perform a new line operation at a desired position.
Message
An alarm title and details are written in separate MSGXML files. However,
pairing messages are to be written at the same bit specification number.
- 380 -
B-66284EN/07 3.FP FUNCTIONS
3 FP FUNCTIONS
Chapter 3, “FP FUNCTIONS” consists of the following sections.
3.1 FP FUNCTION INTERFACE ..........................................................................................................381

3.1.1 Method of specifying FP function ........................................................................................381
3.1.2 FP functions for CNC window .............................................................................................384
3.1.3 FP functions for PMC window .............................................................................................461
3.1.4 FP Functions for Input/Output of Array-Type Record Variable Data ..................................472
3.1.5 Function reference of FP script.............................................................................................516
3.1 FP FUNCTION INTERFACE
3.1.1 Method of specifying FP function

This section explains the functions that can be set in the function field of FANUC PICTURE.
• FP functions are set in the function name fields of FANUC PICTURE property page dialog boxes.
See each function reference item presented below for function names and data types. Note that
function names are case-sensitive.
The return value of each function is indicated in the control display area. If a function results in an
error, as many asterisks (*) or E’s as they can fit to the screen are displayed.
• Setting a function name with arguments

When “[Format/with arguments]” is indicated in the function reference below, arguments must be
given. When setting a FANUC PICTURE function name, enclose an argument in brackets [ ]. When
giving more than one argument, use “_” to separate them from each other. Do not insert any blank.
Example)
Reading a parameter
rdparam[1422_1_8]
• Path specification for multipath control units

If a multipath control unit is used, “_(path-number)” can be appended to an argument specification
to specify the data for the desired path. For functions without arguments, the “_” specification is not
required. Specify “1” for the data for path 1, “2” for the data for path 2, and “5” for the loader axis
path in FS16i/18i/21i.
Example)
absolute[3_2]: Reads the absolute value of the third axis of path 2.
actf[2]: Reads the actual feedrate of path 2.
In the absence of a path number specification, the path number set with the path number setting
function is assumed.
In [Functions] below, those functions that accept a path specification are indicated by underlining
their function names.
The function without the path specification in the [Functions] list is as follows.
1.35 setpath Writing a path number (for multipath systems)
1.39 getpath Reading a path number (for multipath systems)
1.45 rdopmsg Reading operator’s message
1.51 rdmemsize Reading amount of D-RAM memory use
1.52 GetDrvVersion Reading FP driver version
1.65 settimer Presetting calendar and clock
- 381 -
3.FP FUNCTIONS B-66284EN/07
1.67 msghis Obtaining history message indication data

1.70 copyval Copy variable data
1.72 rdopmsg2 Reading operator’s message 2
1.73 setproperty Get/set property of control
1.74 GetFPinfo Read FANUC PICTURE edition
1.75 swscreen Switch a screen
1.76 rdcursor Read a cursor number
1.77 wrcursor Write a cursor number
1.90 swpath Switch the CNC/PMC path number
• Processing result notification of FP function

In the FP function, Read/Write is done by using CNC/PMC window library function of C Language
Executor.
In the processing result notification of the FP function, the return value when the error occurs by the
called function is written in the area of PMC specified by the argument of the FP function.
Argument explanation : [..._pmc_address_...]
pmc kind of the pmc address
5:R
9:D
12 : E (PMC-SB7, etc)
99 : Processing result is not notified
address Written PMC address (The area in two bytes is used from the specified address)
Please specify 0 when you specify 99 for a kind of the PMC address.
Example)
5_1000: The return value of the result is written from R1000 in two bytes.
99_0: The return value writing of the result is not done.
• Specification of indirect data number of FP function of indirect specification

By using the FP function of indirect specification, data at a variable location can be read/written
with a control that enables function call.
Moreover, the FP function of indirect specification is able not to be executed by specifying the
signal which enables the operation of the screen set control while rewriting indirect data information.
Argument explanation : [kind_datanum]
kind:The kind of the area indirectly specified (The figure of the treble is specified).
When the specified number is YXX
Y : Kind of indirect data
0: Reserve, currently not used (reserved)
1: Indirect data number specification/PMC area specification
2: Indirect data number specification/custom macro variable specification
3: Indirect data number specification/P code variable (floating point) specification
XX : data area
Y=1 (PMC area specification) :
00 : G
01 : F
02 : Y
03 : X
04 : A
05 : R
06 : T
07 : K
08 : C
09 : D
Y=2, 3 : Please specify 00
datanum Number :
- 382 -
The number of beginning of the storage of the argument of indirect specification is specified.
Y=1 : The specification of the argument of PMC area of the XX specification storage start
number is specified.
Y=2 : The argument specification storage beginning custom macro variable number is
specified.
Y=3 : Argument specification storage beginning code variable number is specified.
It is necessary to secure the area with which all arguments which contain the system number
regardless of the number of path of CNC systems when the FP function of indirect specification is
used are specifiable. The order of the arguments that must be specified does not change regardless of
the value of Y.
A necessary number must be referred to from the specified number as an argument when you specify
the custom macro variable or P code variable for a place of indirect specification.
Offset from the first variable number
+0 +1 +2 +3 +4
Set argument number type pmc address path
When # 500 is a head
#500:number, #501:type, #502:pmc, #503:address, #504:path
When PMC area is specified for a place of indirect specification, the following size explanations are
described in each function explanation because the size of the argument is different depending on
the function used.
Offset from the first PMC address(byte)
+0-1 +2 +3 +4-5 +6
When D100 is a head
D100-101:number, D102:type, D103:pmc, D104-105:address, D106:path
- 383 -
3.1.2 FP functions for CNC window

[Functions]
* Those functions whose names are underlined accept a path specification.
Function name Description

1.1 sysinfo Reading CNC system information
1.2 rdproginfo Reading program information
1.3 rdprgnum Reading the current program number
1.4 rdseqnum Reading the current sequence number
1.5 actf Reading the actual feedrate (F) of the controlled axis
1.6 acts Reading the actual spindle speed (S)
1.7 absolute Reading the absolute position of a controlled axis
1.8 machine Reading the machine position of a controlled axis
1.9 relative Reading the relative position of a controlled axis
1.10 distance Reading the remaining amount of travel along a controlled axis
1.11 skip Reading the skip position of a controlled axis
1.12 srvdelay Reading the servo delay of a controlled axis
1.13 accdecdly Reading the acceleration/deceleration delay of a controlled axis
1.14 statinfo Reading CNC status information
1.15 alarm Reading the alarm status
1.16 rdtofs Reading the tool offset value
1.17 rdzofs Reading the workpiece origin offset
1.18 rdparam Reading a parameter
1.19 rdset Reading a setting
1.20 rdpitchr Reading pitch error compensation data
1.21 diagnoss Reading diagnosis data
1.22 adcnv Reading A/D conversion data
1.23 rdgrpid Reading tool life management data (tool group number)
1.24 rdngrp Reading tool life management data (the number of tool groups)
1.25 rdntool Reading tool life management data (the number of tools)
1.26 rdlife Reading tool life management data (tool life)
1.27 rdcount Reading tool life management data (tool life counter)
1.28 rd1length Reading tool life management data (tool length compensation number 1)
1.29 rd2length Reading tool life management data (tool length compensation number 2)
1.30 rd1radius Reading tool life management data (cutter compensation number 1)
1.31 rd2radius Reading tool life management data (cutter compensation number 2)
1.32 t1info Reading tool life management data (tool information 1)
1.33 t2info Reading tool life management data (tool information 2)
1.34 toolnum Reading tool life management data (tool number)
1.35 setpath Writing a path number (for multipath systems)
1.36 rdpmacro Reading a P code variable
1.37 wrpmacro Writing a P code variable
1.38 loadtorq Reading abnormal torque (estimated torque) data
1.39 getpath Reading a path number (for multipath systems)
1.40 wrtofs Writing tool offset amount
1.41 wrset Writing setting parameter
1.42 rdmacro Reading custom macro variable
1.43 wrmacro Writing custom macro variable
1.44 rdmodal Reading modal data
1.45 rdopmsg Reading operator’s message
1.46 rdprgdir Reading program directory
1.47 progdel Delete specified program
1.48 progsrch Search specified program
- 384 -
1.49 rdexecprog Reading executing program
1.50 rdncstats Reading CNC status information
1.51 rdmemsize Reading amount of D-RAM memory use
1.52 GetDrvVersion Reading FP driver version
1.53 idrdtofs2 Reading tool offset amount (indirect specification)
1.54 idwrtofs Writing tool offset amount (indirect specification)
1.55 idrdmac Reading custom macro variable (indirect specification)
1.56 idwrmac Writing custom macro variable (indirect specification)
1.57 idprogdel Delete specified program (indirect specification)
1.58 idprogsrch Search specified program (indirect specification)
1.59 idrdset2 Reading setting parameter (indirect specification)
1.60 idwrset Writing setting parameter (indirect specification)
1.61 idrdpmac2 Reading a P code variable(indirect specification)
1.62 idwrpmac2 Writing a P code variable (indirect specification)
1.63 absolute2 Reading the absolute position of a controlled axis (type 2)
1.64 relative2 Reading the relative position of a controlled axis (type 2)
1.65 settimer Presetting calendar and clock
1.66 rdalminfo Obtaining CNC alarm
1.67 msghis Obtaining history message indication data
1.68 rdprgdir2 Reading program directory2
1.69 setrdprgtop Increment/decrement of display pointer of rdprgdir2
1.70 copyval Copy of variable data
1.71 movrlap Reading manual handle override amount
1.72 rdopmsg2 Reading operator’s message 2
1.73 setproperty Get/set property of control
1.74 GetFPinfo Read FANUC PICTURE edition
1.75 swscreen Switch a screen
1.76 rdcursor Read a cursor number
1.77 wrcursor Write a cursor number
1.78 acts2 Read the actual spindle speed (S)(type 2)
1.79 actf3 Read the actual feedrate (F) of the controlled axis(type 3)
1.80 absolute3 Read the absolute position of a controlled axis(type 3)
1.81 machine3 Read the machine position of a controlled axis(type 3)
1.82 relative3 Read the relative position of a controlled axis(type 3)
1.83 distance3 Read the remaining amount of travel along a controlled axis(type 3)
1.84 skip3 Read the skip position of a controlled axis(type 3)
1.85 srvdelay3 Read the servo delay of a controlled axis(type 3)
1.86 accdecdly3 Read the acceleration/deceleration delay of a controlled axis(type 3)
1.87 rdtofs3 Read the tool offset value(type 3)
1.88 rdzofs3 Read the workpiece origin offset(type 3)
1.89 movrlap3 Read manual handle override amount(type 3)
1.90 swpath Switch the CNC/PMC path number
1.91 rdspload Reading the load information of a serial spindle
1.92 fetchtool Fetch tool management data
1.93 rdtool Read tool management data
1.94 unfetchtool Free tool management data
1.95 wrtool Write tool management data
1.96 deltool Delete tool management data
1.96 scroll Scroll a message
※ To use the FP functions from 1.79 to 1.89, there are compatibilities in Series and Edition of
CNC software. In the software that cannot be used, the display is blank.
- 385 -
[Function reference]
1.1 Reading CNC system information
[Available CNC]
i-A
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
[Function name]
sysinfo
[Data type]
6: Character string
[Format/with arguments]
sysinfo[type]
[Arguments]
type = 0 CNC type (character string in ASCII)
1 M/T/TT type (character string in ASCII)
2 Series (character string in ASCII)
3 Edition (character string in ASCII)
4 Number of controlled axes (character string in ASCII)
[Return value]
CNC system information for the specified type
[Example]
Specify a character string as the property/action data type.
In the Series 16i-MA (ROM series: B0F1, edition: 10) 4-axis system, executing this function
provides the following information:
sysinfo[0] => “16”
sysinfo[1] => “ M”
sysinfo[2] => “B0F1”
sysinfo[3] => “0010”
sysinfo[4] => “4 “
1.2 Reading program information
[Available CNC]
i-A
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
[Function name]
rdproginfo
[Data type]
5: 4 bytes
rdproginfo[type]
[Arguments]
type = 0 Number of registered programs
1 Number of programs not registered
2 Used memory area (the number of characters)
3 Unused memory area (the number of characters)
[Return value]
Program information for the specified type
- 386 -
1.3 Reading the current program number
[Available CNC]
i-A
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
[Function name]
rdprgnum
[Data type]
- For Series 0i-C, Power Mate i
3 : 2 byte
- For Series 16i/18i/21i
3 : 2 byte (for the program numbers four digits)
5 : 4 byte (for the program numbers eight digits)
5 : 4 byte
rdprgnum[type]
[Arguments]
type = 0 Current program number
1 Main program number
[Return value]
Program number for the specified type
1.4 Reading the current sequence number
[Available CNC]
i-A
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
[Function name]
rdseqnum
[Data type]
5: 4 bytes
[Format]
rdseqnum[]
[Arguments]
--------
[Return value]
Sequence number
1.5 Reading the actual feedrate (F) of the controlled axis
[Available CNC]
i-A
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
[Function name]
actf
[Data type]
5: 4 bytes
- 387 -
[Format]
actf[]
[Arguments]
--------
[Return value]
Actual feedrate of the controlled axis
[Setting]
Parameter 3105#0=1
1.6 Reading the actual spindle speed
[Available CNC]
i-A
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ - ○ ○ ○ ○ -
[Function name]
acts
[Data type]
5: 4 bytes
[Format]
acts[]
[Arguments]
--------
[Return value]
Actual spindle speed
[Setting]
Parameter 3105#2=1
1.7 Reading the absolute position of a controlled axis
[Available CNC]
i-A
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
[Function name]
absolute
[Data type]
4: 4 bytes (signed)
absolute[axis]
[Arguments]
axis Axis number (= from 1 to the maximum number of controlled axes)
[Return value]
Absolute position for the specified axis number
In Series 30i/31i/32i/35i, Power Motion i-A, Series 0i-D, coordinates equal with the absolute2
function can be read.
1.8 Reading the machine position of a controlled axis
[Available CNC]
- 388 -
i-A
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
[Function name]
machine
[Data type]
4: 4 bytes (signed)
machine[axis]
[Arguments]
[Return value]
Machine position for the specified axis number
1.9 Reading the relative position of a controlled axis
[Available CNC]
i-A
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
[Function name]
relative
[Data type]
4: 4 bytes (signed)
relative[axis]
[Arguments]
[Return value]
Relative position for the specified axis number
In Series 30i/31i/32i/35i, Power Motion i-A, Series 0i-D, coordinates equal with the relative2
function can be read.
1.10 Reading the remaining amount of travel along a controlled axis
[Available CNC]
i-A
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
[Function name]
distance
[Data type]
4: 4 bytes (signed)
distance[axis]
[Arguments]
[Description]
With Edition 1.15 or later, when this function is specified for numeric data/character string display,
numeric data display with input, or numeric data display control with a ten-key pad, a blank is
displayed in a mode other than MEM, MDI, RMT, and INC.
- 389 -
However, when this function is specified for OLD DATA, which is a numeric data display control
with a meter, graph, and ten-key pad, 0 is displayed.
[Return value]
Remaining amount of travel for the specified axis number
1.11 Reading the skip position of a controlled axis
[Available CNC]
i-A
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
[Function name]
skip
[Data type]
4: 4 bytes (signed)
skip[axis]
[Arguments]
[Return value]
Skip position for the specified axis number
1.12 Reading the servo delay of a controlled axis
[Available CNC]
i-A
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
[Function name]
srvdelay
[Data type]
4: 4 bytes (signed)
srvdelay[axis]
[Arguments]
[Return value]
Servo delay for the specified axis number
1.13 Reading the acceleration/deceleration delay of a controlled axis
[Available CNC]
i-A
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
[Function name]
accdecdly
[Data type]
4: 4 bytes (signed)
accdecdly[axis]
- 390 -
[Arguments]
[Return value]
Acceleration/deceleration delay for the specified axis number
1.14 Reading CNC status information
[Available CNC]
i-A
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
[Function name]
statinfo
[Data type]
3: 2 bytes
statinfo[type]
[Arguments]
type = 0: Operation mode
1: Automatic operation status
2: Axis movement and dwell statuses
3: M, S, T, and B function statuses
4: Emergency stop and reset statuses
5: Alarm status
6: Program edit status
[Return value]
Number indicating the CNC status information for the specified type
Use the rdncstatus function if you use the fixed character strings for each type from 0 to 5 that are
prepared in the FPDriver.
1.15 Reading the alarm status
[Available CNC]
i-A
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
[Function name]
alarm
[Data type]
3 : 2 byte
5 : 4 byte
[Format]
[alarm]
[Arguments]
--------
[Return value]
Alarm status
* Use 1.66 rdalminfo when obtaining, as a character string, an alarm message issued in the CNC.
- 391 -
1.16 Reading the tool offset value
[Available CNC]
i-A
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
[Function name]
rdtofs
[Data type]
4: 4 bytes (signed)
rdtofs[number_type]
[Arguments]
number Offset number
type Offset type
Machining center system
0: Cutter compensation/wear compensation value
1: Cutter compensation/geometric compensation value
2: Tool length compensation/wear compensation value
3: Tool length compensation/geometric compensation value
Lathe system
0: X-axis wear compensation value
1: X-axis geometric compensation value
2: Z-axis wear compensation value
3: Z-axis geometric compensation value
4: Tool-nose radius wear compensation value
5: Tool-nose radius geometric compensation value
6: Virtual tool tip direction
8: Y-axis wear compensation value
9: Y-axis geometric compensation value
When the tool geometry compensation option is not provided, specify wear compensation.
[Return value]
Tool offset value for the specified type
1.17 Reading the workpiece origin offset
[Available CNC]
i-A
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ - - ○ ○ ○ ○ -
[Function name]
rdzofs
[Data type]
4: 4 bytes (signed)
rdzofs[number_axis]
[Arguments]
0 : External workpiece origin offset
1 to 6 : Workpiece origin offset of G54 to G59
7 to 306 : Workpiece origin offset of G54.1P1 to G54.1P300
- 392 -
[Return value]
Workpiece origin offset
1.18 Reading a parameter
[Available CNC]
i-A
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
[Function name]
rdparam
[Data type]
4: 4 bytes (signed)
5: 4 bytes
One of the data type is determined according to whether the parameter number is signed or unsigned.
rdparam[number_axis_length]
[Arguments]
number Parameter number
axis Axis number (= from 1 to the maximum number of controlled axes, or 0)
length Data block length
(= 4 + parameter byte size)
Bit/byte type parameter => 5
Word type parameter => 6
Two-word type parameter => 8
[Return value]
Parameter
1.19 Reading a setting
[Available CNC]
i-A
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
[Function name]
rdset
[Data type]
4: 4 bytes (signed)
rdset[number_axis_length]
[Arguments]
number Setting data number
(= 4 + byte size of setting)
Bit/byte type setting => 5
Word type setting => 6
Two-word type setting => 8
[Return value]
Setting
- 393 -
1.20 Reading pitch error compensation data
[Available CNC]
i-A
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ - ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
[Function name]
rdpitchr
[Data type]
2: 2 bytes (signed)
rdpitchr[number]
[Arguments]
number Pitch error compensation data number with which input starts
[Return value]
Pitch error compensation data
[Explanation]
The pitch error compensation data with the specified number is read.
1.21 Reading diagnosis data
[Available CNC]
i-A
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
[Function name]
diagnoss
[Data type]
4: 4 bytes (signed)
diagnoss[number_axis_length]
[Arguments]
number Diagnosis data
(= 4 + byte size of diagnosis data)
Bit/byte type diagnosis data => 5
Word type diagnosis data => 6
Two-word type diagnosis data => 8
[Return value]
Diagnosis data
1.22 Reading A/D conversion data
[Available CNC]
i-A
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
[Function name]
adcnv
[Data type]
- 394 -
2: 2 bytes (signed)
adcnv[inptype_avtype]
[Arguments]
inptype Type of analog voltage ( = 2 )
2: Load current of CNC controlled axis.
avtype Specification of an input channel or CNC controlled axis
(=1 to maximum number of controlled axes)
[Return value]
A/D conversion data (It is possible to get the load current using this value as following formula.)
The Load current (A) = [Returned value]*N/6554
N is a value of parameter No.2165.
(However, when N is more than 20, the digit of one is rounded down.)
1.23 Reading tool life management data (tool group number)
[Available CNC]
i-A
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ - - ○ ○ ○ - -
Reads the tool group number in which the specified tool is registered.
[Function name]
rdgrpid
[Data type]
5: 4 bytes
rdgrpid[number]
[Arguments]
number Tool number
The currently used tool group number is stored by specifying 0 in "number".
[Return value]
Tool group number
1.24 Reading tool life management data (the number of tool groups)
[Available CNC]
i-A
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ - - ○ ○ ○ - -
Reads the total number of tool groups in which at least one tool is registered.
[Function name]
rdngrp
[Data type]
5: 4 bytes
[Format]
rdngrp[]
[Arguments]
--------
[Return value]
Number of tool groups
- 395 -
1.25 Reading tool life management data (the number of tools)
[Available CNC]
i-A
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ - - ○ ○ ○ - -
Reads the number of tools which are registered in the specified tool group.
[Function name]
rdntool
[Data type]
5: 4 bytes
rdntool[number]
[Arguments]
number Tool group number
[Return value]
Number of tools
1.26 Reading tool life management data (tool life)
[Available CNC]
i-A
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ - - ○ ○ ○ - -
Reads the tool life value of the specified tool group.
[Function name]
rdlife
[Data type]
5: 4 bytes
rdlife[number]
[Arguments]
[Return value]
Tool life value
1.27 Reading tool life management data (tool life counter)
[Available CNC]
i-A
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ - - ○ ○ ○ - -
Reads the tool life counter of the specified tool group.
[Function name]
rdcount
[Data type]
5: 4 bytes
rdcount[number]
- 396 -
[Arguments]
[Return value]
Tool life counter
1.28 Reading tool life management data (tool length compensation number 1)
[Available CNC]
i-A
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ - - ○ ○ ○ - -
Reads the tool length compensation number of the specified tool group and tool number. This function is
effective for only M Series. 0 is always read for T Series.
[Function name]
rd1length
[Data type]
5: 4 bytes
rd1length[grpnum_toolnum]
[Arguments]
grpnum Tool group number
toolnum Tool number
The currently used tool group and tool are referred by specifying 0 in "grpnum" and
"toolnum".
[Return value]
Tool length compensation number 1
1.29 Reading tool life management data (tool length compensation number 2)
[Available CNC]
i-A
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ - - ○ ○ ○ - -
Reads the tool length compensation number of the specified tool group and tool use-order number. This
function is effective for only M Series. 0 is always read for T Series.
[Function name]
rd2length
[Data type]
5: 4 bytes
rd2length[grpnum_tusenum]
[Arguments]
The currently used tool group and tool are referred by specifying 0 in "grpnum".
tusenum Tool change order number
In case of specifying 0 in "tusenum", either the currently used tool for already used tool
group or the first tool for not-used tool group is referred.
[Return value]
Tool length compensation number 2
- 397 -
1.30 Reading tool life management data (cutter compensation number 1)
[Available CNC]
i-A
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ - - ○ ○ ○ - -
Reads the cutter radius compensation number of the specified tool group and tool number. This function
is effective for only M Series. 0 is always read for T Series.
[Function name]
rd1radius
[Data type]
5: 4 bytes
rd1radius[grpnum_toolnum]
[Arguments]
toolnum Tool number
"toolnum".
[Return value]
Cutter compensation number 1
1.31 Reading tool life management data (cutter compensation number 2)
[Available CNC]
i-A
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ - - ○ ○ ○ - -
Reads the cutter radius compensation number of the specified tool group and tool use-order number. This
function is effective for only M Series. 0 is always read for T Series.
[Function name]
rd2radius
[Data type]
5: 4 bytes
rd2radius[grpnum_tusenum]
[Arguments]
[Return value]
Cutter compensation number 2
1.32 Reading tool life management data (tool information 1)
[Available CNC]
i-A
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ - - ○ ○ ○ - -
- 398 -
Reads the tool information of the specified tool group and tool number.
[Function name]
t1info
[Data type]
5: 4 bytes
t1info[grpnum_toolnum]
[Arguments]
toolnum Tool number
"toolnum".
[Return value]
Tool information 1
0: In case that any tool group number has never be specified since power-on.
1: This tool is registered(available).
2: This tool has expired.
3: This tool was skipped.
1.33 Reading tool life management data (tool information 2)
[Available CNC]
i-A
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ - - ○ ○ ○ - -
Reads the tool information of the specified tool group and tool use-order number.
[Function name]
t2info
[Data type]
5: 4 bytes
t2info[grpnum_tusenum]
[Arguments]
"toolnum".
[Return value]
Tool information 2
0: In case that any tool group number has never be specified since power-on.
1: This tool is registered(available).
2: This tool has expired.
3: This tool was skipped.
1.34 Reading tool life management data (tool number)
[Available CNC]
i-A
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ - - ○ ○ ○ - -
Reads the tool number of the specified tool group and tool use-order number.
[Function name]
- 399 -
toolnum
[Data type]
5: 4 bytes
toolnum[grpnum_tusenum]
[Arguments]
[Return value]
Tool number
1.35 Writing a path number (for multipath systems)
[Available CNC]
i-A
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ - ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
[Function name]
setpath
[Data type]
3: 2 bytes
setpath[path]
[Arguments]
path 1: Sets the first path.
2: Sets the second path.
[Return value]
None
1.36 Reading a P code variable
[Available CNC]
i-A
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
A P-code variable having a variable number of 10000 or greater can be read.
Numbers after twenty thousand change with the value that the user sets in parameter No. 9044. This
value is obtained from the part program storage and NC program size by using the calculation
method explained in the programming manual for the macro executor.
The specifiable number of P-code variables with variable numbers from 20000 varies with the NC
parameter setting.
(a) For specification of a read function in the numeral indication control with key input etc., or a
function in the numeral/character string indication control
[Function name]
rdpmacro
[Data type]
- 400 -
7 : Floating-Point
rdpmacro[type_number]
[Arguments]
type Always 0
number P code macro variable number (#10000 and up)
(b) For specification of other than (a)

[Function name]
rdpmacro
[Data type]
4 : 4 bytes(Signed)
7 : Floating-Point
rdpmacro[type_number]
[Arguments]
type Data type
0: Reads a variable value (Select "Floating-Point" as [Data type].)
1: Reads the number of decimal positions (Select "4 bytes(Signed)" as [Data
type].)
1.37 Writing a P code variable
[Available CNC]
i-A
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
A P-code variable having a variable number of 10000 or greater can be written.
Numbers after twenty thousand change with the value that the user sets in parameter No. 9044. This
value is obtained from the part program storage and NC program size by using the calculation
method explained in the programming manual for the macro executor.
The specifiable number of P-code variables with variable numbers from 20000 varies with the NC
parameter setting.
(a) For specification of a write function in the numeral indication control with key input etc.
[Function name]
wrpmacro
[Data type]
2 : 2 bytes(Signed)
wrpmacro[number_data_decimal]
[Arguments]
data Always 0
decimal Always 0
(b) For specification of other than (a)

[Function name]
wrpmacro
[Data type]
2 : 2 bytes(Signed)
- 401 -
wrpmacro[number_data_decimal]
[Arguments]
data Output data
decimal The number of decimal positions of output data
1.38 Reading abnormal torque (estimated torque) data
[Available CNC]
i-A
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ - - ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
[Function name]
loadtorq
For a servo motor, returns the abnormal torque of a specified axis, as well as the load current value
[Apeak].
For a spindle motor, returns the ratio (as percentage) of the torque to the maximum torque of a specified
spindle. The value to be returned is rounded up at the digit after the specified decimal places and then
converted into a whole number.
Example) For 98.12%, 9812 is returned.
[Data type]
5 : 4 bytes (unsigned)
loadtorq[motor_axis_coefficient_deccnt]
[Arguments]
motor : Motor type
0 : Servo motor
1 : Spindle motor
For Power Motion i-A, “1: Spindle motor” cannnot be specified.
axis: Axis number(=1 to maximum number of controlled axes)
For a spindle, specify the spindle number such as the first or second spindle.
coefficient :
(1) For a servo motor
Specify the constant N used to calculate the load current value.
The value of the parameter No. 2162 is filled in.
(2) For a spindle motor, specify 0.
deccnt: Number of decimal places = (0 to 3)
Specify the number of decimal places of the load current value or load ratio.
[Return value]
The load current value or load ratio raised to the nth power (n: number of decimal places) yields a
whole number before being returned.
NOTE
To use a numeral indication control, the decimal point display property must be
set to the same number of decimal places as the deccnt argument. This causes
1234 to be displayed as 12.34%.
If specifying a spindle with a deccnt value of 2 in a meter indication control,
specify max=20000, min=0 if the meter range is 200% to 0%.
- 402 -
1.39 Reading a path number (for multipath systems)
[Available CNC]
i-A
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ - ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
[Function name]
getpath
[Data type]
3 : 2 bytes
getpath[type]
[Arguments]
type 0 : Current selected path number
1 : Maximum path number
[Return value]
Path information corresponding to type
1.40 Writing tool offset amount
[Available CNC]
i-A
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
[Function name]
wrtofs
[Data type]
4 : 4 bytes(signed)
wrtofs[number_type_data_pmc_address]
[Arguments]
type Offset type
0: Cutter compensation/wear compensation value
1: Cutter compensation/geometric compensation value
2: Tool length compensation/wear compensation value
3: Tool length compensation/geometric compensation value
Lathe system
0: X-axis wear compensation value
1: X-axis geometric compensation value
2: Z-axis wear compensation value
3: Z-axis geometric compensation value
4: Tool-nose radius wear compensation value
5: Tool-nose radius geometric compensation value
8: Y-axis wear compensation value
9: Y-axis geometric compensation value
data Writing data value (0 is specified at the ten keys input.)
pmc Kind of PMC address for processing result notification
5:R
- 403 -
9:D
address PMC address where processing result is written
(The area in two bytes is used from the specified address)
[Description]
Alters the tool offset amount stored in the CNC.
[Example]
wrtofs[10_1_0_9_200]
Data is written in X-axis geometric compensation value of offset number 10 by the ten keys input
in the CNC of the lathe system, and processing result is written in D200.
wrtofs[10_1_123456_99_0_2]
Data 123.456 is written in Tool length compensation /wear compensation value of 2path side
offset number 10 in the button control when specified that the offset is the treble decimal position
in the CNC of the machining center system, and this processing result is not notified.
[Value of processing result written in specified PMC area]
0 Successful.
2 Incorrect data block length “length”.
3 Incorrect offset number “number”.
(This return code is returned in case that any value except 1,..,(maximum number of offset) was
specified in offset number “number”.
4 Incorrect offset type “type”.
6 There are no additional tool offset options required for the specified offset number to be
written.
-1 Attempted to execute this function while the other low-speed window function is being
executed.
Retry after completing currently executed window’s process.
1.41 Writing setting parameter
[Available CNC]
i-A
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
[Function name]
wrset
[Data type]
4 : 4 bytes (signed)
wrset[number_axis_length_data_pmc_address]
[Arguments]
number Setting parameter number
axis Axis number
Data usual (It is not an axis type) => axis = 0
Axis data specified of axis type data => axis = 1,..,amount of controlled axes
length Data block length (=4+byte size of the setting parameter)
Bit/byte type setting data => 5
Word type setting data => 6
Two word type setting data => 8
data Writing data value (0 is specified at the ten keys input.)
5:R
- 404 -
9:D
address PMC address where processing result is written (The area in two bytes is used from the
specified address)
[Description]
Alters the setting parameter stored in the CNC.
Data types of CNC setting parameter are as follows. The data types of setting parameter are different
for every setting parameter number.
Parameter type Use Byte size

Bit parameter Every bits have each definition. 1
Byte parameter 1-byte data is stored. 1
Word parameter 2-byte data is stored. 2
2-Word parameter 4-byte data is stored. 4
It is impossible to write any bit setting parameter bit by bit.
Do the following process to change bit data, Read eight bits (i.e. 1 byte) which belong to the same
setting parameter number.
Change the target bit.
Write above eight bits at the same time.
[Example]
wrset[5421_2_8_0_9_200]
Data from which ten keys are input to the second axis of axis type setting data number 5421(four
byte type data) is written, and this processing result is written in D200.
wrset[5410_0_8_1000_99_0_2]
Data 1000 is written in setting data number 5410(four byte type data) on 2path side usual (It is not
an axis type) in the button control, and this processing result is not notified.
0 Successful.
3 Incorrect setting parameter number “datano”.
4 Incorrect axis number “type”.
Any data other than -1, 0 or (1,..,amount of controlled axes) has been specified.
5 Invalid value of the setting parameter to be written.
For example, when any data other than 0,..,3 was attempted to write for I/O device number, this
return code is returned.
executed.
1.42 Reading custom macro variable
[Available CNC]
i-A
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
[Function name]
rdmacro
[Data type]
7: Floating-Point
rdmacro[number_pmc_address]
- 405 -
[Arguments]
number Custom macro variable number
Local variables ( #1,..,#99 )
Readable. The local variables which belong to the macro program just being executed
when the application program calls this function are read.
Common variables ( #100,..,#999 )
Readable.
System variables ( #1000,.. )
Readable.
5:R
9:D
12 : E (PMC-SB7, ect)
specified address)
[Description]
Reads the custom macro variable data stored in the CNC.
[Example]
rdmacro[100_9_200]
The data of common variable #100 is read, and this processing result is written in D200.
rdmacro[1000_99_0_2]
The data of system variable #1000 on 2path side is read, and this processing result is not
notified.
0 Successful.
3 Incorrect custom macro variable number “number”.
5 Value of the custom macro variable is out of the limit.
6 There are no required options.
The related options;
- Custom macro.
- Custom macro common variable addition (#100,..,#199, #500,..,#999).
-1 It has been failed to read custom macro variable because the other application program has
already started writing custom macro variable. Or attempted to execute this function while the
other low-speed window function is being executed.
1.43 Writing custom macro variable
[Available CNC]
i-A
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
[Function name]
wrmacro
[Data type]
2: 2 bytes (signed)
wrmacro[number_data1_data2_pmc_address]
[Arguments]
- 406 -
Local variables ( #1,..,#99 )
Not writable.
Common variables ( #100,..,#999 )
Writable.
System variables ( #1000,.. )
Writable for only changeable variables.
data1 Variable value converted into integer. (0 is specified at the ten keys input.)
data2 Digit number after decimal point. (0 is specified at the ten keys input.)
5:R
9:D
specified address)
[Description]
Writes the custom macro variable data in the CNC.
Data1 and data2 are set as follows.
written value data1 data2
void 0 -1
0.000 0 3
0.0000001 1 7
00000.100 100 3
00001.000 1000 3
00010.000 10000 3
99999999. 99999999 0
-00123.000 -123000 3
When “123.” is written, “data1=123000, data2=3” isn’t only available format like above but also
“data1=123, data2=0” or “data1=1230, data2=1”, etc, are available.
“void” can be written.
[Example]
wrmacro[100_0_0_9_10]
Data is written in common variable #100 in the ten keys input, and this processing result is
written in D10.
wrmacro[1000_123456_2_99_0_2]
1234.56 is written in system variable # 1000 on 2path side in the button control, and this
processing result is not notified.
0 Successful.
3 Incorrect custom macro variable number “number”.
5 Value of the custom macro variable is out of the limit.
6 There are no required options.
The related options;
- Custom macro.
- Custom macro common variable addition (#100,..,#199, #500,..,#999).
executed.
1.44 Reading modal data
[Available CNC]
- 407 -
i-A
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
[Function name]
rdmodal
[Data type]
6: String
rdmodal[type_block_inp_pmc_address]
[Arguments]
type Kind of modal data
- For Series 30i/31i/32i/35i, Series 0i-D, Power Motion i-A
0,..,99: G code group number
100: B (2nd auxiliary function)
101: D
103: F
104: H
105: L
106: M
107: S
108: T
125: M (2nd M code)
126: M (3rd M code)
- For Series 16i/18i/21i, Series 0i-C, Power Mate i
0,..,99 : G code group number
100: B (2nd auxiliary function)
101: D
103: F
104: H [M]
105: L
106: M
107: S
108: T
109: R [M]
110: P [M]
111: Q [M]
112: M (2nd M code)
113: M (3rd M code)
[M] is read as a modal data on Machining center system and a commanded data on Lathe
system.
block Objective block
- For Series 30i/31i/32i/35i, Series 0i-D, Power Motion i-A
0 : Currently executed block
1 : Next block
- For Series 16i/18i/21i, Series 0i-C, Power Mate i
0 : Currently executed block
1 : Next block
2 : Next to next block
inp Display type by presence of instruction
0 : Modal information is displayed regardless of the presence of the buffering and the
instruction.
1 : Modal information is displayed when there is an instruction in the buffered block.
- 408 -
5:R
9:D
specified address)
[Description]
Modality in the specified G modal code and the address is read.
The readable modal data are modal G code, M/S/T code or commanded data such as F.
[Example]
rdmodal[0_0_0_9_10]
The modal information on the G code group number 1 in the block currently being executed is
read and the processing results are written in D10.
0 Successful.
3 Incorrect kind of data “type”.
4 Incorrect objective block “block”.
-1 It has been failed to read modal data because the CNC software was updating the modal data.
1.45 Reading operator’s message
[Available CNC]
i-A
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
[Function name]
rdopmsg
[Data type]
6: String
rdopmsg[type_pmc_address]
[Arguments]
type Kind of the operator’s message (Always 0)
5:R
9:D
specified address)
[Description]
Reads the contents of the operator’s message displayed in the CNC’s screen.
For Series 30i/31i/32i/35i, Power Motion i-A, Series 0i-D, turn off and back on the power for the
change in parameter No. 6310 or bit 1 of parameters No. 6301 to take effect.
For Series 0i-C, Series16i/18i/21i or Power Mate i, set bit 0 of parameter No. 3207 to 0.
[Example]
rdopmsg[0_9_10]
The operator message is read, the content is displayed on the screen, and this processing result
is written in D10.
0 Successful.
- 409 -
4 The specification of the kind of operator’s message (type) is wrong.

6 The external message or external data input option is not specified.
1.46 Reading program directory
[Available CNC]
i-A
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
[Function name]
rdprgdir
[Data type]
8 : Rectangle String
rdprgdir[type_sprg_eprg_pmc_address]
[Arguments]
type Format of program list
0: O number only
1: O number and comment
2: O number, comment, and the use number of characters
sprg Start program number to be read
eprg End program number to be read.
5:R
9:D
specified address)
[Description]
Reads the list of program numbers (program directory) of all CNC programs registered in CNC.
For instance, when the following CNC programs are registered, it is displayed as follows.
Program number (COMMENT) Character number

O0012 (TEST) ; 420
O0200 (WORK1) ; 352
O0201 ; 537
O9001 (SUB-PRO1) ; 781
- type=0 (Change line by the unit of O number when the display reaches a right edge)
O0012 O0200 O0201 O9001
- type=1
O0012 (TEST)
O0200 (WORK1)
O0201
O9001 (SUB-PRO1)
- type=2
O0012 (TEST) 420
O0200 (WORK1) 352
O0201 537
O9001 (SUB-PRO1) 781
[Example]
- 410 -
rdprgdir[0_12_9001_9_10]
The list of the program number of all registered the processing programs is read from program
number O0012 of the [Description] with Type0, and this processing result is written in D10.
0 Successful.
2 Incorrect buffer size “length”.
3 Incorrect format of program “type”.
5 Program number is incorrect.
-1 CNC program directory reading command has been rejected.
This code is returned under one of following conditions.
• CNC is executing other requested command (downloading, comparing, uploading or
reading program directory).
• The operation mode of CNC is background editing mode or MDI mode.
• P/S 000 or P/S 101 alarm is set.
-2 The CNC has been reset. In this case, the process of reading program directory has been
completed normally.
1.47 Delete specified program
[Available CNC]
i-A
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
[Function name]
progdel
[Data type]
2: 2 bytes (signed)
progdel[number_pmc_address]
[Arguments]
number Program number (0 is specified at the ten keys input.)
All program deletion can be done by specifying -1.
5:R
9:D
specified address)
[Description]
Deletes all CNC programs registered in CNC.
When the specified program is a be in operation, it cannot be deleted.
[Example]
progdel[20_99_0]
The CNC instruction data of program number 20 is deleted, and this processing result is not
notified.
0 Successful.
5 There is no specified program.
7 Tape memory of CNC is protected, or the target program is protected.
-1 Specified program deletion command has been rejected.
- 411 -

• Any automatic operation is being executed. (Automatic operating signal “OP”<F000#7> is
“ON”.)
• P/S 000, P/S 101 or any BP/S alarm is set.
1.48 Search specified program
[Available CNC]
i-A
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
[Function name]
progsrch
[Data type]
4: 4 bytes (signed)
progsrch[number_pmc_address]
[Arguments]
number Program number (0 is specified at the ten keys input.)
5:R
9:D
specified address)
[Description]
Searches the CNC program already registered in CNC.
This function is used to select one CNC program before memory operation is executed in CNC.
[Example]
progsrch[100_9_200_2]
The program of program number 100 is searched, and this processing result is written in D200.
0 Successful.
5 The specified CNC program is not registered in CNC.
7 Tape memory of CNC is protected.
-1 Program search command has been rejected.
• CNC’s mode is EDIT or MEM and Automatic operating signal “OP”<F000#7> is “ON”.
• CNC’s mode is EDIT or MEM and P/S 000 or P/S 101 alarm is set.
1.49 Reading executing program
[Available CNC]
i-A
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
[Function name]
- 412 -
rdexecprog
[Data type]
rdexecprog[block_pmc_address]
[Arguments]
block Always 0
5:R
9:D
specified address)
[Description]
Reads the contents of the CNC program following the currently executing block. For example, while
the following CNC program is being executed, the next string is got by this function.
O1234 ;
N10 G0 X10. Y20. Z30. ;
N20 G0 X20. Y30. Z40. ; <-- This function is called when
N30 G0 X30. Y40. Z50. ; this block is being executed.
N40 G0 X40. Y50. Z60. ;
M30 ;
%
String to be read.
N20 G0 X20. Y30. Z40. ;
N30 G0 X30. Y40. Z50. ;
N40 G0 X40. Y50. Z60. ;
M30 ;
%
[Example]
rdexecprog[0_9_10]
The program of executing is read, and this processing result is written in D10.
1.50 Reading CNC status information
[Available CNC]
i-A
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
[Function name]
rdncstats
[Data type]
6 : String
rdncstats[kind]
[Arguments]
kind 0 : Operation mode
1 : Status of automatic operation
2 : Status of axis motion and dwelling
3 : Status of M,S,T,B functions
4 : Status of emergency stop and reset (Reverse display)
- 413 -
5 : Status of alarm (Reverse display)

[Description]
Specified CNC status information is read.
kind = 0 : Operation mode
Display Meaning
MDI Manual data input mode
MEM Automatic operation mode
**** Not used
EDIT Memory editing mode
HND Manual handle feed mode
JOG Manual continuous feed mode
TJOG TEACH IN JOG mode
THND TEACH IN HANDLE mode
INC Manual incremental feed mode
REF Manual reference position return mode
RMT Automatic operation (Tape command) mode
kind = 1 : Status of automatic operation
Display Meaning
**** Reset state
STOP Automatic operation stop state
HOLD Feed hold state
STRT Cycle start state
kind = 2 : Status of axis motion and dwelling
Display Meaning
*** Not in motion or dwelling
MTN Any axis in motion
DWL In dwelling
kind = 3 : Status of M,S,T,B functions
Display Meaning
*** Not in waiting FIN signal
FIN In executing auxiliary functions (waiting FIN signal)
kind = 4 : Status of emergency stop and reset
Display Meaning
blank Not emergency stop or resetting
--EMG-- Emergency stop
-RESET- Resetting
kind = 5 : Status of alarm
Display Meaning
*** No alarms or warnings
ALM Alarm
BAT Battery low
[Example]
rdncstats[1]
Status information in the state of the automatic operative method is read.
1.51 Reading amount of D-RAM memory use
[Available CNC]
i-A
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
[Function name]
rdmemsize
- 414 -
[Data type]
4 : 4 bytes (signed)
rdmemsize[kind]
[Arguments]
kind 0 : Occupied D-RAM size (byte)
1 : Empty size (byte)
[Description]
Information on the D-RAM status is read.
1.52 Reading FP driver version
[Available CNC]
i-A
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
[Function name]
GetDrvVersion
[Data type]
6 : String
[Format]
GetDrvVersion[]
[Arguments]
----------
[Description]
The version of the FP driver which operates on CNC is read.
A string from 9 to 12 characters is returned.
Example) BY27-02.5
1.53 Reading tool offset amount (indirect specification)
[Available CNC]
i-A
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
[Function name]
idrdtofs2
[Data type]
4 : 4 bytes(signed)
idrdtofs2[kind_datanum]
[Arguments]
kind Kind and data division of indirect specification
datanum Number of beginning of storage of argument of indirect specification
[Argument of indirect specification destinations]
number_type_pmc_address_path
type Offset type
specified address)
path Path number
- 415 -
Row of argument when PMC area is specified

Offset from head PMC address (byte)
+0-1 +2 +3 +4-5 +6
[Example]
When the value of the 10th offset number of Tool length compensation/wear compensation value on
2path side is read, and processing result is written in D200.
idrdtofs2[109_10]
D10 in PMC area is used for indirect data.
D10,11(number) = 10
D12(type) =2
D13(pmc) =9
D14,15(address) = 200
D16(path) = 2 (1 is specified for 1path side)
idrdtofs2[200_100]
#100 in custom macro variable is used for indirect data.
#100(number) = 10
#101(type) =2
#102(pmc) =9
#103(address) = 200
#104(path) = 2 (1 is specified for 1path side)
idrdtofs2[300_10000]
#10000 in P code variable is used for indirect data.
#10000(number) = 10
#10001(type) =2
#10002(pmc) =9
#10003(address) = 200
1.54 Writing tool offset amount (indirect specification)
[Available CNC]
i-A
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
[Function name]
idwrtofs
[Data type]
4 : 4 bytes(signed)
idwrtofs[kind_datanum]
[Arguments]
number_type_data_pmc_address_path
type Offset type
data Output data(signed 4 bytes)
address PMC address where processing result is written (The area in two bytes is used
rom the specified address)
- 416 -
path Path number

+0-1 +2 +3-6 +7 +8-9 +10
Set argument number type data pmc address path
[Example]
When 20 is written in the 10th offset numbers of Tool length compensation/wear compensation
value on 2path side, and processing result is written in D200.
idwrtofs[109_10]
D10,11(number) = 10
D12(type) =2
D13,14,15,16(data) = 20 (0 is specified at the ten keys input.)
D17(pmc) =9
D18,19(address) = 200
D20(path) =2 (1 is specified for 1path side)
idwrtofs[200_100]
#100(number) = 10
#101(type) =2
#102(data) = 20 (0 is specified at the ten keys input.)
#103(pmc) =9
#104(address) = 200
#105(path) =2 (1 is specified for 1path side)
idwrtofs[300_10000]
#10000(number) = 10
#10001(type) =2
#10003(pmc) =9
#10004(address) = 200
1.55 Reading custom macro variable (indirect specification)
[Available CNC]
i-A
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
[Function name]
idrdmac
[Data type]
7: Double(Decimal point)
idrdmac[kind_datanum]
[Arguments]
number_pmc_address_path
- 417 -

from the specified address)
path Path number

+0-1 +2 +3-4 +5
Set argument number pmc address path
[Example]
When the 100th custom macro variables on 2path side are read, and processing result is written in
D200.
idrdmac[109_10]
D10,11(number) = 100
D12(pmc) =9
D13,14(address) = 200
idrdmac[200_100]
#100(number) = 100
#101(pmc) =9
#102(address) = 200
idrdmac[300_10000]
#10000(number) = 100
#10001(pmc) =9
#10002(address) = 200
1.56 Writing custom macro variable (indirect specification)
[Available CNC]
i-A
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
[Function name]
idwrmac
[Data type]
2: 2 bytes (signed)
idwrmac[kind_datanum]
[Arguments]
number_data1_data2_pmc_address_path
data1 Output data (custom macro variable value)
data2 Output data (decimal position)
- 418 -
path Path number

+0-1 +2-5 +6 +7 +8-9 +10
Set argument number data1 data2 pmc address path
[Example]
To the custom macro variable on 2path side when the value of 123.456 is written, and to the 100th
processing result is written in D200.
idwrmac[109_10]
D10,11(number) = 100
D12,13,14,15(data1) = 123456 (0 is specified at the ten keys input.)
D16(data2) =3 (0 is specified at the ten keys input.)
D17(pmc) =9
D18,19(address) = 200
idwrmac[200_100]
#500(number) = 100
#501(data1) = 123456 (0 is specified at the ten keys input.)
#502(data2) =3 (0 is specified at the ten keys input.)
#503(pmc) =9
#504(address) = 200
idwrmac[300_10000]
#10000(number) = 100
#10003(pmc) =9
#10004(address) = 200
1.57 Delete specified program (indirect specification)
[Available CNC]
i-A
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
[Function name]
idprogdel
[Data type]
2: 2 bytes(signed)
idprogdel[kind_datanum]
[Arguments]
- 419 -
number Program number
Deletion of all programs when instructing in -1.
path Path number

+0-3 +4 +5-6 +7
[Example]
When program number 100 on 2path side is deleted, and processing result is written in D200.
idprogdel[109_10]
D10,11,12,13(number) = 100 (0 is specified at the ten keys input.)
D14(pmc) =9
D15,16(address) = 200
idprogdel[200_100]
#100(number) = 100 (0 is specified at the ten keys input.)
#101(pmc) =9
#102(address) = 200
idprogdel[300_10000]
#10001(pmc) =9
#10002(address) = 200
1.58 Search specified program (indirect specification)
[Available CNC]
i-A
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
[Function name]
idprogsrch
[Data type]
4: 4 bytes(signed)
idprogsrch[kind_datanum]
[Arguments]
number Program number
- 420 -
path Path number

+0-3 +4 +5-6 +7
[Example]
When program number 100 on 2path side is searched, and processing result is written in D200.
idprogsrch[109_10]
D10,11,12,13(number) = 100 (0 is specified at the ten keys input.)
D14(pmc) =9
D15,16(address) = 200
idprogsrch[200_100]
#101(pmc) =9
#102(address) = 200
idprogsrch[300_10000]
#10001(pmc) =9
#10002(address) = 200
1.59 Reading setting parameter (indirect specification)
[Available CNC]
i-A
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
[Function name]
idrdset2
[Data type]
4: 4 bytes(signed)
idrdset2[kind_datanum]
[Arguments]
number_axis_length_pmc_address_path
axis Axis number
- 421 -

path Path number

+0-1 +2 +3 +4 +5-6 +7
Set argument number axis length pmc address path
[Example]
When the data of the second axis of setting data number 5421(4 byte type data) on 2path side is read,
and processing result is written in D200.
idrdset2[109_10]
D10,11(number) = 5421
D12(axis) =2
D13(length) =8
D14(pmc) =9
D15,16(address) = 200
D17(path) = 2 (1 is specified for 1path side)
idrdset2[200_100]
#100(number) = 5421
#101(axis) =2
#102(length) =8
#103(pmc) =9
#104(address) = 200
idrdset2[300_10000]
#10000(number) = 5421
#10001(axis) =2
#10002(length) =8
#10003(pmc) =9
#10004(address) = 200
1.60 Writing setting parameter (indirect specification)
[Available CNC]
i-A
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
[Function name]
idwrset
[Data type]
2: 2 bytes(signed)
idwrset[kind_datanum]
[Arguments]
- 422 -
number_axis_length_data_pmc_address_path
axis Axis number
data Output data
path Path number

+0-1 +2 +3 +4-7 +8 +9-10 +11
Set argument number axis length data pmc address path
NOTE
Even when the data length is one byte, pmc begins with +8 since the remaining
three bytes of dummy data are reserved.
[Example]
When 123 is written in the second axis of setting data number 5421(4 byte type data) on 2path side,
and processing result is written in D200.
idwrset[109_10]
D10,11(number) = 5421
D12(axis) =2
D13(length) =8
D18(pmc) =9
D19,20(address) = 200
idwrset[200_100]
#100(number) = 5421
#101(axis) =2
#102(length) =8
#104(pmc) =9
#105(address) = 200
idwrset[300_10000]
#10000(number) = 5421
#10001(axis) =2
#10002(length) =8
#10004(pmc) =9
#10005(address) = 200
- 423 -
1.61 Reading a P code variable(indirect specification)
[Available CNC]
i-A
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
[Function name]
idrdpmac2
[Data type]
7: Floating-Point
idrdpmac2[kind_datanum]
[Arguments]
number P code variable number
path Path number

+0-3 +4 +5-6 +7
[Example]
When the data of P code variable number 10100 on 2path side is read, and processing result is
written in D200.
idrdpmac2[109_10]
D10,11,12,13(number) = 10100
D14(pmc) =9
D15,16(address) = 200
idrdpmac2[200_100]
#100(number) = 10100
#101(pmc) =9
#102(address) = 200
idrdpmac2[300_10000]
#10000(number) = 10100
#10001(pmc) =9
#10002(address) = 200
1.62 Writing a P code variable (indirect specification)
- 424 -
[Available CNC]
i-A
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
[Function name]
idwrpmac2
[Data type]
2: 2 bytes (signed)
idwrpmac2[kind_datanum]
[Arguments]
number_data1_data2_pmc_address_path
number P code variable number
data1 Output data (Integer)
data2 Output data (decimal position)
address PMC address where processing result is written (The area in two bytes is used f
rom the specified address)
path Path number

+0-3 +4-7 +8 +9 +10-11 +12
Set argument number data1 data2 pmc address path
[Example]
When 123.456 is written in P code variable number 10100 on 2path side, and processing result is
written in D200.
idwrpmac2[109_10]
D10,11,12,13(number) = 10100
D14,15,16,17(data1) = 123456 (0 is specified at the ten keys input.)
D18(data2) =3 (0 is specified at the ten keys input.)
D19(pmc) =9
D20,21(address) = 200
idwrpmac2[200_100]
#100(number) = 10100
#103(pmc) =9
#104(address) = 200
idwrpmac2[300_10000]
#10000(number) = 10100
#10003(pmc) =9
#10004(address) = 200
- 425 -
1.63 Reading the absolute position of a controlled axis (type 2)
[Available CNC]
i-A
○ - ○ ○ ○ - - - - - - -
[Function name]
absolute2
[Data type]
4: 4 bytes (signed)
absolute2[axis]
[Arguments]
[Return value]
The same value as the absolute position displayed on the position display screen of the CNC is read.
For Series 30i/31i/32i/35i, Power Motion i-A, Series 0i-D, the absolute function can be used to read
the same coordinate value.
1.64 Reading the relative position of a controlled axis (type 2)
[Available CNC]
i-A
○ - ○ ○ ○ - - - - - - -
[Function name]
relative2
[Data type]
4: 4 bytes (signed)
relative2[axis]
[Arguments]
[Return value]
The same value as the relative position displayed on the position display screen of the CNC is read.
For Series 30i/31i/32i/35i, Power Motion i-A, Series 0i-D, the relative function can be used to read
the same coordinate value.
1.65 Presetting calendar and clock
[Available CNC]
i-A
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
This function is used only for the function specification property of a button control.
[Function name]
settimer
- 426 -
[Data type]
4: 4 bytes (signed)
settimer[type_area_presetadr_pmc_address]
[Arguments]
type 0 : Date setting
1 : Time setting
2 : Date and time
area PMC address type
5 : R (Internal relay)
9 : D (Data table)
presetadr Start PMC address in which the preset value of the calendar timer is stored.
It is a pattern of three or six bytes depending on the type, with each item being one byte, as
shown in the table below.
type address +0 +1 +2 +3 +4 +5
0 : Year Month Day
1 : Hour Minute Second
2 : Year Month Day Hour Minute Second
pmc Type of the PMC address for processing result notification
5:R
9:D
99 : Does not perform processing result notification
address PMC address to which a processing result is to be written (an area of two bytes starting
with the specified address is used.)
If you specify 99 as the PMC address type, specify 0.
[Value of the processing result to be written to the specified PMC area]

0 Normal termination.
5 The type, year/month/day or hour/minute/second value is not correct.
-1 Data could not be set in the calendar timer LSI chip. The cause may be a hardware fault.
1.66 Obtaining CNC alarm
[Available CNC]
i-A
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
This function obtains information about the alarm that has occurred on the CNC.
For Series 0i-C, Series 16i/18i/21i or Power Mate i , up to five alarms are read for each obtained alarm
type.
The message will be the character string in the display language of the CNC.
[Function name]
rdalminfo
[Data type]
6 : Character string (only one line is displayed)
8 : Rectangular character string
rdalminfo[type_almtype_num_pmc_address(_path)]
[Arguments]
- 427 -
type Display format

0 : “Alarm number” only
1 : “Alarm number” and “Message”
2 : “Path name” and “Line feed” and “Alarm number” and “Message”
Only for Series 0i-D or Series 30i/31i/32i/35i or Power Motion i-A, the type argument can
be set to 2.
The alams of all paths are obtained at a time when the type argument is set to 2.
“Path name” is the path name set to CNC parameter No.3141-3147. If the parameter
(No.3141) is not set, it is set to the following path name.
- For Series 0i-TD
English Japanese Simplified Other language
Chinese
HEADn 刃物台 n 路径 n HEADn
(n: path number)
- For other models
“PATHn”
(n: path number)
almtype Type of the alarm to be obtained
0 : Parameter write switch on (SW)
1 : Input of a parameter that requires power-off (PW)
2 : I/O error (IO)
3 : P/S alarm for foreground (PS)
4 : Overtravel alarm / external data input alarm (OT)
5 : Overheat alarm (OH)
6 : Servo alarm (SV)
7 : Data I/O error (SR)
8 : Macro alarm (MC)
9 : Spindle alarm (SP)
10 : Other DS alarms (DS)
11 : Alarm related to prevention of malfunction (IE)
12 : P/S alarm for background (BG)
13 : Synchronization deviation excess error (SN)
14 : (Reserved)
15 : External alarm message (EX)
16 : (Reserved)
17 : (Reserved)
18 : (Reserved)
19 : PMC error (PC)
99 : All types
0 : P/S100
1 : P/S000
2 : P/S101
3 : Other P/S alarms
4 : Overtravel alarm
5 : Overheat alarm
6 : Servo alarm
8 : APC alarm
9 : Spindle alarm
10 : P/S5000
99 : All types
num Number of alarms to be obtained (= 1 to 50)
If a value out of the valid range is specified, 1 is assumed.
- 428 -
pmc Type of the PMC address for processing result notification
5:R
9:D
99 : Does not perform processing result notification
address PMC address to which a processing result is to be written (an area of two bytes starting
with the specified address is used.)
If you specify 99 as the PMC address type, specify 0.
(path) CNC path number specification. Optional
If the type argument is set to 2, always omit this argument.
[Value of the processing result to be written to the specified PMC area]

3 The type specification is not correct.
5 The almtype specification is not correct.
1.67 Obtaining history message indication data
[Available CNC]
i-A
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
This function obtains various information from history data in accordance with a specified history
message indication collection block or in accordance with the history block number specified by the
message history indication control.
[Function name]
msghis
[Data type]
6 : Character string
msghis[block_item_linkout]
[Arguments]
block : Specify the block from which various history message indication data is to be obtained.
Both direct and indirect specifications are available.
0: [Indirect specification] Obtains various information in accordance with the
history block number specified for the history message indication control
specified for the linkout argument.
If, however, the history block number is other than 1 to 4 or if “Message
Display” is specified for the first time display property, the data for history data
category arguments 0 to 2 cannot be obtained. In this case, the return value will
be a null character string.
1 to 4: [Direct specification] Specify the number of the history block from which data is
to be obtained. In this case, set the linkout argument to 0. In this case, data for
history data category arguments 0 to 3 can be obtained.
item : History data category

0: Data deletion date and time
1: Oldest history retention date and time
2: Newest history retention date and time
3: Depending on the screen type of the screen displayed by the history message
indication control specified for linkout, the following data can be obtained as
“zero-suppressed numeric values of up to three digits”.
- 429 -
History Display :Total number of history items retained

Summary Display :Total number of messages that have occurred up to present
Detail Display :Either of the items mentioned above will be assumed
depending on whether the history message indication control
of the reference link number has performed history or
summary display.
4: Depending on the screen type of the screen displayed by the history message
indication control specified for linkout, the following data can be obtained as
“zero-suppressed numeric values of up to three digits/ zero-suppressed numeric
values of up to three digits”.
History Display :Indication page start history record number/Total number of
history items retained
Summary Display :Number of the indication page start message that has
occurred up to present/total number of messages
Detail Display :Either of the items mentioned above will be assumed
depending on whether the history message indication control
of the reference link number has performed history or
summary display.
*1 For data categories 3 and 4, the data to be obtained will vary depending on
which of history, summary, and detail screens is displayed by the history
message indication control specified for linkout. If “Message Display” is
specified for the first time display property, either summary or detail
display screen will be assumed, and history display will not be assumed.
*2 If the history data category argument is either 2 or 3 and no history data has
been registered, The numeric value positions of a date will be replaced by
an asterisk (*). Example: ****/**/** **:**:**
linkout : To identify the history message indication control with which to obtain history information,
specify the assigned link number of that control.
1.68 Reading program directory2
[Available CNC]
i-A
- ○ - - - - - ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
[Function name]
rdprgdir2
[Data type]
rdprgdir2[type_num_pmc_address]
[Arguments]
type Format of program list
0 : O number only
1 : O number and comment
2 : O number, comment, and the use number of characters
num Read program number(program display number in one page)
5: R
9: D
- 430 -
specified address) Please specify 0 when you specify 99 for a kind of the PMC address.
[Description]
A list of program numbers of machining programs registered in the CNC is read. The first program
number in rectangle string of the read number list, the display pointer, varies with the specification
by the setrdprgtop function.
For example, when the following CNC program is registered, the display pointer changes as follows:
Program number (COMMENT) Character number

O0012 (TEST) ; 420
O0200 (WORK1) ; 352
O0201 ; 537
O9001 (SUB-PRO1) ; 781
- type=0 (Change line by the unit of O number when the display reaches a right edge)
O0012 O0200 O0201 O9001
- type=1
O0012 (TEST)
O0200 (WORK1)
O0201
O9001 (SUB-PRO1)
- type=2
O0012 (TEST) 420
O0200 (WORK1) 352
O0201 537
O9001 (SUB-PRO1) 781
[Example]
rdprgdir2[0_8_9_10]
A list of up to eight program numbers is read in type 0 format and the result is written to D10.
0 Successful.
4 Incorrect format of “type”.
NOTE
1 The program information obtained by this function is only O numbers. The
arbitrary file name program name or subfolder cannot be obtained.
2 Only the programs that are present in foreground folders can be obtained.
3 The rdprgdir function and rdprgdir2 function cannot be used together.
4 In addition, the rdprgdir2 function cannot be used from multiple controls on one
screen.
1.69 Increment/decrement of display pointer of rdprgdir2
[Available CNC]
i-A
- ○ - - - - - ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
[Function name]
setrdprgtop
[Data type]
--------
setrdprgtop[top]
- 431 -
[Arguments]
top Increment value of the program display pointer of rdprgdir2.
A negative value can be specified.
[Description]
The display pointer of a list of program numbers read by the rdprgdir2 function is incremented or
decremented.
An argument of 0 is ignored and the display pointer does not change.

Even when an attempt is made to increment the display pointer on the last page where the last
program is displayed, the pointer does not change. In addition, even when an attempt is made to
decrement the display pointer on the first page, the pointer does not change (remains at 1).
1.70 Copy of variable data
[Available CNC]
i-A
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
[Description]
This function is to copy the source variables specified with this function to the destination variables
by the touch action of the button control etc. The data can be copied between PMC area data and
also between custom macro variables, P-code variables.
Do not use this function in the control whose main purpose is to show data such as
numeral/character string indication control.
[Function name]
copyval
[Data type]
None
copyval[k1_n1_t1_d1_p1_k2_n2_t2_d2_p2_pmc_add]
[Arguments]
k1_n1_t1_d1_p1: Destination variables
k2_n2_t2_d2_p2: Source variables
pmc_add: PMC address where processing result is written.
k1,k2: The kind of data area (Specify by 3 digits).

When YXX is specified,
Y : Data kind
0 : Reserve, currently not used
1 : PMC area
2 : Custom macro variables
3 : P-code variables
XX : Data area
Y = 1(PMC area):
00:G/%QG 01:F/%IF 02:Y/%Q
03:X/%I 04:A/%MA 01:R/%M
06:T 07:K/%MK 08:C
09:D/%R
12: E / %ME
Y = 2, 3: Must be 00.
n1,n2: Start number of variables to copy regarding to Y.
- 432 -
Y = 1: Start number of PMC address which is specified in XX to copy
Y = 2: Start number of custom macro variables to copy
Y = 3: Start number of P-code variables to copy
t1,d1,t2,d2 : Data type and parameter of variables
The specified value
Kind of variables
t1,t2 (data type) t1,t2 (data type)
PMC area (integer) Data type: Data type:
0,1 : 1 byte data 0,1 : 1 byte data
PMC area (character string) Specify 6 that means character Specify 6 that means character
string string
Common variables (floating point) Specify 7 that means floating Specify 7 that means floating
P-code variables (floating point) point point
* The destination data type t1 must be the same as the source data type t2.
* Specify 0 or 99 as the valid digits when the destination or the source of P-cede
variables is integer.
* In case of the floating point type, the digits of mantissa must be within 9. If it
is equal to or greater than 10, the overflow error 10044 is returned.
Example: If you specify 6 as the valid digits after the decimal point and copy
7654.321, the value becomes 7654.321000 and the digits of mantissa
including 0 is 10, after that, the error occurs.
p1,p2: Path number

P1 is the path number of the distination, p2 is one of the source. It cannot be omitted.
pmc: Kind of PMC address for processing result notification

5:R/%M 9:D/%R 12: E (PMC-SB7, etc)
99: Processing result is not notified
add: PMC address where processing result is written
(The area in two bytes is used from the specified address.)
[Return]
Argument: copyval[k1_n1_t1_d1_p1_ k2_n2_t2_d2_p2_pmc_add]
Return code Error Argument Meaning/Error handling
10001 k1 Data kind (Y) of k1 or k2 is not 1, 2 or 3.
10021 k2
10002 k1 Data area (XX) of k1 or k2 is not 0.
10022 k2
10003 t1 Incorrect data type. The data is not from 0 to 7, or an incorrect data type is
10023 t1 specified in case of the current k.
10004 d1 Incorrect digit number after decimal point.
10024 d2 In case of the integer type, it must be 0.
In case of the floating point type, it must be from 0 to 9 or 99.
10005 d1 Incorrect length of string
10025 d2 The length must be from 1 to 80.
10041 t1 と t2 The data type of the destination the source is not same. t1 and t2 must be
same.
10042 k1,n1,t1,d1 of the Write error of the destination
destination ※Refer to the following error code table for each data types about the
number shown before the display of this error number.
10043 k2,n2,t2,d2 of the Read error of the source
source ※Refer to the following error code table for each data types about the
number shown before the display of this error number.
10044 Overflow error of digits to be written. The digits of mantissa are over 9
- 433 -
Argument: copyval[k1_n1_t1_d1_p1_ k2_n2_t2_d2_p2_pmc_add]

Return code Error Argument Meaning/Error handling
when data is transferred to the form of destination.
* Refer to following error code table of each data types about the number shown before the
display of an error number from 10001 to 10044 when the specified pmc or add is incorrect.
[Error code table for each data types]
In case of the PMC area
3 Incorrect kind of PMC address
4 Incorrect kind of PMC area
In case of the custom macro variables

3 Incorrect variable number.
A read only system variable is written.
5 Value is out of range
6 There is no necessary option.
-1 The arbitration of reading / writing variables is failed. Retry the operation.
In case of the P-code variables

3 Incorrect variable number.
5 Value is out of range
6 There is no necessary option.
P-code macro file is not loaded.
Integer type of P-code variables cannot be used.
-1 The arbitration of reading / writing variables is failed. Retry the operation.
[Example]
copyval[109_1120_6_16_0_105_2000_6_16_0_99_0]
16 bytes data from R2000 of PMC data is stored into 16 bytes data from D1120 of PMC data,
and the processing result notification is not used.
When the length of string of the destination is longer than one of the source, the extra area of
characters of the destination is written in 0.
copyval[109_3340_4_0_0_109_3300_4_0_0_5_456]
4 bytes data from D3300 of PMC data is stored into 4 bytes data from D3340 of PMC data, and
the processing result is written to R456.
copyval[300_10033_7_2_0_200_5041_7_99_0_99_0]
The 1st absolute axis data is stored into the P-code variable #10033. At this time, the data is
copied until 2 decimals into #10033, and the processing result notification is not used.
When the data is 3435.126, 3435.12 is written to #10033. And then, when the decimal position
is 3 in a control to display, 3456.120 is shown.
copyval[300_10000_7_99_0_200_500_7_1_0_99_0]
The common variable #500 is written to the P-code variable #10000 until 1 decimal, and the
processing result notification is not used.
When #500 is 3456.594, 3456.5 is written to #10000.
1.71 Reading manual handle override amount
The amount of manual override by JOG feed or HANDL feed etc. of the specified axis is read. The
amount of override can specify either of the input unit system or the output unit system.
[Available CNC]
- 434 -
i-A
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
[Function name]
movrlap
[Data type]
4: 4 bytes (signed)
[Value of processing result]
movrlap[axis_unit_pmc_address(_path)]
The path specification in ( ) can be omitted.
[Arguments]
axis: Axis number(From 1 to the number of maximum control axes)
unit: Specification of I/O unit system
pmc_address: Processing result notification of FP function
path: Path specification for multipath control units
axis: The control axis number by which the amount of manual override is read is specified. The
axis number is a range from 1 to the number of maximum control axes. If the invalid axis
number is specified, the return value of this function is 0.
unit: The I/O unit system of the read amount of manual override is specified.
0: Input unit system
1: Output unit system
pmc: Kind of PMC address for processing result notification

5:R
9:D
12: E (PMC-SB7, etc)
address: Written PMC address
(The area in two bytes is used from the specified address)
[Return value]
It is an integer value of the amount of manual override according to axis and unit. The decimal point
is not attached to the return value. When the amount of manual override is displayed on the custom
screen, the decimal point position should specify the number of digits in input/output unit system.

Value of Value of processing result: movrlap[axis_unit_pmc_address(_path)]
processing result Error argument Content and action
0 Successful.
101 axis The axis number is 0 or the number of maximum control axes is
exceeded.
102 unit The I/O unit system is illegal .
103 Error in CNC/PMC data window library
Please refer to the following library error code table.
[Library error code table]

Error code of Read manual handle override amount function
6 There are no required options (Manual handle override).
- 435 -
When specify processing result notification of FP function

3 address Incorrect PMC address
4 pmc Incorrect kind of PMC address
Error message display screen
PMC number error. : PC_Wx[nnnnn]
x: The kind of the PMC address is shown by the character of "R","D" and "E".
When SD7 type PMC is used, it is displayed by the address kind in the SB7 type.
nnnnn: An illegal address number is displayed.
*This number display cannot correctly indicate the address, except when an illegal actual address is
0-65535.
[Example]
When you lead the amount of manual override of the third axis in the input unit system. The error
notification to PMC is not used.
movrlap[3_0_99_0]
When you lead the amount of a manual interruption of the first axis of 2path control in the output
unit system. Two bytes of R120 are used for the error notification to PMC.
movrlap[1_1_05_120_2]
1.72 Reading operator's message 2
[Available CNC]
i-A
- ○ - - - - - ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
[Function name]
rdopmsg2
[Data type]
8: Rectangular character string
rdopmsg2[mode_type_pmc_address]
[Arguments]
mode Display mode
0: Message number (4 digits) + blank + message
1: Message number (4 digits) + new line operation + message
type Type of operator's message
0: First message
1: Second message
2: Third message
3: Fourth message
4: Macro message
5 to 16: Fifth to sixteenth messages (only with Series 30i/31i/32i/35i, Power Motion i-A)
-1: All messages
pmc Type of PMC address for processing result notification
5: R
9: D
99: Processing result is not notified.
address PMC address where the processing result is written (The 2-byte area starting at a specified
address is used.)
When 99 is specified as the type of PMC address, specify 0.
[Description]
- 436 -
Reads CNC operator's message numbers and their messages displayed on the CNC screen.
For Series 30i/31i/32i/35i, Power Motion i-A, Series 0i-D, turn off and back on the power for the
change in parameter No. 6310 or bit 1 of parameters No. 6301 to take effect.
[Example]
rdopmsg2[0_-1_9_10]
All operator's messages are read and displayed on the screen, and the processing result is written to
D10.
2015 OP MESSAGE1
OP MESSAGE2
rdopmsg2[1_-1_99_0]
All operator's messages are read and displayed on the screen, but the processing result is not posted.
2015
OP MESSAGE1
OP MESSAGE2
[Processing result value written to a specified PMC area]

0 Normal termination
4 The specified type of operator's message is incorrect.
6 The option for external message or external data input is not added.
100 No data read area can be found.
101 The specified display mode is incorrect.
1.73 Get/set property of control
[Available CNC]
i-A
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
[Function name]
setproperty
[Data type]
--------
setproperty [type1_type2_arg1_arg2_arg3_arg4_arg5_arg6_arg7_arg8_arg9_arg10]
[Arguments]
type1 Kind specification of the property
1: Properties related with the clock
2: Properties of the asterisk(*)
3: Properties of the key input buffer
4: Properties of the history message indication control
The arg1-arg10 change as follows in accordance with type1 or type2.
type1 = 1 (properties related with the clock)

type2: 1: Change of the date display order. (year/month/day)
The display order of date in the clock control and the message history indication
control can be changed.
arg1,arg2,arg3:Specify year/month/day. (1:year, 2:month, 3:day)
When arg1, arg2, arg3 are incorrect, the date display on custom screens becomes
format when screen forms are made.
- 437 -
arg4-arg10: Must be 0.
[Data type and Return]

None
type1 = 2 (properties of the’*’ display)

Display data as ‘*’(‘.’ In the X6 character)in the following controls.
- Numeral/character string indication control
- Numeral indication control with key input
- Numeral indication control for calling a ten-key pad
- PMC area character string indication control
type2: 1: Sets the property for a control that calls this function
2: Sets the property for controls in the specified range of the focus number
11: Gets the property for a controls in the specified focus number
Note 1: The specified focus number must exist in screen. (type2 = 2 or 12)
Note 2: By setting the property too often, the performance of the display speed is getting
slow because the display of the input focus and data is refreshed. Therefore, don't
set the property carelessly.
The arguments from arg1 to arg10 are as follows according to the table in below.
type2 arg1 arg2 arg3 arg4-10

1 0 : The asterisk is not displayed. 0 0 0
2 1 : The asterisk is displayed. Start focus number End focus number
11 0 0 0
12 0 Focus number 0
[Data type and Return] 4:4 bytes(with sign)
type2 Normal end Abnormal end

1 0 100: The focus number or its range is illegal.
2 101: A control that calls this function is not a numeric
11 0 : The asterisk is not displayed. indication control or a control with input in case of
1 : The asterisk is displayed. type2 = 1 or 11.
102: There is no numeric display control or control with
12
input in screen in case of type2 = 2 or 12.
103: The specification of type2 is illegal.
type1 = 3 (properties of the key input buffer)

type2: 1: Sets the property for a control that calls this function
2: Sets the property for controls in the specified range of the focus number
9: Clears the key input buffer and deletes the input focus
Note 1: The specified focus number must exist in screen. (type2 = 2 or 12)
Note 2: By setting the property too often, the performance of the display speed is getting
slow because the display of the input focus and data is refreshed. Therefore, don't
set the property carelessly.
The arguments from arg1 to arg10 are as follows according to the table in below.
- 438 -
type2 arg1 arg2 arg3 arg4-10

1 0 : Not clear the key input buffer 0 0 0
2 1 : Clear the key input buffer Start focus number End focus number
9,11 0 0 0
12 0 Focus number 0
type2 Normal end Abnormal end

1 0 100: The focus number or its range is illegal.
2 101: A control that calls this function is not a numeric
9,11 0 : Not clear the key input buffer indication control or a control with input in case of
1 : Clear the key input buffer type2 = 1 or 11.
102: There is no numeric display control or control with
12
input in screen in case of type2 = 2 or 12.
103: The specification of type2 is illegal.
type1 = 4 (Properties of the history message indication control)

type2: 1: Gets the kind of data that the history indication control is displaying now.
arg1 Assigned link number of the history indication control
arg2-arg10 Must be 0

Returns the kind of data that the history indication control is displaying now.
-1: The specified assigned link number does not exist.
2: History display
3: Summary display
4: Detailed display
type2: 11: Changes the summary display of the specified line to the detailed display. It is
available in the FP script only.
arg2 Line number in the summary display
arg3 Specify the detail message file name. The file name must be included by double
quotations (") and specify "\\" as the separator between its folder and its file name like as
follows.
Example)"VtsData\\DetailMessage.msgxml"
[Data type and Return] None
type2: 12: Switches page of the summary display. It is available in the FP script only.
arg2 Direction of the page switching.
0 : Page up
1 : Page down
[Data type and Return] None
[Example]
- 439 -
When the date display order is DD/MM/YYYY (day /month/year), the following function is
specified for the function specification of a button control.
setproperty[1_1_3_2_1_0_0_0_0_0_0_0]
This instruction sets to clear the numerical value of the key input buffer after inputting data on
controls whose focus numbers are from 1 to 20 on a screen.
setproperty[3_2_1_1_20_0_0_0_0_0_0_0];
When you change the summary display of a history indication control whose assigned link
number is 1 to the detailed display of its line number 10, specify the following instruction in the
FP script.
setproperty[4_11_1_10_"VtsData\\DetailMessage.msgxml"_0_0_0_0_0_0_0];
1.74 Read FANUC PICTURE edition
[Available CNC]
i-A
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
[Function name]
GetFPinfo
[Data type]
6: String
GetFPinfo [type_datatype]
[Arguments]
type 0: Edition information
datatype 0: Obtain FANUC PICTURE (J518) edition
A string as up to twenty characters is returned.
[Return]
FANUC PICTURE edition information for the specified type and datatype.
[Example]
When FANUC PICTURE (J518) edition information is obtained, it is understood that FANUC
PICTURE is edition 02.2 by the first two values.
GetFPinfo [0_0] => " 2, 2, 0, 0"
1.75 Switch a screen
[Available CNC]
i-A
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
It is possible to switch to various screens with one button control by the FP function specification. The
screen switched with button controls by the PMC LADDER sequence can be freely specified.
The switched screen can switch both of the CNC screen and the custom screen.
The table below decides the screen number.
Screen type Screen number definition
The number which is specified by "Option function details setting / Display number setting"
can be used.
Custom screens
The display number setting is specified by "DETAIL setting" which is an MEM-generated
setup item.
CNC screens The number in which 100,000 is added to the CNC screen number is used. The CNC
- 440 -
screen number is decimal.
Example)
In Series 30i/31i/32i/35i, Power Motion i-A, when outside message is 0x0204:
A screen number is 516+100000=100516.
[Function name]
swscreen
[Data type]
--------
swscreen[type_kind_datanum_default_pmc_address]
[Arguments]
type Processing division
0: It switches to the screen number of the kind and datanum. When this screen
number is 0, it switches to the screen number of the default.
1: After a screen number of the default argument is written in the kind and datanum
arguments, the screen number of the kind and datanum arguments is switched.
When this function is specified to writing function of the control with input, this
processing division is specified. The input value from a screen is taken over
default argument.
2: The screen number of a current screen is written in the kind and datanum
arguments only the first time display. In this division, the switching screen is not
occurred.
caution: For the processing division is 2, and there are several writing function in the
current parent and child screens are displayed
If the written screen number equals the writing it, it isn't written by the function
call there after.
kind Data kind and data division of storage area of the switching screen number area.
When specified PMC data, area of four bytes starting with the specified address
is used.
1nn: PMC data
In nn, specify a type of PMC address.
105:R / %M
109:D / %R
112:E / %ME
2pp: Macro variable
In pp, specify a path number.
200: current path
2pp: CNC path number is specified from 01.
205: loader's path (Series 16i /18i /21i)
For a non-multipath system, specify 200.
3pp: P code variable
300: current path
datanum Start data number of storage area of the switch screen number area
When processing division is 0 or 1, obtain switching screen number from this
area.
When processing division is 2, the current parents screen number is written in
this area.
default Screen number in accordance with each processing division
For processing division is 0 or 1
- 441 -
0: Specify default screen number that is called when the switching screen number
area of kind and datanum is 0.
1: Specify screen number that switch screen and write to kind and datanum at the
same time
When processing division is 2, specify 0.
5:R
9:D
99: Processing result is not notified.
from the specified address.)
[Example]
1. The display is switched to the screen number being written in D124 of PMC area. At this time,
when switch screen number is 0, it switches to the 202nd custom screens.
The following function is specified for the function call of the button control.
swscreen[0_109_124_202_99_0]
2. The screen number of a current screen is written to the D124 of PMC area.
Specifying the following functions for the numeral/character string indication control, and the
check on the display check box is removed.
swscreen[2_109_124_0_99_0]
100 The specified indirect argument type is incorrect.
101 The specified PMC data address number is incorrect.
140 The specified custom screen number is incorrect.
141 The specified default screen number is incorrect.
142 The specified notice of processing result is incorrect.
1.76 Read a cursor number
[Available CNC]
i-A
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
The cursor number (the identification number or the focusing index number of the control with focus) in
the custom screen is read.
The value in which the cursor number is added to the index value can be obtained. The index value is in
witch the array index number used by fixed value and "FP function for the I/O of array type record
variable data" is converted into 1st dimension array. The return value is given to 7 colors display value
and message number of text character string indication control. 7 colors display possible controls are
lamp control and numeral/character string indication control and numeral indication control for calling a
ten-key pad. Therefore, it can change other control's colors synchronizing with the control with the cursor,
and it can change text message according to the message number.
When the array reference index value is specified, the calculation type that a focus index value and a
fixed value are added to one dimension array conversion index value is as follows.
Return value =(fixed value or focus index value) +

(1st dimension array index number -1)+
(2nd dimension array index number -1)*(1st dimension elements number)+
(3rd dimension array index number -1)*(2nd dimension elements number)*
(1st dimension elements number)
- 442 -
* The paragraph of the dimension not used is 0.
[Function name]
rdcursor
[Data type]
5: 4 bytes (unsigned)
rdcursor[type_fix_kind2_address2_kind3_address3_pmc_address]
[Arguments]
type Reading division
0: Function is invalid
The return value is always 0.
1: Fixed value
The return value is fix argument.
2: Focusing index number
The return value is focusing index number of control which the cursor is positioned in
the screen currently displayed.
3: Identification number
The return value is identification number of control that the cursor is positioned in the
screen currently displayed.
4: Array index number + Second index offset
The return value is the value that added index value convert first dimension array
obtained by array information for record and array index number to fixed value
specified fix argument. (second index offset)
5: Array index number + Focusing index number
The return value is value that added first dimension array obtained by array information
for array type record and array index number to focusing index number of control which
the cursor is positioned in the screen currently displayed.
6: Screen composition offset + Focusing index number
The return value is value that is added the screen composition offset value
corresponding to the parents screen and the child screen from 1 to 10 to focusing index
number of control that the cursor is positioned in the screen currently displayed.
7: Screen composition offset + Array index number
+Focusing index number
Addition of the screen composition offset value corresponding to the parents screen and
the child screen from 1 to 10 and index value convert first dimension array obtained by
array information for record and array index number and focusing index number of
control which the cursor is positioned in the screen currently displayed is return value.
* When the type argument is set to 6 or 7, the follwoing value of the screen composition
offset is added to the return value.
Screen where the cursor is displayed Value of Screen composition offset
Parent screen 0
Child screen 1 10000
: :
* When the child screen structure is specified by the screen structure definition control,
specify continuously child screens. When it is not continuous specification, the
continuous offset number from start is specified for the screen structure offset.
* Specify 0 for kind2 and address2 and kind3 and address3, except for the reading
division is 4 or 5. Please refer to the content related to explanation by "FP function for
the I/O of 3.1.4 array type record variable data" for a specified value.
fix Fix value / second index offset value
- 443 -
Specify the following value according to the reading division. Specify 0, except for this.
Range of specification:
0 to 16383 is specified, for identification number.
0 to 65535 is specified, for display number of text character string indication control.
When the reading division is 1, specify the unsigned fix value.
When the reading division is 4, specify the second index offset value.
kind2 Data type and data category at an array information data storage destination
1nn:PMC data
105:R / %M
109:D / %R
112:E / %ME
2pp:Macro variable
200: current path
3pp:P code variable
300: current path
address2 Start data number at an array information storage destination
When kind2 specifies PMC data, specify a PMC address number.
When kind2 specifies a macro variable, specify a macro variable number.
When kind2 specifies a P code variable, specify a P code variable number.
kind3 Data type and data category at an array index information storage destination
1nn:PMC data
105:R / %M
109:D / %R
112:E / %ME
2pp:Macro variable
200: current path
3pp:P code variable
300: current path
address3 Start data number at an array index information storage destination
5 :R
9 :D
99:Processing result is not notified
- 444 -
specified address)

Array information (kind2, datanum2)
kind_datanum_record_dimension_maxindex1_maxindex2_maxindex3
kind Data type and data category at an array information data storage destination
1nn:PMC data
105:R / %M
109:D / %R
112:E / %ME
2pp:Macro variable
200: current path
3pp:P code variable
300: current path
datanum Start data number at an array information data storage destination
When kind specifies PMC data, specify a PMC address number.
When kind specifies macro variable, specify a macro variable number.
When kind specifies P code variable, specify a P code variable number.
record Array record size
dimension Number of array record dimensions used (1 to 3)
maxindex1 Number of array record elements (one dimension)
maxindex2 Number of array record elements (two dimension)
Specify this argument when dimension specifies 2 or 3.
maxindex3 Number of array record elements (three dimension)
Specify this argument when dimension specifies 3.
Indirect Indirect argument storage location

argument PMC data PMC data(PMC-SD7) Macro variable
(other than %R Other than %R P code variable
PMC-SD7)
Offset Size Offset Size Offset Size Offset Size
1 Kind +0 2 +0 1 +0 16 +0 1
2 datanum +2 4 +1 2 +16 32 +1 1
3 record +6 2 +3 1 +48 16 +2 1
4 dimension +8 2 +4 1 +64 16 +3 1
5 maxindex1 +10 2 +5 1 +80 16 +4 1
6 maxindex2 +12 2 +6 1 +96 16 +5 1
7 maxindex3 +14 2 +7 1 +112 16 +6 1
* When dimension specifies 1, the maxindex2 and maxindex3 areas need not be allocated.
* When dimension specifies 2, the maxindex3 area need not be allocated.
- Array index information (kind3, address3)

index1_index2_index3
index1 Array record reference index number (one dimension)
- 445 -
index2 Array record reference index number (two dimension)

index3 Array record reference index number (three dimension)
PMC-SD7)
1 index1 +0 2 +0 1 +0 16 +0 1
2 index2 +2 2 +1 1 +16 16 +1 1
3 index3 +4 2 +2 1 +32 16 +2 1
* When dimension specifies 1, the index2 and index3 areas need not be allocated.
* When dimension specifies 2, the index3 area need not be allocated.
[Example]
When the focus is at the control with input on the screen, the guidance message of this input item is
displayed text character string indication control.
The following function is specified for the function specification of the text character string
indication control. The text message registers the guidance message that corresponds by the focus
index number set to the input screen.
rdcursor[2_0_0_0_0_0_99_0]
102 The specified record size is not incorrect.
103 The specified number of dimensions is incorrect.
104 The specified number of array elements is incorrect.
105 The specified array index number is incorrect.
1.77 Write a cursor number
[Available CNC]
i-A
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
The cursor number (focus index value or identification number) to display the cursor on the screen can be
written in FP driver's display control program. The cursor is displayed the control with input that agrees
with the written value. The cursor display appears or can be moved to the input item of an arbitrary place
on the screen by using this function and the ladder sequence and P code macro, etc.
When the focus index value is written, please add the screen composition offset value to indicate of
which screen the focus index value according to the parents screen and from child screen 1 to child screen
10.
When 0 is written in the cursor number with a cursor display in the screen, it becomes a cursor display
position. When the same cursor number as the current displayed it is written, the cursor display is deleted.
When cursor number 0 is written when there is no cursor display, it becomes the following table.
Cursor specification Cursor number Cursor display
Identification number 0 The cursor is displayed to the youngest identification number in
the screen composition.
Focusing index number n0000 The cursor is displayed to the youngest focusing index
number in parent screens or child screens correspond to the
screen composition that is shown with "n".
- 446 -
* See the explanation of "Read of the cursor number" function too.
* When the screen is made, it is necessary to specify the identification number or the focusing index
number of the control with input to display the cursor.
[Function name]
wrcursor
[Data type]
--------
wrcursor[type_fix_kind2_address2_kind3_address3_pmc_address(_size)]]
[Arguments]
type Writing division
When 1000 is added to the writing division, writing is executed only first time of the
screen is switched and the cursor number specified for writing differs from the last
number.
0,100: Function is invalid
1: Fix value (fix) is written to current focusing index without conditions.
2: When focusing index number of a displaying screen is 0 (a state that the cursor display
is not done usually), fix value(fix) is written.
3: When the focusing index number agree with it shown by kind2 and address2, fix value
(fix) is written.
4: Fix value (fix) is written to current identification number without conditions.
5: When identification number is 0 (a state that the cursor display is not done usually), fix
value (fix) is written.
6: When the current identification number agree with it shown by kind2 and address2, fix
value (fix) is written.
101: Specified value (kind3, address3) is written to current focusing index without
conditions.
102: When current focusing index is 0, specified value (kind3, address3) is written.
103: When the current focusing index agree with it shown by kind2 and address2, specified
value (kind3, address3) is written.
104: Specified value (kind3, address3) is written to current identification number without
conditions.
105: When the current identification number is 0, specified value (kind3, address3) is
written.
106: When the current identification number agree with it shown by kind2 and address2,
specified value (kind3, address3) is written.
fix fixed value
The value of the control with input is succeeded to this argument.
When the writing division is 1-6, specify unsigned fix value, except for this.
kind2 Data type and data category at the write condition comparative value storage destination
1nn:PMC data
105:R / %M
109:D / %R
112:E / %ME
The area size of the PMC data follows the size argument. (two bytes or four bytes)
2pp:Macro variable
200: current path
3pp:P code variable
300: current path
- 447 -

address2 Start data number at the write condition comparative value storage destination.
kind3 Data type and data category at a writing cursor value storage destination.
When the writing division is set to 1-6, specify 0.
1nn:PMC data
105:R / %M
109:D / %R
112:E / %ME
The area size of the PMC data follows the size argument. (two bytes or four bytes)
2pp:Macro variable
200: current path
3pp:P code variable
300: current path
address3 Start data number at a writing cursor value storage destination.
When the writing division is set to 1-6, specify 0.
5 :R
9 :D
specified address)
(size) Specify the area size of the PMC data where the cursor number is stored.
The area size of the PMC data specified for (kind2, address2) and (kind3, address3) is
2: two bytes
4: four bytes
The area size is two bytes value if the size argument is omitting.
[Example]
When there is no cursor display on the screen, a control with input with the smallest focusing index
number of a child screen 2 became the focusing display. The function writing is executed only one
time when the screen is switched.
Specify the following functions for the numeral/character string indication control, and the display
check box is removed.
wrcursor[1002_20000_0_0_0_0_99_0]
- 448 -
106 The specified size argument is not incorrect.
1.78 Read the actual spindle speed (S)(type 2)
[Available CNC]
i-A
- ○ - - - - - ○ ○ ○ ○ -
[Function name]
acts2
[Data type]
5:4 bytes (unsigned)
acts2[spno]
[Arguments]
spno Spindle number (= from 1 to the maximum number of spindles)
[Description]
The return value of the function is 0 if error occurs such as specifying an illegal spindle number.
At that time, if it is used in the numeral/character string indication control, the display of the control
is blank.
And, when the function is used except for Series 0i-D, Series 30i/31i/32i/35i, the display is blank.
[Return]
Spindle speed
The unit of it is rev/min.
1.79 Read the actual feedrate (F) of the controlled axis(type 3)
[Available CNC]
i-A
- ○ - - - - - ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
[Function name]
actf3
[Data type]
5:4bytes
[Format]
actf3[]
[Arguments]
--------
[Description]
This function is available in the numeral/character string indication control only.
This function automatically displays the decimal point according to CNC setting.
In this case, the setting of "Use Decimal Point" of control is invalid.
[Return]
Actual feedrate of the controlled axis
- 449 -
1.80 Read the absolute position of a controlled axis(type 3)
[Available CNC]
i-A
- ○ - - - - - ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
[Function name]
absolute3
[Data type]
4:4 bytes(signed)
absolute3[axis]
[Arguments]
[Description]
When the axis number that exceeds the number of controlled axes is specified, blank ("") is
displayed.
[Return]
The same value as the absolute position displayed on the position display screen of the CNC is read.
1.81 Read the machine position of a controlled axis(type 3)
[Available CNC]
i-A
- ○ - - - - - ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
[Function name]
machine3
[Data type]
4:4 bytes (signed)
machine3[axis]
[Arguments]
[Description]
displayed.
[Return]
Machine position for the specified axis number
1.82 Read the relative position of a controlled axis(type 3)
[Available CNC]
i-A
- 450 -
- ○ - - - - - ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
[Function name]
relative3
[Data type]
4:4 bytes (signed)
relative3[axis]
[Arguments]
[Description]
displayed.
[Return]
The same value as the relative position displayed on the position display screen of the CNC is read.
1.83 Read the remaining amount of travel along a controlled axis(Type 3)
[Available CNC]
i-A
- ○ - - - - - ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
[Function name]
distance3
[Data type]
4:4 bytes (signed)
distance3[axis]
[Arguments]
[Description]
When the axis number that exceeds the number of controlled axes is specified, or when it was called
in other than the MEM, MDI, RMT or INC mode of CNC, blank ("") is displayed.
[Return]
Remaining amount of travel for the specified axis number
1.84 Read the skip position of a controlled axis(type 3)
[Available CNC]
i-A
- ○ - - - - - ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
[Function name]
skip3
[Data type]
- 451 -
4:4 bytes (signed)

skip3[axis]
[Arguments]
[Description]
displayed.
[Return]
Skip position for the specified axis number
1.85 Read the servo delay of a controlled axis(type 3)
[Available CNC]
i-A
- ○ - - - - - ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
[Function name]
srvdelay3
[Data type]
4:4 bytes (signed)
srvdelay3[axis]
[Arguments]
axis Axis number(= from 1 to the maximum number of controlled axes)
[Description]
displayed.
[Return]
Servo delay for the specified axis number
1.86 Read the acceleration/deceleration delay of a controlled axis(type 3)
[Available CNC]
i-A
- ○ - - - - - ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
[Function name]
accdecdly3
[Data type]
4:4 bytes (signed)
accdecdly3[axis]
[Arguments]
axis Axis number(= from 1 to the maximum number of controlled axes)
[Description]
- 452 -
displayed.
[Return]
Acceleration/deceleration delay for the specified axis number
1.87 Read the tool offset value(type 3)
[Available CNC]
i-A
- ○ - - - - - ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
[Function name]
rdtofs3
[Data type]
4:4 bytes (signed)
rdtofs3[number_type]
[Arguments]
type Offset type
0 : Cutter compensation/wear compensation value
1 : Cutter compensation/geometric compensation value
2 : Tool length compensation/wear compensation value
3 : Tool length compensation/geometric compensation value
Lathe system
0 : X-axis wear compensation value
1 : X-axis geometric compensation value
2 : Z-axis wear compensation value
3 : Z-axis geometric compensation value
4 : Tool-nose radius wear compensation value
5 : Tool-nose radius geometric compensation value
6 : Virtual tool tip direction wear compensation value
7 : Virtual tool tip direction geometric compensation value
8 : Y-axis wear compensation value
9:Y-axis geometric compensation value
When the tool geometry compensation option is not provided, specify wear compensation.
[Description]
[Return]
Tool offset value for the specified type
1.88 Read the workpiece origin offset(type 3)
[Available CNC]
i-A
- 453 -
- ○ - - - - - ○ ○ ○ ○ -
[Function name]
rdzofs3
[Data type]
4:4 bytes (signed)
rdzofs3[number_axis]
[Arguments]
0 :External workpiece origin offset
1 to 6 :Workpiece origin offset of G54 to G59
7 to 306 :Workpiece origin offset of G54.1P1 to G54.1P300
[Description]
[Return]
Workpiece origin offset
1.89 Read manual handle override amount(type 3)
[Available CNC]
i-A
- ○ - - - - - ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
[Function name]
movrlap3
[Data type]
4:4 bytes (signed)
movrlap3[axis_unit_pmc_address(_path)]
[Arguments]
axis Axis number (From 1 to the number of maximum control axes)
Specify the control axis number by which the amount of manual override is read. The axis
number is a range from 1 to the number of maximum control axes.
Specification within the range from 1 to 32
unit Specification of I/O unit system
0 : Input unit system
1 : Output unit system
5:R
9:D
address Written PMC address(The area in two bytes is used from the specified address)
(path) Path specification for multipath control units. Optional
[Description]
- 454 -
displayed.
The amount of manual override by JOG feed or HANDL feed etc. of the specified axis is read. The
amount of override can specify either of the input unit system or the output unit system.
[Return]
It is an value of the amount of manual override according to axis and unit.
[Error number table]

Return code Function argument Specify : movrlap3[axis_unit_pmc_address(_path)]
Error Argument Meaning/Error handling
101 axis The axis number is 0 or the number of maximum control axes is
exceeded.
102 unit The I/O unit system is illegal .
103 Error in CNC/PMC data window library
Please refer to the following library error code table.
[Library error code table]

Error code of Read manual handle override amount function
6 There are no required options (Manual handle override).
When specify processing result notification of FP function
3 address Incorrect PMC address
4 pmc Incorrect kind of PMC address
Error message display screen
PMC number error. : PC_Wx[nnnnn]
x : The kind of the PMC address is shown by the character of "R","D" and "E".
When SD7 type PMC is used, it is displayed by the address kind in the SB7 type.
nnnnn : An illegal address number is displayed.
※This number display cannot correctly indicate the address, except when an illegal actual address is
0-65535.
[Example]
When you read the amount of manual override of the third axis in the input unit system. The error
notification to PMC is not used.
movrlap3[3_0_99_0]
When you read the amount of a manual interruption of the first axis of 2path control in the output unit
system. Two bytes of R120 are used for the error notification to PMC.
movrlap3[1_1_05_120_2]
1.90 Switch the CNC/PMC path number
[Available CNC]
i-A
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ - ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
[Function name]
swpath
[Data type]
4:4 bytes (signed)
- 455 -
swpath[type_path]
[Argument]
type Path type
0 : CNC
1 : PMC
path Path number
type = 0 (CNC) : 1 to 10
type = 1 (PMC) : 1 to 3 (1st to 3rd PMC)、9(DCS PMC)
* When the specified path number is 0, the path switching does not be executed.
[Description]
This function switches the path number in CNC or PMC. The return value of it is the previous path
number in which is specified by the parameter type before calling this function.
Switching the path number in PMC is available only for Series 30i/31i/32i/35i, Power Motion i-A.
[Return]
Path number before calling this function
1.91 Reading the load information of a serial spindle
[Available CNC]
i-A
- ○ - - - - - ○ ○ ○ ○ -
[Function name]
rdspload
[Data type]
4:4 bytes (signed)
rdspload [spno]
[Argument]
spno Spindle number (= from 1 to the maximum number of spindles)
[Return]
Load information for the specified spindle number
1.92 Fetch tool management data
[Available CNC]
i-A
- ○ - - - - - ○ ○ ○ - -
[Function name]
fetchtool
[Data type]
2:2 bytes (signed)
fetchtool[number_datanum(_path)]
[Argument]
number Start data number to be fetched from the tool management data table
datanum Count of data to be fetched
(path) CNC path number, Optional
[Description]
Fetches the tool management data for the specified count beginning from the start data number into
the temporary memory of the FP driver.
- 456 -
To read the fetched data, use the rdtool function. And, to free them, use the unfetchtool function.
One tool management data size is 220 bytes.
The data cannot be fetched for several multi-paths at the same time.
This function can be used in the timer driven operation function.
[Example]
An example to display the tool management data on a screen is as follows:
1) By the timer driven operation function, fetch data to be displayed for your necessary count by the
fetchtool function at opening the screen and at every interval time.
2) Read the data to be displayed by the rdtool function. Then, display them in the numeral/character
string indication control, etc.
3) By the timer driven operation function, free the fetched data by the unfetchtool function at closing
the screen.
[Return]
-6 Allocation of temporary memory in FP driver is failed.
-1 Other users (such as PMC) have accessed the same function. Try this function again.
3 The start data number to be fetched is invalid.
6 No option
1.93 Read tool management data
[Available CNC]
i-A
- ○ - - - - - ○ ○ ○ - -
[Function name]
rdtool
[Data type]
4:4 bytes (signed)
rdtool[number_id]
[Argument]
number Data number of the tool management data table to be read
id Identifier of the tool management data to be read
1 ：Tool number(T) 31：Customizing data 1
2 ：Tool life counter 32：Customizing data 2
3 ：Maximum of tool life 33：Customizing data 3
4 ：Rest of tool life 34：Customizing data 4
5 ：State of tool life 35：Customizing data 5
6 ：Customizing bit ：:
7 ：Tool information 50：Customizing data 20
8 ：Tool length compensation number (H) ：
9 ：Cutter compensation number (D) 70：Customizing data 40
10：Spindle speed(S)
11：Feed rate(F)
12：Tool geometric compensation number(G)
13：Tool wear compensation number(W)
14：Tool geometric number
15：Edge group number
16：Edge number
17：Origin magazine number
- 457 -
18：Origin pot number

19：Edge position number(only 30i/31i/32i)
：
29：Magazine number(read only)
30：Pot number(read only)
[Description]
Reads the tool management data fetched by fetchtool function.
When an illegal identifier number is specified or the tool management data is not fetched, the return
value becomes 0.
[Return]
Data specified by the identifier.
1.94 Free tool management data
[Available CNC]
i-A
- ○ - - - - - ○ ○ ○ - -
[Function name]
unfetchtool
[Data type]
None
[Format]
unfetchtool[]
[Argument]
None
[Description]
Frees the memory of the tool management data fetched by the fetchtool function.
After using the fetchtool function, execute this function certainly at the end.
[Return]
None
1.95 Write tool management data
[Available CNC]
i-A
- ○ - - - - - ○ ○ ○ - -
[Function name]
wrtool
[Data type]
2:2 bytes (signed)
wrtool[number_id_data(_path)]
[Argument]
number Data number of the tool management data table to be written
id Identifier of the tool management data to be written (Refer to the rdtool as for id.)
data Value to write
- 458 -
(path) CNC path number, Optional
[Description]
Writes value to the tool management data specified by the identifier.
To read the written data by the rdtool function, fetch the data again by the fetchtool function.
This function cannot be used in the timer driven operation function.
[Return]
3 The data number to be written is invalid.
4 The identifier to be written is invalid.
5 The value to write is invalid.
6 No option
7 The tool management data table is write-protected.
1.96 Delete tool management data
[Available CNC]
i-A
- ○ - - - - - ○ ○ ○ - -
[Function name]
deltool
[Data type]
2:2 bytes (signed)
deltool[number_datanum(_path)]
[Argument]
number Start data number to be deleteed from the tool management data table.
datanum Count of data to be deleted.
(path) CNC path number. Optional
[Description]
Deletes the tool management data for the specified count beginning from the start data number.
This function cannot be used in the timer driven operation function.
[Return]
3 The start data number to be deleted is invalid.
6 No option
7 The tool management data table is write-protected.
1.97 Scroll a message
[Available CNC]
i-A
- ○ - - - - - ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
[Function name]
scroll
[Data type]
4:4 bytes (signed)
scroll["id"_type_arg1_arg2]
- 459 -
[Argument]
"id" The object ID of the text character string indication control that you want to scroll.
Specify the object ID enclosed with double quotes (").
type Operation type
0: Scrolls the contents by pages or lines. Specify a relative page or line count from the
current display start position.
1: Jumps to the specified display start position. Specify an absolute page or line count to
display.
2: Obtains the page's or line's information of the character string being displayed.
arg1,arg2 Specify the value of the table below according to the type argument.
type arg1 arg2
0 Specify the display start position
Page count or line count for the display
0: by page count
1 start position (*)
1: by line count
kind of the information to obtain
0: current page number displayed
1: total page count
2 Specify 0
10: first line number displayed
11: total line count
12: line count per page
* In case of specifying a relative value, a positive value scrolls down and a negative value
scrolls up.
In case of specifying an absolute value, the value must be within the range from 1 to the
total page or line count.
if the display start position became under 1, the first page is displayed.
if the display start position became more than the total page or line count, the last page is
displayed.
[Description]
Scrolls a character string being displayed, by changing the display start position of the contents of
Text Character String Indication Control.
Or, obtains the information such as current page number being displayed or total page count.
[Return]
A value of the table below returns according to the type argument.
type Return value
0,1 Always 0
2 The information specified with the arg1 arugument
[Error code]
100 The specified type argument is invalid.
101 The specified arg1 argument is invalid.
102 The specified arg2 argument is invalid.
110 The specified Text Character String Indication Control does not exist in the screen.
- 460 -
3.1.3 FP functions for PMC window

[Functions]
2.1 wrpmcb PMC write (bit)
2.2 rdpmc PMC read (1/2/4 bytes)
2.3 wrpmc PMC write (1/2/4 bytes)
2.4 rdpmcb PMC read (bit)
2.5 idrdpmcb PMC read (bit) (indirect specification)
2.6 idwrpmcb PMC write (bit) (indirect specification)
2.7 idrdpmc PMC read (1/2/4 bytes) (indirect specification)
2.8 idwrpmc PMC write (1/2/4 bytes) (indirect specification)
2.9 rdpmcbr Read PMC arbitrary bit range
2.10 wrpmcbr Write PMC arbitrary bit range
In the following four functions, it is possible to specify the path number of PMC.
2.1 wrpmcb PMC write (bit)
2.2 rdpmc PMC read (1/2/4 bytes)
2.3 wrpmc PMC write (1/2/4 bytes)
2.4 rdpmcb PMC read (bit)
Add the path number of PMC in the last argument.
Example)rdpmc[adrtype_snumber_datatype_path]
As the path number, it is possible to specify the value of 1 to 3 (1st to 3rd PMC), and 9(DCS PMC), and
these are optional. The path number is available only for Series 30i/31i/32i/35i, Power Motion i-A and it
is ignored in other series.
[Function reference]
2.1 PMC write (bit)
[Function name]
wrpmcb
[Data type]
1 : 1 byte
wrpmcb[adrtype_snumber_bitpos_data]
[Arguments]
adrtype PMC address type
0: G (PMC → CNC)
1: F (CNC → PMC)
2: Y (PMC → machine)
3: X (machine → PMC)
4: A (message request)
5: R (internal relay)
6: T (variable timer)
7: K (keep relay)
8: C (counter)
9: D (data table)
12 : E (internal relay/PMC-SB7, etc)
snumber PMC address where data is written
bitpos Bit position (0 to 7)
- 461 -
data Output data (0 is specified at the ten keys input)

0: 0 is written in the bit.
1: 1 is written in the bit.
2: The bit is reversed.
[Description]
Writing 1 or 0 in the bit in the specified PMC area or the bit data is reversed.
[Example]
wrpmcb[9_0_0_0] Writes 0 in D[0] bit 0.
wrpmcb[9_1500_3_2] Writes 1 in D[1500] bit 3.
2.2 PMC read (1/2/4 bytes)
[Function name]
rdpmc
[Data type]
0 : 1 byte(Signed)
1 : 1 byte
2 : 2 byte(Signed)
3 : 2 byte
4 : 4 byte(Signed)
5 : 4 byte
rdpmc[adrtype_snumber_datatype]
[Arguments]
0: G (PMC → CNC)
1: F (CNC → PMC)
7: K (keep relay)
8: C (counter)
9: D (data table)
snumber PMC address where data is read
datatype PMC data type (The same size as the [Data type] is specified)
0: 1 byte
1: 2 bytes
2: 4 bytes
[Description]
The data of specified PMC area is read.
[Example]
rdpmc[9_1000_0] Reads 1-byte data from D[1000].
rdpmc[5_2000_0] Reads 1-byte data from R[2000].
rdpmc[9_500_1] Reads 2-byte data from D[500].
rdpmc[5_2500_1] Reads 2-byte data from R[2500].
- 462 -
2.3 PMC write (1/2/4 bytes)
[Function name]
wrpmc
[Data type]
0 : 1 byte(Signed)
1 : 1 byte
2 : 2 byte(Signed)
3 : 2 byte
4 : 4 byte(Signed)
5 : 4 byte
wrpmc[adrtype_snumber_datatype_data]
[Arguments]
0 : G (PMC → CNC)
1 : F (CNC → PMC)
2 : Y (PMC → machine)
3 : X (machine → PMC)
4 : A (message request)
5 : R (internal relay)
6 : T (variable timer)
7 : K (keep relay)
8 : C (counter)
9 : D (data table)
snumber PMC address where data is written
0 : 1 byte
1 : 2 bytes
2 : 4 bytes
data Output data (0 is specified at the ten keys input)
[Description]
The data is written to the specified PMC area.
[Example]
wrpmc[9_1000_0_-128] Writes -128 (1-byte data) in D[1000].
wrpmc[9_2000_0_127] Writes 127 (1-byte data) in D[2000].
wrpmc[9_500_1_-32768] Writes -32768 (2-byte data) in D[500].
wrpmc[9_2500_1_32767] Writes 32767 (2-byte data) in D[2500].
2.4 PMC read (bit)
[Function name]
rdpmcb
[Data type]
1: 1bytes
rdpmcb[adrtype_snumber_bitpos]
[Arguments]
0: G (PMC → CNC)
1: F (CNC → PMC)
- 463 -
7: K (keep relay)
8: C (counter)
9: D (data table)
snumber PMC address where data is read
bitpos Bit position (0 to 7)
[Description]
1 bit of the specified PMC area is read.
[Example]
rdpmcb[9_100_0] The data of bit 1 of D100 is read.
2.5 PMC read (bit) (indirect specification)
[Function name]
idrdpmcb
[Data type]
1: 1 bytes
idrdpmcb[kind_datanum]
[Arguments]
adrtype_snumber_bitpos
adrtype Kind of PMC address
snumber read PMC address
bitpos Bit position

+0 +1-2 +3
Set argument adrtype snumber bitpos
[Example]
When you read the data of bit 7 of D100 of PMC area.
idrdpmcb[109_10]
D10(adrtype) =9
D11,12(snumber) = 100
D13(bitpos) =7
idrdpmcb[200_100]
#100(adrtype) =9
#101(snumber) = 100
#102(bitpos) =7
idrdpmcb[300_10000]
#10000(adrtype) = 9
#10001(snumber) = 100
#10002(bitpos) =7
- 464 -
2.6 PMC write (bit) (indirect specification)
[Function name]
idwrpmcb
[Data type]
1: 1 bytes
idwrpmcb[kind_datanum]
[Arguments]
adrtype_snumber_bitpos_data
bitpos Bit position
data Output data(0, 1, 2(reverse))

+0 +1-2 +3 +4
Set argument adrtype snumber bitpos data
[Example]
When you read the data of bit 7 of D100 of PMC area.
idwrpmcb[109_10]
D10(adrtype) =9
D11,12(snumber) = 100
D13(bitpos) =7
D14(data) = 1 (0 is specified at the ten keys input.)
idwrpmcb[200_100]
#100(adrtype) =9
#101(snumber) = 100
#102(bitpos) =7
idwrpmcb[300_10000]
#10000(adrtype) = 9
#10001(snumber)= 100
#10002(bitpos) =7
2.7 PMC read (1/2/4 bytes) (indirect specification)
[Function name]
idrdpmc
[Data type]
0: 1bytes (signed)
1: 1bytes
2: 2bytes (signed)
3: 2bytes
4: 4bytes (signed)
5: 4bytes
- 465 -
idrdpmc[kind_datanum]
[Arguments]
adrtype_snumber_datatype

+0 +1-2 +3
Set argument adrtype snumber datatype
[Example]
When you read the data of 4 bytes from D100 of PMC area.
idrdpmc[109_10]
D10(adrtype) =9
D11,12(snumber) = 100
D13(datatype) =2
idrdpmc[200_100]
#100(adrtype) =9
#101(snumber) = 100
#102(datatype) =2
idrdpmc[300_10000]
#10000(adrtype) = 9
#10001(snumber) = 100
#10002(datatype) = 2
2.8 PMC write (1/2/4 bytes) (indirect specification)
[Function name]
idwrpmc
[Data type]
0: 1bytes (signed)
1: 1bytes
2: 2bytes (signed)
3: 2bytes
4: 4bytes (signed)
5: 4bytes
idwrpmc[kind_datanum]
[Arguments]
adrtype_snumber_datatype_data
- 466 -
data Output data

1 byte type data
+0 +1-2 +3 +4
Set argument adrtype snumber datatype data
2 byte type data

+0 +1-2 +3 +4-5
4 byte type data

+0 +1-2 +3 +4-7
[Example]
When you write 123 in 4 bytes in D100 of PMC area.
idwrpmc[109_10]
D10(adrtype) =9
D11,12(snumber) = 100
D13(datatype) =2
idwrpmc[200_100]
#100(adrtype) =9
#101(snumber) = 100
#102(datatype) =2
idwrpmc[300_10000]
#10000(adrtype) = 9
#10001(snumber) = 100
#10002(datatype) = 2
2.9 Read PMC arbitrary bit range
The continuous bits from specification bit position to 32 are read. In addition, it can make a return value
arithmetic operation value, a bit operation value including the logical operation, a arithmetic relation
value with the numerical value, etc for the data of the read bit length.
Caution: When PMC type is SD7, don't specify the %R area to the arbitrary bit data reading because
the %R area is not BOOL type data. If it is specified, operation is not guaranteed.
[Function name]
rdpmcbr
[Data type]
Specify data type of PMC arbitrary bit length
0: 1 byte (Signed)
1: 1 byte
2: 2 bytes (Signed)
- 467 -
3: 2 bytes
4: 4 bytes (Signed)
5: 4 bytes
rdpmcbr[adrtype_snumber_pos_len_data_type_adrtype2_snumber2_pmc_address]
[Arguments]
adrtype(P1) PMC address type
When PMC type is not SD7
0 :G
1 :F
2 :Y
3 :X
4 :A
5 :R
6 :T
7 :K
8 :C
9 :D
12 :E (internal relay/PMC-SB7, etc)
When PMC type is SD7
0 :%QG
1 :%IF
2 :%Q
3 :%I
4 :%MA
5 :%M
7 :%MK
12 :%ME
snumber(P2) PMC address where data is read
pos(P3) Bit position
Specify it from 0 bit to the maximum bit of specification area.
For symbol specification, please specify "adrtype_snumber_pos" by the BOOL
type of the symbol. Therefore, the bit position when the symbol is specified is
0-7.
len(P4) Number of continuous bits (0-32)
It ends normally without writing anything in case of 0.
data(P5) Calculation data value corresponding to processing division 1-20
When the processing division is 1-20, specify the data value and the logical
operation value and the arithmetic comparison value up to the bit width specified
with len. When the processing division is rotate/shift, specify the frequency with
the condition of number < len.
When the processing division is 0 or 100-120, specify 0.
0, 100: Simple reading (rdpmc/rdpmcb)
1, 101: Unsigned addition reading
2, 102: Unsigned subtraction reading
3, 103: Unsigned multiplication reading
4, 104: Unsigned division reading
5, 105: Unsigned surplus reading
6, 106: Logical operation AND(P5orP7-P8 AND P1-P3)
7, 107: Logical operation OR(P5orP7-P8 OR P1-P3)
8, 108: Logical operation EOR(P5orP7-P8 EOR P1-P3)
9, 109: Logical operation NOT(NOT P5orP7-P8 )
10, 110: Logical operation NOT(NOT P1-P3)
- 468 -
11, 111: Rotate direction of shift up
12, 112: Rotate direction of shift down
13, 113: Shift up
14, 114: Shift down
15, 115: P1-P3 = P5orP7-P8, TRUE:1, FALSE:0
16, 116: P1-P3 ≠ P5orP7-P8, TRUE:1, FALSE:0
17, 117: P1-P3 < P5orP7-P8, TRUE:1, FALSE:0
18, 118: P1-P3 ≥ P5orP7-P8, TRUE:1, FALSE:0
19, 119: P1-P3 > P5orP7-P8, TRUE:1, FALSE:0
20, 120: P1-P3 ≤ P5orP7-P8, TRUE:1, FALSE:0
* P1-P3 :adrtype, snumber, pos (Data value operated)
P5 :data (Direct value of operation source data)
P7-P8 :adrtype2, snumber2 (Operation source data)
* Please store the value, arithmetic operation value, the logical operation value,
the number of shifts, the comparison values (101-120) in the area where be
indicated with adrtype2 and snumber2.
* When the arithmetic comparison is 15-20 or 115-120, the value is compared as
unsigned.
* When logical operation "NOT" of 10 and 110 don't refer from data or adrtype2,
snumber2 to the data.
* When divisor is 0 by the division/remainder calculation, it ends with normally
without calculation.
* Error that is overflow and underflow by the arithmetic operation result is not
notified.
adrtype2(P7) Kind of PMC address for data storage corresponding to processing division 1-20
snumber2(P8) PMC address for data storage corresponding to processing division 1-20.
When the processing division is 0-20 or 100, "P7_P8" is specified "0_0". When
the processing division is 101-120, specify the PMC address were written the
following data values.
When the processing division is 101-120 or 115-120, the bit length from 0 to len
is read from this area. When it is 111-114, 5 bits or less length is read from 0 bit
because it is up to 31 times or less in case of 111-114.
Bit length of len argument ≤1 ≤2 ≤4 ≤8 ≤16 ≤32
Reading bit length of P7_P8 0 1 2 3 4 5
5 :R
9 :D
from the specified address).
[Example]
1. 2 bytes of D124 and 2 bytes of D126 are added, and it reads. Processing result is not notified.
rdpmcbr[9_124_0_16_0_101_9_126_99_0]
2. The value in which only the frequency in which 10 bits from R1204.3 to R1206.5 are written in
one byte of taking out D1202 is rotate shift upped is read.
The value is read. Processing result is not notified.
rdpmcbr[5_1204_3_10_0_111_9_1202_99_0]
rdpmcbr[:ROTBIT:_10_0_111_:TIMES:_99_0] (Symbol)

- 469 -

2.10 Write PMC arbitrary bit range
It reads the number of continuous bit from bit position in the specified PMC area to 32 bits or less length,
for according to a processing division.
The arithmetic operation value or the logical operation values are written between the arbitrary bit
positions to specification and continuous the bit length for the reading bit length data.
* Specify it 0-14 for the processing division, when wrpmcbr is used for the writing function of
numeral indication control with key input/numeral indication control for calling a ten-key pad. The
input value is succeeded to the data argument.
* Set the value to the area that adrtype2 and snumber2 show with the numeral indication control for
calling a ten-key pad/PMC ladder/etc, when 100-120 of processing division is used for the function
call of the button control.
Caution: When PMC type is SD7, don't specify the %R area to the arbitrary bit data because the %R area
is not BOOL type data. If it is specified, operation is not guaranteed.
[Function name]
wrpmcbr
[Data type]
--------
wrpmcbr[adrtype_snumber_pos_len_data_type_adrtype2_snumber2_pmc_address]
[Arguments]
adrtype(P1) PMC address type where data is written.
When PMC type is not SD7
0 :G
1 :F
2 :Y
3 :X
4 :A
5 :R
6 :T
7 :K
8 :C
9 :D
12 :E (internal relay/PMC-SB7, etc)
When PMC type is SD7
0 :%QG
1 :%IF
2 :%Q
3 :%I
4 :%MA
5 :%M
7 :%MK
12 :%ME
snumber(P2) PMC address where data is written.
pos(P3) Bit position
Specify it from 0 bit to the maximum bit of specification area.
For symbol specification, please specify "adrtype_snumber_pos" by the BOOL
type of the symbol. Therefore, the bit position when the symbol is specified is
0-7.
- 470 -
len(P4) Number of continuous bits(0-32)
It ends normally without writing anything in case of 0.
data(P5) Calculation data value corresponding to processing division 1-20
When the processing division is 1-20, specify the data value and the logical
operation value and the arithmetic comparison value up to the bit width
specified with len. When the processing division is rotate/shift, specify the
frequency with the condition of number < len.
0, 100: Simple writing (wrpmc/wrpmcb)
1, 101: Unsigned addition writing
2, 102: Unsigned subtraction writing
3, 103: Unsigned multiplication writing
4, 104: Unsigned division writing
5, 105: Unsigned surplus writing
13, 113: Shift up
14, 114: Shift down
* The processing division of 15-20 or 115-120 can be specified because it has the
compatibility of the argument with the rdpmcbr function, but it ends normally
without writing.
* P1-P3 :adrtype, snumber, pos (Data value operated)
P7-P8 :adrtype2, snumber2 (Operation source data)
* Please store the value, arithmetic operation value, the logical operation value,
the number of shifts, the comparison values (101-120) in the area where be
indicated with adrtype2 and snumber2.
* When the processing division of 15-20 or 115-120, it ends normally without
writing.
* When the arithmetic comparison is 15-20 or 115-120, the value is compared as
unsigned.
* When logical operation NOT of 10 and 110, do not refer from data or adrtype2,
snumber2 to the data.
* When divisor is 0 by the division/remainder calculation, it ends with normally
without calculation.
* Error that is overflow and underflow by the arithmetic operation result is not
notified.
adrtype2(P7) Kind of PMC address for data storage corresponding to processing division 1-20
snumber2(P8) PMC address for data storage corresponding to processing division 1-20
When the processing division is 0-20 or 100, "P7_P8" is specified "0_0". When
the processing division is 101-120, specify the PMC address were written the
following data values.
When the processing division is 101-120 or 115-120, the bit length from 0 to len
is read from this area. When it is 111-114, 5 bits or less length is read from 0 bit
because it is up to 31 times or less in case of 111-114.
Bit length of len argument ≤1 ≤2 ≤4 ≤8 ≤16 ≤32
Reading bit length of P7_P8 0 1 2 3 4 5
- 471 -

5 :R
9 :D
address PMC address where processing result is written
[Example]
1. Four bytes of D124 and four bytes of D128 are added, and the result is written in D124.
Processing result is not notified.
wrpmcbr[9_124_0_32_0_101_9_128_99_0]
2. The value input from the screen is added to two bytes of D1204, and this value is written in
D1204. Processing result is notified to R1206. The following function is specified the writing
function of the control with input.
wrpmcbr[9_1204_0_16_0_1_0_0_5_1206]
3.1.4 FP Functions for Input/Output of Array-Type Record Variable

Data
[Functions]
3.1 idxrdval Reading array-type record variable data
3.2 idxrdvalb Reading array-type record variable bit data
3.3 idxwrval Writing array-type record variable data
3.4 idxwrvalb Writing array-type record variable bit data
3.5 idxmvval Copying array-type record variable data
3.6 idxwridx Writing an array index number
3.7 idxrdvalbr2 Read array type record variable arbitrary bit data
3.8 idxwrvalbr2 Write array type record variable arbitrary bit data
The functions above are available with all CNC series.

[Available CNC]
i-A
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
3.1 Reading array-type record variable data
[Function]
idxrdval
[Data type]
0 : 1 byte(Signed)
1 : 1 byte
2 : 2 bytes(Signed)
- 472 -
3 : 2 bytes
4 : 4 bytes(Signed)
5 : 4 bytes
7 : Floating-Point
idxrdval[kind1_datanum1_kind2_datanum2_dataoffs_datatype_ datasize_pmc_address]
[Arguments]
kind1 Data type and data category at an array information storage destination
1nn : PMC data
100 : G / %QG
101 : F / %IF
102 : Y / %Q
103 : X / %I
104 : A / %MA
105 : R / %M
106 : T / Unusable
107 : K / %MK
108 : C / Unusable
109 : D / %R
112 : E / %ME
2pp : Macro variable
200 : Current path
201 : Path 1
202 : Path 2
205 : Loader
3pp : P code variable
300 : Current path
301 : Path 1
302 : Path 2
305 : Loader
datanum1 Start data number at an array information storage destination
1nn : PMC data
100 : G / %QG
101 : F / %IF
102 : Y / %Q
103 : X / %I
104 : A / %MA
105 : R / %M
106 : T / Unusable
107 : K / %MK
108 : C / Unusable
109 : D / %R
112 : E / %ME
- 473 -

200 : Current path
201 : Path 1
202 : Path 2
205 : Loader
300 : Current path
301 : Path 1
302 : Path 2
305 : Loader
datanum2 Start data number at an array index information storage destination
dataoffs Specify the offset value indicating the position of variable data to be read in the record,
relative to the start position of the record assumed to be 0.
When the variable data is a PMC data, specify the number of byte present from the start
position of the record to the record data to be read.
When the variable data is a macro variable or P code variable, specify the number of
variables present from the start position of the record to the record data to be read.
datatype Type of record data to be read
Specify the same value as [Data type].
datasize Data size of record data to be read
Specify the number of characters when datatype specifies character string.
Specify 0 when datatype specifies a type other than character string.
Pmc Kind of PMC address for processing result notification
5 :R
9 :D
specified address)
- Array information (kind1, datanum1)
1nn : PMC data
100 : G / %QG
101 : F / %IF
102 : Y / %Q
103 : X / %I
104 : A / %MA
105 : R / %M
106 : T / Unusable
107 : K / %MK
108 : C / Unusable
109 : D / %R
112 : E / %ME
- 474 -
200 : Current path
201 : Path 1
202 : Path 2
205 : Loader
300 : Current path
301 : Path 1
302 : Path 2
305 : Loader
PMC-SD7)
1 kind +0 2 +0 1 +0 16 +0 1
2 datanum +2 4 +1 2 +16 32 +1 1
3 record +6 2 +3 1 +48 16 +2 1
4 dimension +8 2 +4 1 +64 16 +3 1
5 maxindex +10 2 +5 1 +80 16 +4 1
1
6 maxindex +12 2 +6 1 +96 16 +5 1
2
7 maxindex +14 2 +7 1 +112 16 +6 1
3
- Array index information (kind2, datanum2)
PMC-SD7)
1 index1 +0 2 +0 1 +0 16 +0 1
2 index2 +2 2 +1 1 +16 16 +1 1
3 index3 +4 2 +2 1 +32 16 +2 1
- 475 -
[Description]
Reads the data of the array record specified by array information and array index information.
[Example 1]
From the three-dimensional array record, array[3][4][5], consisting of the following record data, the
record data, data3, of array[0][1][2] is read and the result of processing is written to D200:
Array[3][4][5] record data format (10 bytes)
+00 data1 (word type)
idxrdval[109_1000_109_1100_4_2_0_9_200]
Array information is stored starting at number 1000 in the D area of the PMC.
Array index information is stored starting at number 1100 in the D area of the PMC.
Array record data is stored starting at number 2000 in the D area of the PMC.
⇒D1000 = 109 (Array record location: D area of the PMC)
D1002 = 2000 (Array record location: Number D2000)
D1006 = 10 (Record size of one array: 10 bytes)
D1008 = 3 (Number of array dimensions: 3-dimensional array)
D1010 = 5 (Maximum number of one-dimensional arrays: 5)
D1012 = 4 (Maximum number of two-dimensional arrays: 4)
D1014 = 3 (Maximum number of three-dimensional arrays: 3)
⇒D1100 = 3 (Reference record one-dimensional array index: [2])
D1102 = 2 (Reference record two-dimensional array index: [1])
D1104 = 1 (Reference record three-dimensional array index: [0])
[Example 2]
From the three-dimensional array record, array[3][4][5], consisting of the following record data, the
record data, data3, of array[0][1][2] is read and the result of processing is written to D200:
Array[3][4][5] record data format (5 items)
+00 data1 (Floating-point type)
idxrdval[200_100_200_110_2_7_0_9_200]
Array information is stored starting at macro variable number 100.
Array index information is stored starting at macro variable number 110.
Array record data is stored starting at macro variable number 500.
⇒#100 = 200 (Array record location: Common variable area)
#101 = 500 (Array record location: #500)
#102 = 5 (Record size of one array: 5 variables)
#103 = 3 (Number of array dimensions: 3-dimensional array)
#104 = 5 (Maximum number of one-dimensional arrays: 5)
#105 = 4 (Maximum number of two-dimensional arrays: 4)
#106 = 3 (Maximum number of three-dimensional arrays: 3)
⇒#110 = 3 (Reference record one-dimensional array index : [2])
#111 = 2 (Reference record two-dimensional array index : [1])
#112 = 1 (Reference record three-dimensional array index : [0])
idxrdval[300_10000_300_10010_2_7_0_9_200]
Array information is stored starting at P code variable number 10000.
Array index information is stored starting at P code variable number 10010.
- 476 -
Array record data is stored starting at P code variable number 11000.
⇒#10000 = 300 (Array record location: P code variable area)
[Return value]
Value of specified variable data
3.2 Reading array-type record variable bit data
[Function]
idxrdvalb
[Data type]
1 : 1 byte
idxrdvalb[kind1_datanum1_kind2_datanum2_dataoffs_bitpos_ pmc_address]
[Arguments]
1nn : PMC data
100 : G / %QG
101 : F / %IF
102 : Y / %Q
103 : X / %I
104 : A / %MA
105 : R / %M
106 : T / Unusable
107 : K / %MK
108 : C / Unusable
109 : D / %R
112 : E / %ME
200 : Current path
201 : Path 1
202 : Path 2
205 : Loader
300 : Current path
301 : Path 1
302 : Path 2
305 : Loader
- 477 -

1nn : PMC data
100 : G / %QG
101 : F / %IF
102 : Y / %Q
103 : X / %I
104 : A / %MA
105 : R / %M
106 : T / Unusable
107 : K / %MK
108 : C / Unusable
109 : D / %R
112 : E / %ME
200 : Current path
201 : Path 1
202 : Path 2
205 : Loader
300 : Current path
301 : Path 1
302 : Path 2
305 : Loader
bitpos Read bit position (0 to 255)
pmc Type of PMC address for processing result notification
5 :R
9 :D
99 : Processing result is not notified.
address PMC address where the processing result is written (The 2-byte area starting at a specified
address is used.)
When 99 is specified as the type of PMC address, specify 0.
1nn : PMC data
- 478 -
100 : G / %QG
101 : F / %IF
102 : Y / %Q
103 : X / %I
104 : A / %MA
105 : R / %M
106 : T / Unusable
107 : K / %MK
108 : C / Unusable
109 : D / %R
112 : E / %ME
200 : Current path
201 : Path 1
202 : Path 2
205 : Loader
300 : Current path
301 : Path 1
302 : Path 2
305 : Loader
- 479 -

(other than PMC-SD7) %R Other than %R P code variable
1 Kind +0 2 +0 1 +0 16 +0 1
2 datanum +2 4 +1 2 +16 32 +1 1
3 Record +6 2 +3 1 +48 16 +2 1
4 dimension +8 2 +4 1 +64 16 +3 1
5 maxindex +10 2 +5 1 +80 16 +4 1
1
6 maxindex +12 2 +6 1 +96 16 +5 1
2
7 maxindex +14 2 +7 1 +112 16 +6 1
3
- Array index information (kind2,datanum2)

1 index1 +0 2 +0 1 +0 16 +0 1
2 index2 +2 2 +1 1 +16 16 +1 1
3 index3 +4 2 +2 1 +32 16 +2 1
[Description]
Reads the state of a specified bit position from the variable data of the array record specified by
array information and array index information.
[Example]
From the three-dimensional array record, array[3][4][5], consisting of the following record data, bit
5 of the record data, data3, of array[0][1][2] is read and the processing result is written to D200:
Array[3][4][5] record format (10 bytes)
idxrdvalb[109_1000_109_1100_4_5_9_200]
⇒D1000 = 109 (Array record location: D area of the PMC)
D1002 = 2000 (Array record location: number 2000 of D)
- 480 -
⇒D1100 = 3 (Reference record one-dimensional array index : [2])
D1102 = 2 (Reference record two-dimensional array index : [1])
D1104 = 1 (Reference record three-dimensional array index : [0])
[Return value]
Value of bit data of a specified variable
3.3 Writing array-type record variable data
[Function]
idxwrval
[Data type]
0 : 1 byte(Signed)
1 : 1 byte
2 : 2 bytes(Signed)
3 : 2 bytes
4 : 4 bytes(Signed)
5 : 4 bytes
7 : Floating-Point
idxwrval[kind1_datanum1_kind2_datanum2_dataoffs_datatype_
datasize_kind3_datanum3_noticemode_noticedata_ data1_data2_pmc_address]
[Arguments]
1nn : PMC data
100 : G / %QG
101 : F / %IF
102 : Y / %Q
103 : X / %I
104 : A / %MA
105 : R / %M
106 : T / Unusable
107 : K / %MK
108 : C / Unusable
109 : D / %R
112 : E / %ME
200 : Current path
201 : Path 1
202 : Path 2
205 : Loader
300 : Current path
301 : Path 1
302 : Path 2
305 : Loader
- 481 -

1nn : PMC data
100 : G / %QG
101 : F / %IF
102 : Y / %Q
103 : X / %I
104 : A / %MA
105 : R / %M
106 : T / Unusable
107 : K / %MK
108 : C / Unusable
109 : D / %R
112 : E / %ME
200 : Current path
201 : Path 1
202 : Path 2
205 : Loader
300 : Current path
301 : Path 1
302 : Path 2
305 : Loader
datatype Data type of record data to be written
0 : 1 byte(Signed)
1 : 1 byte
2 : 2 bytes(Signed)
3 : 2 bytes
4 : 4 bytes(Signed)
5 : 4 bytes
7 : Floating-Point
datasize Data size of record data to be written
When datatype specifies character string, specify the number of characters.
When datatype specifies a data type other than character string, specify 0.
kind3 Data type and data category at an update notification data storage destination
000 : Record data
- 482 -
1nn : PMC data
100 : G / %QG
101 : F / %IF
102 : Y / %Q
103 : X / %I
104 : A / %MA
105 : R / %M
106 : T / Unusable
107 : K / %MK
108 : C / Unusable
109 : D / %R
112 : E / %ME
200 : Current path
201 : Path 1
202 : Path 2
205 : Loader
300 : Current path
301 : Path 1
302 : Path 2
305 : Loader
datanum3 Start data number at an update notification data storage destination
When kind3 specifies record data, specify an offset in the record.
noticemode Update notification data write mode
- When the update notification data storage destination is PMC data
-10,-11 : Writes noticedata to update notification data (byte type).
-12,-13 : Writes noticedata to update notification data (word type).
-14,-15 : Writes noticedata to update notification data (long type).
-20,-21 : Adds noticedata to update notification data (byte type).
-22,-23 : Adds noticedata to update notification data (word type).
-24,-25 : Adds noticedata to update notification data (long type).
0 to 255 : Update notification data bit position
Sets a specified bit to OFF when noticedata is 0.
Sets a specified bit to ON when noticedata is 1.
A specified bit is reversed when noticedata is 2.
- When the update notification data storage destination is a macro variable or P code
variable
-17 : Writes noticedata to update notification data.
-27 : Adds noticedata to update notification data.
noticedataData (integer) to be written to update notification data
data1 Write data (integer)
data2 Write data (number of decimal places)
- 483 -

5 :R
9 :D
specified address)
1nn : PMC data
100 : G / %QG
101 : F / %IF
102 : Y / %Q
103 : X / %I
104 : A / %MA
105 : R / %M
106 : T / Unusable
107 : K / %MK
108 : C / Unusable
109 : D / %R
112 : E / %ME
200 : Current path
201 : Path 1
202 : Path 2
205 : Loader
300 : Current path
301 : Path 1
302 : Path 2
305 : Loader
- 484 -

1 Kind +0 2 +0 1 +0 16 +0 1
2 datanum +2 4 +1 2 +16 32 +1 1
3 record +6 2 +3 1 +48 16 +2 1
4 dimension +8 2 +4 1 +64 16 +3 1
5 maxindex +10 2 +5 1 +80 16 +4 1
1
6 maxindex +12 2 +6 1 +96 16 +5 1
2
7 maxindex +14 2 +7 1 +112 16 +6 1
3

1 Index1 +0 2 +0 1 +0 16 +0 1
2 Index2 +2 2 +1 1 +16 16 +1 1
3 Index3 +4 2 +2 1 +32 16 +2 1
- Update notification data (kind3,datanum3)

data
data Update notification data
1 Data +0 N +0 M +0 8*N +0 1
* When update notification data is of byte type: N=1, M=1
* When update notification data is of word type: N=2, M=1
* When update notification data is of long type: N=4, M=2
[Description]
Writes data to the record data of the array record specified by array information and array index
information.
- 485 -
[Example 1]
To the record data, data3, of array[0][1][2] in the three-dimensional array record, array[3][4][5],
consisting of the following record data, 100 is written and the result of processing is written to
D200:
idxwrval[109_1000_109_1100_4_2_0_109_1200_-12_99_100_0_9_200]
Update notification data is stored starting at number 1200 in the D area of the PMC.
⇒D1000 = 109 (Array record location: D AREA OF THE PMC)
D1002 = 2000 (Array record location: NUMBER 2000 OF D)
[Example 2]
To the record data, data3, of array[0][1][2] in the three-dimensional array record, array[3][4][5],
consisting of the following record data, 100 is written and the result of processing is written to
D200:
Array[3][4][5] record format (5 items)
idxwrval[200_100_200_110_2_7_0_200_120_-17_99_100_0_9_200]
Update notification data is stored starting at macro variable number 120.
⇒#100 = 200 (Array record location: Common variable area)
idxwrval[300_10000_300_10010_2_7_0_300_10020_-17_99_100_0_9_200]
Update notification data is stored starting at P code variable number 10020.
- 486 -
⇒#10000 = 300 (Array record location: P code variable area)
102 The specified record size is incorrect.
106 The specified data type is incorrect.
3.4 Writing array-type record variable bit data
[Function]
idxwrvalb
[Data type]
1 : 1 byte
idxwrvalb[kind1_datanum1_kind2_datanum2_dataoffs_bitpos_
kind3_datanum3_noticemode_noticedata_data_pmc_ address]
[Arguments]
1nn : PMC data
100 : G / %QG
101 : F / %IF
102 : Y / %Q
103 : X / %I
104 : A / %MA
105 : R / %M
106 : T / Unusable
107 : K / %MK
108 : C / Unusable
109 : D / %R
112 : E / %ME
200 : Current path
201 : Path 1
202 : Path 2
205 : Loader
- 487 -

300 : Current path
301 : Path 1
302 : Path 2
305 : Loader
1nn : PMC data
100 : G / %QG
101 : F / %IF
102 : Y / %Q
103 : X / %I
104 : A / %MA
105 : R / %M
106 : T / Unusable
107 : K / %MK
108 : C / Unusable
109 : D / %R
112 : E / %ME
200 : Current path
201 : Path 1
202 : Path 2
205 : Loader
300 : Current path
301 : Path 1
302 : Path 2
305 : Loader
dataoffs Specify the offset value indicating the position of variable data to be written in the record,
When the variable data is PMC data, specify the number of bytes present from the start
position of the record to the record data to be written.
variables present from the start position of the record to the record data to be written.
bitpos Write bit position (0 to 255)
- 488 -
kind3 Data type and data category at an update notification data storage destination
000 : Record data
1nn : PMC data
100 : G / %QG
101 : F / %IF
102 : Y / %Q
103 : X / %I
104 : A / %MA
105 : R / %M
106 : T / Unusable
107 : K / %MK
108 : C / Unusable
109 : D / %R
112 : E / %ME
200 : Current path
201 : Path 1
202 : Path 2
205 : Loader
300 : Current path
301 : Path 1
302 : Path 2
305 : Loader
datanum3 Start data number at an update notification data storage destination
When kind3 specifies record data, specify an offset in the record.
noticemode Update notification data write mode
-When the update notification data storage destination is PMC data
-10,-11 : Writes noticedata to update notification data (byte type).
-12,-13 : Writes noticedata to update notification data (word type).
-14,-15 : Writes noticedata to update notification data (long type).
-20,-21 : Adds noticedata to update notification data (byte type).
-22,-23 : Adds noticedata to update notification data (word type).
-24,-25 : Adds noticedata to update notification data (long type).
0 to 255 : Update notification data bit position
Set a specified bit to OFF when noticedata is 0.
Set a specified bit to ON when noticedata is 1.
A specified bit is reversed when noticedata is 2.
-When the update notification data storage destination is a macro variable or P code
variable
-17 : Writes noticedata to update notification data.
-27 : Adds noticedata to update notification data.
noticedataData (integer) to be written to update notification data
data Bit operation type
0 : Set a bit to OFF.
1 : Set a bit to ON.
2 : Inverts a bit.
- 489 -
Pmc Kind of PMC address for processing result notification

5 :R
9 :D
specified address)
1nn : PMC data
100 : G / %QG
101 : F / %IF
102 : Y / %Q
103 : X / %I
104 : A / %MA
105 : R / %M
106 : T / Unusable
107 : K / %MK
108 : C / Unusable
109 : D / %R
112 : E / %ME
200 : Current path
201 : Path 1
202 : Path 2
205 : Loader
300 : Current path
301 : Path 1
302 : Path 2
305 : Loader
- 490 -

1 Kind +0 2 +0 1 +0 16 +0 1
2 datanum +2 4 +1 2 +16 32 +1 1
3 record +6 2 +3 1 +48 16 +2 1
4 dimension +8 2 +4 1 +64 16 +3 1
5 maxindex +10 2 +5 1 +80 16 +4 1
1
6 maxindex +12 2 +6 1 +96 16 +5 1
2
7 maxindex +14 2 +7 1 +112 16 +6 1
3

1 index1 +0 2 +0 1 +0 16 +0 1
2 index2 +2 2 +1 1 +16 16 +1 1
3 index3 +4 2 +2 1 +32 16 +2 1
- Update notification data (kind3, datanum3)

data
data Update notification data

1 Data +0 N +0 M +0 8*N +0 1
* When update notification data is of byte type: N=1, M=1
* When update notification data is of word type: N=2, M=1
* When update notification data is of long type: N=4, M=2
[Description]
Writes the state of a bit in a specified write pattern to a specified bit position from the variable data
of the array record specified by array information and array index information.
[Example]
Bit 3 of the record data, data3, of array[0][1][2] in the three-dimensional array record, array[3][4][5],
consisting of the following record data is set to ON and the result of processing is written to D200:
- 491 -

idxwrvalb[109_1000_109_1100_4_3_109_1200_-12_99_1_9_200]
Update notification data is stored starting at number 1200 in the D area of the PMC.
103 The specified number of dimensions to be used is incorrect.
107 The specified output data is incorrect.
3.5 Copying array-type record variable data
[Function]
idxmvval
[Data type]
None
idxmvval[kind1_datanum1_kind2_datanum2_kind3_datanum3_
kind4_datanum4_kind5_datanum5_pmc_address]
[Arguments]
kind1 Data type and data category at a copy condition information storage destination
1nn : PMC data
100 : G / %QG
101 : F / %IF
102 : Y / %Q
103 : X / %I
104 : A / %MA
105 : R / %M
106 : T / Unusable
107 : K / %MK
108 : C / Unusable
109 : D / %R
- 492 -
112 : E / %ME
200 : Current path
201 : Path 1
202 : Path 2
205 : Loader
300 : Current path
301 : Path 1
302 : Path 2
305 : Loader
datanum1 Start data number at a copy condition information storage destination
kind2 Copy destinationData type and data category at an array information storage destination
1nn : PMC data
100 : G / %QG
101 : F / %IF
102 : Y / %Q
103 : X / %I
104 : A / %MA
105 : R / %M
106 : T / Unusable
107 : K / %MK
108 : C / Unusable
109 : D / %R
112 : E / %ME
200 : Current path
201 : Path 1
202 : Path 2
205 : Loader
300 : Current path
301 : Path 1
302 : Path 2
305 : Loader
datanum2 Copy destination
Start data number at an array information storage destination
kind3 Copy destinationData type and data category at an array index information storage
destination
1nn : PMC data
- 493 -

100 : G / %QG
101 : F / %IF
102 : Y / %Q
103 : X / %I
104 : A / %MA
105 : R / %M
106 : T / Unusable
107 : K / %MK
108 : C / Unusable
109 : D / %R
112 : E / %ME
200 : Current path
201 : Path 1
202 : Path 2
205 : Loader
300 : Current path
301 : Path 1
302 : Path 2
305 : Loader
datanum3 Copy destination
Start data number at an array index information storage destination
kind4 Copy source
Data type and data category at an array information storage destination
1nn : PMC data
100 : G / %QG
101 : F / %IF
102 : Y / %Q
103 : X / %I
104 : A / %MA
105 : R / %M
106 : T / Unusable
107 : K / %MK
108 : C / Unusable
109 : D / %R
112 : E / %ME
200 : Current path
201 : Path 1
202 : Path 2
205 : Loader
- 494 -
300 : Current path
301 : Path 1
302 : Path 2
305 : Loader
datanum4 Copy source
Start data number at an array information storage destination
kind5 Copy source
Data type and data category at an array index information storage destination
1nn : PMC data
100 : G / %QG
101 : F / %IF
102 : Y / %Q
103 : X / %I
104 : A / %MA
105 : R / %M
106 : T / Unusable
107 : K / %MK
108 : C / Unusable
109 : D / %R
112 : E / %ME
200 : Current path
201 : Path 1
202 : Path 2
205 : Loader
300 : Current path
301 : Path 1
302 : Path 2
305 : Loader
datanum5 Start data number at a copy source array index information storage destination
5 :R
9 :D
specified address)

- Copy condition information (kind1, datanum1)
(1) When copy condition data 2 is constant data
- 495 -
data1kind_data1num_checktype_data2
(2) When copy condition data 2 is constant data (character string)
data1kind_data1num_checktype_data2len_data2
(3) When copy condition data 2 is variable data
data1kind_data1num_checktype_data2kind_data2num
data1kind Data type and data category at a copy condition data 1 storage destination
1nn : PMC data
100 : G / %QG
101 : F / %IF
102 : Y / %Q
103 : X / %I
104 : A / %MA
105 : R / %M
106 : T / Unusable
107 : K / %MK
108 : C / Unusable
109 : D / %R
112 : E / %ME
200 : Current path
201 : Path 1
202 : Path 2
205 : Loader
300 : Current path
301 : Path 1
302 : Path 2
305 : Loader
data1num Start data number at a copy condition data 1 storage destination
data1When kind specifies PMC data, specify a PMC address number.
data1When kind specifies macro variable, specify a macro variable number.
data1When kind specifies P code variable, specify a P code variable number.
checktype Copy condition judgment type
-100 : Copy processing is performed at all times.
-200 : Copy processing is not performed at any time.
-3nm : Copy processing is performed when copy condition data 1 = copy condition data 2
In n, specify the data attribute of copy condition data 2.
0 : Constant data
1 : Variable data
In m, specify the data type of copy condition data 1 or 2.
0,1 : Byte type
2,3 : Word type
4,5 : Long type
-4nm : Copy processing is performed when copy condition data 1 ≠ copy condition data 2.
-5nm : Copy processing is performed when copy condition data 1 > copy condition data 2.
-6nm : Copy processing is performed when copy condition data 1 < copy condition data 2.
-7nm : Copy processing is performed when copy condition data 1 ≥ copy condition data 2.
-8nm : Copy processing is performed when copy condition data 1 ≤ copy condition data 2.
0 : Copy processing is performed when the bit is set to OFF.
1 : Copy processing is performed when the bit is set to ON.
- 496 -
data2 Copy condition data 2
When copy condition data 2 is constant data, specify copy condition data 2 according to
the data type specified by checktype.
data2len Data length of copy condition data 2 (1 to 255)
When copy condition data 2 is constant data (character string), specify the character string
length of copy condition data 2 to be stored in data2.
data2kind Data type and data category at a copy condition data 2 storage destination
When copy condition data 2 is variable data, specify the character string length of copy
condition data 2.
1nn : PMC data
100 : G / %QG
101 : F / %IF
102 : Y / %Q
103 : X / %I
104 : A / %MA
105 : R / %M
106 : T / Unusable
107 : K / %MK
108 : C / Unusable
109 : D / %R
112 : E / %ME
200 : Current path
201 : Path 1
202 : Path 2
205 : Loader
300 : Current path
301 : Path 1
302 : Path 2
305 : Loader
data2num Start data number at a copy condition data 2 storage destination
data2 When kind specifies PMC data, specify a PMC address number.
data2 When kind specifies macro variable, specify a macro variable number.
data2 When kind specifies P code variable, specify a P code variable number.
- 497 -
(1)When copy condition data 2 is constant data

Size Size Size Size Size Size Size Size
1 Data1kind +0 2 +0 1 +0 16 +0 1
2 Data1num +2 4 +1 2 +16 32 +1 1
3 checktype +6 2 +3 1 +48 16 +2 1
4 Data2 +8 N +4 M +64 8*N +3 1
* When copy condition data is of byte type: N=1, M=1
* When copy condition data is of word type: N=2, M=1
* When copy condition data is of long type: N=4, M=2
(2)When copy condition data 2 is constant data (character string)

Indirect argument Indirect argument storage location
PMC data PMC data(PMC-SD7)
(other than PMC-SD7) %R Other than %R
Offset Size Offset Size Offset Size
1 data1kind +0 2 +0 1 +0 16
2 data1num +2 4 +1 2 +16 32
3 checktype +6 2 +3 1 +48 16
4 data2len +8 1 +4 1 +64 8
5 data2 +9 256 +5 128 +72 2048
(3)When copy condition data 2 is variable data

1 Data1kind +0 2 +0 1 +0 16 +0 1
2 Data1num +2 4 +1 2 +16 32 +1 1
3 checktype +6 2 +3 1 +48 16 +2 1
4 Data2kind +8 2 +4 1 +64 16 +3 1
5 Data2num +10 4 +5 2 +80 32 +4 1
- Array information (kind2, datanum2), (kind4, datanum4)

1nn : PMC data
100 : G / %QG
101 : F / %IF
102 : Y / %Q
103 : X / %I
104 : A / %MA
105 : R / %M
106 : T / Unusable
107 : K / %MK
108 : C / Unusable
109 : D / %R
112 : E / %ME
200 : Current path
- 498 -
201 : Path 1
202 : Path 2
205 : Loader
300 : Current path
301 : Path 1
302 : Path 2
305 : Loader

1 Kind +0 2 +0 1 +0 16 +0 1
2 datanum +2 4 +1 2 +16 32 +1 1
3 record +6 2 +3 1 +48 16 +2 1
4 dimension +8 2 +4 1 +64 16 +3 1
5 maxindex +10 2 +5 1 +80 16 +4 1
1
6 maxindex +12 2 +6 1 +96 16 +5 1
2
7 maxindex +14 2 +7 1 +112 16 +6 1
3
- Array index information (kind3,datanum3), (kind5,datanum5)

dataoffs_datasize_index1_index2_index3
dataoffs Copy start offset in the record
datasize Copy data size
- 499 -

1 dataoffs +0 2 +0 1 +0 16 +0 1
2 datasize +2 2 +1 1 +16 16 +1 1
3 index1 +4 2 +2 1 +32 16 +2 1
4 index2 +6 2 +3 1 +48 16 +3 1
5 index3 +8 2 +4 1 +64 16 +4 1
[Description]
Copies the record data of the array record specified by copy source array information and copy
source array index information to the record data of the array record specified by copy destination
array information and copy destination array index information.
[Example 1]
The record data, data3, of array1[0][1][2] in the three-dimensional array records, array1[3][4][5] and
array2[3][4][5], consisting of the following record data is copied to the record data, data1, in
array2[1][1][1] and the result of processing is written to D200:
Array1[3][4][5] and array2[3][4][5] record format (10 bytes)
idxmvval[109_1000_109_1100_109_1200_109_1300_109_1400_9_200]
Copy condition information is stored starting at number 1000 in the D area of the PMC.
Copy destination array information is stored starting at number 1100 in the D area of the PMC area.
Copy destination array index information is stored starting at number 1200 in the D area of the
PMC.
Copy destination array record data is stored starting at number 2500 in the D area of the PMC.
Copy source array information is stored starting at number 1300 in the D area of the PMC area.
Copy source array index information is stored starting at number 1400 in the D area of the PMC.
Copy source array record data is stored starting at number 2000 in the D area of the PMC.
D1000, 1001 = 109
D1002 to 1005 = 210
D1006, 1007 = -302
D1008, 1009 = 125
D1100, 1101 = 109
D1102 to 1105 = 2500
D1106, 1107 = 10
D1108, 1109 = 3
D1110, 1111 = 5
D1112, 1113 = 4
D1114, 1115 = 3
D1200, 1201 = 0
D1202, 1203 = 2
D1204, 1205 = 2
D1206, 1207 =2
D1208, 1209 = 2
D1300, 1301 = 109
D1302 to 1305 = 2000
D1306, 1307 = 10
D1308, 1309 = 3
- 500 -
D1310, 1311 = 5
D1312, 1313 = 4
D1314, 1315 = 3
D1400, 1401 = 4
D1402, 1403 = 2
D1404, 1405 = 3
D1406, 1407 = 2
D1408, 1409 = 1
[Example 2]
The record data, data3, of array1[0][1][2] in the three-dimensional array records, array1[3][4][5] and
array2[3][4][5], consisting of the following record data is copied to the record data, data1, in
array2[1][1][1] and the result of processing is written to D200:
Array1[3][4][5] and array2[3][4][5] record data (5 items)
idxwrval[200_100_200_110_200_120_200_130_200_140_9_200]
Copy destination array information is stored starting at number 110 in the D area of the PMC.
Copy destination array index information is stored starting at number 120 in the D area of the PMC.
Copy source array information is stored starting at number 130 in the D area of the PMC.
#100 = 200
#101 = 109
#102 = -307
#103 = 125
#110 = 200
#111 = 600
#112 = 5
#113 = 3
#114 = 5
#115 = 4
#116 = 3
#120 = 0
#121 = 1
#122 = 2
#123 = 2
#124 = 2
#130 = 200
#131 = 500
#132 = 5
#133 = 3
#134 = 5
#135 = 4
#136 = 3
#140 = 2
#141 = 1
#142 = 3
#143 = 2
#144 = 1
idxwrval[300_10000_300_10010_300_10020_300_10030_300_10040_9_200]
- 501 -
Copy destination array information is stored starting at number 10010 in the D area of the PMC.
Copy destination array index information is stored starting at 10020 in the D area of the PMC.
Copy source array information is stored starting at number 10030 in the D area of the PMC.
#10000 = 300
#10001 = 10009
#10002 = -307
#10003 = 125
#10010 = 300
#10011 = 11500
#10012 = 5
#10013 = 3
#10014 = 5
#10015 = 4
#10016 = 3
#10020 = 0
#10021 = 1
#10022 =2
#10023 = 2
#10024 = 2
#10030 = 300
#10031 = 11000
#10032 = 5
#10033 = 3
#10034 = 5
#10035 = 4
#10036 = 3
#10040 = 2
#10041 = 1
#10042 = 3
#10043 = 2
#10044 = 1
108 The specified copy condition judgment type is incorrect.
109 The copy condition is not satisfied.
3.6 Writing an array index number
[Function]
idxwridx
[Data type]
3 : 2 bytes
idxwridx[kind1_datanum1_kind2_datanum2_writetype_index1_ index2_index3_pmc_address]
- 502 -
[Arguments]
1nn : PMC data
100 : G / %QG
101 : F / %IF
102 : Y / %Q
103 : X / %I
104 : A / %MA
105 : R / %M
106 : T / Unusable
107 : K / %MK
108 : C / Unusable
112 : E / %ME
200 : Current path
201 : Path 1
202 : Path 2
205 : Loader
300 : Current path
301 : Path 1
302 : Path 2
305 : Loader
1nn : PMC data
100 : G / %QG
101 : F / %IF
102 : Y / %Q
103 : X / %I
104 : A / %MA
105 : R / %M
106 : T / Unusable
107 : K / %MK
108 : C / Unusable
109 : D / %R
112 : E / %ME
200 : Current path
201 : Path 1
202 : Path 2
205 : Loader
- 503 -
300 : Current path

301 : Path 1
302 : Path 2
305 : Loader
writetype Array index number write type
1: Write data is written over an array index number.
If an array index number less than 1 is set, 1 is used as the array index number.
If an array index number greater than the maximum number of array elements is set, the
maximum number of array elements is used as the array index number.
2: Write data is added to an array index number.
If an array index number less than 1 is set, 1 is used as the array index number.
If an array index number greater than the maximum number of array elements is set, the
maximum number of array elements is used as the array index number.
3: Write data is added to an array index number.
If an array index number less than 1 is set, the maximum number of array elements is used
as the array index number.
If an array index number greater than the maximum number of array elements, 1 is used as
the array index number.
index1 Value of writing to an array index number (one-dimensional)
Specify 0 when no array index number modification is made.
index2 Value of writing to an array index number (two-dimensional)
Specify 0 when the number of dimensions used is 1.
index3 Value of writing to an array index number (three-dimensional)
Specify 0 when the number of dimensions used is 1 or 2.
In case that the writing type is 2 or 3, the array index can be subtracted by specifying a
minus value in index 1,2,3.
5 :R
9 :D
specified address)
1nn : PMC data
100 : G / %QG
101 : F / %IF
102 : Y / %Q
103 : X / %I
104 : A / %MA
105 : R / %M
106 : T / Unusable
107 : K / %MK
- 504 -
108 : C / Unusable
109 : D / %R
112 : E / %ME
200 : Current path
201 : Path 1
202 : Path 2
205 : Loader
300 : Current path
301 : Path 1
302 : Path 2
305 : Loader

PMC-SD7)
1 Kind +0 2 +0 1 +0 16 +0 1
2 datanum +2 4 +1 2 +16 32 +1 1
3 record +6 2 +3 1 +48 16 +2 1
4 dimension +8 2 +4 1 +64 16 +3 1
5 maxindex1 +10 2 +5 1 +80 16 +4 1
6 maxindex2 +12 2 +6 1 +96 16 +5 1
7 maxindex3 +14 2 +7 1 +112 16 +6 1
- Array index information (kind2, datanum2)

- 505 -

1 Index1 +0 2 +0 1 +0 16 +0 1
2 Index2 +2 2 +1 1 +16 16 +1 1
3 Index3 +4 2 +2 1 +32 16 +2 1
[Description]
Changes the array index number to a one for referencing the array record specified by array
information.
[Example]
The array index information of the three-dimensional array record, array[3][4][5], is changed to that
of the location of array [0][1][2] and the result of processing is written to D200:
idxwridx[109_1000_109_1100_1_3_2_1_9_200]
⇒D1100 = 3(update) (Reference record one-dimensional array index : [2])
D1102 = 2(update) (Reference record two-dimensional array index : [1])
D1104 = 1(update) (Reference record three-dimensional array index : [0])
idxwridx[200_100_200_110_1_3_2_1_9_200]
⇒#100 = 200
#101 = 100
#102 = 5
#103 = 3
#104 = 5
#105 = 4
#106 = 3
⇒#110 = 3(update)
#111 = 2(update)
#112 = 1(update)
idxwridx[300_10000_300_10010_1_3_2_1_9_200]
⇒#10000 = 300
#10001 = 11000
#10002 = 5
#10003 = 3
#10004 = 5
#10005 = 4
- 506 -
#10006 = 3
⇒#10010 = 3(update)
#10011 = 2(update)
#10012 = 1(update)
110 The specified array index number write type is incorrect.
3.7 Read array type record variable arbitrary bit data
The arbitrary bit data length (in the array record that is added second index of fix value and array
specification index) is written the record in the array structure built in the PMC area.
In addition, it can make a return value arithmetic operation value, a bit operation value including the
logical operation, a arithmetic relation value with the numerical value, etc for the data of the read bit
length.
Caution: When PMC type is SD7, don't specify the arbitrary bit data for array record because %R area is
not BOOL type data. If it is specified, operation is not guaranteed.
[Function name]
idxrdvalbr2
[Data type]
5:4 bytes
idxrdvalbr2[kind1_datanum1_kind2_datanum2_indx2_offset_pos_len_data_type
_offset2_pos2_pmc_address]
[Arguments]
kind1 Data type and data category at an array information storage destination.
1nn:PMC data
100 : G / %QG
101 : F / %IF
102 : Y / %Q
103 : X / %I
104 : A / %MA
105 : R / %M
106 : T / Unusable
107 : K / %MK
108 : C / Unusable
109 : D / %R
112 : E / %ME
2pp:Macro variable
200: current path
- 507 -
3pp:P code variable

300: current path
kind2 Data type and data category at an array index number storage destination
1nn:PMC data
100 : G / %QG
101 : F / %IF
102 : Y / %Q
103 : X / %I
104 : A / %MA
105 : R / %M
106 : T / Unusable
107 : K / %MK
108 : C / Unusable
109 : D / %R
112 : E / %ME
2pp:Macro variable
200: current path
3pp:P code variable
300: current path
datanum2 Start data number at an array index number storage destination
indx2 Second index value
"Fixed array reference offset value that starts from one" is added an array specification
index number value, and specify it. The specification of 0 is considered to be 1. When
several records are displayed in the screen, this is used.
(The value of the array index that specifies the record array specified with kind2 and
datanum2 is assumed to be the start index of the screen display.)
offset(P1)_ pos(P2)_ len(P3)
"Offset value(P1)_bit position(P2)_bit length(P3)" that shows the arbitrary bit data
position operated is specified. Simultaneously it becomes writing the arbitrary bit data
previously.
Offset value:
The offset value in which the position in the record of the operation source data is shown
is specified.
The first position of the record is assumed to be 0.
Bit position:
- 508 -
is specified.
Bit length:
Bit length of arbitrary bit data (0 to 32)
When bit length is 0, it ends normally as return value 0 without reading.
data(P5) When the processing division is 1-20, specify the source data operated (direct value).
0, 100: Simple reading (rdpmc/rdpmcb)
1, 101: Unsigned addition reading
2, 102: Unsigned subtraction reading
3, 103: Unsigned multiplication reading
4, 104: Unsigned division reading
5, 105: Unsigned surplus reading
13, 113: Shift up
14, 114: Shift down
15, 115: P1-P3 = P5orP7-P8, TRUE:1, FALSE:0
16, 116: P1-P3 ≠ P5orP7-P8, TRUE:1, FALSE:0
17, 117: P1-P3 < P5orP7-P8, TRUE:1, FALSE:0
18, 118: P1-P3 ≥ P5orP7-P8, TRUE:1, FALSE:0
19, 119: P1-P3 > P5orP7-P8, TRUE:1, FALSE:0
20, 120: P1-P3 ≤ P5orP7-P8, TRUE:1, FALSE:0
* P1-P3 :offset, pos, len (Data operated in record)
P7-P8 :offset2, pos2, len (Operation source data in record)
* Please store the value, arithmetic operation value, the logical operation value, the number
of shifts, the comparison values (101-120) in the area where be indicated with offset2,
pos2, and len.
* For the arithmetic comparison (15-20,115-120), the value is compared as unsigned.
offset2(P7)_pos2(P8)
Specify "Offset value _ bit position" that shows the source data. When the processing
division is 0-20 or 100, specify 0_0.
Offset value:
is specified.
Bit position:
The number of byte from byte position of the offset value to operation source data start bit
position is specified. (From 0 to maximum value of specified area)
5 :R / %M
9 :D / %R
12: E / %ME (PMC-SB7, etc)
specified address)
- 509 -
- Array information (kind1, address1)
kind Data kind and data division of storage area of the record in the array structure in the PMC
area
Only R/D/E in the PMC area can be specified for the arbitrary bit data.
1nn:PMC data
105 :R / %M
109 :D / Unusable
112:E / %ME
Specify PMC address number.
PMC-SD7)
1 Kind +0 2 +0 1 +0 16 +0 1
2 Datanum +2 4 +1 2 +16 32 +1 1
3 Record +6 2 +3 1 +48 16 +2 1
4 Dimension +8 2 +4 1 +64 16 +3 1
5 maxindex +10 2 +5 1 +80 16 +4 1
1
6 maxindex +12 2 +6 1 +96 16 +5 1
2
7 maxindex +14 2 +7 1 +112 16 +6 1
3

PMC-SD7)
1 index1 +0 2 +0 1 +0 16 +0 1
2 index2 +2 2 +1 1 +16 16 +1 1
3 index3 +4 2 +2 1 +32 16 +2 1
- 510 -
[Example]
The operation source data in the same record is added to the arbitrariness bit data that is in 2nd
record from records specified by the array index. Processing result is not notified.
* As for the specifications and the data about the array information on D1200 and the array index
information on R3300, refer to the description of the functions from the section 3.1 to 3.5.
idxrdvalbr2[109_1200_105_3300_2_3_13_9_0_106_10_5_99_0]

130 The specified first bit position number is incorrect.
131 The specified data bit length is incorrect.
132 The specified processing division is incorrect.
133 The specified number of bit shift is incorrect.
134 The specified the data to be operated is incorrect.
135 The specified operation source data is incorrect.
3.8 Write array type record variable arbitrary bit data
The arbitrary bit data length (in the array record that is added second index of fix value and array
specification index) is written the record in the array structure built in the PMC area.
The arithmetic operation value or the logical operation value, are written between the arbitrary bit
positions to specification and continuous the bit length for the reading bit length data.
Caution: When PMC type is SD7, don't specify the arbitrary bit data for array record because %R
area is not BOOL type data. If it is specified, operation is not guaranteed.
[Function name]
idxwrvalbr2
[Data type]
5:4 bytes
idxwrvalbr2[kind1_datanum1_kind2_datanum2_indx2_offsetpos_len_data
_type_offset2_pos2_pmc_address]
- 511 -
[Arguments]
kind1 Data type and data category at an array information storage destination.
1nn:PMC data
100 : G / %QG
101 : F / %IF
102 : Y / %Q
103 : X / %I
104 : A / %MA
105 : R / %M
106 : T / Unusable
107 : K / %MK
108 : C / Unusable
109 : D / %R
112 : E / %ME
2pp:Macro variable
200: current path
3pp:P code variable
300: current path
1nn:PMC data
100 : G / %QG
101 : F / %IF
102 : Y / %Q
103 : X / %I
104 : A / %MA
105 : R / %M
106 : T / Unusable
107 : K / %MK
108 : C / Unusable
109 : D / %R
112 : E / %ME
2pp:Macro variable
200: current path
- 512 -
3pp:P code variable
300: current path
indx2 Second index value
"Fixed array reference offset value that starts from one" is added an array specification
index number value, and specify it. The specification of 0 is considered to be 1. When
several records are displayed in the screen, this is used.
(The value of the array index that specifies the record array specified with kind2 and
datanum2 is assumed to be the start index of the screen display.)
offset(P1)_ pos(P2)_ len(P3)
"Offset value_bit position_bit length" that shows the arbitrary bit data position operated is
specified. Simultaneously it becomes writing the arbitrary bit data previously.
Offset value:
is specified.
Bit position:
Bit length:
Bit length of arbitrary bit data (0 to 32)
When bit length is 0, it ends normally as return value 0 without reading.
data(P5) When the processing division is 1-20, specify the source data operated (direct value).
0, 100: Simple writing (wrpmc/wrpmcb)
1, 101: Unsigned addition writing
2, 102: Unsigned subtraction writing
3, 103: Unsigned multiplication writing
4, 104: Unsigned division writing
5 105: Unsigned surplus writing
13, 113: Shift up
14, 114: Shift down
* The processing division of 15-20 or 115-120 can be specified because it has the
compatibility of the argument with the idxrdvalbr2 function, but it ends normally without
writing.
* P1-P3 :offset, pos, len (Data operated in record)
P7-P8 :offset2, pos2, len (Operation source data in record)
- 513 -
* Please store the value, arithmetic operation value, the logical operation value, the number
of shifts, the comparison values (101-120) in the area where be indicated with offset2,
pos2, and len.
* For the arithmetic comparison (15-20,115-120), the value is compared as unsigned.
offset2(P7)_pos2(P8)
Specify "Offset value _ bit position" that shows the source data. When the processing
division is 0-20 or 100, specify 0_0.
Offset value:
is specified.
Bit position:
5 :R
9 :D
specified address)

- Array information (kind1, address1)
kind Data kind and data division of storage area of the record in the array structure in the PMC
area
Only R/D/E in the PMC area can be specified for the arbitrary bit data.
1nn:PMC data
105 :R / %M
109 :D / Unusable
112:E / %ME
Specify PMC address number.

argument PMC data (other PMC data(PMC-SD7) Macro variable
than PMC-SD7) %R Other than %R P code variable
1 Kind +0 2 +0 1 +0 16 +0 1
2 Datanum +2 4 +1 2 +16 32 +1 1
3 Record +6 2 +3 1 +48 16 +2 1
4 Dimension +8 2 +4 1 +64 16 +3 1
5 maxindex1 +10 2 +5 1 +80 16 +4 1
6 maxindex2 +12 2 +6 1 +96 16 +5 1
7 maxindex3 +14 2 +7 1 +112 16 +6 1
- 514 -

PMC-SD7)
1 index1 +0 2 +0 1 +0 16 +0 1
2 index2 +2 2 +1 1 +16 16 +1 1
3 index3 +4 2 +2 1 +32 16 +2 1
[Example]
The operation source data in the same record is added to the arbitrariness bit data that is in 7th record
from records specified by the array index. Processing result is not notified.
* As for the specifications and the data about the array information on D1200 and the array index
information on R3300, refer to the description of the functions from the section 3.1 to 3.5.
idxwrvalbr2[109_1200_105_3300_7_3_11_12_0_101_8_3_99_0]
130 The specified first bit position number is incorrect.
131 The specified data bit length is incorrect.
132 The specified processing division is incorrect.
133 The specified number of bit shift is incorrect.
134 The specified the data to be operated is incorrect.
135 The specified operation source data is incorrect.
- 515 -
3.1.5 Function Reference of FP Script

【Function List】
4.1 setdecimal Set the decimal point in control
4.2 setmaxlimit Set the maximum value in control
4.3 setminlimit Set the minimum value in control
4.4 getmacval Read macro variable
4.5 setmacval Write macro variable
4.6 errno Get error code
4.7 seterrno Set error code
4.8 isnan Test NaN
4.9 acos Calculate arccosine value
4.10 asin Calculate arcsine value
4.11 atan Calculate arctangent value
4.12 atan2 Calculate arctangent value(type 2)
4.13 ceil Calculate ceiling of value
4.14 cos Calculate cosine value
4.15 cosh Calculate hyperbolic cosine value
4.16 exp Calculate exponential value
4.17 fabs Calculate absolute value
4.18 floor Calculate floor of value
4.19 fmod Calculate floating-point remainder value
4.20 frexp_mantissa Get mantissa of floating-point value
4.21 frexp_exponent Get exponent of floating-point value
4.22 ldexp Calculate real value from mantissa and exponent
4.23 log Calculate natural logarithm value
4.24 log10 Calculate common logarithm value
4.25 modf_integer Get integer part of floating-point value
4.26 modf_decimal Get fractional part of floating-point value
4.27 pow Calculate raised value
4.28 sin Calculate sine value
4.29 sinh Calculate hyperbolic sine value
4.30 sqrt Calculate square root value
4.31 tan Calculate tangent value
4.32 tanh Calculate hyperbolic tangent value
4.33 set_handler Execute the FP script periodically for every specified interval time
4.34 remove_handler Release the setting of the FP script number by set_handler
4.35 settenkeypos Changing the display position of the pop-up ten-key pad
NOTE
The function of 4.6-4.32 can be used from Edition 03.2.
The function of 4.33-4.34 can be used from Edition 03.5.
The function of 4.35 can be used from Edition 03.7.
- 516 -
4.1 Set the decimal point in control
[Available CNC]
i-A
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
[Function name]
setdecimal
[Data type]
--------
setdecimal[dec]
[Argument]
dec Decimal point
[Description]
The value specified for dec is set to the decimal point of the control.
In this case, the setting of "Use Decimal Point" of the control is invalid.
Moreover, this function is FP function that can be used only in the FP script.
The setting by this function is effective for only in the following controls.
- Numeral/Character String Indication Control
- Numeral Indication Control with Key Input
- Numeral Indication Control for Calling a Ten-Key Pad
[Example]
(1) To set the number of decimal positions in the control to 3 (example:0.000)
setdecimal[3];
(2) To change the number of decimal positions of the control according to the value of PMC
BVAL[0] = rdpmcb[5_1000_0]; // Gets R1000.0
if( BVAL[0] == 0 ){ // Changes the number of decimal positions according to the value
setdecimal[3];
}
else{
setdecimal[4];
}
4.2 Set the maximum value in control
[Available CNC]
i-A
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
[Function name]
setmaxlimit
[Data type]
--------
setmaxlimit[max]
[Arguments]
max Maximum value
[Description]
The value specified for max is set to the maximum value of the control.
In this case, the setting of "Max. Value" of the control is invalid.
- 517 -
[Example]
(1) To set the maximum value which can be input of control to 100.
setmaxlimit[100];
(2) To change the maximum value according to the value of PMC.
if( BVAL[0] == 0 ){ // Changes the maximum value according to the value.
setmaxlimit[100];
}
else{
setmaxlimit[1000];
}
4.3 Set the minimum value in control
[Available CNC]
i-A
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
[Function name]
setminlimit
[Data type]
--------
setminlimit[min]
[Arguments]
min mum value
[Description]
The value specified for min is set to the minimum value of the control.
In this case, the setting of "Min. Value" of the control is invalid.
[Example]
(1) To set the minimum value which can be input of control to 0.
setminlimit[0];
(2) To change the minimum value according to the value of PMC.
if( BVAL[0] == 0 ){ // Changes the maximum value according to the value.
setminlimit[0];
}
else{
setminlimit[(-10)];
}
- 518 -
4.4 Read macro variable
[Available CNC]
i-A
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
[Function name]
getmacval
[Data type]
Floating-point type
getmacval[num]
[Arguments]
num Macro variable number
[Description]
Reads a value of a custom macro variable or a P code macro variable specified by the argument
num.
Moreover, this function can be used in the FP script only.
[Example]
In case of converting units of values #501 and #520 from inch to mm, you can get plural macro
variables by one script like as follows:
FP script number109:
DISP_VAL = getmacval[ARG[0]] * 25.4;
Setting property of FP function in control:

FP_Script[109_501] // read value #[501] at mm unit
FP_Script[109_520] // read value #[520] at mm unit
4.5 Write macro variable
[Available CNC]
i-A
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
[Function name]
setmacval
[Data type]
--------
setmacval[num_value]
[Arguments]
num macro variable number
value value to be write
[Description]
Writes a value of the argument value to a custom macro variable or a P code macro variable
specified by the argument num.
[Example]
In case of writing values as mm unit to converted macro variables as inch unit, you can write plural
macro variables by one script like as follows:
- 519 -
FP script number110:
DVAL[0]= INPUT_DVAL / 25.4;
setmacval[ARG[0]_DVAL[0]];
Setting property of FP function in control:
FP_Script[110_501] // write value at inch unit
FP_Script[110_520] // write value at inch unit
4.6 Get error code
[Available CNC]
i-A
- ○ - - - - - ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
[Function name]
errno
[Data type]
4-byte singed integral type
errno[]
[Arguments]
--------
[Description]
Gets the error code of the lastest arithmetic operation.
One of the following error codes can be got.
- EDOM The argument of the arithmetic operation was out of range.
- ERANGE The result of the arithmetic operation was overflowed.
[Return]
Error code
4.7 Set error code
[Available CNC]
i-A
- ○ - - - - - ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
[Function name]
seterrno
[Data type]
--------
seterrno[x]
[Arguments]
x Value to be set
[Description]
Sets the error code by the value of x.
[Return]
--------
4.8 Test NaN
[Available CNC]
- 520 -
i-A
- ○ - - - - - ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
[Function name]
isnan
[Data type]
isnan[x]
[Arguments]
x Value to be tested
[Description]
Tests if the value of x is NaN.
[Return]
Value that indicates NaN (0 means not NaN)
4.9 Calculate arccosine value
[Available CNC]
i-A
- ○ - - - - - ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
[Function name]
acos
[Data type]
Floating-point type
acos[x]
[Arguments]
x Value whose arccosine is to be calculated
[Description]
Calculates the arccosine value of x.
The range of x is between -1 and 1, if a number is out of this range, this function returns undefined
value.
Then, when the errno function is executed, EDOM is returned.

[Return]
Angle (Unit:Radian)
4.10 Calculate arcsine value
[Available CNC]
i-A
- ○ - - - - - ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
[Function name]
asin
[Data type]
Floating-point type
- 521 -
asin[x]
[Arguments]
x Value whose arcsine is to be calculated
[Description]
Calculates the arcsine value of x.
The range of x is between -1 and 1. If a number is out of this range, this function returns an
undefined value.
[Return]
Angle (Unit:Radian)
4.11 Calculate arctangent value
[Available CNC]
i-A
- ○ - - - - - ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
[Function name]
atan
[Data type]
Floating-point type
atan[x]
[Arguments]
x Value whose arctangent is to be calculated
[Description]
Calculates the arctangent value of x.
The result is between -π/2 andπ/2 radian.
[Return]
Angle (Unit:Radian)
4.12 Calculate arctangent value(type 2)
[Available CNC]
i-A
- ○ - - - - - ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
[Function name]
atan2
[Data type]
Floating-point type
atan2[y_x]
[Arguments]
y Numerator value whose arctangent is to be calculated
x Denominator value whose arctangent is to be calculated
[Description]
Calculates the arctangent of x/y.
The result is between -π/2 and π/2 radian, and if x and y is 0, this function returns 0.
- 522 -
[Return]
Angle (Unit:Radian)
4.13 Calculate ceiling of value
[Available CNC]
i-A
- ○ - - - - - ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
[Function name]
ceil
[Data type]
Floating-point type
ceil[x]
[Arguments]
x Floating-point value
[Description]
Calculates the smallest integer value that is greater than or equal to x.
[Return]
Value whose fractions is raised
4.14 Calculate cosine value
[Available CNC]
i-A
- ○ - - - - - ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
[Function name]
cos
[Data type]
Floating-point type
cos[x]
[Arguments]
x Angle (Unit:Radian)
[Description]
Calculates the cosine value of x.
[Return]
Cosine value
4.15 Calculate hyperbolic cosine value
[Available CNC]
i-A
- ○ - - - - - ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
[Function name]
- 523 -
cosh
[Data type]
Floating-point type
cos[x]
[Arguments]
[Description]
Calculates the hyperbolic cosine value of x.
If the result is too large, this function returns HUGE_VAL.
Then, when the errno function is executed, ERANGE is returned.
[Return]
Hyperbolic cosine value
4.16 Calculate exponential value
[Available CNC]
i-A
- ○ - - - - - ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
[Function name]
exp
[Data type]
Floating-point type
exp[x]
[Arguments]
[Description]
Calculates the exponential value of x.
The result is e (base-e logarithm) raised to x.
If the result is too large, this function returns HUGE_VAL.
If the result is too small, returns 0.
[Return]
Exponential value
4.17 Calculate absolute value
[Available CNC]
i-A
- ○ - - - - - ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
[Function name]
fabs
[Data type]
Floating-point type
fabs[x]
[Arguments]
- 524 -
[Description]
Calculates the absolute value of x.
[Return]
Absolute value
4.18 Calculate floor of value
[Available CNC]
i-A
- ○ - - - - - ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
[Function name]
floor
[Data type]
Floating-point type
floor[x]
[Arguments]
[Description]
Calculates the largest integer value that is less than or equal to x.
[Return]
Largest integer value
4.19 Calculate floating-point remainder value
[Available CNC]
i-A
- ○ - - - - - ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
[Function name]
fmod
[Data type]
Floating-point type
fmod[x_y]
[Arguments]
y Floating-point value
[Description]
Calculates the remainder of x and y.
If y is 0, this function returns a NaN.
[Return]
Remainder of x and y
4.20 Get mantissa of floating-point value
- 525 -
[Available CNC]
i-A
- ○ - - - - - ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
[Function name]
frexp_mantissa
[Data type]
Floating-point type
frexp_mantissa[x]
[Arguments]
[Description]
Gets the mantissa value of x.
[Return]
Mantissa value
4.21 Get exponent of floating-point value
[Available CNC]
i-A
- ○ - - - - - ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
[Function name]
frexp_exponent
[Data type]
frexp_exponent[x]
[Arguments]
[Description]
Gets the exponent value of x.
[Return]
Exponent value
4.22 Calculate real value from mantissa and exponent
[Available CNC]
i-A
- ○ - - - - - ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
[Function name]
ldexp
[Data type]
Floating-point type
ldexp[x_exp]
[Arguments]
- 526 -
exp Exponent value
[Description]
Calculates the value of x*(2^exp).
When the overflow occurs or the value of exp is too large, this function returns +/–HUGE_VAL.
[Return]
Real value
4.23 Calculate natural logarithm value
[Available CNC]
i-A
- ○ - - - - - ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
[Function name]
log
[Data type]
Floating-point type
log[x]
[Arguments]
x Value whose logarithm is to be found
[Description]
Calculates the natural logarithm value of x.
If x is 0, this function returns -HUGE_VAL.
If x is negative, this function returns an undefined value.
[Return]
Natural logarithm value
4.24 Calculate common logarithm value
[Available CNC]
i-A
- ○ - - - - - ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
[Function name]
log10
[Data type]
Floating-point type
log10[x]
[Arguments]
x Value whose logarithm is to be found
[Description]
Calculates the common logarithm value of x.
If x is 0, this function returns -HUGE_VAL.
- 527 -
If x is negative, this function returns an undefined value.

[Return]
Common logarithm value
4.25 Get integer part of floating-point value
[Available CNC]
i-A
- ○ - - - - - ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
[Function name]
modf_integer
[Data type]
Floating-point type
modf_integer[x]
[Arguments]
[Description]
Calculates the integer part of x.
[Return]
Integer part of x
4.26 Get fractional part of floating-point value
[Available CNC]
i-A
- ○ - - - - - ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
[Function name]
modf_decimal
[Data type]
Floating-point type
modf_decimal[x]
[Arguments]
[Description]
Calculates the fractional part of x.
[Return]
Fractional part of x
4.27 Calculate raised value
[Available CNC]
i-A
- ○ - - - - - ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
- 528 -
[Function name]
pow
[Data type]
Floating-point type
pow[x_y]
[Arguments]
x Floating-point value to be raised
y Exponent value
[Description]
Calculates x raised to the power of y.
If x is 0 and y is negative, this function returns HUGE_VAL.
If x is negative and y is not an integer, this function returns an undefined value.
If the result is too large, this function returns +/-HUGE_VAL.
[Return]
Value of x raised to the power of y
4.28 Calculate sine value
[Available CNC]
i-A
- ○ - - - - - ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
[Function name]
sin
[Data type]
Floating-point type
sin[x]
[Arguments]
[Description]
Calculates the sine value of x.
[Return]
Sine value
4.29 Calculate hyperbolic sine value
[Available CNC]
i-A
- ○ - - - - - ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
[Function name]
sinh
[Data type]
Floating-point type
- 529 -
sinh[x]
[Arguments]
[Description]
Calculates the hyperbolic sine value of x.
If the result is too large, this function returns +/-HUGE_VAL.
[Return]
Hyperbolic sine value
4.30 Calculate square root value
[Available CNC]
i-A
- ○ - - - - - ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
[Function name]
sqrt
[Data type]
Floating-point type
sqrt[x]
[Arguments]
[Description]
Calculates the square root value of x.
If x is negative, this function returns an indefinite value.
[Return]
Square root value
4.31 Calculate tangent value
[Available CNC]
i-A
- ○ - - - - - ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
[Function name]
tan
[Data type]
Floating-point type
tan[x]
[Arguments]
[Description]
Calculates the tangent value of x.
[Return]
- 530 -
Tangent value
4.32 Calculate hyperbolic tangent value
[Available CNC]
i-A
- ○ - - - - - ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
[Function name]
tanh
[Data type]
Floating-point type
tanh[x]
[Arguments]
[Description]
Calculates the hyperbolic tangent value of x.
[Return]
Hyperbolic tangent value
4.33 Execute the FP script periodically for every specified interval time
[Available CNC]
i-A
- ○ - - - - - ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
[Function name]
set_handler
[Data type]
4:4 bytes (signed)
set_handler[sno_type_arg1_arg2_arg3]
[Arguments]
sno FP script number (from 900 to 999)
1:FP script sno is executed repeatedly at every interval time specified in arg1.
arg1:Time (from 1 to 3600000 milliseconds)
arg2:0 (Not used)
arg3:0 (Not used)
2: FP script sno is executed once after passing the time specified in arg1.
arg1:Time (from 1 to 3600000 milliseconds)
arg2:0 (Not used)
arg3:0 (Not used)
3: FP script sno is executed at opening or closing the screen specified in arg1.
arg1:Screen number (-1 is for all screens) (NOTE1)
arg2:0 is at opening, 1 is at closing screen.
arg3:0 (Not used)
4: FP script sno is executed when the input focus is moved to a control whose identification
number (NOTE2) within arg2 to arg3 on the screen specified in arg1.
arg1: Screen number (-1 is specified for all screens)
- 531 -
arg2: Start identification number (-1 is specified for all controls)

arg3: End identification number (-1 is specified for all controls)
5: FP script sno is executed when an error is detected in the FP script driven by the timer in the
FP driver.
arg1:0 (Not used)
arg2:0 (Not used)
arg3:0 (Not used)
NOTE1) See Subsection 2.2.10.5, "Automatic screen call function based on the PMC signals".
NOTE2) See "Data Change Report Function" in Subsection 2.3.3, "Screen Structure Definition
Control".
[Description]
This function sets a FP script number specified with sno to be executed in the condition specified
with type.
[Return]
0 : Success
1 : The same setting has already existed.
2 : The number of FP scripts to be set is over the limitation (100 pieces).
3 : The FP script number specified in the argument sno is not found.
4 : The argument type is out of range.
5 : The argument arg1 is out of range.
8 : The startup FP script had not executed.
4.34 Release the setting of the FP script number by set_handler
[Available CNC]
i-A
- ○ - - - - - ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
[Function name]
remove_handler
[Data type]
4:4 bytes (signed)
remove_handler[sno_type_arg1_arg2_arg3]
[Arguments]
sno FP script number (from 900 to 999)
type and arg1 to 3 must be set the same values as settings by the set_handler function.
[Description]
The function removes the FP script number sno that has set by the set_handler function.
[Return]
0 : Success
1 : The FP script number specified in the argument sno is not found.
4.35 Changing the display position of the pop-up ten-key pad
[Available CNC]
i-A
- ○ - - - - - ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
- 532 -
[Function name]
settenkeypos
[Data type]
None
settenkeypos[X_Y]
[Arguments]
X X coordinate in the display position
By specifying a negative value, the ten-key pad will be shown at the center in the X
direction of the screen.
By specifying more than "Width of screen - Width of ten-key pad", it will be shown at the
right side of the screen.
Y Y coordinate in the display position
By specifying a negative value, the ten-key pad will be shown at the center in the Y
direction of the screen.
By specifying more than "Height of screen - Height of ten-key pad", it will be shown at the
bottom of the screen.
[Description]
This function can be used in the FP script only.
Once the display position is set in a control by this function, the positions in all controls are changed.
But the display position of the ten-key type "Tenkey2" cannot be changed.
When you make the position return to the center of the screen as default, call settenkeypos[(-1)_(-1)]
intentionally.
[Return]
None
- 533 -
4.EMBEDDING OF C APPLICATIONS B-66284EN/07
4 EMBEDDING OF C APPLICATIONS
This chapter describes how to use FANUC PICTURE together with customer-created application
software that uses the C executor.
Chapter 4, “EMBEDDING OF C APPLICATIONS” consists of the following sections.
4.1 SOFTWARE REQUIRED FOR C APPLICATION DEVELOPMENT ..........................................534

4.2 CREATION OF APPLICATIONS USING TASKS ........................................................................535
4.3 DRAM AND SRAM.........................................................................................................................538
4.4 NOTES AND RESTRICTIONS .......................................................................................................539
4.5 Series 0i-D, Series 30i/31i/32i/35i and Power Motion i-A ...............................................................540
4.1 SOFTWARE REQUIRED FOR C APPLICATION

DEVELOPMENT
The following software programs are required to use FANUC PICTURE together with the C executor.
They must be prepared by the machine tool builder.
(1) C executor
C application development requires the C executor library suitable to the CNC model used, as well
as the C executor option on the target CNC.
(2) C compiler
(The following is an excerpt from the C executor manual.)
- For Series 16i/18i/21i, Power Mate i
Microsoft C compiler (MS-C) Ver. 6, Ver. 7, or Ver. 8 (either Japanese or English version).
MS-C (Microsoft Visual C/C++) of versions other than Ver. 6/Ver. 7/Ver. 8 cannot be used
C compiler (WATCOM C) Ver. 10.5 or Ver. 11.0 of Sybase (Japanese version or English
version).
MS-C (Microsoft Visual C/C++) of versions other than Ver. 6/Ver. 7/Ver. 8 and WATCOM C
of versions other than Ver. 10.5/Ver. 11.0 cannot be used.
Use the WindRiver Diab C/C++ Power-PC compiler.
(3) Linker. (The following is an excerpt from the C executor manual.)

Systems&Software Link&Locate PM or Link&Locate 386. (Link&Locate PM and
Link&Locate 386 refer to the same product.) The linker xlink386 and the librarian xlib386
contained in Link&Locate PM/386 are used. The versions of the xlink386 that can be used
(confirmed to operate properly) are as follows:
xlink386 Ver.2.0, 2.2a, 2.5a
Note that xlink386 Ver.1.6 and Ver.1.6b cannot be used to develop C executor applications. It
has been confirmed that Ver.2.1 may not be capable of establishing links normally.
Use the linker attached to the WindRiver Diab C/C++ Power-PC compiler.
- 534 -
B-66284EN/07 4.EMBEDDING OF C APPLICATIONS
(4) Personal computer DOS environment
(The following is an excerpt from the C executor manual.)
C executor applications can be developed on MS-DOS (or PC-DOS or IBM-DOS). The DOS
prompt of Windows can also be used.
DPMI is required to run MS-C Ver.7. The linker xlink386 requires VCPI or DPMI.
VCPI: Virtual Control Program Interface
DPMI: DOS Protected Mode Interface
Both are interface specifications required for DOS application to gain access to expanded
memory. Therefore, the memory manager used on DOS must support either VCPI or DPMI. Be
sure to use either of the following memory managers. (Enclosed in parentheses are the
interfaces supported by each memory manager.)
PC-9800 series PCs
Memory Server (VCPI, DPMI) of I-O DATA DEVICE
Melware (VCPI) of Melco
IBM PCs or compatibles
EMM386.EXE supplied with DOS(VCPI) of Microsoft or IBM
QEMM386 (VCPI, DPMI) of Quarterdeck Office Systems
386MAX (VCPI, DPMI) of Qualitas
Both PC-9800 series PCs and IBM PCs or compatibles
DOS prompt of Windows 2000/XP
If using MS-C Ver.7, prepare an environment supporting DPMI; if MS-C Ver.6 or MS-C Ver.8,
prepare an environment supporting VCPI or DPMI.
For descriptions of the WATCOM C development environment and so forth, refer to the
relevant manual of the C language executor.
(5) Reference
The development environment of the FANUC PICTURE library is as follows:
Microsoft C compiler Ver.7.00
Link&Locate PM/386(xlink386) Ver.2.0b
4.2 CREATION OF APPLICATIONS USING TASKS

(1) Main task
The main function exists in the FANUC PICTURE library.
The outline of the FANUC PICTURE library is as follows.
Initialization
Screen display
Action monitor
Screen switch check

(Switching)
Error check
(Error)
End
From within the FANUC PICTURE library, predetermined functions are called at the following locations.
Patterns (UserFunc.c) of the following functions are supplied so that the machine tool builder can make
the necessary modifications to them for use.
- 535 -
Location in which to call Function name

Application of the power (initialization) void User_Pon_Func(void)
Start of screen display (always before screen display) void User_Dsp_Func(void)
End of screen display (always after screen switching) void User_Clr_Func(void)
All-time call (during action monitoring) void User_All_Func(void)
From those controls that can call FANUC PICTURE functions, functions created by the machine tool
builder must be specified in properties.
A specified function is called with char* as an argument(Note 1) during FANUC PICTURE library action
monitoring by registering its function name(User_Pon_Func) when the power is turned on, using the
following function. The argument must be analyzed in each function created by the machine tool builder
that has been called.
long SetUserFunc(char *funcname, void (*funcadrs)())

char *funcname : Function name (of up to 30 characters, the first four characters of which is fixed
to “usr_”.)
void (*funcadrs)() : Function pointer
Return value : 0 Normal termination
-1 Not enough space to register the function name (memory allocation failure)
-2 Invalid function name
(not beginning with “usr_”)
-3 Too long function name
(exceeding 30 characters)
NOTE
1 Pointer to the argument character string specified with a function call control.
If user_Func[123_456] is specified with a function call control, a pointer to the
character string “123_456” is passed as an argument and, therefore, create a
function with “usr_Func(char*)”.
Notes:
• The function name must always start with the four characters “usr_”.
• The number of function name characters including "usr_" must not exceed 30.
• The number of function argument characters between "[" and "]" must not exceed 40.
• No blanks can be used to specify an argument with a function call control.
• An argument must always be enclosed in “[“ and “]”.
• For a read function in a ten-key pad call control, create the function as one that returns the data value
that has been read.
Example: Function to return a custom macro variable value
long usr_rmacro(char *param)
{
int ret;
struct odbpm buf;
int num;
// Analysis of param
// For example,
// decide the common variable number (num)
ret = cnc_rdmacro(num, 10, buf);
if (ret != 0) {
// Error handling
}
return buf.mcr_val;
}
- 536 -
• For a write function in a ten-key pad call control, the function is called with the unsigned long
argument added to the write function argument specified with ten-key pad call control.
Example 1
Calling a user function with only a write data argument
Create a user function with usr_wmacro(unsigned long data).
Specify usr_wmacro[] as the write function specification in the ten-key pad control.
The function is called with usr_wmacro (data) from the ten-key call control. (data is the input value
from the ten-key pad.)
void usr_wmacro(unsigned long data)

{
int ret;
ret = cnc_wrmacro(100, 10, data, 3);
if (ret != 0) {
// Error handling
}
}
Example 2
If an argument other than write data is required in a user function
Create a user function with usr_wmacro(char *param, unsigned long data).
Specify usr_wmacro[param] as the write function specification in the ten-key pad call control.
The function is called with usr\wmacro(param,data) from the ten-key pad call control.
(data is the input value from the ten-key pad.)
void usr_wmacro(char *param, unsigned long data)

{
int ret;
int dec;
int num
// Analysis of param
// For example, decide the common variable number (num)
and number of decimal places (dec).
ret = cnc_wrmacro(num, 10, data, dec);
if (ret != 0) {
// Error handling
}
}
(2) Communication task, alarm task, window task, and high-level task
The main function of each task must be created by the machine tool builder.
From the main function created by the machine tool builder, the functions necessary to run the FANUC
PICTURE library must be called.
- 537 -
Currently, the functions necessary to run FANUC PICTURE are as follows.

Task name Function name Remarks
Communication task -
Optimum period 128ms
void Fanuc_Alarm_Task_Init(void) The Fanuc_Alarm_Task_Script
Alarm task void Fanuc_Alarm_Task_Main(void) function is available only for
void Fanuc_Alarm_Task_Script(void) Series 30i/31i/32i/35i, Power
Motion i-A, Series 0i-D.
Window task -
High-level task -
Currently, those tasks for which no function names are listed do not require any functions to run the
FANUC PICTURE library. Tasks that require functions may be added in the future due to upgrades.
A pattern (Back1.c) of the alarm task main function is supplied so that the machine tool builder can make
the necessary modifications to it for use.
NOTE
1 A pattern of the communication task main function (Back2.c) is supplied to
develop C executor applications.
2 If the time required to process the above tasks increases, the execution speed of
the touch panel screen of the main task will be affected severely. the alarm task
must be designed to be processed in a short time so that the main task can use
as much time as possible.
(3) Linking the FANUC PICTURE library

The following two types of FANUC PICTURE library must be prepared by the machine tool builder.
A pattern (Makefile) of the make file is supplied so that the machine tool builder can make the necessary
modifications to it for use.
The files that must be linked may be changed due to upgrades. In this case, the make file pattern is
changed. The changes must be reflected in the make file created by the machine tool builder.
For MS-C development

FPTASK1.LNK Library for the main task
FPTASK3.LNK Library for the alarm task
WATCOM C development
FPTASK1W.LNK Library for the main task
FPTASK3W.LNK Library for the alarm task
4.3 DRAM AND SRAM

The machine tool builder must prepare DRAM and SRAM in accordance with the specifications of the C
executor. The FANUC PICTURE library requires these RAM areas to run and, therefore, the machine
tool builder must add the necessary RAM definitions to the supplied patterns (Dramver.c and Sramver.c).
The size that the FANUC PICTURE library requires may increase due to upgrades. In this case, the
patterns are changed. The changes must be reflected in the source files created by the machine tool
builder.
- 538 -
4.4 NOTES AND RESTRICTIONS

The following items may be added due to upgrades:
• The operating environment of FANUC PICTURE runs with the following settings:
Settings of the method of switching between CNC and user screens (crt_setswt)
⋅ CNC software cannot recognize the function keys on the MDI panel.
⋅ Whether to automatically switch to an alarm screen of the NC if an alarm occurs while a CNC
screen is displayed is determined with the user screen.
⋅ Switching from a user screen to a CNC screen is prohibited.
Setting of CRT display mode (crt_setmode)
⋅ VGA display 80-column-by-30-row mode.
⋅ Reduced display is accomplished using a 14-inch font with 9-inch VGA.
Setting of video mode (_setvideomode)
⋅ Size 640 × 480, palette of 256 colors (PC-AT)
Setting of all palettes (_remapallpalette)
⋅ The palette created with FANUC PICTURE (MEM generation), which is a tool on the PC, is
set.
The environment described above must not be changed in the functions created by the machine tool
builder. Otherwise, the FANUC PICTURE library will not run normally.
The following color number acquisition function is supplied for graphic processing purposes:
short GetPaletteNumber(short nBlue, short nGreen, short nRed)
short nBlue : Value of B of an RGB color
short nGreen : Value of G of an RGB color
short nRed: Value of R of an RGB color
Return value : Color number
• In the timer driven operation function of the FP script, the semaphore ID 255 is used. Don’t use the
this ID 255 and the timer driven operation function at the same time.
• The semaphore ID 254 is used in the FP function for the tool management data. Do not use the
semaphore ID in an application program.
• The following functions are controlled by FANUC PICTURE. Do not use them in the functions
created by the machine tool builder.
crt_setuserscrn Registers the screen number of a user screen.
crt_setuserskey Customizes the soft keys on a CNC screen.
crt_cncscrn Switches to a CNC screen.
• Function key input is monitored by the action monitor portion shown in the figure in (1) in Section
4.2. When controlling function key input using a function created by the machine tool builder, use
great caution not to affect the operation of the FANUC PICTURE library.
• As the version of the C executor application displayed on the NC, a pattern containing the version of
FANUC PICTURE (Version.c) is supplied. Subsequent management must be performed by the
machine tool builder.
• In the FANUC PICTURE library, graphic pages 0, 1, and 2 are used with a “crt_setgraphpage(-2)”
declaration. Do not use the graphic pages in the functions created by the machine tool builder.
• If the user uses Version.c, the user can obtain the version information for the FANUC PICTURE
driver, using the following function:
char* GetDrvVertion()
Returns a pointer to the version character string of the FANUC PICTURE driver.
• When the library for WATCOM C is used, JPEG image display is disabled.
- 539 -
4.5 Series 0i-D, Series 30i/31i/32i/35i and Power Motion i-A
4.5.1 Outline
FANUC PICTURE is a software application for C language executors. Therefore, a user-created

application for C language executors (referred to below as a user application) and FANUC PICTURE
cannot be used at the same time on one CNC unit without alteration.
By converting FANUC PICTURE into a library (referred to below as the FP library) and then combining
it with a user application to execute two C language executor applications as one application (referred to
below as a combined application), a user application and FANUC PICTURE can be used together.
This subsection describes how to develop a combined application for Series 30i/31i/32i/35i, Power
Motion i-A, Series 0i-D.
4.5.2 Content of Files

[FPLink0] (for Series 0i-D)
[FPLink30] (for Series 30i/31i/32i/35i)
[FPLinkPMiA] (for Power Motion i-A)
MAKE.BAT Compilation, Link, Batch file for MEM file generation.
[FPLink0\FPLib] (for Series 0i-D)

[FPLink30\FPLib] (for Series 30i/31i/32i/35i)
[FPLinkPMiA\FPLib] (for Power Motion i-A)
FANUC PICTURE file related to library
FPMAINLIB.A FP library 1 for the main task
FPJPEGLIB.A FP library 2 for the main task
FPSUBLIB.A FP library for the alarm task
FPDRAM.C Defined file of DRAM variables used by FANUC PICTURE
DRAMVER.H Declared file of DRAM variables used by FANUC PICTURE
FPSRAM.C Defined file of SRAM variables used by FANUC PICTURE
SRAMVER.H Declared file of SRAM variables used by FANUC PICTURE
CMNSTRCT.H Defined file of the symbols used by FANUC PICTURE
DEFCONST.H Defined file of the symbols used by FANUC PICTURE
VARTYPE.H Defined file of the symbols used by FANUC PICTURE
CEXE_DEF.H Definition file of symbol used with FANUC PICTURE
CMMNTOOL.H Definition file of symbol used with FANUC PICTURE
FS30ICEX.H Definition file of symbol used with FANUC PICTURE
FS30IDEF.H Definition file of symbol used with FANUC PICTURE
[FPLink0\UserSample] (for Series 0i-D)

[FPLink30\UserSample] (for Series 30i/31i/32i/35i)
[FPLinkPMiA\UserSample] (for Power Motion i-A)
Sample application of C language executor
CEXE.MAK Make file for making the combination application
VERSION.C Defined file of the series and version of the uniting application
USERFUNC.C Source file of the user functions
USERFUNC.H Source file of the user functions
BACK1.C Source file of main function for the alarm task
BACK2.C Source file of main function for the communication task
TASK4.C Source file of the main function for window task
TASK5.C Source file of the main function for high-level task
DRAMVER.C Defined file of DRAM variables used by the user application
- 540 -
SRAMVER.C Defined file of SRAM variables used by the user application
USERMAIN.C Source file of the user functions
[FPLink0\FPSample] (for Series 0i-D)

[FPLink30\FPSample] (for Series 30i/31i/32i/35i)
[FPLinkPMiA\FPSample] (for Power Motion i-A)
Sample application of FANUC PICTURE
FPSample.fpp Project file of sample FP screen
Others Project data of sample FP screen
- 541 -
4.5.3 Preparation for Development Environment

First, install the C language executor development environment. For the procedure, refer to the manual of
the C language executor.
Copy the FPLib folder of the FP library and the UserSample folder of the C language executor samples to
the C language executor development folder (same level as LIB, INC, and TOOL).
4.5.4 Interface between FANUC PICTURE and C Language

Executor
Create a dummy parent screen for FANUC PICTURE and call a user function for user screen display to
allow coexistence of a user-created screen display application and FANUC PICTURE.
(1) Calling a user function for user screen display from the FANUC PICTURE screen
Create a dummy screen and paste the parent screen control and value/character display control.
Make the settings of the value/character display control as follows:
[Action] tab
Action Type: “1:function”
Function Name: “usr_Dispxxxx[param]”
param: Argument character string of function
(Maximum 40 characters, the blank cannot be used.)
Display Check Box: No check
[Image] tab
Style: “10:No Figure”
(2) User function for user screen display

(a) User function name
The first eight characters of the name of a user function for user screen display must be
"usr_Disp" to separate it from the other user functions.
Example) usr_DispSample()
(b) Return value of user function

As the return value of the user function, specify the screen to which the previous screen is
switched.
For the CNC screen, specify either the CNC screen number or the key code of the screen
switching MDI key. When specifying the MDI key, add a value of 0x10000000 to the return
value.
For the FANUC PICTURE screen, add a value of 0x20000000 to the screen number.
Example1) To make switching to the system diagnosis screen
return ( CRT_SYS_DGN);
Example2) To make the same screen switching as if MDI key [POS] were pressed
return (0x10000000 | MDIKEY_POS);
Example3) To make switching to FANUC PICTURE screen 3
return (0x20000000 | 3);
- 542 -
(c) Processing structure of user function
A user function for user screen display must have a structure in which a loop is always made
within the function while the screen is displayed and the function is terminated with a return
value indicating the switching destination screen number when the user screen is cleared.
usr_DispSample()
↓
Initialization of display
↓
Update of display
↓
Screen change demand? No
↓ Yes
Termination of display
↓
RETURN/ The screen number switched after the return is returned.
(d) Library function which cannot be used by user function

The following functions cannot be used in a user function for user screen display.
crt_setswt()
crt_setuserscrn()
crt_setuserskey()
crt_cncscrn()
(3) Registration of user function

Registration of a user function for user screen display is added to the User_Pon_Func() function of
USERFUNC.C. The SetUserFunc() function is used to register a user function.
## Example> Registration of user function”usr_DispSample()” #############################

<< USERFUNC.C >>
void User_Pon_Func(void)
{
long ret;
ret = SetUserFunc(“usr_DispSample”, usr_DispSample);
switch (ret) {
case UFUNCERR_ALOC:
// Error processing
break;
case UFUNCERR_NAME:
// Error processing
break;
default:
break;
}
return;
}
####################################################################
Function specification of SetUserFunc()

[Function]
Registers a user function.
[Format]
long SetUserFunc(char *funcname, void (*funcadrs)())
- 543 -
[Arguments]
funcname Registered user function name
A function name must begin with "usr_" and be 30 characters or less.
Funcadrs Pointer of registered user function
[Return value]
0 normal return
-1 The result failed in the reservation of the registered area.
-2 The user function name is not correct.
-3 The user function name exceeds 30 characters.
[Attention]
The first eight characters of a user function for user screen display must be "usr_Disp".
When a user function with a name other than "usr_DispXXX" is registered, screen switching or
other processing is not correctly performed because the function is treated as a normal user function.
4.5.5 Making of Screen Data of FANUC PICTURE

(1) Making of project
Newly creates a project for FANUC PICTURE.
For the creation procedure, refer to the manual of FANUC PICTURE.
(2) Making of parent(=base) screen of dummy

Newly creates a dummy parent screen and pastes the parent screen control.
The screen name is entered with the property of the parent screen control.
(3) Putting of Numeral/Character String Indication Control

Pastes the value/character display control on a dummy parent screen.
On the property action definition tab, the setting for calling a user function for user screen display is
made.
(4) Setting for making MEM file

Selects MEM file generation in the FANUC PICTURE menu.
CNC screen assignment to the user screen is made as shown below.
[Setting user screen]

Softkey Number: CNC screen number to which the user screen is assigned
Key Caption: Display character string of software key to user(=custom) screen
Select flag: Check on
[FP Parameter]
Rule of the screen Switch Set to “0”
The NC screen switch rule is followed.
(5) Making of MEM file

Upon completion of the above settings, select OK to perform MEM generation.
- 544 -
4.5.6 Making of Combining Application Program
4.5.6.1 Combining of the main task

(1) Create a user function for user screen display.
(2) Add registration of the user function to USERFUNC.C.
(3) Add the source files configuring TASK1.

In CEXE.MAK in the UserSample folder, the FP libraries
(USERFUNC.O, ..\FPLIB\FPJPEGLIB.A, ..\FPLIB\FPMAINLIB.A) are defined as TASK1.
Example)
Addition of USERMAIN.O USERSCRN.O
TASK1=USERFUNC.O ..\FPLIB\FPJPEGLIB.A ..\FPLIB\FPMAINLIB.A\USERMAIN.O
USERSCRN.O
4.5.6.2 Combining of alarm task

Add processing of the alarm task for user applications to BACK1.C.
In CEXE.MAK in the UserSample folder, the FP library (FPSUBLIB.O) is added to TASK3.
TASK3 = BACK1.O ..\FPLIB\FPSUBLIB.A
(1) User_Alarm_Task_Init() function

Add the initialization of the alarm task of the user application program.
(2) User_Alarm_Task_Main() function

Add the processing of the alarm task of the user application program.
The longer the processing time of the alarm task is, the lower the display speed of the main task and the
response of key input become. Therefore, it is necessary to allocate as much CPU time as possible to the
main task during design.
Even when the alarm task is not used by a user application, be sure to specify "BACK1.OBJ" for
"TASK3=" of MAKEFILE.
4.5.6.3 Combining of communication task

Add processing of the communication task for a user application to BACK2.C.
The longer the processing time of the communication task is, the lower the display speed of the main task
and the response of key input become. Therefore, it is necessary to allocate as much CPU time as possible
to the main task during design.
Even when the communication task is not used by a user application, be sure to specify "BACK2.OBJ"
for "TASK2=" of MAKEFILE.
4.5.6.4 Combining of window task

Add processing of the window tasks for a user application to TASK4.C.
Since the window task is not used by FANUC PICTURE, it is possible to design it freely.
When the window task is not used, do not specify an object for "TASK4=" of MAKEFILE.
- 545 -
4.5.6.5 Combining of high-level task (Series 30i/31i/32i/35i, Power

Motion i-A)
Add processing of the high level task for a user application to TASK5.C.
Since the high level task is not used by FANUC PICTURE, it is possible to design it freely.
When the high level task is not used, do not specify an object for "TASK5=" of MAKEFILE.
4.5.6.6 Combining of common variable (DRAM variable and SRAM

variable)
(1) Combining of DRAM variable
Add the definitions of DRAM variables for a user application to DRAMVER.C.
Before using DRAMVER.C, copy it from the TEMPLATE folder to the working folder.
(2) Combining of SRAM variable

Add the SRAM variable definition for a user application to SRAMVER.C.
Before using SRAMVER.C, copy it from the TEMPLATE folder to the working folder.
4.5.6.7 Making of memory card form file (*.MEM)

Edit the CEXE.MAK file according to the configuration of a combined application, open the Windows
command prompt, and execute MAKE.BAT.
Defined in MAKE.BAT are the FP libraries and the object names (FPMAINLIB.A, USERFUNC.O,
BACK1.O, BACK2.O, , etc) of the individual tasks, which are already described above.
By performing MAKE with the MAKEFILE, the memory card form file of the combined application is
created.
## Example) MAKEFILE for combining application program making ##############
#-----------------------------------------------------------------------
# Task definition block. Modify here for your application.
#-----------------------------------------------------------------------
TASK1=USERFUNC.O USERMAIN.O ..\FPLIB\FPJPEGLIB.A ..\FPLIB\FPMAINLIB.A

TASK2 = BACK2.O
TASK3 = BACK1.O ..\FPLIB\FPSUBLIB.A
TASK4 = TASK4.O
TASK5 = TASK5.O
# Select one of the following FROMSIZE variables according to F-ROM size.

# Remove the leading comment mark (#) of the selected FROMSIZE variable.
#FROMSIZE = 0_5M # MEMORY CARD 0.5MB

FROMSIZE = 2_0M # MEMORY CARD 2.0MB
#######################################################################
- 546 -
B-66284EN/07 5.MEMORY SIZES OF CONTROLS AND RESTRICTIONS
5 MEMORY SIZES OF CONTROLS AND

RESTRICTIONS
This chapter describes the memory sizes that the various controls provided by FANUC PICTURE
consume on the CNC, as well as restrictions and notes.
Chapter 5, “MEMORY SIZES OF CONTROLS AND RESTRICTIONS” consists of the following

sections.
5.1 MEMORY SIZES OF CONTROLS .................................................................................................547

5.2 RESTRICTIONS,CAUTIONS .........................................................................................................550
5.3 DIFFERENCES FROM FANUC PICTURE OF OLD VERSION ..................................................552
5.1 MEMORY SIZES OF CONTROLS

Amounts of memory used by the controls on screens created with FANUC PICTURE
Amount of memory
Use of basic memory, control name Remarks
used
FP driver 1800Kbyte
Temporary work area/maximum per popup screen * 310Kbyte
Temporary work area/JPG display, maximum * 620Kbyte
Temporary work area/BMP display, maximum * 310Kbyte
PMC screen call (if 50 screens are registered) 0.7Kbyte
1byte × (total number
Popup screen/occupied area per dot *
of dots on the screen)
Screen switching/lighting and blinking not used 2.2Kbyte TFPChgScrn
Screen switching/lighting and blinking not used and interlock image 4.0Kbyte TFPChgScrn
Screen switching/lighting and blinking used 6.4Kbyte TFPChgScrn
Screen switching/lighting and blinking used and interlock image 7.7Kbyte TFPChgScrn
Screen switching/lighting and blinking used and no action&interlock
9.5Kbyte TFPChgScrn
image
Button 2.2Kbyte FPButton
Button and interlock image 4.0Kbyte FPButton
Button and no action&interlock image 5.8Kbyte FPButton
Framed button/momentary (with no lamp) * 2.2Kbyte TFPOpBtn
Framed button/momentary (with no lamp) and interlock image * 4.0Kbyte TFPOpBtn
Framed button/momentary (with lamp + with blinking) * 2.9Kbyte TFPOpBtn
Framed button/momentary (with lamp + with blinking) and interlock
3.2Kbyte TFPOpBtn
image *
Framed button/momentary (with lamp + without blinking) * 2.1Kbyte TFPOpBtn
Framed button/momentary (with lamp + without blinking) *
2.5Kbyte TFPOpBtn
/ and interlock image
Framed button/alternate (with blinking) * 2.6Kbyte TFPOpBtn
Framed button/alternate (with blinking) and interlock image * 3.0Kbyte TFPOpBtn
Framed button/alternate (without blinking) * 1.0Kbyte TFPOpBtn
Framed button/alternate (without blinking) and interlock image * 1.4Kbyte TFPOpBtn
Framed button/actuator (with blinking) * 2.9Kbyte TFPOpBtn
Framed button/actuator (with blinking) and interlock image * 3.2Kbyte TFPOpBtn
Framed button/actuator (without blinking) * 2.1Kbyte TFPOpBtn
Framed button/actuator (without blinking) and interlock image * 2.5Kbyte TFPOpBtn
Framed button/actuator (with blinking) and no action&interlock image * 4.0Kbyte TFPOpBtn
- 547 -
5.MEMORY SIZES OF CONTROLS AND RESTRICTIONS B-66284EN/07
Amount of memory
Use of basic memory, control name Remarks
used
Clock 0.4Kbyte FPClock
Graph/scale 0.9Kbyte FPGraph
Graph/bar graph 0.05Kbyte FPGraph
Image display 0.04Kbyte FPImage
Lamp/1 on color 2.7Kbyte FPLamp
Lamp/7 on colors + blinking 2.7Kbyte FPLamp
Lamp/7 on colors + blinking and no action image 5.0Kbyte FPLamp
Meter/bar meter (if the number of divisions is 10) 0.9Kbyte FPMeter
Meter/sector meter (if the number of divisions is 10) 1.1Kbyte FPMeter
Label 0.9Kbyte FPLabel
Numeral/character string display (with no background color changes) 1.0Kbyte FPNDisp
Numeral/character string display (7 background colors) 2.0Kbyte FPNDisp
Numeral indication control for calling a ten-key pad (with no background
1.9Kbyte TFPInput
color changes)
Numeral indication control for calling a ten-key pad (with no background
3.3Kbyte TFPInput
color changes) and check function
Numeral indication control for calling a ten-key pad (7 background
3.3Kbyte TFPInput
colors)
Numeral indication control for calling a ten-key pad (7 background
3.3Kbyte TFPInput
colors) and check function
Numeral indication control with key input 1.9Kbyte FPInput
Numeral indication control with key input and check function 3.3Kbyte FPInput
Key input buffer 1.0Kbyte FPKyInBf
MDI key 2.9Kbyte FPKey
PMC area character string indication/if half-size 40 characters are FPPMCStrDis
2.9Kbyte
specified p
2.9Kbyte + maximum
FPPMCStrDis
PMC area character string display (with a popup screen) *2, * number of characters
p
×2
MDI keyboard/numeral keyboard 26.4Kbyte FPKeybord
MDI keyboard/command keyboard 26.4Kbyte FPKeybord
MDI keyboard/alphabetic keyboard 30.7Kbyte FPKeybord
Text character string display (1-phrase display, display width of 70
1.3Kbyte FPTxtMsg
characters)
Composite message indication (1 line, display width of 70 characters) 7.8Kbyte FPTxtMsgLst
Composite message indication (32 lines, display width of 70 characters) 13.7Kbyte FPTxtMsgLst
Composite message display (telop) 9.2Kbyte FPTxtMsgLst
History message indication control * 3.6Kbyte FPHistory
Line chart/real-time display, trigger display 1.8Kbyte FPLineChart
*7
/(10 divisions, one display data item)
Line chart/real-time display, trigger display 2.3Kbyte FPLineChart
*7
/(10 divisions, 8 display items)
Message Indication Control 2.02Kbyte FPMsg
Screen Switch Control with image 1.44Kbyte FPImgChgScr
Button Control with image 1.44KByte FPImgButton
Drawing of Graphic Characters 0..03KByte FPChar
* 1 K byte is equal to 1024 bytes.
*1 Of the three work areas, the largest one must be reserved.

*2 Method of calculating the amount of memory used by the maximum number of characters.
Maximum number of characters of the display character string = Maximum number of characters in
one line × Maximum number of lines
- 548 -
Maximum number of characters in one line = (Rectangle width - X coordinate of the character string
start position)/Character type width
Maximum number of lines = (Rectangle height - Y coordinate of the character string start
position)/character type height
The size of each character type is given in the table below.
Character type Soft keys (10+2) Soft keys (5+2)

Width Height Width Height
ANK 8 16 16 25
X2 16 16 32 25
X4 16 32 16 32
X6 24 32 48 50
SMALL 8 8 8 12
*3 The amount of memory used by the components created in the popup screen is not included.
*4 The button shape is “23:Rectangle with lamp” is specified.
*5 Added on Edition4.00 or later. Because of this, an S-RAM space of about 15 Kbytes is constantly
used as a history record area.
*6 The maximum rectangular size × 1 byte is required for the display screen on the second layer of the
pop-up screen.
*7 A memory space of 80 bytes is used for each line chart display data item.
Method to estimate the amount of all used memory:

The amount of all used memory is the sum of the FP driver, the largest temporary work area, the
popup screen display area (dot/byte), and the memory size of the control × total number that is
placed on all screens. And in case of Series 0i-D, Series 30i/31i/32i/35i, Power Motion i-A, because
the screen data in F-ROM is loaded into D-RAM when the power is turned on, add the size of the
F-ROM data (FPF0FPDT.MEM) to the amount of memory. It must not exceed the custom software
capacity.
In case of touch panel B option (Series 0i-C, Series 16i/18i/21i), the custom software capacity is 2
MBytes. In case of others (touch panel C option etc.), it is up to 6M bytes.
Amount of F-ROM space used by a screen created with FANUC PICTURE

The maximum amount of F-ROM space that can be used is the same as the main custom software
capacity. If it is 6M bytes, subtracting 2 MBytes for use by FP driver, 4 Mbytes will be the maximum
available capacity for screen data (CEX0FPDT.MEM or FPF0FPDT.MEM).
- 549 -
5.2 RESTRICTIONS,CAUTIONS
Restriction or note Remarks
Tests of connecting the touch panel operator’s panel to the CNC/PMC
must be conducted after storing FP driver software and screen data to
CNC.
Real-time screen operation is not guaranteed. So, do not provide
operations (such as an emergency stop, start, stop, and movement on
axes) that need to be performed on a real-time basis, on the operator's
panel screen.
An unpredictable operation results when multiple touch panel positions
are pressed simultaneously.
Input and output signals to and from a control can be specified in the
property setting items such as X, Y, F, and G. In reality, there are some
that cannot be written from the touch panel operator’s panel because of
signal characteristics. Thus, select a proper signal area considering
these characteristics.
If controls whose color or shape change due to the on/off states of
signals, as well as numeral/character string indication controls, overlap
with each other, the overlapping section will be painted by the display
changes. Remove any overlapping of competing controls.
The display performance for SMALL and x4 characters are slower than Use SMALL and x4 characters only
that for ANK, x2, and x6 characters in case of other than Series 0i-D, where necessary and use ANK, x2, and
Series 30i/31i/32i/35i, Power Motion i-A. If a large number of SMALL x6 characters where possible.
and x4 characters are used on a single screen, the display speed of the
entire screen will be lower. On display link displays, in particular, the
effect on the display speed will increase because large amount of data
converges at once.
If FANUC PICTURE is used together with C applications, too much load
on alarm task processing affects the screen display speed of the main
task. The customer is responsible for the necessary design and
adjustment to avoid this.
A user-defined function call affects the screen display speed. The
customer is responsible for the necessary design and adjustment to
avoid this.
If you select to store screen data in the screen structure definition If getting a target CNC ready, select a
control, the screen data must not exceed the custom software capacity. DRAM/FROM module slightly larger
Otherwise, a shortage of memory is reported with an alarm when a than necessary.
screen is displayed on the CNC screen. For frequently used screens, store
If not all screens can be stored in memory, all screens may be displayed screen data; for infrequently used ones,
by specifying whether to free memory for each screen. free memory.
If you specify that memory for a screen should be freed in the screen
structure definition control, this screen is displayed more slowly than if a
screen stored in DRAM memory is displayed because the necessary
data is read from F-ROM to display that screen.
If many controls that perform dynamic operation, such as lamp, button, If getting a target CNC ready, specify a
character string, and numeral indication controls, are used on the touch high-speed CPU card.
panel, response will be slow because the display update period
increases. If this occurs, reduce the number of controls used so that the
operator does not feel stress in touch panel operation.
The maximum number of parent and child screens is 200.
If the total number exceeds the maximum one, its error is reported in
the dialog box, so reduce the number of screens.
- 550 -
Restriction or note Remarks

The maximum number of work files that can be generated during MEM
generation is 5000.
the dialog box, so reduce the number of controls in the project.
Only one key input buffer control and one screen definition control can
be used on a single screen.
Only one clock control can be used on each parent or child screens.
The maximum allowable total number of buttons and numeral indicators
(including those with popup ten-key pad input and with key input) per
one form is 200.
the dialog box, so reduce the number of buttons and numeral indicators.
The maximum number of the following controls per one form is 100. (*1) When "Watch" is "AUTO"
• Button control (*1) (*2) When "Screen Type" is "Sub
• Button control with image (*1) screen" or "NC screen", or when
• Screen switch control (*2) "Screen Type" is base screen and
• Framed button control "Light" is checked.
• Numeral indication control with key input (*3) When "Use Key-in-buffer" is
• Numeral indication control for calling a ten-key pad checked.
• MDI Key Control
• PMC area character string indication control (*3)
the dialog box, so reduce the number of the above controls.
The maximum whole line number that can be displayed by the message
indication controls is 100 in one project.
If the total line number exceeds the maximum one, its error is reported
in the dialog box, so reduce the line number of the message indication
controls.
If a popup ten-key pad or a popup screen is displayed, only the popup
screen section last displayed is active. Data update and operation on
the screen in the background is stopped.
The display performance for SMALL and x4 characters are slower than Use SMALL and x4 characters only
that for ANK, x2, and x6 characters in case of FS18i-LNA/LNB, Power where necessary and use ANK, x2, and
Mate i-LNA. If a large number of SMALL and x4 characters are used on x6 characters where possible.
a single screen, the display speed of the entire screen will be lower.
On the character string setting popup screen of a PMC character string
indication control, numeral indication controls with key input cannot be
used.
If a custom screen is displayed using the CNC screen display function, For Series 30i/31i/32i/35i, Power
0x000/Position-Absolute cannot be used as the screen number to be Motion i-A or Series 0i-D, a screen
assigned to the custom screen. 0x000 is reserved for the initial screen number of 0x0100 is reserved.
on the CNC screen display.
The interlock signals located on the PMC area character string
indication control and the numeral indication control with key input are
those effective both to calling a pop-up screen for input and to data
input.
For the telop display of the composite message indication control, the
maximum allowable total number of characters of a concatenated
paragraph is 80. Operation cannot be guaranteed for a specification
exceeding 80 characters.
- 551 -
5.3 DIFFERENCES FROM FANUC PICTURE OF OLD

VERSION
The differences from FANUC PICTURE/A08B-9010-J514#ZZ11 of the old version are described below.
Specifications of the old product Specifications of the new software product

No.
(A08B-9010-J514#ZZ11) (A08B-9010-J518#ZZ11)
1 Pop-up screen area specification
The rectangle of the screen structure The rectangle of the screen structure definition control serves
definition control serves as a as a displayable area as with the old FP. However, the
displayable area. The background of background of the rectangle is filled using the screen
the rectangle is transparent, and base background color specified by the screen set control. So, the
screen data is displayed in an area pop-up rectangle area is filled using the screen background
where no control is placed. color specified by the screen set control, so that no base screen
data remains displayed in the periphery and in an area within
the rectangle where no control is placed.
2 Acquisition of screen data stored in the F-ROM
Screen data stored in the F-ROM is In Series 0i-D, Series 30i/31i/32i/35i, Power Motion i-A, when
translated to data in the D-RAM that the power is turned on, all of screen data files are read from the
can be handled by the display unit F-ROM to the D-RAM. After that, one of these is translated to
when a screen is first displayed. data in another D-RAM area that can be handled by the display
Whether to save or discard data unit when a screen is first displayed.
translated in the D-RAM can be set The specification for saving/discarding data translated in the
using a property (free memory) in D-RAM is the same as for the old FANUC PICTURE.
Screen Structure Definition Control.
3 Size of a created screen
The used memory size is increased comparing the old FANUC
PICTURE because of enhancement for its functions and display
performance.
So, note that the new version does not guarantee that the
number of screens displayed by the old version can be
displayed due to the insufficient memory error.
When the error happened, by setting 1 in the FP parameter
No.6 (the D-RAM capacity saving function), there is a chance to
display all screen.
- 552 -
APPENDIX
B-66284EN/07 APPENDIX A.ERROR MESSAGES
A ERROR MESSAGES
A.1 ERROR MESSAGES
The table below is a list of the error message generated while executing FANUC PICTURE on CNC.
Message Content
BACK1 TASK Error. The screen data file cannot be opened by the following
errprint2 101 factors.
errprint2 1 - The screen data file is not stored in F-ROM.
errprint2 -1 - The D-RAM capacity is insufficient.
MLTLNGMG.TXT read error. Refer to “When D-RAM for FANUC PICTURE is
insufficient” of “A.2 TROBULE SHOOTING”.
LANGUAGE FILE read error. The screen data (each language data) is not correct.
Remake the screen data file.
No Action information table make error. The signal not supported is set to the screen data (a invalid
signal of control).
PMC number error. : xxxx The signal not supported is set to the screen data.
Function name is illegal !! The FP fucntion not supported is set to the screen data.
For the FP functions supported with each CNC model, refer
to "3 the FP function".
The D-RAM capacity is insufficient to acquire a new The D-RAM capacity is insufficient.
memory block. Refer to “When D-RAM for FANUC PICTURE is
Insufficient memory insufficient” of “A.2 Trouble shooting”.
The characters count is over the maximum 16K The character string data set to a screen by the text
bytes in the screen. character string indication control etc. exceeds 16K bytes.
Cannot open screen for the above reason The screen change failed by the reason displayed above
this message.
CRT file error !! The screen data (CTF file) is not correct.
Impossible to open CRT file !! Remake the screen data file.
Impossible to open DEF file The screen data (DEF file) is not correct.
Intermediate data file name has not been defined Remake the screen data file.
WARNING : Illegal data (F-name:xxxx Line:yyyy).
Impossible to open FP_PAT.DAT file !! The screen data (FP_PAT.DAT) is not correct.
- 555 -
A.ERROR MESSAGES APPENDIX B-66284EN/07
A.2 TROBLE SHOOOTING

When FANUC PICTURE can not start
Deal by the following procedures.
(1) Confirm error message
When an error message of FANUC PICTURE is displayed, see "A.1 ERROR MESSAGES".
(2) Confirm CNC parameters

For the setting of the CNC parameter for FANUC PICTURE, see "Setting NC parameters on the
CNC" of "1.1 OPERATING ENVIRONMENT".
(3) Confirm F-ROM files

Confirm the FP driver and the screen data file are correctly stored on the BOOT screen.
CNC model FP driver Screen data file
Series 30i/31i/32i/35i FPF 2.0M FPF0xx
Series 0i-D (xx: 01 to 99)
Power Motion i-A
Other model CEX 2.0M CEX0FPDT
(4) Confirm FANUC PICTURE options

For the necessarry options for FANUC PICTURE, see "Option specificatiion" of “1.1 OPERATING
ENVIRONMENT".
When D-RAM for FANUC PICTURE is insufficient

Increase the free memory of D-RAM used with FANUC PICTURE by the following method.
(1) Use the F-ROM capacity compression function
* This function is available only for Series 30i/31i/32i/35i, Series 0i-D and Power Motion i-A.
For the F-ROM capacity compression function, see “FP parameter No.11 F-ROM data compression”
of “2.2.10.6 FP-PARAMETER SETTING screen”.
(2) Use the D-RAM capacity saving function

* This function is available only for Series 30i/31i/32i/35i, Series 0i-D and Power Motion i-A.
For the D-RAM capacity saving function, see “FP parameter No.6 D-RAM capacity saving
function” of “2.2.10.6 FP-PARAMETER SETTING screen”.
(3) Make the common parts on each screen a child screen, and share it among screens
(4) Change the memory storage type screens to the memory release type screens.
(5) Enhance the D-RAM capacity

For Series 30i/31i/32i/35i and Power Motion i-A, the D-RAM capacity for FANUC PICTURE can
be enhanced up to 8MB by adding the the custom software size option.
- 556 -
B-66284EN/07 APPENDIX B.CNC SCREEN NUMBERS LIST
B CNC SCREEN NUMBERS LIST

It is a screen number for which “O” mark of each CNC device can be used in the following
correspondence tables.
The screen numbers of “X” mark cannot be used with the CNC device.
B.1 Screen numbers for Series 0i-C, Series 16i/18i/21i, Power

Mate i
<POSITION>
CNC screen Series Series Power Mate
Screen Series 0i-C
number 16i/18i/21i-M 16i/18i/21i-T i
0x0000 ABSOLUTE O O O O
0x0100 RELATIVE O O O O
0x0200 ALL O O O O
0x0300 HANDLE INTERRUPT O O O O
0x0400 OPERATING MONITOR O O O O
0x0500 C Executor 1 X *2 O O O
0x0800 C Executor 2 X *2 O *1 O *1 X
0x0900 C Executor 3 X *2 O *1 O *1 X
0x0a00 C Executor 4 X *2 O *1 O *1 X
0x0b00 C Executor 5 X *2 O *1 O *1 X
*1 Specifiable for the MODEL-B and later.
*2 Specifiable only as a FANUC PICTURE screen.
<PROGRAM>
Screen Series 0i-C
0x0001 MDI PROGRAM O O O O
0x0101 PROGRAM O O O O
0x0201 LIBRARY O O O O
0x0301 CURRENT BLOCK O O O O
0x0401 NEXT BLOCK O O O O
0x0501 PROGRAM CHECK O O O O
0x0601 PROGRAM RESTART O O O X
0x0701 FLOPPY DIRECTORY O O O O
0x0801 C.A.P. O O O X
0x0901 SCHEDULE O O O X
0x0a01 CYCLE TIME X O O X
0x0b01 DATA SERVER DIRECTORY O O O X
0x0c01 JOG X O O X
0x0d01 C Executor 1 X *2 O O O
0x1201 C Executor 2 X *2 O *1 O *1 X
0x1301 C Executor 3 X *2 O *1 O *1 X
0x1401 C Executor 4 X *2 O *1 O *1 X
0x1501 C Executor 5 X *2 O *1 O *1 X
- 557 -
B.CNC SCREEN NUMBERS LIST APPENDIX B-66284EN/07
<OFFSET>
Screen Series 0i-C
0x0002 OFFSET (GEOM,WEAR) O O O O
0x0102 SETTING PARAMETER O O O O
0x0202 WORK COORDINATE O O O X
0x0302 MACRO VARIABLE O O O O
0x0402 MENU O O O O
0x0502 OPERATOR'S PANEL O O O O
0x0602 TOOL LIFE O O O X
0x0702 CHOPPING PARAMETER X O X X
0x0802 TOOL LENGTH MES.-B X O X X
0x0902 INTERFERENCE CHECK X O X X
0x0702 WORK SHIFT O (T,TT) X O X
0x0802 Y-AXIS OFFSET O (T,TT) X O X
(GEOM,WEAR)
0x0902 TOOL FORM O (TT) X O X
0x0a02 BARRIER O (T,TT) X O X
0x0b02 B-AXIS OFFSET X X O X
0x0c02 2ND OFFSET GEOMETORY X X O X
0x0a02 C Executor 1 X *2 (M) O X X
0x0d02 C Executor 1 X *2 (T,TT) X O X
0x1302 C Executor 2 X *2 O *1 O *1 X
0x1402 C Executor 3 X *2 O *1 O *1 X
0x1502 C Executor 4 X *2 O *1 O *1 X
0x1602 C Executor 5 X *2 O *1 O *1 X
<SYSTEM>
Screen Series 0i-C
0x0003 PARAMETER O O O O
0x0103 DIAGNOSE O O O O
0x0203 PMC O O O O
0x0303 SYSTEM O O O O
0x0403 MEMORY X O O O
0x0503 PITCH ERROR O O O X
0x0603 SERVO SETTING O O O O
0x0703 SPINDLE SETTING O O O O
0x0803 MAP C-SERV X O O X
0x0903 WAVE ANALYZER O O O X
0x0a03 M-CODE GRP SETTING X O O X
0x0b03 OPERATION HISTORY O O O O
0x0c03 ALL I/O O O O O
0x0d03 MAP C-OPER X O O X
0x0e03 DATA SERVER SETTING O O O X
0x0f03 DATA SERVER O O O X
MAINTENANCE
0x1003 DATA SERVER MODE O O O X
STORAGE.
0x1103 SERCOS INTERFACE X O O X
DISPLAY
0x1203 VGA COLOR SETTING O O O X
- 558 -

Screen Series 0i-C
0x1303 PERIODICAL O O O O
MAINTENANCE DISP.
0x1403 MAINTENANCE O O O O
INFORMATION DISP.
0x1503 PMM O O O X
0x1603 PROGRAM TAPE MEMORY X O O X
CHECK DISP.
0x1703 TOUCH PANEL O O O X
CALIBRATION DISP.
0x1803 FSSB SETTING DISPLAY O O O O
0x1903 C Executor 1 X *2 O O O
0x1d03 C Executor 2 X *2 O *1 O *1 X
0x1e03 C Executor 3 X *2 O *1 O *1 X
0x1f03 C Executor 4 X *2 O *1 O *1 X
0x2003 C Executor 5 X *2 O *1 O *1 X
<MESSAGE>
Screen Series 0i-C
0x0004 ALARM O O O O
0x0104 EXTERNAL MESSAGE O O O O
0x0204 ALARM HISTORY O O O O
0x0304 MAP MESSAGE X O O X
0x0404 MAP OPERATOR'S X O O X
MESSAGE
0x0504 REMOTE DIAGNOSTICS O O O X
0x0604 EXTERNAL/OPERATOR'S O O O X
MESSAGE HISTORY
0x0704 NETWORK MESSAGE X O O X
0x0804 DATA SERVER MESSAGE O O O X
0x0904 FACTOLINK X O O X
0x0a04 C Executor 1 X *2 O O O
0x1004 C Executor 2 X *2 O *1 O *1 X
0x1104 C Executor 3 X *2 O *1 O *1 X
0x1204 C Executor 4 X *2 O *1 O *1 X
0x1304 C Executor 5 X *2 O *1 O *1 X

*2 Specifiable only as a FANUC PICTURE screen
<USER>(SMALL KEY)
Screen Series 0i-C
0x0005 PASCAL X O O X
0x0105 AUX O O O O
0x0205 MACRO O O O O
0x0305 MENU O O O O
0x0405 GRAPHIC O O O X
0x0505 SOLID GRAPHIC O (M) O X X
- 559 -
<GRAPHIC>(FULL KEY)
Screen Series 0i-C
0x0005 GRAPHIC O O O X
<CUSTOM>(FULL KEY)
Screen Series 0i-C
0x0006 PASCAL X O O X
0x0106 AUX O O O X
0x0206 MACRO O O O X
0x0306 MENU O O O X
<FAPT>
Screen Series 0i-C
0x0007 FAPT X O O X
B.2 Screen Numbers for Series 0i-D, Series 30i/31i/32i/35i,

Power Motion i-A
The screen numbers that can be replaced with a custom screen are the numbers of the basic screens and
the screens whose options are valid. In addition, it is possible to specify the screens from "C Executor" to
"C Executor 5", which are present for each function key.
<POSITON>
Series
CNC screen number Screen Series 0i-D 30i/31i/32i/35i
Power Motion i-A
0x0100 ABSOLUTE ○ ○
0x0200 RELATIVE ○ ○
0x0300 ALL ○ ○
0x0400 HANDLE INTERRUPT ○ ○
0x0600 OPERATING MONITOR ○ ○
0x0700 5-AXES MANUAL × ○
0x0800 VIRTUAL AXIS × ○
0x3200 C Executor ○ ○
0x3300 C Executor2 ○ ○
- 560 -
<PROGRAM>
Series
Power Motion i-A
0x0101 PROGRAM ○ ○
0x0201 FOLDER ×*1 ○
0x0301 NEXT ×*1 ○
0x0401 PROGRAM CHECK ×*1 ○
0x0601 TIME STAMP × ○
0x0701 JOG × ○
0x0801 PROGRAM RESTART ○ ○
0x1101 MDI ×*1 ×
0x1201 FOLDER (for not EDIT mode) ×*1 ×
0x1301 CURRENT BLOCK ×*1 ×
0x2f01 MANUAL GUIDE 0i ×*1 ×
*1 The screen exists, but not avairable for FANUC PICTURE.
<OFFSET>
Series
Power Motion i-A
0x0102 OFFSET(GEOM,WEAR) ○ ○
0x0202 SETTING PARAMETER ○ ○
0x0302 WORK COORDINATE ○ ○
0x0402 MULTI -EDGE OFFSET × ○
0x0602 MACRO VARIABLE ○ ○
0x0702 PATTEREN MENU ○ ×
0x0802 OPERATOR'S PANEL ○ ○
0x0902 TOOL MANAGER ○ ○
0x0b02 Y-AXIS OFFSET ○ (T) ○
0x0c02 WORK COORDINATE SHIFT ○ (T) ○
0x0d02 2nd OFFSET GEOMETRY × ○
0x0e02 TOOL FORM ○ (T) ○
0x1002 MODEM × ○
0x1102 PRECISION LEVEL ○ ○
0x1302 CHOPPING PARAMETER × ○
0x1502 CHUCK TAIL STOCK BARRIER ○ (T) ○
0x1602 LANGUAGE ○ ○
0x1702 PROTECT ○ ○
0x1802 SAFE GUARD ○ ○
0x1a02 ACT. FIXTURE OFFSET × ○
0x1b02 RTTDYN. FIXTURE OFFSET × ○
0x1f02 WORK SET ERROR × ○
0x0112 OFFSET WEAR (SUB) ○ ×
0x0212 OFFSET GEOMETRY (SUB) ○ ×
- 561 -
Series
Power Motion i-A
0x0312 OFFSET WEAR2 (SUB) ○ ×
0x0412 OFFSET GEOMETRY2 (SUB) ○ ×
<SYSTEM>
Series
Power Motion i-A
0x0103 PARAMETER ○ ○
0x0203 DIAGNOSE ○ ○
0x0303 SERVO GUIDE × ○
0x0403 SYSTEM ○ ○
0x0603 MEMORY ○ ○
0x0703 PITCH ERROR ○ ○
0x0803 SERVO SETTING ○ ○
0x0903 SPINDLE SETTING ○ ○
0x0b03 PMC MAINTENANCE ○ ○
0x0c03 PMC LADDER ○ ○
0x0d03 PMC CONFIGURATION ○ ○
0x1003 MACHINE TUNING ○ ○
0x1103 ALL I/O ○ ○
0x1203 ALL I/O(2ND) × ○
0x1303 OPERATION HISTORY ○ ○
0x1503 VGA COLOR SETTING ○ ○
0x1603 PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE ○ ○
0x1703 MAINTENANCE INFORMATION ○ ○
0x1803 WAVE DIAGNOSIS ○ ○
0x1a03 TOUCH PANEL CALIBRATION ○ ○
0x1b03 FSSB SETTING ○ ○
0x1c03 PARAMETER TUNING ○ ○
0x1d03 POWER MATE MANAGER ○ ○
0x1f03 EMBEDDED ETHRNET PORT ○ ○
0x2003 PCMCIA LAN CARD ○ ○
0x2103 ETHERNET BOARD ○ ○
0x2203 PROFIBUS MASTER ○ ○
0x2403 REMOTE DIAGNOSIS ○ ○
0x2503 M CODE GROUP SETTING ○ ○
0x2603 LEARN CONTORL × ○
0x2703 ADJUST 3D × ○
0x2903 PROFIBUS SLAVE ○ ○
0x2a03 DEVICE NET MANAGER × ○
0x2b03 FL-NET × ○
0x2e03 DUAL CHECK SAFTY ○ ○
0x2f03 REAL TIME MACRO × ○
0x3103 CUSTOMER'S BOARD × ○
0x4103 ID INFORMATION ○ ×
0x4303 PARAMETER CHECK SUM ○ ×
- 562 -
<MESSAGE>
Series
Power Motion i-A
0x0104 ALARM ○ ○
0x0204 OPERATOR MESSAGE ○ ○
0x0304 ALARM HISTORY ○ ○
0x0404 OPERATOR MESSAGE HISTORY ○ ○
0x0604 EMBEDDED ETHRNET LOG ○ ○
0x0704 PCMCIA ETHRNET LOG ○ ○
0x0804 ETHRNET BOARD LOG ○ ○
0x0904 FL-NET MESSAGE × ○
0x3304 C Executor 2 ○ ○
<GRAPHIC>
Series
Power Motion i-A
0x0105 GRAPHIC PARAMETER ○ ○
0x0205 GRAPHIC ○ ○
<CUSTOM1>
Series
Power Motion i-A
0x0106 Macro Executor ×*1 ×*1
*1 The screen exists, but not avairable for FANUC PICTURE.
<CUSTOM2>
Series
Power Motion i-A
- 563 -
C. AVAILABLE CHARACTERS ON
FANUC PICTURE APPENDIX B-66284EN/07
C AVAILABLE CHARACTERS ON FANUC

PICTURE
This appendix explains the character whitch can be treated by FANUC PICTURE.
The character codes are represented in hexadecimal.
C.1 FANUC CODE

When “FANUC CODE” is selected in the character code of the [Setting of Project] dialog, the available
characters are as follows.
<ASCII characters>
Hexa.
code +0 +1 +2 +3 +4 +5 +6 +7 +8 +9 +A +B +C +D +E +F
0020 (*1) ! " # $ % & ' ( ) * + , - . /
0030 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 : ; < = > ?
0040 @ A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O
0050 P Q R S T U V W X Y Z [ \ ] ^ _
0F80 ` a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o
0F90 p q r s t u v w x Y z { | } ~
(*1)space character
<Two-byte characters (kana, kanji, Hangul, symbols)>

Hexa.
code +0 +2 +4 +6 +8 +A +C +E +10 +12 +14 +16 +18 +1A +1C +1E
0200 ぁあぃいぅうぇえぉおかがきぎくぐ
0220 けげこごさざしじすずせぜそぞただ
0240 ちぢっつづてでとどなにぬねのはば
0260 ぱひびぴふぶぷへべぺほぼぽまみむ
0280 めもゃやゅゆょよらりるれろゎわ素
02A0 材をん種類棒穴成形質寸法外径長端
02C0 面最小内大加工切削倣正途中荒具番
02E0 号仕上込点方向速度送量開始深主軸
0300 回転数位置決直線時円反現在指令値
0320 領域診断操作手引機械残移動次早電
0340 源投入間分秒自運負荷実使用寿命新
0360 規除隅取単補能独終了記角溝刃幅広
0380 設定一覧表部炭合金鋼超硬先付摩耗
03A0 仮想副行挿消去山高準備完後弧助択
03C0 無視器原登録再処理描画過容編集未
03E0 対相座標示名歯変呼推馬力系選達閉
0400 禁復帰書個桁稼由両半逃底逆下空四
0420 触平代辺格子周心本群停止巾微状路
0440 範囲倍率注側特殊距離連続増隔件初
0460 期条経握圧扱陰隠右押横黄億屋化何
0480 絵階概該巻換気起軌技疑供共境強教
04A0 掘繰係傾型検権研肩見験元弦減孔巧
04C0 控更校構根左差雑参散産算治耳式失
04E0 修十従勝商少尚昇植色食伸信侵振浸
0500 真暗以意異影鋭越価可科果箇課各拡
- 564 -
C.AVAILABLE CHARACTERS ON
B-66284EN/07 APPENDIX FANUC PICTURE
Hexa.
code +0 +2 +4 +6 +8 +A +C +E +10 +12 +14 +16 +18 +1A +1C +1E
0520 核学掛漢簡観関含却客休急業曲均筋
0540 継計軽言限互降採済細姿思写射斜者
0560 車借縦重出述術渉照省章証象身進人
0580 図違印沿遠央奥往応会解改割活願基
05A0 奇寄岐既近区矩駆偶旧求球究級欠結
05C0 口語誤交厚項刻告黒財策糸試資事持
05E0 似釈弱受収純順所序剰場常飾水錐据
0600 制整製前全然則属即他多存谷探短徴
0620 鎖調頂鉄添頭同導道熱年濃箱発抜伴
0640 必百複物文聞併忘末密有余与裏立略
0660 青席石積赤接折粗創双捜太打体待態
0680 替段知地致遅追通伝得読凸凹突鈍敗
06A0 杯背配品不布並頁別片返勉弁保明滅
06C0 木目歪揺様溶要抑良輪和話枠節説絶
06E0 千専浅旋総走退台第題卓室着柱鋳丁
0700 低訂肉日白薄比皮被非美普伏歩包門
0720 問絡列万利訳礼乱放枚約練油劣例郭
0740 戻冷垂緑紫許測精効 → ↑ ← ↓
0760 ⌒ 板予家装管粉等
0780 貫安 α β 程抗張任破損御足守般
07A0 納義丸汎固毎当的詳鳥適論額縁温給
07C0 界混監締護己称樹脂料落確認報排性
07E0 生績判搬砥 θ 島壁
0800 阿哀愛挨逢悪旭宛案闇鞍伊依偉委威
0820 慰易為維緯胃衣遺医井育 ― 稲員因飲
0840 院羽雨渦唄浦瓜噂雲営映栄永泳洩英
0860 衛液益駅園延援演炎煙鉛塩汚王岡沖
0880 憶臆牡乙恩穏音佳夏暇架歌河火花華
08A0 菓貨我牙芽賀雅介壊廻快怪海灰皆貝
08C0 劾害慨街垣殻獲覚較革楽笠括滑株刈
08E0 乾寒刊勧喚官寛干幹感慣敢歓汗環甘
0900 看緩缶肝還鑑閑陥韓館岸眼岩顔企危
0920 喜希幾揮机旗棄毅祈季稀徽輝騎擬犠
0940 議菊詰脚丘久及吸宮弓救泣牛居巨拒
0960 挙虚魚亨享京競協叫挟橋況狭胸興郷
0980 鏡響驚凝局極玉勤錦琴銀九句苦馳屑
09A0 屈熊君訓軍郡刑兄契掲敬景茎警芸迎
09C0 劇激隙潔血月倹健兼券剣圏堅建憲拳
09E0 犬献絹県謙軒鍵険幻古庫戸故湖狐誇
0A00 顧五午侯候光公勾喉好孝幸康弘拘攻
0A20 江港甲稿絞綱考肯衡講購郊鉱香剛克
0A40 国穀酷腰骨此頃今困婚査砂債妻彩才
0A60 災砕祭菜裁載際剤罪坂阪咲昨索錯桜
0A80 冊刷察撮擦札殺皿三撒讃賛酸伺刺史
0AA0 士姉市師支枝死私紙詞詩字寺磁辞七
0AC0 湿芝縞捨煮社謝尺若酒首授需秋習臭
0AE0 舟週住柔宿祝縮熟春瞬盾巡暑女傷唱
0B00 奨将床承招昭焼焦笑紹衝賞障乗城情
0B20 浄蒸錠職唇寝審森申神芯親辛針震尽
0B40 陣須酢吹粋遂杉裾澄世是勢征政星晴
0B60 清盛聖声西誓請静税昔析籍責跡雪舌
0B80 占宣尖川戦扇栓泉洗染潜船銑鮮善組
0BA0 訴倉層掃巣争窓草騒像臓蔵贈造促息
0BC0 束俗卒其揃尊村詑堕妥耐帯怠滞袋貸
- 565 -
Hexa.
code +0 +2 +4 +6 +8 +A +C +E +10 +12 +14 +16 +18 +1A +1C +1E
0BE0 隊滝宅拓濯託濁奪脱棚誰嘆担淡団弾
0C00 暖男談池築畜竹筑秩茶昼虫駐貯帳庁
0C20 彫挑朝町脹腸跳沈珍賃墜痛塚爪吊釣
0C40 庭廷提釘泥摘滴笛典天展店貼殿田吐
0C60 塗徒都砥努土怒倒冬凍刀島東湯灯答
0C80 筒統到藤討踏透働堂胴銅峠徳毒届曇
0CA0 謎鍋縄南軟難二匂乳尿念燃粘悩脳農
0CC0 把波派廃拝肺買売博拍泊舶麦肌畑八
0CE0 罰版犯班繁販飯盤否彼悲扉批疲秘肥
0D00 費避飛尾鼻菱筆俵氷票評病浜貧敏夫
0D20 婦富怖浮父符腐武舞封風服福腹払沸
0D40 噴憤奮紛丙兵幣柄米壁癖偏便捕募墓
0D60 母簿宝崩捧泡胞芳訪豊飽亡傍剖妨帽
0D80 忙房暴望紡肪膨防北僕撲釦没翻磨魔
0DA0 幕膜迄満味魅脈妙民務夢矛迷鳴免綿
0DC0 模茂毛盲網黙紋冶夜野矢役薬躍諭輸
0DE0 優友遊郵融誉預幼揚曜洋葉陽養浴翼
0E00 螺来頼欄陸律流留粒旅療稜林臨隣涙
0E20 累励鈴暦歴烈裂労漏老六脇惑詫湾腕
0E40 斡椅萎宇嘘閲宴欧懐拐涯穫閣潟渇冠
0E60 患汽貴鬼偽戯欺喫窮糾拠漁恐狂脅仰
0E80 緊愚遇靴啓慶憩携撃傑嫌懸厳雇娯洪
0EA0 紅耕航貢挫催栽崎柵拶傘志施旨至誌
0EC0 識狩趣就秀衆襲蹴充渋緒署諸叙掌訟
0EE0 鐘壌織紳酔瀬誠繊漸繕塑礎阻奏族惰
0F00 戴諾叩旦誕恥仲宙忠抽兆懲抵敵撤党
0F20 盗糖陶闘督馴覇媒爆縛髪閥泌匹府敷
0F40 仏慕縫乏霧盟勇誘踊裸雷卵里隆慮虜
0F60 寮塁隷霊恋浪郎功坑々
1000 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P
1020 Q R S T U V W X Y Z a b c d e f
1040 g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v
1060 w x y z γ ε μ π φ ω Δ Σ
1080 Ω
10A0 ァアィイゥウェエ
10C0 ォオカガキギクグケゲコゴサザシジ
10E0 スズセゼソゾタダチヂッツヅテデト
1100 ドナニヌネノハバパヒビピフブプヘ
1120 ベペホボポマミムメモャヤュユョヨ
1140 ラリルレロヮワヲンヴヵヶ
1160 、。 , . ・ : ; ? ! “ ゜ ´ ｀ ¨ ＾
1180 ￣ _ ヽヾゝゞ〃仝々〆〇ー ― ‐ / ＼
11A0 ～ ∥ | … ‥ ‘ ‘ “ “ ( ) 〔〕 [ ] {
11C0 } 〈〉《》「」『』【】 + - ± × ÷
11E0 = ≠ < > ≦ ≧ ∞ ∴ ♂ ♀ ° ′ ″ ℃ \ $
1200 ￠￡ % # & * @ § ☆ ★ ○ ● ◎ ◇ ◆ □
1220 ■ △ ▲ ▽ ▼ ※ 〒 → ← ↑ ↓ 〓
1240 ㎜㎝㎞㎠㎡㎢㎤㎥
1260 ㎎㎏㏄㎗ ℓ ㎘㎳㎲㎱㏋㎰㎐㈱ ©
1280 亜芦尉壱逸芋姻韻詠疫悦謁猿殴翁虞
12A0 卸嫁禍彦蚊餓悔塊戒嚇岳樫喝褐轄且
12C0 勘堪棺款憾艦頑忌紀飢棋宜儀吉虐朽
12E0 凶峡恭矯暁斤桐菌謹襟吟隈勲薫恵渓
1300 蛍鶏鯨遣賢繭顕玄孤枯鼓呉悟碁后恒
- 566 -
Hexa.
code +0 +2 +4 +6 +8 +A +C +E +10 +12 +14 +16 +18 +1A +1C +1E
1320 皇慌酵拷豪獄昆恨紺魂墾懇佐唆詐宰
1340 斎歳搾桟蚕惨暫氏司祉肢嗣飼雌賜諮
1360 児侍滋慈璽疾執漆舎赦遮邪蛇勺酌爵
1380 寂朱珠儒囚州宗拾愁酬醜汁銃獣叔淑
13A0 粛塾俊旬准殉循潤遵庶如徐升召匠肖
13C0 償抄昌晶松沼宵症祥硝粧詔彰礁丈冗
13E0 畳嬢譲醸殖嘱辱臣娠慎薪仁迅甚尋炊
1400 帥衰睡穂錘随髄枢崇菅畝姓斉牲逝婿
1420 脆夕斥隻惜拙窃摂仙践銭遷薦禅祖租
1440 措疎壮荘桑曹喪葬僧遭槽燥藻霜憎賊
1460 孫駄舵胎泰逮瀧沢但丹胆鍛壇痴稚蓄
1480 逐窒嫡衷著弔眺潮聴勅朕陳鎮津漬坪
14A0 呈弟邸亭貞帝艇逓偵堤迭哲徹澱斗渡
14C0 奴桃悼棟痘唐塔搭謄豆騰洞童匿篤屯
14E0 豚尼弐妊忍寧婆俳輩梅培陪賠伯迫漠
1500 鉢伐帆畔煩頒藩晩蛮妃披卑碑罷姫漂
1520 苗猫賓頻瓶扶赴膚賦附譜侮覆雰墳陛
1540 塀弊遍舗暮邦奉峰抱俸砲褒坊某冒貿
1560 謀朴牧墨堀奔凡盆麻妹埋又抹慢漫岬
1580 眠娘銘妄猛匁厄愉癒唯幽悠猶裕雄憂
15A0 羊庸窯擁謡翌羅酪濫吏痢履柳竜硫涼
15C0 猟陵僚糧厘倫零齢麗廉錬炉露朗廊楼
15E0 賄國搖條櫻澤濾碌緞鐵靭靖槻浩郁
1600 가 각 간 갈 감 갑 값 강 갖 같 개 객 갱 거 건 걸
1620 검 겁 것 게 겨 격 견 결 겸 겹 경 계 고 곡 곤
1640 골 곰 곳 공 과 곽 관 괄 광 괘 교 구 국 군 굴 굵
1660 굽 권 궤 귀 규 균 그 극 근 글 금 급 기 길 깊
1680 까 깍 깥 깨 꾸 끈 끊 끝 나 낙 난 날 남 납 낭 낮
16A0 내 냄 냉 너 넌 넓 넘 넣 네 넷 녀 년 념 노 녹
16C0 논 놀 농 높 놓 누 눈 뉴 늄 느 는 늘 늠 능 늦 니
16E0 님 다 닦 단 닫 달 닮 담 답 당 닿 대 댐 더 덮
1700 도 독 돈 돌 동 되 된 될 됨 두 둑 둔 둘 둥 뒤 뒷
1720 득 든 듣 들 등 디 딘 딜 따 딴 때 떠 떤 떻 또
1740 뚜 뚫 뛰 뜨 띄 라 락 란 람 랑 래 램 략 량 러 렇
1760 레 력 련 렴 령 로 록 론 롱 뢰 료 루 류 률 르
1780 른 를 름 리 릭 린 림 립 링 마 막 만 많 말 망 맞
17A0 맡 매 맹 먹 먼 멈 멍 메 며 면 멸 명 몇 모 목
17C0 몫 몰 몹 못 몽 묘 무 묵 문 물 뭄 뭉 므 미 믹 민
17E0 믿 밀 밍 및 밑 바 박 밖 반 받 발 밝 밤 방 배
1800 백 버 번 벌 범 법 벗 베 벼 벽 변 별 병 보 복 본
1820 볼 봉 부 북 분 불 붓 붙 브 블 비 빗 빠 빨 빼
1840 뿌 뿐 사 삭 산 살 삼 삽 상 새 색 샘 생 서 석 섞
1860 선 설 섬 섭 성 세 센 셀 셈 셋 셔 소 속 손 솔
1880 솜 솟 송 쇠 수 숙 순 술 숫 쉬 스 슨 습 슷 승 시
18A0 식 신 실 싫 심 싸 쌍 써 쏘 쑤 쓰 쓴 씀 씌 씨
18C0 씩 씻 아 악 안 앉 않 알 암 압 았 앙 앞 애 액 야
18E0 약 얀 얇 양 어 억 언 없 얹 얻 얼 엄 업 었 에
1900 여 역 연 열 염 엽 였 영 옆 에 오 옥 온 올 옳 옴
1920 옷 와 완 왕 왜 외 왼 요 용 우 욱 운 울 웅 워
1940 원 월 위 유 육 윤 율 융 으 은 을 음 응 의 이 익
1960 인 일 읽 잃 임 입 있 잊 잎 자 작 잔 잘 잠 잡
1980 장 재 쟁 저 적 전 절 점 접 젔 정 제 져 조 족 존
19A0 졸 좀 좁 종 좋 좌 주 준 줄 중 증 지 직 진 질
19C0 짐 집 짓 짙 짜 짝 짧 째 쪽 쯤 차 착 찬 찰 참 창
- 567 -
Hexa.
code +0 +2 +4 +6 +8 +A +C +E +10 +12 +14 +16 +18 +1A +1C +1E
19E0 찾 채 책 처 척 천 철 첫 청 체 쳐 초 촉 촌 총
1A00 최 추 축 출 충 취 측 층 치 칙 친 침 카 칸 캠 커
1A20 컴 컵 켜 코 쿠 퀴 크 큰 클 큼 키 타 탁 탄 탈
1A40 탕 태 택 터 턱 턴 테 토 톤 톱 통 퇴 투 트 특 튼
1A60 틀 틈 티 팀 파 판 팔 패 펌 펜 펴 편 평 폐 포
1A80 폭 표 푸 풀 품 풍 퓨 프 피 필 하 할 함 합
1AA0 항 해 핵 했 행 향 허 헌 험 혁 현 협 형 호 혹
1AC0 혼 홈 홍 화 확 환 활 황 회 횟 횡 효 후 훈 휘 휴
1AE0 흑 흔 흠 흥 희 흰 히 힘 갭 겁 괸 굼 궂 궈 깍
1B00 깝 꼼 꼿 낵 냎 넥 놉 놋 눅 눔 눗 댈 댑 댕 덟 덥
1B20 돗 둡 듸 딤 딥 딱 떰 뗀 뗄 뜀 뜸 릭 맆 맬 멎
1B40 뫼 묽 믄 믐 빔 쉰 쌈 썬 썼
1B60 춥 칩 킥 킵 탭 탶
1B80 핍 헉 흘 께 학 한 쐐 쐬 얕 엊 옅 옳
1BA0 왔 웜 윗 잭 쬐 째 찻 쿡 팁 펀 폼 헝 훅
1BC0 데 드 옵 십 려 퀀 션 페 및 칭 머 큽 엔 런 헤 덱
1BE0 룹 닙 캔 챔 캐 펄 벨 럽 됩 팅 런 케
1D20 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1D40 8 9
C.2 RUSSIAN CODE

When “RUSSIAN” is selected in the character code of the [Setting of Project] dialog, the available
<Russian characters>
Hexa.
code +0 +1 +2 +3 +4 +5 +6 +7 +8 +9 +A +B +C +D +E +F
A0 Ë
C0 А Б В Г Д Е Ж З И Й К Л М Н О П
D0 Р С Т У Ф Х Ц Ч Ш Щ Ъ Ы Ь Э Ю Я
- 568 -
C.3 TURKISH CODE

When “TURKISH” is selected in the character code of the [Setting of Project] dialog, the available
<Turkish characters>
Hexa.
code +0 +1 +2 +3 +4 +5 +6 +7 +8 +9 +A +B +C +D +E +F
60 ` a b c d e f g h ｉ j k l m n o
70 p q r s t u v w x y z { : }
80 Š < OE
90 ~ š > oe Ÿ
A0 ¡ \
B0 μ ¿
C0 À Á Â Ã Ä Å Æ Ç È É Ê Ë Ì Í Î Ï
D0 Ğ Ñ Ò Ó Ô Õ Ö x Ø Ù Ú Û Ü İ Ş ß
E0 à á â ã ä å æ ç è é ê ë ì í î ï
F0 ğ ñ ò ó ô õ ö ÷ ø ù ú û ü ı ş ÿ
C.4 CENTRAL EUROPE CODE

When “CENTRAL EUROPE” is selected in the character code of the [Setting of Project] dialog, the
available characters are as follows.
<Central Europe characters >

Hexa.
code +0 +1 +2 +3 +4 +5 +6 +7 +8 +9 +A +B +C +D +E +F
0020 (*1) ! " # $ % & ' ( ) * + , - . /
0030 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 : ; < = > ?
0040 @ A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O
0050 P Q R S T U V W X Y Z [ \ ] ^ _
0F80 α β Θ γ ε μ π φ ω Δ Σ Ω ξ λ τ
0F90 p q r s t u v w x Y z { | } ~
0FB0 Ą Ă Ć Č Đ Ď Ę Ě Ł Ĺ Ń Ň Ő Ŕ Ř Ś
0FC0 Š Á Ş Â Ť Ç Ţ É Ů Ë Ű Í Î Ý Ź Ó
0FD0 Ô Ž Ż ą ă Ú ć č ß ď á â đ ä ę ě
0FE0 ĺ Ä Ö Ü ł ń ç ň é ő ë ŕ í î ř ś
0FF0 š ó ô ş ö ť ţ ů ú ű ü ý ź ž ż
(*1)space character
- 569 -
D. SUPPLEMENT TO THE
LINE CHART CONTROL APPENDIX B-66284EN/07
D SUPPLEMENT TO THE LINE CHART

CONTROL
This appendix explains the method of storing sampled data and the timing chart of the trigger display
method.
D.1 METHOD OF STORING SAMPLED DATA

Sampled data is stored using the ring buffer method as follows:
・ Sampled data is stored in a PMC area (or P code macro variable).
・ The data of individual line charts is stored successively in the following areas:
Example)
Line chart 1: 1000 to 1499
・ A value (wp) indicating the position where the most recent sampled data is written by the PMC (or
auxiliary macro) and a value (rp) indicating the position where sampled data is read by the line chart
control is stored.
・ Update wp after all sampled data is stored.

・ Ensure that the number of stored sampled data items is less than the maximum storable number of
sampled data items by 1 so that wp and rp do not match each other in any state other than the state
where the storage area is empty.
・ Ensure that wp does not exceed rp when data is stored with a PMC ladder (or auxiliary macro)
・ rp is initialized by FANUC PICTURE processing.
- 570 -
D.SUPPLEMENT TO THE
B-66284EN/07 APPENDIX LINE CHART CONTROL
D.2 TIMING CHART OF THE TRIGGER DISPLAY METHOD

The timing of data sampling and graphic display between FANUC PICTURE and the PMC (or auxiliary
macro) is adjusted by preparing the following signals:
・ Sampling start signal (FANUC PICTURE ⇒ PMC, to be prepared as needed)
・ Display request signal (PMC ⇒ FANUC PICTURE, mandatory)
・ Display response signal (FANUC PICTURE ⇒ PMC, mandatory)
1. When the sampling start signal is inverted by a button on the FANUC PICTURE screen or the like,
the PMC (or auxiliary macro) starts sampling of data.
The PMC (or auxiliary macro) initializes the pointer as needed.
2. The PMC (or auxiliary macro) inverts the display request signal upon completion of sampling.
3. When the values of the display request signal and display response signal do not match each other,
FANUC PICTURE graphically displays the data stored in the PMC area (or P code macro variable).
4. FANUC PICTURE inverts the display response signal upon completion of display.
- 571 -
D. SUPPLEMENT TO THE
LINE CHART CONTROL APPENDIX B-66284EN/07
D.3 ERROR MESSAGES

The error messages that may be output when the line chart control is used on the CNC are explained
below.
If an error message is displayed, the line chart or charts that have been displayed are cleared. Moreover,
until the screen is switched, graphic display is stopped.
• Line Chart buffer illegal

The value of the read pointer or write pointer pointing to a buffer where data sampled by the PMC or
auxiliary macro is to be stored is beyond the buffer size.
• P-code macro read error.

Return Value= 101
This error message is displayed only when a P code macro variable is selected in the data storage
area.
Data sampled is "null".
- 572 -
E. CONTROL DRAWING
B-66284EN/07 APPENDIX COMMAND
E CONTROL DRAWING COMMAND

This appendix explains the drawing command in the Fig file that is used for drawing of each control in
FANUC PICTURE.
The Fig file is a text file. By editing it, you can make a control having unique drawing images.
The drawing command has to be commanded within the virtual coordinates (0, 0) - (10000, 10000). The
actual coordinates are scaled to the size of control.
E.1 FORMATS OF COMMANDS

1. Drawing command format
(1) Tile command
'Command’ ‘Title’
(2) Line drawing commands
‘Command’ ‘Parameter’ ‘Line kind’ ‘Line color’ ‘Property color’
‘Command’ ‘Parameter’ ‘Line kind’ ‘Line color’ ‘Line size’ ‘Property color’
‘Command’ ‘Parameter’ ‘Line kind’ ‘Line color’ [Arc/Pie] ‘Property color’
‘Command’ ‘Parameter’ ‘Line kind’ ‘Line color’ [Arc/Pie] ‘Property color’
‘Command’ ‘Thickness’ ‘Border shape’ ‘Border diameter’ ‘Line color 1’ ‘Line color 1’
‘Property color 1’ ‘Property color 2’
(3) Plane drawing commands
‘Command’ ‘Parameter’ ‘Plane kind’ ‘Pattern kind’ ‘Plane color’ ‘Property color’
‘Command’ ‘Thickness’ ‘Border shape’ ‘Border diameter’ ‘Plane color’ ‘Property color’
(4) Comment command
‘Command’ ‘Comment’
2. Description about each drawing command data

(1) Command
T, L, LT, LB, LL, LR, C, A, R, C2, P, c, a, r, c2, R2, r2, ;
(2) Parameter
It depends on each command.
(3) Line kind
Specify the line kind number to draw. (0:Solid, 1:Dashes、2:Dots、3:Dash dot、4:Dash dot dot)
(4) Line color, Line color 1, Line color 2
Specify the line color value to draw (RGB specification)
Don’t include the space in the string like “RGB(128,128,128)”.
(5) Plane kind
Reserved. Always 1.
(6) Pattern kind
Reserved. Always 0.
(7) Plane color
Specify the plane color value to draw (RGB specification)
Don’t include the space in the string like “RGB(128,128,128)”.
(8) Line size
Reserved. Always 0.
(9) Arc/Pie
Specify arc or pie. (0:Arc, 1:Pie)
(10) Thickness
Specify the thickness of border.
- 573 -
E. CONTROL DRAWING
COMMAND APPENDIX B-66284EN/07
(11) Border shape

Reserved. Always 0.
(12) Border diameter
Reserved. Always 0.
(13) Property color, Property color 1, Property color2
Specify the name of the property color to be replaced in the line color or the plane color.
Don’t specify the property name that each control does not have.
none Color specified by RGB

BackColor Background color
BorderColor Border color
BorderColor1 Border color 1
It can be changed to BorderColor2 by the signal status.
BorderColor2 Border color 2
It can be changed to BorderColor1 by the signal status.
MainColor On/Off color
It can be switched between On and Off color by the signal status.
The On color of the following command is changed following the 7
colors display in the controls supporting the 7 colors display like lump.
L (Line), P (Paint), c (circle), a (Pie), r (Rectangle)
In case of the line drawing commands,

• When the property color is specified, the line color is replaced with the property color.
• When the property color 1 is specified, the line color 1 is replaced with the property color
1.
• When the property color 2 is specified, the line color 2 is replaced with the property color
2.
In case of the plane drawing commands,

• When the property color is specified, the plane color is replaced with the property color.
- 574 -
E. CONTROL DRAWING
E.2 DETAILS OF FUNCTIONS

1. Title command
(1) Title (Command =T)
The title name is shown in the property dialog box of controls.
T ‘Title name’
Ex.) T Ellipse Style

"Ellipse Style" is added in the combo box “Shape” of the “Image” property dialog box.
2. Line drawing commands

(1) Line (Command=L)
It draws the line from point (Xs,Ys) to (Xe,Ye) in the line kind and color.
L Xs Ys Xe Ye ‘Line kind’ ‘Line color' ‘Line size’ ‘Property color’
Ex.) L 1000 1000 6000 1000 0 RGB(255,0,0) 0 none

It draws the solid line from point (1000,1000) to (6000,1000) in red.
(2) Line (Command=LT)

It draws the line from point (Xs,Ys) to (Xe-1,Ye) in the line kind and color. It is used for
drawing the border of rectangle. Comparing L command, it subtracts 1 from the X coordinate
of the end point.
LT Xs Ys Xe Ye ‘Line kind’ ‘Line color' ‘Line size’ ‘Property color’
Ex.) LT 0 0 10000 0 0 RGB(255,0,0) 0 none

It draws the solid line from point (0,0) to (10000-1,0) in red.
(3) Line (Command=LB)

It draws the line from point (Xs,Ys-1) to (Xe-1,Ye-1) in the line kind and color. It is used for
drawing the border of rectangle. Comparing L command, it subtracts 1 from the Y coordinate
of both the start point and the end point and also subtracts 1 from the X coordinate of the end
point.
LB Xs Ys Xe Ye ‘Line kind’ ‘Line color' ‘Line size’ ‘Property color’
Ex.) LB 0 10000 10000 10000 0 RGB(255,0,0) 0 none

It draws the solid line from point (0,1000-1) to (10000-1,10000-1) in red.
(4) Line (Command=LL)

It draws the line from point (Xs,Ys) to (Xe,Ye-1) in the line kind and color. It is used for
drawing the border of rectangle. Comparing L command, it subtracts 1 from the Y coordinate
of the end point.
LL Xs Ys Xe Ye ‘Line kind’ ‘Line color' ‘Line size’ ‘Property color’
Ex.) LL 0 0 0 10000 0 RGB(255,0,0) 0 none

It draws the solid line from point (0,0) to (0,10000-1) in red.
- 575 -
E. CONTROL DRAWING
(5) Line (Command=LR)

It draws the line from point (Xs-1,Ys) to (Xe-1,Ye-1) in the line kind and color. It is used for
drawing the border of rectangle. Comparing L command, it subtracts 1 from the X coordinate
of both the start point and the end point and also subtracts 1 from the Y coordinate of the end
point.
LR Xs Ys Xe Ye ‘Line kind’ ‘Line color' ‘Line size’ ‘Property color’
Ex.) LR 10000 0 10000 10000 0 RGB(255,0,0) 0 none

It draws the solid line from point (1000-1,0) to (10000-1,10000-1) in red.
(6) Circle (Command=C)

It draws the circle having the center point (Xc,Yc) and the radius R in the line kind and color.
The radius is scaled by the shorter one of either width or height.
C Xc Yc R ‘Line kind’ ‘Line color' ‘Property color’
Ex.) C 5000 5000 5000 0 RGB(255,255,255) none

It draws the circle having the center point (5000,5000) and the radius 5000 in the white
solid line.
(7) Arc, Pie (Command =A)

It draws the arc or pie from the angle Ds to De having the center point (Xc,Yc) and the radius R
in the line kind and color. The unit of angle is 1/10 degree.
A Xc Yc R Ds De ‘Line kind’ ‘Line color' [Arc|Pie] ‘Property color’
Ex.) A 5000 5000 5000 2700 0 0 RGB(255,255,255) 0 none

It draws the arc from the angle 270 degree to 0 degree having the center point (5000,5000)
and the radius 5000 in the white solid line.
(8) Rectangle (Command=R)

It draws the rectangle having the 4 vertex points (Xi,Yi) in the line kind and color. The
coordinates of vertexes must be specified from the left top clockwise.
R X1 Y1 X2 Y2 X3 Y3 X4 Y4 ‘Line kind’ ‘Line color' ‘Line size' ‘Property color’
Ex.) R 0 0 10000 0 10000 10000 0 10000 0 RGB(255,0,0) 0 BorderColor

It draws the rectangle having the 4 vertex points (0, 0), (0, 10000), (10000, 0) and (10000,
10000) in the solid line with the border color.
(9) Rectangle (Command=R2)

It draws the borderline having the specified thickness as rectangle in the display area.
The border color of the upper and left is the line color 1, and the border color of the lower and
right is the line color 2. The thickness is per dot because it is not scaled.
R2 ‘Thickness’ ‘Border shape’ ‘Border diameter’ ‘Line color 1’ ‘Line color 1’

‘Property color 1’ ‘Property color 2’
Ex.) R2 4 0 0 RGB(255,0,0) RGB(0,0,255) none none

It draws the borderline having the red and blue 4 dots thickness in the display area.
- 576 -
E. CONTROL DRAWING
(10) Ellipse (Command =C2)
It draws the ellipse having the center point (Xc,Yc), the horizontal radius R and the vertical
radius R2 in the line kind and color.
The width of the actual display area is used to scale the horizontal radius and the height of the
actual display area is used to scale the vertical radius.
C2 Xc Yc R R2 ‘Line kind’ ‘Line color' ‘Property color’
Ex.) C2 5000 5000 5000 5000 0 RGB(255,255,255) none

It draws the ellipse having the center point (5000,5000) the horizontal radius 5000 and the
vertical radius 5000 in the white solid line.
3. Plane drawing commands

(1) Paint (Command=P)
It paints over the area enclosed in the border color Ec with the plane color from the start point
to paint (X,Y). The border condition Et is always 0.
When the property color is specified, both the border color Ec and the plane color are replaced
with the property color.
P X Y Ec Et ‘Plane kind’ ‘Pattern kind’ ‘Plane color’ ‘Property color’
Ex.) P 2000 2000 RGB(255,255,255) 0 1 0 RGB(255,255,0) none

It paints over the area enclosed in the white border color with sky blue from the start point
to paint (2000,2000).
(2) Circle (Command=c)

It draws the solid circle having the center point (Xc,Yc) and the radius R in the plane color.
c Xc Yc R ‘Plane kind’ ‘Pattern kind’ ‘Plane color’ ‘Property color’
Ex.) c 5000 5000 5000 1 0 RGB(0,0,0) MainColor

It draws the solid circle having the center point (5000,5000) and the radius 5000 in the
On/Off color.
(3) Pie (Command=a)

It draws the solid pie from the angle Ds to De having the center point (Xc,Yc) and the radius R
in the plane color. The unit of angle is 1/10 degree.
a Xc Yc R Ds De ‘Plane kind’ ‘Pattern kind’ ‘Plane color’ ‘Property color’
Ex.) a 5000 5000 5000 2700 0 0 0 RGB(255,0,255) none

It draws the purple solid pie from the angle 270 degree to 0 degree having the center point
(5000,5000) and the radius 5000.
(4) Rectangle (Command=r)

It draws the solid rectangle having the 4 vertex points (Xi,Yi) in the plane color. The
coordinates of vertexes must be specified from the left top clockwise.
r X1 Y1 X2 Y2 X3 Y3 X4 Y4 ‘Plane kind’ ‘Pattern kind’ ‘Plane color’ ‘Property color’
Ex.) r 0 0 10000 0 10000 10000 0 10000 1 0 RGB(0,0,0) BackColor

It draws the solid rectangle having the 4 vertex points (0, 0), (0, 10000), (10000, 0) and
(10000, 10000) in the border color.
- 577 -
E. CONTROL DRAWING
(5) Rectangle (Command=r2)

It draws the rectangle whose width and height are shrunk by the specified thickness against the
display area. The thickness is per dot because it is not scaled.
r2 ‘Thickness’ ‘Border shape’ ‘Border diameter’ ‘Plane color’ ‘Property color’
Ex.) r2 4 0 0 RGB(255,0,0) MainColor

It draws the rectangle in the On/Off color whose width and height are shrunk by 4 dots
against the display area.
(6) Ellipse (Command =c2)

It draws the ellipse having the center point (Xc,Yc), the horizontal radius R and the vertical
radius R2 in the plane color.
The width of the actual display area is used to scale the horizontal radius and the height of the
actual display area is used to scale the vertical radius.
c2 Xc Yc R R2 ‘Plane kind’ ‘Pattern kind’ ‘Plane color’ ‘Property color’
Ex.) c2 5000 5000 5000 5000 1 0 RGB(255,255,255) none

It draws the white solid ellipse having the center point (5000,5000) the horizontal radius
5000 and the vertical radius 5000.
4. Comment command
(1) Comment (Command=;)
Put ";" (semi colon) in the top of the comment line.
Ex.) ;Lamp figure 1
- 578 -
E. CONTROL DRAWING
E.3 COORDINATES
In the drawing commands, the coordinates are specified within the virtual coordinates (0, 0) - (10000,
10000). The actual coordinates are scaled to the size of control.
(0, 0) X
(10000, 10000)
Y
And, the following special coordinates can be specified.
LEFTn Value added 1 to the x-coordinate of the upper-left corner of the display area
TOPn Value added 1 to the y-coordinate of the upper-left corner of the display area
RIGHTn Value subtracted 1 from the x-coordinate of the lower-right corner of the display
area
BOTTOMn Value subtracted 1 from the y-coordinate of the lower-right corner of the display
area
VIEWn n dots without scaling
(It is used for radius of circle, arc and so on. It is NOT used for angle.)
The value of ‘n’ is NOT scaled and always realized in dots. If the specified value is over the display area,
the drawing is done out of the display area just as it is.
Ex. 1)
R LEFT1 TOP1 RIGHT1 TOP1 RIGHT1 BOTTOM1 LEFT1 BOTTOM1 0 RGB(0,0,0) 0
BackColor
When the coordinates of the upper-left corner is (x0, y0) and the coordinates of the lower-right
corner is (x1, y1), then it draws the rectangle having the 4 vertex points (x0+1, y0+1), (x1-1,
y0+1), (x1-1, y1-1) and (x0+1, y1-1) in the solid line and the border color.
Ex. 2)
A RIGHT16 TOP15 VIEW12 0 900 0 RGB(255,255,255) 0 MainColor
When the coordinates of the upper-left corner is (x0, y0) and the coordinates of the lower-right
corner is (x1, y1), then it draws the arc from the angle 0 degree to 90 degree having the center
point (x1-16, y0+15) and the radius 12 dots in the solid line and the On/Off color.
- 579 -
E. CONTROL DRAWING
E.4 EXAMPLE
This section describes how to draw of the control in the actual “FPButton.fig” file.
Contents of the file

T Rectangle(No.1)
; Paint over the display area of this control in the On/Off color.
r 0 0 10000 0 10000 10000 0 10000 1 0 RGB(192,192,192) MainColor
; Border color 1
LT LEFT0 TOP0 RIGHT0 TOP0 0 RGB(255,255,255) 0 BorderColor1
LT LEFT0 TOP1 RIGHT1 TOP1 0 RGB(255,255,255) 0 BorderColor1
LL LEFT0 TOP0 LEFT0 BOTTOM0 0 RGB(255,255,255) 0 BorderColor1
LL LEFT1 TOP0 LEFT1 BOTTOM1 0 RGB(255,255,255) 0 BorderColor1
; Border color 2
LR RIGHT0 TOP1 RIGHT0 BOTTOM0 0 RGB(0,0,0) 0 BorderColor2
LR RIGHT1 TOP2 RIGHT1 BOTTOM0 0 RGB(0,0,0) 0 BorderColor2
LB LEFT0 BOTTOM0 RIGHT0 BOTTOM0 0 RGB(0,0,0) 0 BorderColor2
LB LEFT1 BOTTOM1 RIGHT0 BOTTOM1 0 RGB(0,0,0) 0 BorderColor2
;
Display
The solid line having 2 dots thickness and the border color 1 is displayed on the upper and left edge of the
rectangle painted in the On/Off color. And the solid line having 2 dots thickness and the border color 2 is
displayed on the lower and right edge of the rectangle.
E.5 NOTES
CAUTION
1 DON’T change the existing fig files. If you change them, the making of screen
data maybe failed.
2 Put the fig file you make into the “figure” folder of your installed folder. If you put
into other folder, you may not be able to edit screens anymore.
3 [Making of backup to F-ROM] in "Make MEM file" does NOT take case of fig files
you make. Uninstalling of FANUC PICTURE may removes the fig files.
Make sure to backup your fig file and restore them to the "figure" folder at
reinstalling.
- 580 -
E. CONTROL DRAWING
NOTE
1 The following commands used in the fig files of FANUC PICTURE cannot be
used because they are dedicated for the internal use.
AA,G,g,N
If you use them, you may not be able to edit screens anymore.
2 If you use the paint command along with the figures made by several
commands, a color maybe leaked because the crack generated by the error of
the scaling.
3 Color by RGB may be displayed in another approximated color in the screen
editor on personal computer or the CNC display according to the specification
about the number of colors in the CNC display.
- 581 -
B-66284EN/07 INDEX
INDEX
Creating custom screens for non-touch panel display
<A>
units........................................................................... 161
About FANUC PICTURE and Customization Tools .... 360
Creating New Project ...................................................... 24
Activating FANUC PICTURE ..........................................6
CREATION OF APPLICATIONS USING TASKS..... 535
ACTIVATION AND TERMINATION ............................6
Custom Screen Creation Procedure................................. 23
APPLICABLE MODELS ..............................................p-2
CUSTOM SCREEN CREATION PROCEDURE AND
Arrangement of tool window .......................................... 18
GUIDELINE ............................................................. 360
Automatic screen call function based on the PMC
Custom Screen Design and Creation............................. 361
signals.......................................................................... 67
AVAILABLE CHARACTERS ON FANUC PICTURE <D>
................................................................................... 564 Data conversion and MEM form file making procedure. 54
Description of general property setting items ............... 147
<B>
DETAILS OF FUNCTIONS......................................... 575
BE SURE TO READ THE FOLLOWING: ................... s-1
DEVELOPMENT OF CUSTOM SCREEN...................... 6
Bitmap output................................................................ 145
DIFFERENCES FROM FANUC PICTURE OF OLD
Button Control ................................................... 205
VERSION ................................................................. 552
Button Control with image ................................ 327 DRAM AND SRAM..................................................... 538
DRAW CONTROLS .................................................... 348
<C> Drawing of Arc .................................................... 352
CENTRAL EUROPE CODE ........................................ 569 Drawing of Circle ................................................ 354

CHECKING THE PRODUCT PACKAGE ...................p-2
Drawing of Ellipse ............................................... 356
Clock Control .................................................... 302
Drawing of Graphic Characters ........................... 358
CNC SCREEN NUMBERS LIST................................. 557 Drawing of Line .................................................. 348
Collection of history........................................................ 36
Drawing of Rectangle .......................................... 350
Collective screen bitmap output function........................ 78
Color ............................................................................. 144
<E>
Combining of alarm task ............................................... 545
Edit of Screen Form ........................................................ 46
Combining of common variable (DRAM variable and
Editing text message files ............................................. 152
SRAM variable) ........................................................ 546
EMBEDDING OF C APPLICATIONS ........................ 534
Combining of communication task ............................... 545
Environment.................................................................. 145
Combining of high-level task (Series 30i/31i/32i/35i,
ERROR MESSAGES............................................. 555,572
Power Motion i-A) .................................................... 546
EXAMPLE.................................................................... 580
Combining of the main task .......................................... 545
Example of FANUC PICTURE Custom Screen
Combining of window task ........................................... 545
Creation ..................................................................... 362
Composite Forms ............................................................ 77
Explanations of additional property items .................... 165
Composite Message Indication Control ............. 281
<F>
Composite screen edit function ....................................... 49
FANUC CODE ............................................................. 564
CONFIGURATIONS AND FUNCTIONS OF BARS......8
FANUC PICTURE creation procedure ......................... 364
Content of Files............................................................. 540
FANUC PICTURE Tool Bar Controls and Draw
Continuous input function............................................. 164
Controls ....................................................................... 13
CONTROL DRAWING COMMAND.......................... 573
FEATURES OF FANUC PICTURE..............................p-1
CONTROLS.................................................................. 147
Form tool bar................................................................... 52
COORDINATES........................................................... 579
FORMATS OF COMMANDS ..................................... 573
i-1
INDEX B-66284EN/07
FP FUNCTION INTERFACE ...................................... 381 MDI Key Control .............................................. 229

FP FUNCTIONS ........................................................... 381
FP functions for CNC window...................................... 384 MDI Keyboard Control ..................................... 232
FP Functions for Input/Output of Array-Type Record MEMORY SIZES OF CONTROLS ............................. 547
Variable Data............................................................. 472 MEMORY SIZES OF CONTROLS AND
FP functions for PMC window...................................... 461 RESTRICTIONS....................................................... 547
FP script commands (operators, variables, statements). 125 Menu Bar and Tool Bar of FANUC PICTURE ................ 8
FP Script Function......................................................... 116
Message Indication Control ............................... 296
FP-PARAMETER SETTING screen .............................. 69
Framed Button Control ...................................... 218 Meter Control .................................................... 305
Function Reference of FP Script ................................... 516 Method of creating a parent screen and child screens... 368
Method of FP script setting ........................................... 119
<G> Method of placing controls on a form ............................. 46
Graph Control .................................................... 308 Method of specifying FP function................................. 381
METHOD OF STORING SAMPLED DATA .............. 570
<H> Mouse operation and key operation for edit.................... 51
Help............................................................................... 146 Moving and resizing controls.......................................... 47
History Message Indication Control .................. 287
<N>
NOTATION CONVENTIONS IN THIS MANUAL.....p-3
<I>
NOTES.......................................................................... 580
Image Display Control ....................................... 301
NOTES AND RESTRICTIONS ................................... 539
INSTALLING FANUC PICTURE ...................................4 Notes and restrictions on FP scripts .............................. 142
INSTALLING FANUC PICTURE disk/ Numeral Indication Control for Calling a Ten-Key Pad
(A08B-9010-J518 #ZZ11).............................................4 ........................................................................ 248
Interface between FANUC PICTURE and C Language
Numeral Indication Control with Key Input ...... 239
Executor .................................................................... 542
<K> Numeral/Character String Indication Control .... 264
Key Input Buffer Control ................................... 235

<O>
Open Project.................................................................... 26
<L>
OPERATING ENVIRONMENT ...................................... 1
Label Control ..................................................... 272
Option ........................................................................... 144
Lamp Control ..................................................... 197 Option function details setting ........................................ 59
ORGANIZATION OF THIS MANUAL .......................p-2
Lamp Control with exchangeable images .......... 341
Outline .......................................................................... 540
Line Chart Control ............................................. 311 Outputting a property list file.......................................... 86

Overall Edit Function...................................................... 90
List edit ......................................................................... 144 Overall edit function for all properties............................ 92
List editor window .......................................................... 17 Overall edit function for multi-language caption .......... 105
<M> Overall edit menu............................................................ 91
Make MEM file............................................................... 53 <P>

Making of Combining Application Program................. 545
PMC Area Character String Indication Control . 258
Making of memory card form file (*.MEM)................. 546
Making of Screen Data of FANUC PICTURE.............. 544 Pointer Switching ................................................ 348
i-2
B-66284EN/07 INDEX
Pop-up menu display....................................................... 47 <T>

PREFACE ......................................................................p-1 Terminating FANUC PICTURE ....................................... 7
Preparation for Development Environment................... 542 Text Character String Indication Control .......... 276
Procedure for Setting Properties Common to Controls . 147
Thumbnail Display.......................................................... 82
Project window ............................................................... 16
Timer driven operation function ................................... 123
<R> TIMING CHART OF THE TRIGGER DISPLAY
RESTRICTIONS,CAUTIONS...................................... 550 METHOD.................................................................. 571
RUSSIAN CODE.......................................................... 568 Tool window of FANUC PICTURE ............................... 16
TROBLE SHOOOTING ............................................... 556
<S>
TURKISH CODE ......................................................... 569
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS ............................................ s-1
Saving the bit map of the active screen form .................. 78 <U>
Screen composite function .............................................. 83 UNINSTALLING FANUC PICTURE ............................. 5
Screen configuration ..................................................... 116
<W>
Screen form enlarge and edit function ............................ 48
WARNINGS AND NOTES RELATING TO FANUC
Screen numbers for Series 0i-C, Series 16i/18i/21i,
PICTURE ................................................................... s-1
Power Mate i ............................................................. 557
Write to Card................................................................... 76
Screen Numbers for Series 0i-D, Series 30i/31i/32i/35i,
Power Motion i-A...................................................... 560 <Z>
Screen Set Control......................................................... 177 Zoom dialog box ............................................................. 53
Screen Structure Definition Control .................. 182
Screen Switch Control ....................................... 189
Screen Switch Control with image .................... 318
Series 0i-D, Series 30i/31i/32i/35i and Power Motion

i-A ............................................................................. 540
Setting of CNC system.................................................... 28
Setting of Multi-language................................................ 31
Setting of Project............................................................. 27
Setting of properties ........................................................ 46
Setting the output language ............................................. 88
Setting the signal for the PMC/SD7 type ...................... 174
Settings for calling a custom screen with the
OPER/CUSTOM/GRAPH keys .................................. 57
SETUP ..............................................................................1
SOFTWARE REQUIRED FOR C APPLICATION
DEVELOPMENT...................................................... 534
SUPPLEMENT TO THE LINE CHART CONTROL .. 570
Switching between the CNC screen and custom screen .. 56
Symbol data definition .................................................... 20
Symbol specification for signals used as FP function
arguments .................................................................... 22
Symbol specification method for signals with the
property dialog box ..................................................... 21
Symbol Specification with FANUC PICTURE .............. 19
i-3
B-66284EN/07 REVISION RECORD
REVISION RECORD
Edition Date Contents
• Added descriptions of Power Motion i-A.
• Added descriptions of Russian, Turkish and Central Europe to Subsections 2.2.8.2.
• Added descriptions of the FP parameter No.14,15,16 to Subsections 2.2.10.6.
• Added descriptions of sub screen 6-10 to Subsection 2.3.3.
• Added descriptions of the without caption property to Subsections 2.3.4, 2.3.6, 2.3.7,
2.3.25, and 2.3.26.
07 Jan., 2012
• Added descriptions of the method of setting the character string to Subsection 2.3.13.
• Added descriptions of the function to read alarms of all CNC paths at a time to the function
(1.66 rdalminfo) of Chapter 3.
• Added descriptions of the "size" argument to the function(1.77 wrcursor) of Chapter 3.
• Added descriptions of functions (1.92 to 1.97) to Subsection 3.1.2.
• Added descriptions of function (4.35) to Subsection 3.1.5.
• Added descriptions of Series 30i/31i/32i-B and 35i-B.
• Added timer driven operation function to Subsections 2.2.15.3
06 Jul., 2010
• Added functions (1.91) to Subsection 3.1.2, "FP Functions for CNC Window".
• Added functions (4.33 to 4.44) to Subsection 3.1.5, "Functions reference of FP script".
• Added descriptions of the composite screen edit function to Subsections 2.9.6.
• Added the FP-PARAMETER No.10 to 12 to Subsections 2.2.10.6, "FP-PARAMETER
SETTING screen".
05 Apr., 2009 • Added descriptions of the collective screen bitmap output function to Subsections 2.2.13.
• Added descriptions of the constant value for arithmetic operation (2-7) to Subsection
2.2.14, "2.2.15.3 FP script commands".
• Added functions 4.6 to 4.32 to Subsection 3.1.5, "2.2.15.3 Function reference of FP script ".
• Added descriptions of FS0i MODEL C/D.
• Added descriptions of the history data memory card output function to Subsections 2.2.8.3,
2.3.6, 2.3.18, and 2.3.26.
• Added descriptions of the enlarge and edit function to Subsections 2.2.9.5, 2.2.9.6, 2.2.9.7,
and 2.2.9.8.
• Added descriptions of the line chart control to Subsection 2.2.14, "FP Script Function".
• Added ASCII to the format of the 2.3.14, "Numerical/Character String Indication Control".
04 Jun., 2008
• Added the function for using different graduation background colors to Subsection 2.3.22,
"Meter Control".
• Added Subsection 2.3.24, "Line Chart Control".
• Added functions 1.78 to 1.89 and functions 4.1 to 4.3 to Chapter 3, "FP FUNCTIONS".
• Added the line chart control to Chapter 5, "MEMORY SIZES OF CONTROLS AND
RESTRICTIONS".
• Added Appendix D, "SUPPLEMENT TO THE LINE CHART CONTROL".
• Added descriptions of FS0i-TTC.
• Added descriptions of European and Hangul character display based on FANUC code
specification to Subsection 2.2.8.2.
• Added Subsection 2.2.9.6, "Form tool bar".
• Added the method of importing and exporting multi-language character string files to
03 Sep., 2007
Subsections 2.2.13.3 and 2.3.1.2.
• Added Subsection 2.2.14, "FP Script Function".
• Added a highlight function to Subsection 2.3.16, "Text Character String Indication Control".
• Added controls with image as Subsections 2.3.24, 2.3.25, and 2.3.26.
• Added nine new functions to Chapter 3, "FP FUNCTIONS".
r-1
REVISION RECORD B-66284EN/07
Edition Date Contents

• Added FANUC PICTURE tool windows in Subsection 2.2.3.
• Added the method of creating a Chinese (simplified character) display screen to Subsection
2.2.8.2.
• Added Subsection 2.2.10.5, "Automatic screen call function based on the PMC signals".
02 Aug., 2006
• Added Subsection 2.2.13, "Overall Edit Function".
• Added three functions (1.70 to 1.72) to Subsection 3.1.2, "FP Functions for CNC Window".
• Added Subsection 3.1.4, "FP Functions for Input/Output of Array-Type Record Variable
Data".
01 Feb., 2005
r-2

B-66284en 07 120229 PDF

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originaltitel

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

B-66284en 07 120229 PDF

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

FANUC PICTURE

• Read this manual carefully, and store it in a safe place.

WARNINGS AND NOTES RELATING TO FANUC PICTURE

BE SURE TO READ THE FOLLOWING:

As for other restrictions and cautions, see Appendix 5.2, “RESTRICTIONS･CAUTIONS”.

FEATURES OF FANUC PICTURE

• This software provides many controls such as touch switches.

• You do not need to know programming languages such as C to create programs.

MEM data file:

CNC Model Abbreviation

CHECKING THE PRODUCT PACKAGE

ORGANIZATION OF THIS MANUAL

2. DEVELOPMENT OF CUSTOM SCREEN

5. MEMORY SIZES OF CONTROLS AND RESTRICTIONS

NOTATION CONVENTIONS IN THIS MANUAL

• Notations and operations of keys

• Notations of mouse operations

2.3.4 Screen Switch Control ................................................................................189

2.3.5 Lamp Control ..............................................................................................197

2.3.6 Button Control ............................................................................................205

2.3.7 Framed Button Control ...............................................................................218

2.3.8 MDI Key Control ........................................................................................229

2.3.9 MDI Keyboard Control ...............................................................................232

2.3.10 Key Input Buffer Control ............................................................................235

2.3.11 Numeral Indication Control with Key Input ...............................................239

2.3.12 Numeral Indication Control for Calling a Ten-Key Pad .............................248

2.3.13 PMC Area Character String Indication Control .........................................258

2.3.14 Numeral/Character String Indication Control .............................................264

2.3.15 Label Control ..............................................................................................272

2.3.16 Text Character String Indication Control ...................................................276

2.3.17 Composite Message Indication Control ......................................................281

2.3.18 History Message Indication Control ...........................................................287

2.3.19 Message Indication Control ........................................................................296

2.3.20 Image Display Control ................................................................................301

2.3.21 Clock Control .............................................................................................302

2.3.22 Meter Control .............................................................................................305

2.3.23 Graph Control .............................................................................................308

2.3.24 Line Chart Control ......................................................................................311

2.3.25 Screen Switch Control with image .............................................................318

2.3.26 Button Control with image .........................................................................327

2.3.27 Lamp Control with exchangeable images ...................................................341

3 FP FUNCTIONS .................................................................................. 381

3.1.4 FP Functions for Input/Output of Array-Type Record Variable Data..................472

4 EMBEDDING OF C APPLICATIONS.................................................. 534

5 MEMORY SIZES OF CONTROLS AND RESTRICTIONS.................. 547

C AVAILABLE CHARACTERS ON FANUC PICTURE.......................... 564

E.3 COORDINATES ........................................................................................ 579

Chapter 1, “SETUP” consists of the following sections.

1.1 OPERATING ENVIRONMENT..........................................................................................................1

1.1 OPERATING ENVIRONMENT

Personal computer operating environment

Items required to create a simplified Chinese character screen on personal

- Power Motion i-A

Option specification (for uniting with C language executor application)

Setting NC parameters on the CNC

1.2 INSTALLING FANUC PICTURE

1.2.1 INSTALLING FANUC PICTURE disk/ (A08B-9010-J518 #ZZ11)

1.3 UNINSTALLING FANUC PICTURE

1 Click the Start button of Windows.

2 DEVELOPMENT OF CUSTOM SCREEN

Chapter 2, “DEVELOPMENT OF CUSTOM SCREEN” consists of the following sections.

2.1 ACTIVATION AND TERMINATION................................................................................................6

2.1 ACTIVATION AND TERMINATION